2018 Nissan Leaf User Manual

2018 LEAF

OWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2018 NISSAN LEAF

ZE1-D

Printing : November 2017

Publication No.:

Printed in U.S.A.

OM18EA 0ZE1U0

‘18

This manual was prepared to help you un-

derstand the operation and maintenance

of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many

miles of driving pleasure. Please read

through this manual before operating your

vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Book-

let explains details about the warranties

covering your vehicle. The NISSAN Ser-

vice and Maintenance Guide explains de-

tails about maintaining and servicing

your vehicle. Additionally, a separate

Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S.

only) will explain how to resolve any con-

cerns you may have with your vehicle, as

well as clarify your rights under your

state’s lemon law.

In addition to factory installed options, your

vehicle may also be equipped with addi-

tional accessories installed prior to deliv-

ery. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for details

concerning the particular accessories with

which your vehicle is equipped. It is impor-

tant that you familiarize yourself with all

disclosures, warnings, cautions and in-

structions concerning proper use of such

accessories prior to operating the vehicle

and/or accessory. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

details concerning the particular accesso-

ries with which your vehicle is equipped.

A NISSAN certified LEAF dealer knows your

vehicle best. When you require any service

or have any questions, we will be glad to

assist you with the extensive resources

available to us.

Before driving your vehicle, read your Own-

er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-

iarity with controls and maintenance re-

quirements, assisting you in the safe

operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-

MINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable

trip for you and your passengers!

• NEVER drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs.

• ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for condi-

tions.

• ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle fea-

tures or taking other actions that

could distract you.

• ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-

propriate child restraint systems.

Pre-teen children should be seated

in the rear seat.

FOREWORD READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY

• ALWAYS provide information about

the proper use of vehicle safety fea-

tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

• ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its perfor-

mance, safety or durability, and may

even violate governmental regula-

tions. In addition, damage or perfor-

mance problems resulting from modi-

fication may not be covered under

NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-

agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that

uses the port during normal driving,

for example remote insurance com-

pany monitoring, remote vehicle diag-

nostics, telematics or engine repro-

gramming, may cause interference or

damage to vehicle systems. We do not

recommend or endorse the use of any

aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, un-

less specifically approved by NISSAN.

The vehicle warranty may not cover

damage caused by any aftermarket

plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all

features and equipment available on this

model. Features and equipment in your ve-

hicle may var y depending on model, trim

level, options selected, order, date of pro-

duction, region or availability. Therefore,

you may find information about features or

equipment that are not included or in-

stalled on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-

tions in this manual are those in effect at

the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the

right to change specifications, perfor-

mance, design or component suppliers

without notice and without obligation.

From time to time, NISSAN may update or

revise this manual to provide Owners with

the most accurate information currently

available. Please carefully read and retain

with this manual all revision updates sent

to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac-

cess to accurate and up-to-date informa-

tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver-

sions of vehicle Owner's Manuals and any

updates can also be found in the Owner

section of the NISSAN website at

https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/

navigation/manualsGuide

. If you have

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

questions concerning any information in

your Owner's Manual, contact NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs. For contact information, re-

fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO-

GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual.

They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause death or se-

rious personal injury. To avoid or re-

duce the risk, the procedures must be

followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause minor or

moderate personal injury or damage

to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the

risk, the procedures must be followed

carefully.

If you see the symbol above, it means “Do

not do this” or “Do not let this happen”.

If you see a symbol similar to those above

in an illustration, it means the arrow points

to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

those above indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

those above call attention to an item in the

illustration.

[ ]: Indicates a key/item displayed on the

screen.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION

65 WARNING

WARNING

Certain vehicle components contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth

defects or other reproductive harm. In

addition, certain fluids contained in ve-

hicles and certain products of compo-

nent wear contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

Operating,servicing and maintaining a

passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle

can expose you to chemicals including

engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known

to the State of California to cause can-

cer and birth defects or other repro-

ductive harm. To minimize exposure,

avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle

the engine except as necessary, ser-

vice your vehicle in a well-ventilated

area and where gloves or wash your

hands frequently when servicing your

vehicle. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-

teries, may contain perchlorate material.

The following advisory is provided: “Per-

chlorate Material - special handling may

apply. For additional information, refer

to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate.”

Bluetooth® is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed to Vis-

teon.

SiriusXM® services require

a subscription after trial

period and are sold sepa-

rately or as a package.

The satellite service is

available only in the

48 contiguous USA and

DC. SiriusXM® satellite ser-

vice is also available in

Canada; see

www.siriusxm.ca.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any

form, or by any means, electronic, me-

chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-

erwise, without the prior written permis-

sion of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES ...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN certified LEAF dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle

and your NISSAN certified LEAF dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN certified LEAF dealer is always available to assist you with

all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer cannot assist

you with or you would like to provide

NISSAN directly with comments or ques-

tions, please contact the NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs Department using our toll-

free number:

For U.S. customers

1-877-NOGASEV

(1-877-664-2738)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask

for the following information:

• Your name, address, and telephone

number

• Vehicle identification number (attached

to the top of the instrument panel on the

driver’s side)

• Date of purchase

• Current odometer reading

• Your NISSAN certified LEAF dealer’s name

• Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the informa-

tion at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumer[email protected]om

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.

com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customer) or

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NOTES

Table of

contents

Illustrated table of contents

EV Overview

Charging

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS).........................0-2

Ex terior front.........................0-3

Ex terior rear .........................0-4

Passenger compartment ................0-5

Cockpit ............................0-3

Instrument panel ......................0-5

Meters and gauges ....................0-6

Motor compartment ...................0-10

Warning and indicator lights ..............0-11

1. Rear head restraints/headrests (P. 1-7)

2. Child restraint anchor points (for top

tether strap child restraint) (P. 1-22)

3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover air bags (P. 1-43)

4. Front head restraints/headrests (P. 1-7)

5. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and

shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-11, 1-43)

6. Front seats (P. 1-2)

7. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P. 1-43)

8. Occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor) (P. 1-43)

9. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags (P. 1-43)

10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P. 1-22)

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(SRS)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Charge port lid

—Charging lid switch (P. 3-19)

2. Hood (P. 3-16)

3. Wiper and washer switch

— Switch operation (P. 2-49)

— Blade replacement (P. 8-14)

— Windshield-washer fluid (P. 8-11)

4. Outside mirrors

— Switch operation (P. 3-23)

— Side camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-13)

5. Power windows (P. 2-68)

6. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-4)

7. Doors

— Keys (P. 3-2)

— Door locks (P. 3-4)

— NISSAN Intelligent Key® system (P. 3-6)

— Security system (P. 2-46)

8. Tires

— Wheels and tires (P. 8-28, 9-5)

— Flat tire (P. 6-3)

— Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) (P. 2-20, 5-4)

9. Headlight and turn signal lights

— Switch operation (P. 2-52)

— Bulb replacement (P. 8-24)

— LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (if

so equipped) (P. 2-52)

10. Fog lights (if so equipped)

— Switch operation (P. 2-52)

— Bulb replacement (P. 8-24)

11. License plate installation (P. 9-8)

12. Front view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-13)

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Rear wiper and washer switch

— Switch operation (P. 2-49)

— Windshield-washer fluid (P. 8-11)

2. High-mounted stop light

— Bulb replacement (P. 8-24)

3. Rear window defroster (P. 2-51)

4. Rear combination lights

— Bulb replacement (P. 8-24)

5. Rear hatch (P. 3-17)

— Rear view camera (P. 4-4, 4-13)

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Emergency tire puncture repair kit

(P. 6-3)

2. Map lights

— Switch operation (P. 2-70)

— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

(without Navigation) microphone (P. 4-67)

— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

(with Navigation) microphone (Refer to

NissanConnect® Manual (for Leaf))

— Sunglasses holder (P. 2-63)

3. Sun visors (P. 3-22)

4. Mirror

— Inside rearview mirror (P. 3-23)

— HomeLink® (if so equipped) (P. 2-72)

5. Front cup holders (P. 2-63)

6. Console box (P. 2-63)

7. C a r g o a r e a

— Tonneau cover (if so equipped) (P. 2-63)

— EVSE (Electric Vehicle Supply Equip-

ment) (P. CH-42)

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. TRIP RESET switch for twin trip odom-

eter (P. 2-6)

— Instrument brightness control switch

(P. 2-57)

2. Headlight, fog light (if so equipped) and

turn signal switch

— Headlight (P. 2-52)

— Turn signal light (P. 2-52)

— Fog light (if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

3. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

— Audio control (P. 4-45)

— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

control (without navigation) (P. 4-45)

— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

control (with navigation) (Refer to

NissanConnect® Manual (for Leaf))

4. Steering wheel

— Power steering system (P. 5-133)

— Horn (P. 2-58)

— Driver's supplemental air bag (P. 1-43)

5. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-49)

6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(right side)

— Cruise control switches (if so

equipped) (P. 5-54)

— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-56)

— ProPILOT

Assist switch (if so

equipped) (P. 5-79)

COCKPIT

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

7. Shift lever (P. 5-15)

— ECO switch (P. 2-58)

— e-Pedal switch (P. 5-22)

8. Console box (P. 2-63)

9. Parking brake (switch type) (if so

equipped) (P. 5-19)

10. Tilting steering wheel lever (P. 3-21)

11. Charge port lid switch (P. 3-19)

— Charge timer OFF switch (P. 2-61)

— Heated steering wheel switch (if so

equipped) (P. 2-60)

— Steering Assist switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-79)

12. Fuse box cover (P. 8-17)

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

1. Vents (P. 4-29)

2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-6)

3. Center multi-function control panel

— Navigation system (Refer to

NissanConnect® Manual (for Leaf))

— Without Navigation System (P. 4-45)

4. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

5. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-51)

6. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-43)

7. Glove box (P. 2-63)

8. Heater and air conditioner control

(P. 4-30)

9. Power outlet (P. 2-62)

10. Front heated seat switches (if so

equipped) (P. 2-59)

11. Auxiliary input jack (P. 4-64)

— iPod® connector/USB connector

(P. 4-45)

12. Push-button power switch (P. 5-10)

13. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-43)

14. Hood release handle (P. 3-16)

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

1. Vehicle information display (P. 2-27)

— Clock (P. 2-12)

— Outside air temperature (P. 2-11)

— Li-ion battery available charge gauge

(P. 2-10)

— Driving range (P. EV-19)

— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P. 2-7)

— Indicator for timer (P. CH-35)

— Power meter (P. 2-9)

2. Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-14)

— Turn signal/Hazard indicator light

(P. 2-52)

— READY to drive indicator light (P. 2-25)

— ECO mode indicator (P. 2-12

3. Speedometer (P. 2-6)

METERS AND GAUGES

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

1. Fuse/Fusible link holder (P. 8-17)

2. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)

3. 12-volt battery (P. 8-12)

4. Fuse holder (P. 8-17)

5. Fuse/Fusible link holder (P. 8-17)

6. Coolant reservoir cap (P. 8-8)

7. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-11)

MOTOR COMPARTMENT

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Warn-

ing

light

Name Page

12-volt battery

charge warning light

2-16

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warn-

ing light

2-17

Approaching Vehicle

Sound for Pedestri-

ans (VSP) OFF system

warning light

2-17

Automatic Emer-

gency Braking (AEB)

system warning light

(if so equipped)

2-17

Automatic Emer-

gency Braking (AEB)

with Pedestrian De-

tection system warn-

ing light (if so

equipped)

2-18

Warn-

ing

light

Name Page

Brake system warn-

ing light (yellow)

2-18

Brake warning light

(red)

2-19

Electronic parking

brake system warn-

ing light (yellow)

2-19

Electric shift control

system warning light

2-20

Electric Vehicle (EV)

system warning light

2-20

Low tire pressure

warning light

2-20

Warn-

ing

light

Name Page

Master warning light

(red/yellow)

2-22

Power steering warn-

ing light

2-22

Seat belt warning

light

2-22

Supplemental air bag

warning light

2-22

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

Indica-

tor

light

Name Page

Electronic parking

brake indicator light

2-23

Ex terior light indica-

tor light

2-23

Front fog light indica-

tor light (if so

equipped)

2-23

Front passenger air

bag status light

2-23

High Beam Assist in-

dicator light (if so

equipped)

2-23

High beam indicator

light (blue)

2-24

Indica-

tor

light

Name Page

Plug-in indicator light 2-24

Power limitation indi-

cator light

2-24

READY to drive indi-

cator light

2-25

Security indicator

light

2-25

Slip indicator light 2-25

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

2-25

Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

2-25

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

EV Overview

The EV (Electric Vehicle) system ...........EV-2

Li-ion battery .......................EV-2

Driving with a discharged Li-ion battery . . . .EV-3

Charging the 12-volt battery............EV-5

Li-ion battery warmer (if so equipped) .....EV-5

High voltage precautions................EV-7

High-voltage components .............EV-7

Road accident precautions ..............EV-8

Emergency shut-off system............EV-8

EV characteristics ....................EV-9

Noise and vibration .................EV-10

Life with an EV (scene guide) .............EV-10

Charging the Li-ion battery............EV-10

Before driving your vehicle (models with

Navigation System) .................EV-12

Checking Li-ion battery charging status . . .EV-12

Operating the climate control system before

driving .........................EV-13

Starting your vehicle ................EV-14

Driving the vehicle..................EV-15

Charging after driving ...............EV-18

Efficient use of your vehicle..............EV-19

Range..........................EV-19

Improve driving range ...............EV-19

Li-ion battery life ..................EV-20

Li-ion battery maintenance ...........EV-21

EV unique information .................EV-21

Meters and indicators ...............EV-21

Approaching Vehicle Sound for

Pedestrians (VSP) system.............EV-24

Electric shift control system ...........EV-25

LED headlight (low beam) (if so equipped) . .EV-25

Driving range (if so equipped) ..........EV-25

The LEAF is an electric vehicle. Some of the

vehicle’s systems operate differently and

have different operating characteristics

than vehicles equipped with an internal

combustion engine. It is important to care-

fully review the entire Owner's Manual for

this reason. The main difference is the LEAF

is powered by electricity. The LEAF does not

require and it is not capable of using gaso-

line like a vehicle powered by a traditional

internal combustion engine. The LEAF uses

electricity stored in the lithium ion (Li-ion)

battery. The vehicle’s Li-ion battery must

be charged with electricity before the ve-

hicle can be driven. As the vehicle operates,

the Li-ion battery gradually discharges. If

the Li-ion battery becomes completely dis-

charged, the vehicle will not operate until it

is re-charged.

This vehicle uses two types of batteries.

One is the 12-volt battery that is the same

as the battery in vehicles powered by

gasoline engines, the other is the Li-ion

battery (high voltage).

The 12-volt batter y provides power to the

vehicle systems and features such as the

audio system, supplemental restraint sys-

tems, headlights and windshield wipers.

The Li-ion battery provides power to the

electric motor (traction motor) that moves

the vehicle.

The Li-ion battery also charges the 12-volt

battery.

The vehicle must be plugged in for the Li-

ion battery to be charged. Additionally, the

vehicle system can extend the vehicle

range by converting driving force into elec-

tricity that is stored in the Li-ion battery

while the vehicle is decelerating or being

driven downhill. This is called regenerative

braking. This vehicle is considered to be an

environmentally friendly vehicle because it

does not emit exhaust gases, such as car-

bon dioxide and nitrogen oxide.

WARNING

Your vehicle contains a sealed Li-ion

high voltage battery. If the Li-ion bat-

tery is disposed of improperly, there is

a risk of severe burns and electrical

shock that may result in serious injury

or death and there is also a risk of en-

vironmental damage.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the Li-ion bat-

tery:

• Do not expose the vehicle to ex-

treme ambient temperatures for ex-

tended periods.

• Do not store the vehicle in tempera-

tures below −13°F (−25°C) for more

than seven days.

• Do not leave the vehicle for more

than 14 days where the Li-ion bat-

tery available charge gauge reaches

azeroornearzero.

• Do not use the Li-ion battery for any

other purpose.

THE EV (ELECTRIC VEHICLE) SYSTEM LI-ION BATTERY

EV-2 EV Overview

NOTE:

• If the outside temperature is −13°F

(−25°C) or less, the Li-ion battery may

freeze and it cannot be charged or pro-

vide power to run the vehicle. Move the

vehicle to a warm location.

• The capacity of the Li-ion battery in

your vehicle to hold a charge will, like all

such batteries, decrease with time and

usage. As the battery ages and capacity

decreases, this will result in a decrease

from the vehicle’s initial mileage range.

This is normal, expected, and not in-

dicative of any defect in your Li-ion bat-

tery.

• The Li-ion battery has limited service

life, and when its charging capacity falls

below a specific level, the EV system

warning light will illuminate. Owners

should bring their vehicle in for inspec-

tion and possible battery replacement.

• It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for infor-

mation about recycling or disposal of

the Li-ion battery. Do not attempt to re-

cycle or dispose of the Li-ion battery

yourself.

DRIVING WITH A DISCHARGED

LI-ION BATTERY

When a destination is set in the navigation

system (if so equipped) that exceeds the

available vehicle range, the navigation sys-

tem automatically searches the location of

nearby charging stations. When the nearby

charging station locations are displayed,

charge the Li-ion battery as soon as pos-

sible.

Warning lights illuminate on the instru-

ment panel and messages are displayed

on the vehicle information display to in-

form you that the Li-ion battery charge is

low. Instructions are also displayed on the

navigation system screen (if so equipped)

to direct you to nearby charging stations.

The vehicle's range is very limited when

these warning lights illuminate and mes-

sages are displayed. Follow the instruc-

tions on the navigation system screen (if so

equipped) and immediately charge the ve-

hicle at the nearest charging station.

There are three levels of information that

will be displayed as the Li-ion battery be-

comes discharged:

1. The following warning lights illuminate

on the instrument panel and messages

are displayed on the vehicle information

display at the same time to indicate low

Li-ion battery charge:

EV Overview EV-3

• The low battery charge indicator light

• The master warning light

• The “Battery charge is low, Charge now”

warning message is displayed on the

vehicle information display.

• Messages are displayed on the naviga-

tion system screen (if so equipped).

• For additional information, refer to “Low

battery charge indicator” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this

manual.

• The driving range flashes

䊊

NOTE:

Due to traffic conditions, it may be dif-

ficult to get to the charging station

suggested by the navigation system

(if so equipped). If the Li-ion battery is

almost completely discharged, drive

directly to the nearest charging sta-

tion.

2. If the vehicle is driven and the Li-ion bat-

tery continues to discharge, the driving

range on the instrument panel changes

to “— — —”

䊊

Messages are displayed on the naviga-

tion system screen (if so equipped). For

additional information, refer to “Li-ion

battery available charge gauge” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

3. When the power limitation indicator

light

illuminates, traction motor

output is limited resulting in reduced ve-

hicle speed. Stop the vehicle in a safe

EV-4 EV Overview

location before the Li-ion battery be-

comes completely discharged and

there is no power available to drive the

vehicle. Contact Roadside Assistance

Service shown in your NISSAN Warranty

Information Booklet. For additional in-

formation, refer to “If the Li-ion battery

becomes completely discharged” in the

“In case of emergency” section of this

manual.

CHARGING THE 12-VOLT BATTERY

The 12-volt battery is charged automati-

cally using electricity stored in the Li-ion

battery.

When the 12-volt battery is being charged,

the charge status indicator light on the in-

strument panel flashes (except when

charging the Li-ion battery or the power

switch is in the Ready to Drive position). For

additional information, refer to “Charging

status indicator lights” in the “Charging”

section of this manual.

While vehicle is driven

The Li-ion battery charges the 12-volt bat-

tery as necessary when the power switch

is in the Ready to Drive position or ON posi-

tion.

The 12-volt battery is not charged in the

following conditions.

• When the power switch is in the ACC

position.

• When the power switch is in the ON posi-

tion and the shift position is in the N (Neu-

tral) position.

While the vehicle is not in use

When the EV system is off for an extended

time, the 12-volt battery may be automati-

cally charged for a short period of time on a

regular basis.

LI-ION BATTERY WARMER (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

CAUTION

The Li-ion battery warmer does not

operate if the available Li-ion battery

charge is less than approximately 15%

and the charger is not connected to

the vehicle. To help prevent the Li-ion

battery from freezing, do not leave the

vehicle in an environment if tempera-

tures may go below -1°F (-17°C) unless

the vehicle is connected to a charger.

The Li-ion battery warmer helps to prevent

the Li-ion battery from freezing and helps

to prevent significant reductions in the Li-

ion battery output when the temperature

is cold. The Li-ion battery warmer auto-

matically turns on when the Li-ion battery

temperature is approximately -1°F (-17°C) or

colder. The Li-ion battery warmer auto-

matically turns off when the Li-ion battery

temperature is approximately 14°F (-10°C)

or higher.

The Li-ion batter y warmer uses electrical

power from an external source when a

charger is connected to the vehicle. The

Li-ion battery warmer uses electrical

power from the Li-ion battery when the

charger is not connected to the vehicle.

EV Overview EV-5

NOTE:

• Connect the charger to the vehicle and

place the power switch in the OFF posi-

tion when parking the vehicle if tem-

peratures may go below -1°F (-17°C). This

provides external power to the Li-ion

battery warmer when it operates and

does not discharge the Li-ion battery.

• The charging status indicator lights illu-

minate in a specific pattern when the

Li-ion battery warmer operates. The

charging status indicator lights use the

same pattern to indicate 12-volt battery

charging, Climate Ctrl. Timer operation

or Remote Climate Control operation

(models with Navigation System). The

charging status indicator lights do not

change if the Li-ion battery warmer op-

erates at the same time as the above

features. For additional information, re-

fer to “Charging status indicator lights”

in the “Charging” section of this manual.

• The Li-ion battery warmer uses Li-ion

battery power to operate, even if the

vehicle is connected to a charger when:

– The vehicle's power switch is in the

ON position.

– There is no electrical power being

supplied to the charging equipment.

• When the Li-ion battery warmer is al-

ready in operation using an external

power source, it will continue to use the

external power even if the power switch

is placed in the ON position.

• Vehicle driving range is reduced if the

Li-ion battery warmer operates (Li-ion

battery temperature approximately

-1°F (-17°C) or colder) while driving the

vehicle. You may need to charge the Li-

ion battery sooner than in warmer tem-

peratures.

• The Li-ion battery requires more time to

charge when the Li-ion battery warmer

operates.

• The predicted charging time displayed

on the meter and navigation system (if

so equipped) increases when the Li-ion

battery warmer operates.

• Climate control performance is reduced

when using the Climate Ctrl. Timer or

Remote Climate Control (models with

Navigation System) while the Li-ion bat-

tery warmer operates.

• The Li-ion battery may not charge to

the expected level using the charging

timer while the Li-ion battery warmer

operates.

EV-6 EV Overview

HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS

WARNING

• The EV system uses high voltage up

to approximately DC 400 volt. The

system can be hot during and after

starting and when the vehicle is shut

off. Be careful of both the high volt-

age and the high temperature. Fol-

low the warning labels that are at-

tached to the vehicle.

• Never disassemble, remove or re-

place high-voltage parts and cables

as well as their connectors because

they can cause severe burns or elec-

tric shock that may result in serious

injury or death. High-voltage cables

are colored orange. The vehicle high

voltage system has no user service-

able parts. It is recommended that

you take your vehicle to a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for any neces-

sary maintenance.

1. Traction motor and reduction gear

2. Traction motor inverter

3. Power delivery module (PDM) (Charger,

DC/DC converter, junction box)

4. High-voltage wire harnesses (colored

orange)

5. Li-ion battery

6. Service plug

HIGH VOLTAGE PRECAUTIONS

EV Overview EV-7

WARNING

In case of a collision:

• If your vehicle is drivable, pull your

vehicle off the road, push the P

(Park) position switch on the shift

lever, apply the parking brake and

turn the EV system off.

• Check your vehicle to see if there are

exposed high-voltage parts or

cables. For their locations, refer to

“High voltage components” in this

section. To avoid personal injury,

never touch high-voltage wiring,

connectors, and other high-voltage

parts, such as inverter unit and Li-

ion battery. An electric shock may

occur if exposed electric wires are

visible when viewed from inside or

outside of your vehicle. Therefore,

never touch exposed electric wires.

• If the vehicle receives a strong im-

pact to the floor while driving, stop

the vehicle in a safe location and

check the floor.

• Leaks or damage to the Li-ion bat-

tery may result in a fire. If you dis-

cover them, contact emergency ser-

vices immediately. Since the fluid

leak may be lithium manganate

from the Li-ion battery, never touch

the fluid leak inside or outside the

vehicle. If the fluid contacts your

skin or eyes, wash it off immediately

with a large amount of water and

receive immediate medical atten-

tion to help avoid serious injury.

• If a fire occurs in the EV, leave the

vehicle as soon as possible. Only use

a type ABC, BC or C fire extinguisher

that is meant for use on electrical

fires. Using a small amount of water

or the incorrect fire extinguisher can

result in serious injury or death from

electrical shock.

• If your vehicle needs to be towed, do

it with the front wheels raised. If the

front wheels are on the ground

when towing, the traction motor

may generate electricity. This may

damage the components of the EV

system and cause a fire.

• If you are not able to safely assess

the vehicle due to vehicle damage,

do not touch the vehicle. Leave the

vehicle and contact emergency ser-

vices. Advise first responders that

this is an electric vehicle.

• In the event of an accident that re-

quires body repair and painting, the

Li-ion battery pack and high voltage

parts such as the inverter, including

the wire harness, should be re-

moved prior to painting. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer for this service. Li-

ion battery packs exposed to heat in

the paint booth will experience ca-

pacity loss. Damaged Li-ion battery

packs may also pose safety risks to

untrained mechanics and repair

personnel.

EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF SYSTEM

The emergency shut-off system is acti-

vated and the high-voltage system auto-

matically turns off in the following condi-

tions:

- Front and side collisions in which the air

bags are deployed.

- Certain rear collisions.

- Certain EV system malfunctions.

For the above collisions and certain other

EV system malfunctions, the Ready to Drive

indicator light will turn off. For additional

ROAD ACCIDENT PRECAUTIONS

EV-8 EV Overview

information, refer to “Warning lights, indica-

tor lights and audible reminders” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this

manual.

The emergency shut-off activates for the

above collisions to minimize risk of an

event that could cause injury or an acci-

dent. If the emergency shut-off system ac-

tivates, the EV system may not be switched

to the Ready to Drive position; it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer. Even if the power switch is

switched to the Ready to Drive position, the

system may shut-off suddenly. Therefore,

drive cautiously to the nearest certified re-

pair facility; it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for ser-

vice.

WARNING

• Pay special attention to pedestrians.

Because there is no engine noise,

pedestrians may not know the ve-

hicle is approaching, moving or

about to move, and may step into

the path of vehicle travel.

• When leaving the vehicle, be sure to

turn off the EV system.

• Be sure to push the P (Park) position

switch on the shift lever and apply

the parking brake when parking be-

cause the vehicle can move when

the Ready to Drive indicator light is

ON. When the Ready to Drive indica-

tor light is ON, do not leave your ve-

hicle in a shift position other than

the P (Park) position.

• Keep the brake pedal depressed un-

til you are ready to drive. When the

vehicle is in the D (Drive) position, B

or R (Reverse) position, if you release

the brake pedal and do not depress

the accelerator, the vehicle will creep

and may start abruptly. This may

cause serious injury or death.

NOTE:

• The vehicle cannot run with a dis-

charged Li-ion battery. Repeated accel-

eration consumes more power from the

Li-ion battery than driving at a steady

speed.

• This vehicle is equipped with a regen-

erative brake system. The primary pur-

pose of the regenerative brake system

is to provide some power to recharge

the Li-ion battery and extend driving

range. A secondary benefit is “engine

braking” that operates based on Li-ion

battery conditions.

• In the D (Drive) position, when the accel-

erator pedal is released, the regenera-

tive brake system provides some decel-

eration.

• When you put the shift lever in the B

mode and take your foot off the accel-

erator pedal, more regenerative brake is

applied than in the D (Drive) position.

• Less deceleration is provided by the re-

generative brake system when the Li-

ion battery is fully charged. The regen-

erative brake is automatically reduced

when the Li-ion battery is fully charged

EV CHARACTERISTICS

EV Overview EV-9

to prevent the Li-ion battery from be-

coming overcharged. The regenerative

brake is also automatically reduced

when the battery temperature is high/

low (indicated by the red/blue zones on

the Li-ion battery temperature gauge)

to prevent Li-ion battery damage.

• The brake pedal should be used to slow

or stop the vehicle depending on traffic

or road conditions. The vehicle brakes

are not affected by the regenerative

brake system operation.

NOISE AND VIBRATION

You might experience the following noise

or vibration as a normal characteristic of

this vehicle:

• Traction motor noise from the motor

compartment.

• Water pump and radiator fan noise while

charging.

• Compressor and radiator fan noise when

the Climate Ctrl. Timer or remote climate

control (models with Navigation System)

is used.

• Relay operation noise and vibration at

start-up and shut-down of the EV system

(power switch placed in the ON and OFF

position).

• Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestri-

ans (VSP).

This section provides a brief explanation

for the most important LEAF functions. For

additional information, refer to the specific

sections of this manual for detailed expla-

nations of the vehicle features and

operation.

CHARGING THE LI-ION BATTERY

WARNING

The EV system uses a high voltage cur-

rent. Failure to follow the proper han-

dling instructions may cause serious

injury or death. Be sure to read the

“Charging” section and follow the pro-

cedures and guidelines described.

LIFE WITH AN EV (SCENE GUIDE)

EV-10 EV Overview

EV Overview EV-11

BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

(MODELS WITH NAVIGATION

SYSTEM)

The Li-ion battery charging status and the

Li-ion battery warmer (if so equipped) op-

eration can be checked using an internet

enabled smart phone or personal com-

puter at home. You may also choose to

have SMS messages (text messages) sent

to a cellular phone. Additionally, the vehi-

cle’s heater and air conditioner can be set

to operate using the Climate Ctrl. Timer

function or A/C-heater remote function, if

necessary. For additional information, refer

to “Remote climate control” in the “Monitor,

climate, audio, phone and voice recogni-

tion systems” section of this manual.

NOTE:

• To check the Li-ion battery charging

status or to use the remote heater and

air conditioner using an internet en-

abled smart phone or personal com-

puter, the following conditions must be

met:

– The vehicle must be located in a cel-

lular phone or smart phone cover-

age area.

– The internet enabled cellular phone

or smart phone must be located in a

cellular phone or smart phone cov-

erage area.

– The computer must be connected to

the internet.

– A cellular phone must be used to

communicate with the vehicle.

– A cellular phone capable of text mes-

saging must be used to receive text

message regarding vehicle charge

status.

• The remote heater and cooler can ad-

just the in-cabin temperature.

• When the charge connector is discon-

nected from the vehicle, the heater and

air conditioner operates using vehicle

Li-ion battery electric power.

• If the remote heater and air conditioner

function and Li-ion battery charging are

performed at the same time, Li-ion bat-

tery charging will take longer than

usual due to the power used to heat or

cool the vehicle.

CHECKING LI-ION BATTERY

CHARGING STATUS

The Li-ion battery charge status can be

checked on the NISSAN Data Center web-

site via an internet enabled smart phone or

personal computer.

If the Li-ion battery is not sufficiently

charged, you can start charging the Li-ion

battery via the remote charge function. For

additional information, refer to “Charging

related remote function” in the “Charging”

section of this manual.

EV-12 EV Overview

OPERATING THE CLIMATE

CONTROL SYSTEM BEFORE

DRIVING

The vehicle’s heating and air conditioning

system can be turned on via remote con-

trol with an internet enabled smart phone

or personal computer.

This allows the interior of the vehicle to be

heated or cooled while the vehicle is charg-

ing. This reduces the load on the Li-ion bat-

tery while the vehicle is being driven and

can help increase the vehicle driving range.

For additional information, refer to “Remote

climate control” in the “Monitor, climate, au-

dio, phone and voice recognition systems”

section of this manual.

EV Overview EV-13

STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Push the power switch.

3. Check that the Ready to Drive indicator

light illuminates. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Ready to drive indicator

light” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

4. For models with Navigation System: If

route guidance is necessary, enter the

destination in the navigation system.

For additional information, refer to the

LEAF Navigation System Owner's

Manual.

5. Check the Li-ion battery level and the

estimated driving range shown on the

meter. For additional information, refer

to “Driving range” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

NOTE:

• Before driving, compare the driving dis-

tance to the destination displayed on

the navigation system screen (if so

equipped) with the estimated driving

range shown on the meter. Determine if

it will be necessary to charge the Li-ion

battery before or while driving to your

planned destination.

• If it is necessary to charge the Li-ion

battery, use the navigation system (if so

equipped) to search for available charg-

ing stations on your planned driving

route.

EV-14 EV Overview

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Release the parking brake.

3. Move the shift lever into the D (Drive)

position. When released, the shift lever

returns to its original center position.

4. Confirm that the vehicle is in the D (Drive)

position. The indicator next to the “D” by

the shift lever illuminates and “D” is dis-

played on the meter.

5. Release the brake pedal.

6. Depress the accelerator pedal and start

driving.

EV Overview EV-15

These are the following gear positions for

driving the vehicle forward:

• Use the D (Drive) position for optimum

driving performance.

• Use the B mode for downhill driving. When

the B mode is used, more regenerative

brake is applied when the accelerator

pedal is released in comparison to the D

(Drive) position.

For additional information, refer to “Driving

the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

NOTE:

The regenerative brake converts the ve-

hicle's forward motion to electric power

to help slow the vehicle.

Use the ECO mode for maximum vehicle

range and for city driving. The ECO mode

helps reduce power consumption by re-

ducing acceleration when compared to

the same accelerator pedal position in the

D (Drive) position.

EV-16 EV Overview

If the low battery charge indicator

illuminates yellow, the Li-ion battery charge

is too low for travel. For additional informa-

tion, refer to "Li-ion battery available

charge gauge" in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual. Charge

the Li-ion battery as soon as possible.

EV Overview EV-17

CHARGING AFTER DRIVING

Charging the Li-ion batter y

When you return home, connect the ve-

hicle to the charging device installed at

your home or the EVSE plugged to outlet

using the normal charge connector.

Charge the vehicle or set the charging

timer function to have the vehicle charge

at a specific time. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Charging timer” in the “Charg-

ing” section of this manual.

1. When the power switch is turned off, the

settings of the charging timer, and the

Climate Ctrl. Timer and the charge con-

nector lock functions are displayed on

the vehicle information display. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

2. Open the charge port lid and charge

port cap. For additional information, re-

fer to “Charge port lid” in the “Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” section of this

manual.

3. Connect the charge connector to the

vehicle.

4. When the charging timer is turned on,

charging starts at the set time. When the

charging timer is not turned on, charg-

ing starts immediately.

NOTE:

• Charging can be started remotely, even

if the charging timer is set up.

• When you have forgotten to connect

the charge connector at home, there is a

function that can notify you via a text

message capable cellular phone, inter-

net enabled smart phone or personal

computer. For additional information,

refer to “Charging related remote func-

tion” in the “Charging” section of this

manual (models with Navigation Sys-

tem).

• NISSAN recommends that you connect

the normal charge cable when getting

out of the vehicle, even if it is not going

to be used. By doing this, you can get

the most out of the remote climate con-

trol (models with Navigation System)

and Climate Ctrl. Timer functions the

next time you use the vehicle.

EV-18 EV Overview

RANGE

The distance you can drive the vehicle

(range) varies considerably depending

upon available charge, weather, tempera-

ture, usage, battery age, topography, and

driving style.

Refer to the Monroney label (window

sticker) for the official EPA range. Your ac-

tual range can vary, either initially or as the

battery ages and with use over time. For

additional information, refer to “Improve

driving range” in this section for informa-

tion on the factors that affect vehicle range

and how to use the vehicle to maximize

vehicle range.

IMPROVE DRIVING RANGE

Vehicle range depends on a number of fac-

tors.

Actual vehicle range will vary depending

upon:

• Speed,

• Vehicle load,

• Electrical load from vehicle accessories,

• Traffic and road conditions.

NISSAN recommends the following driv-

ing habits to help maximize vehicle

range:

Before driving:

• Follow recommended periodic

maintenance.

• Keep tires inflated to correct pressure.

• Keep wheels in correct alignment.

• Pre-heat or pre-cool the interior cabin

while the vehicle is charging.

• Remove unnecessary cargo from the

vehicle.

While driving:

• Drive in ECO mode

– The ECO mode helps reduce power

consumption by reducing acceleration

when compared to the same accelera-

tor pedal position in the D (Drive) posi-

tion.

• Drive at a constant speed. Maintain cruis-

ing speeds with constant accelerator po-

sitions or by using cruise control when

appropriate.

• Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Gently

press and release the accelerator pedal

for acceleration and deceleration.

• Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

• Avoid frequent stopping and braking.

Maintain a safe distance behind other

vehicles.

• Turn off the air conditioner/heater when it

is not necessary.

• Select a moderate temperature setting

for heating or cooling to help reduce

power consumption.

• Use the air conditioner/heater and close

windows to reduce drag when cruising at

highway speed.

• Vehicle range may be substantially re-

duced in extremely cold conditions (for ex-

ample, -4°F (-20°C)).

• Using the climate control system to heat

the cabin when the outside temperature

is below 32°F (0°C) uses more electricity

and affects vehicle range more than when

using the heater when the temperature is

above 32°F (0°C).

EFFICIENT USE OF YOUR VEHICLE

EV Overview EV-19

• When it is cold, use the steering wheel

heater in substitution for the heater/air

conditioner. The steering wheel heater

consumes less power than the heater/air

conditioner.

• Release the accelerator pedal to slow

down and do not apply the brakes when

traffic and road conditions allow.

– This vehicle is equipped with a regen-

erative brake system. The primary pur-

pose of the regenerative brake system

is to provide some power to recharge

the Li-ion battery and extend driving

range. A secondary benefit is “engine

braking” that operates based on Li-ion

battery conditions. In the D (Drive) posi-

tion, when the accelerator is released,

the regenerative brake system pro-

vides some deceleration and some

power to the Li-ion battery.

LI-ION BATTERY LIFE

The Li-ion battery's ability to hold a charge,

like all batteries, decreases with battery

age and usage which results in decreased

vehicle range when compared to the ve-

hicle range when the vehicle was new. This

is normal and expected, and does not indi-

cate a malfunction of the vehicle or Li-ion

battery.

The Li-ion battery's ability to hold a charge

can be affected by how you drive the ve-

hicle, store the vehicle, how you charge the

Li-ion battery and Li-ion battery tempera-

ture during vehicle operation and charging.

To maximize the battery's useful life, use

the following driving and charging habits

where possible:

• Avoid exposing a vehicle to extreme am-

bient temperatures for extended periods.

• Avoid storing a vehicle in temperatures

below −13°F (−25°C) for more than seven

days.

• Avoid leaving your vehicle for more than

14 days where the Li-ion battery available

charge gauge reaches a zero or near zero

(state of charge).

• Allow the vehicle and Li-ion battery to cool

down after use before charging.

• Park/store your vehicle in cool locations

out of direct sunlight and away from heat

sources.

• Avoid sustained high battery tempera-

tures (caused, for example, by exposure to

very high ambient temperatures or ex-

tending highway driving with multiple

quick charges [if so equipped]) .

• Use the normal charging or trickle charg-

ing methods to charge the Li-ion battery

and minimize the use of public Fast

Charge or Quick Charger.

• Moderate driving.

• Use of ECO mode.

• Do not operate the charging timer repeat-

edly while the charge connector is con-

nected to the vehicle after the Li-ion bat-

tery charging is completed. Doing so may

discharge the 12-volt battery.

• The power of the Li-ion battery can be

checked on the Li-ion battery available

charge gauge. For additional information,

refer to “Li-ion battery available charge

gauge” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

EV-20 EV Overview

LI-ION BATTERY MAINTENANCE

In addition to the regular maintenance rec-

ommended by NISSAN, the LEAF requires

some special Li-ion battery inspections.

• For additional information, refer to the

NISSAN Warranty Information Booklet for

significant limitations, exclusions and pos-

sible voiding of your warranty resulting

from failure to have these necessary in-

spections, repairs and/or adjustments

performed.

• For additional information, refer to the

NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide

for a detailed explanation of the Li-ion bat-

tery inspection and intervals.

METERS AND INDICATORS

Various meters and gauges related to the

EV functions are displayed in the vehicle

information display.

Meter

Master warning light:

The master warning light (red or yellow)

illuminates when any warning lights or in-

dicators illuminate in the display or when

messages are displayed on the vehicle in-

formation display.

For additional information, refer to “Master

warning light (red/yellow)” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

EV UNIQUE INFORMATION

EV Overview EV-21

Li-ion battery temperature gauge:

This gauge displays the temperature of the

Li-ion battery.

For additional information, refer to “Li-ion

battery temperature gauge” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

Power meter:

This meter displays the actual traction mo-

tor power consumption and the regenera-

tive brake power provided to the Li-ion bat-

tery.

For additional information, refer to “Power

meter” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

Driving range:

This indicator displays the estimated driv-

ing range (calculated based on a program

that accounts for current driving style and

operational conditions) that can be driven

before recharging is necessary.

For additional information, refer to “Driving

range” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

EV-22 EV Overview

Li-ion battery available charge gauge:

This indicator displays the available Li-ion

battery capacity remaining to drive the ve-

hicle.

For additional information, refer to “Li-ion

battery available charge gauge” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this

manual.

The EV unique information is displayed on

the vehicle information display as well. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle in-

formation display” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

Warning and indicator lights

The EV system uses the following EV spe-

cific warning and indicator lights:

1. Master warning light (red)

2. Master warning light (yellow)

3. 12-volt battery charge warning light

4. Plug-in indicator light

5. Ready to Drive indicator light

6. Power limitation indicator light

7. EV system warning light

8. Electric shift control system warning

light

9. Regenerative brake system warning

light (yellow)

10. Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedes-

trians (VSP) system OFF warning light

For additional information, refer to “Warn-

ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

EV Overview EV-23

APPROACHING VEHICLE SOUND

FOR PEDESTRIANS (VSP) SYSTEM

The Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedes-

trians (VSP) system is a function that uses

sound to alert pedestrians of the presence

of the vehicle when it is being driven at a

low speed.

When the vehicle starts to move, it pro-

duces a sound.

The sound stops when the vehicle speed is

more than 19 mph (30 km/h) while

accelerating.

The sound starts when the vehicle speed is

less than 16 mph (25 km/h) while deceler-

ating.

The sound stops when the vehicle stops.

The sound does not stop with the vehicle in

the R (Reverse) position even if the vehicle

stops.

WARNING

• If the sound cannot be heard, pedes-

trians may not notice the oncoming

vehicle, which may cause an acci-

dent resulting in serious injury or

death. It is recommended that you

immediately visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for VSP system inspec-

tion.

• If the VSP system OFF warning light

illuminates while the power switch

is in the ON position, or in the Ready

to Drive position, it may indicate the

VSP system is not functioning prop-

erly. Have the VSP system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service. For additional information,

refer to “Approaching Vehicle Sound

for Pedestrians (VSP) system OFF

warning light” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

If you wish to make the sound of the VSP

system louder, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service. It is not possible to make the sound

lower.

EV-24 EV Overview

ELECTRIC SHIFT CONTROL

SYSTEM

This vehicle is equipped with an electric

shift control system. This control system

has three features:

• Smooth and easy shift lever operation.

• To place the vehicle in the P (Park) position,

push the P (Park) position switch on the

shift lever.

• The vehicle automatically applies the P

(Park) position when the power switch is

placed in the OFF position.

For additional information, refer to “Driving

the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

LED HEADLIGHT (LOW BEAM) (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

This vehicle uses an LED headlight for the

headlight low beam. The LED headlight has

the following features:

• Low power consumption

• The shape is very compact.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer to replace the head-

light.

DRIVING RANGE (IF SO EQUIPPED)

On the navigation system screen, you can

check the estimated distance the vehicle

may be driven with the available Li-ion bat-

tery charge. For additional information, re-

fer to the LEAF Navigation System Owner's

Manual.

EV Overview EV-25

NOTES

EV-26 EV Overview

Charging

Precautions on charging................CH-2

Types of charge and how to charge the Li-ion

battery...........................CH-5

How to normal charge (AC 220–240 volt)

by charging device .................CH-8

How to trickle charge (AC 110–120 volt)

byL1EVSE.......................CH-9

How to trickle charge (AC 110–120 volt)

byL1&L2EVSE ...................CH-15

How to normal charge (AC 220–240 volt)

byL1&L2EVSE...................CH-22

How to quick charge (if so equipped) .....CH-29

Charge connector lock system.........CH-32

Charging methods...................CH-35

Charging timer ...................CH-35

Timer Display ....................CH-38

Immediate charge .................CH-40

Charging related remote function

(models with Navigation System) .......CH-41

Charging related indicator lights..........CH-42

Charging status indicator lights ........CH-42

EVSE (Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment)

control box indicator light ............CH-45

Charging troubleshooting guide ..........CH-47

WARNING

• If you use any medical electric de-

vices, such as an implantable car-

diac pacemaker or an implantable

cardiovascular defibrillator, check

with the electric medical device

manufacturer concerning the ef-

fects that charging may have on im-

planted devices before starting the

charge operation. Charging may af-

fect the operation.

• Make sure there is no water or for-

eign materials in the charge port,

charge connector or electrical plug,

and that they are not damaged or

affected by rust or corrosion. If any

of these conditions are noticeable,

do not charge the Li-ion battery. This

may result in a short circuit or elec-

tric shock and could cause a fire

which may result in serious personal

injury or death.

• To avoid serious personal injury or

death when the Li-ion battery is

charging, be aware of the following

precautions.

– Do not touch the metal contacts

of the charge port, charge con-

nector, electrical plug or Genuine

NISSAN Adapter.

– Do not touch the vehicle and EVSE

when there is lightning.

– Do not pull, twist, bend, step on, or

drag the cable.

• Make sure the charge connector is

removed from the charge port be-

fore starting your vehicle. If the

charge connector is only partially

engaged and the connector latch is

unlocked, it is possible to place the

EV in the Ready to Drive position.

• Do not touch the plug or the Genuine

NISSAN Adapter if they are wet or

with wet hands. Do not put the plug

or the Genuine NISSAN Adapter in

water, liquid or snow. This may cause

an electric shock which may result in

serious personal injury or death.

• Do not disassemble or modify the

charge port, the EVSE or the Genuine

NISSAN Adapter. This may cause a

fire or an electric shock which may

result in serious personal injury or

death.

• If you notice an unusual odor, smoke

or abnormal noises coming from the

vehicle, stop charging immediately.

• Be careful not to allow your hands,

hair, jewelry or clothing to come into

contact with, or get caught in, the

traction motor cooling fan. The cool-

ing fan can start at any time during

charging.

• Do not use extension cords or

adapters unless they are Genuine

NISSAN parts.

• Do not use the Genuine NISSAN

Adapter with any devices except the

Genuine NISSAN EVSE.

• Do not allow an unattended child to

handle or use this product.

• Use the EVSE with outlet and wiring

installed according to the

regulations/standards.

• Pass the lower side belt of the EVSE

case securely through the fastener

on the bottom of the luggage board.

If the case suddenly becomes loose,

it may cause serious injury or death.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHARGING

CH-2 Charging

CAUTION

•

To prevent damage to the charging

equipment:

– Do not close the charge port lid

without closing the charge port

cap.

– Do not subject the charging

equipment to impact.

– Do not store and use charging

equipment in locations where the

temperature is over 185°F (85°C).

• Make sure the charge port cap is

closed on the charge port when

charging is finished. If the charge

port lid is closed when the charge

port cap is open, water or foreign

materials may enter the charge

port.

• Do not charge when a vehicle body

cover is in use. This may cause dam-

age to the charge connector.

• Do not attempt to perform a jump

start on the 12-volt battery at the

same time that the Li-ion battery is

being charged. Doing so may dam-

age the vehicle or charging equip-

ment and could cause an injury. For

additional information, refer to

“Jump starting” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

• In normal charging (AC 220 -

240 volt) and trickle charging (AC 110

- 120 volt) using the EVSE (Electric

Vehicle Supply Equipment) provided

with the vehicle, NISSAN recom-

mends using an AC 220 - 240 volt,

50A and an AC 110- 120 volt, 15A dedi-

cated electrical circuit and outlet.

The dedicated circuit is used to help

prevent circuit damage or the circuit

breaker from tripping due to the

high draw of charging the Li-ion bat-

tery. If the dedicated circuit is not

used, the circuit may cause adverse

interference on MCB (Moulded Cir-

cuit Board) and household electrical

appliances such as televisions and

audio systems. If the circuit is

shared, and another electrical de-

vice is being used at the same time

the vehicle is charging, the breaker

may trip. A qualified electrician

should install a dedicated circuit if

one is not already available.

NOTE:

• When charging the Li-ion battery, place

the power switch in the OFF position.

When the power switch is in the ON po-

sition, the Li-ion battery will not start

charging.

• For your safety, if the charge connector

r is connected to the vehicle while the

power switch is in the Ready to Drive,

the vehicle will automatically switch to

the ON position. Because charging will

not be started while the power switch is

in this position, be sure to place the

power switch in the OFF position.

• When the ambient temperature is 32°F

(0°C) or less, charging time may be lon-

ger than normal and the level to which

Charging CH-3

the Li-ion battery can be charged may

be less than at higher temperatures.

• Do not operate the charging timer re-

peatedly while the charge connector is

connected to the vehicle after the Li-ion

battery charging is completed. Doing so

may discharge the 12-volt battery. For

additional information, refer to “Charg-

ing timer” in this section. If the Li-ion

battery becomes discharged, charge it

immediately.

• The power switch can be set to the ON

position and the climate control and

navigation system (if so equipped) can

be used while the Li-ion battery is

charging. However, because these op-

erations consume Li-ion battery power,

it will take longer for the Li-ion battery

to become fully charged. Place the

power switch in the OFF position to help

reduce Li-ion battery charge time.

• If electrical power is interrupted while

charging, charging restarts automati-

cally when the electrical power is re-

stored.

• It is recommended to keep the charge

cable connected to save Li-ion battery

power, when the heater and air condi-

tioner are operating with remote opera-

tion (models with Navigation System).

• If the charge port is frozen, melt the ice

using a hair dryer. After the ice has

melted, charge the Li-ion battery. Forc-

ing the charge connector to connect

may cause a malfunction.

• If foreign materials have entered the

charge connector and charge port and

it is not possible to connect it, do not

attempt to force the connection. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer. Forcing the

charge connector to connect may

cause damage to the charging equip-

ment and vehicle.

• There is a hole on the charge port for

water drainage. If the water drainage

hole becomes blocked, or if water gets

trapped inside the charge port, do not

charge. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

CH-4 Charging

TYPES OF CHARGE AND HOW TO

CHARGE THE LI-ION BATTERY

Charging CH-5

This vehicle is an electric vehicle and it re-

quires electricity to operate. The Li-ion bat-

tery is the only source of power to operate

the vehicle. It is important to conserve

power and plan your charging needs when

you drive to avoid completely discharging

the Li-ion battery and being unable to

drive.

There are three methods available to

charge the Li-ion battery:

• Normal charge

• Trickle charge

• Quick charge (if so equipped)

The time to completely charge the vehicle

Li-ion battery varies based on the state of

charge of the Li-ion battery, condition and

age of the Li-ion battery, ambient tempera-

ture and condition of the power source

connected to the vehicle, and whether the

electric equipment (such as the air condi-

tioner, which consumes electric power) is

used.

Normal charge

NISSAN recommends using normal charg-

ing for usual charging of the vehicle. Use of

quick charge should be minimized in order

to help prolong Li-ion battery life.

Normal charging uses L1 & L2 EVSE(Electric

Vehicle Supply Equipment) or SAE

J1772 compliant the charging device con-

nected to dedicated AC 220 - 240 volt cir-

cuit. L1 & L2 EVSE is provided with the ve-

hicle (if so equipped). The charging device is

a home charging dock installed in your

home by a qualified electrician. Contact

your NISSAN certified LEAF dealer. For addi-

tional information, refer to “How to normal

charge” in this section.

Trickle Charge

Trickle charging is not recommended for

regular use because it takes more time

than normal charging. Trickle charge can

be used when it is necessary to perform an

emergency charge at a destination such

as a friend’s house.

Trickle charge uses the EVSE (Electric Vehicle

Supply Equipment) provided with the vehicle

or an SAE J1772 compliant cord set to connect

the vehicle to an AC 110–120 volt, 15A dedicated

outlet. The outlet should be protected by a

circuit breaker to avoid overloading the circuit

or other electrical hazard.

For additional information, refer to “How to

trickle charge” in this section.

Quick charge (if so equipped)

Quick charge capability is only available on

vehicles manufactured with the quick

charge option, which includes the quick

charge port. If your vehicle does not have

such a port, quick charging cannot be

used.

A vehicle equipped with a quick charge

port is compatible with most CHAdeMO

(Japanese industry standard) connectors

on charging stations. Charging stations

using this standard are UL certified and

safe to use in the US. While supported by

NISSAN, this connector may not become

the US SAE standard.

Quick charging is possible (even several

times a day). If the battery temperature is

near the red zone, in order to protect the

battery, power of the quick charging will be

limited.

CH-6 Charging

Public charging:

This vehicle is compatible with any public

charging station that is SAE J1772 compli-

ant. If you attempt to charge from a non-

compliant charging station, you may not

receive a complete charge, or you may not

be able to charge at all due to hardware

and software differences. NISSAN is work-

ing with states, municipalities, utility com-

panies and others to assist in the prepara-

tion of markets and infrastructure.

However, NISSAN makes no representa-

tions that public charging stations will be

available in locations where you wish to

operate the vehicle, nor can NISSAN predict

the period of time it may take for public

charging infrastructure to be developed in

your area. Depending on where you live or

drive, there may not be sufficient public

charging stations available to meet your

particular needs for driving range and

charging away from your home. Trip plan-

ning is therefore important, and you should

plan trips with these facts in mind.

Quick charge uses public charging sta-

tions (up to 50 kW of power).

The time needed to charge the Li-ion bat-

tery from discharged (low battery charge

indicator light illuminated) to 80% charged

using the quick charger depends on many

factors including the Li-ion battery tem-

perature and the type of quick charger

used.

It may take more time to charge the Li-ion

battery using the quick charger if the ve-

hicle is parked in a cold location for a long

time.

It may take more time to charge the Li-ion

battery using the quick charger if the tem-

perature of the Li-ion battery is high or low.

For additional information, refer to “Li-ion

battery temperature gauge” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

For additional information, refer to “How to

quick charge” in this section.

Power Limitation Mode

This mode protects the health and opera-

tion of the vehicle's Li-ion battery. This

mode operates in certain extreme condi-

tions (heat, cold, low state of charge). Power

available to vehicle systems, including its

traction motor, is limited resulting in limited

performance, acceleration and top speed.

Charging may be automatically termi-

nated, especially with repeated quick

charging in extreme hot weather.

Checking Li-ion battery charge

The three methods for checking the

amount of charge are as follows:

• Check by using the Li-ion battery available

charge gauge on the vehicle information

display when the power switch is placed in

the ON position. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Li-ion battery available

charge gauge” and “Li-ion battery low

charge warning” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

• Check by using an internet enabled smart

phone or personal computer. For addi-

tional information, refer to the LEAF Navi-

gation System Owner’s Manual.

• Check by using the charging status indi-

cator light. For additional information, re-

fer to “Charging status indicator lights” in

this section.

Charging CH-7

NOTE:

• During the charge operation, charge

continues when the power switch is

placed in the ON position.

• The Li-ion battery cannot be charged if

the quick charge connector and the

normal charge connector are con-

nected at the same time. If another

charge connector is connected mid-

charge, charging will stop.

• For safety reasons, it is not possible to

switch to the Ready to Drive position

while a charge connector is connected.

• During charging, it is possible that the

radio may be inaudible due to noise by

the electromagnetic wave.

HOW TO NORMAL CHARGE (AC

220–240 VOLT) BY CHARGING

DEVICE

WARNING

• If you use any medical electric de-

vices, such as an implantable car-

diac pacemaker or an implantable

cardiovascular defibrillator, check

with the electric medical device

manufacturer concerning the ef-

fects that charging may have on im-

planted devices before starting the

charge operation. Charging may af-

fect the operation.

• Be sure to follow the precautions for

using the charging device that can

be installed in your home. Failing to

do so could result in serious injury or

death.

CAUTION

• Do not use any charging equipment

that is not compatible with the LEAF.

Doing so could prevent the Li-ion

battery from charging properly or

could result in damage to the vehicle

or Li-ion battery.

• Normal charge uses the charging device

(AC 220 - 240 volt, 16A or 32A) that can be

installed in your home to charge the Li-ion

battery.

•

Immediate charge, charging timer and re-

mote charge (models with Navigation Sys-

tem) can be performed in the normal

charge mode. For additional information,

refer to “Charging methods” in this section.

• The charging equipment communicates

with the vehicle before Li-ion battery

charging starts. If this communication

does not occur because other equipment

is used, the Li-ion battery will not charge.

• NISSAN recommends that you connect

the charging device when getting out of

the vehicle, even if it is not going to be

used. By doing this, you can get the most

out of the remote climate control (models

with Navigation System) and Climate Ctrl.

Timer functions the next time you use the

vehicle.

To start normal charge:

1. Push the P (Park) position switch to place

the vehicle in the P (Park) position and

apply the parking brake.

2. When charging the Li-ion battery, place

the power switch in the OFF position.

When the power switch is in the ON po-

sition, the Li-ion battery will not start

charging.

3. Open the charge port lid and charge

port cap. For additional information, re-

fer to “Charge port lid” and “Charge port

cap” in the “Pre-driving checks and ad-

justments” section of this manual.

CH-8 Charging

4. Connect the charge connector to the

charge port. If it is connected normally, a

beep will sound once.

5. If charging has started or if the battery is

waiting for the charging timer, a beep

will sound twice and the charging status

indicator light display will change. For

additional information, refer to “Charg-

ing status indicator lights” in this section.

To stop normal charge:

1. Ensure that the charge connector lock is

not engaged. For additional information,

refer to “Charge connector lock system”

in this section.

2. Press the button on the charge connec-

tor, release the lock and remove the

charge connector from the charge port

and properly store it.

3. Close the charge port cap.

4. After closing the charge port cap on the

charge port, close the charge port lid.

NOTE:

To stop charging mid-charge, remove

the charge connector. Charging auto-

matically stops.

HOW TO TRICKLE CHARGE (AC

110–120 VOLT) BY L1 EVSE

WARNING

• If you wear a pacemaker or an im-

plantable cardiovascular defibrilla-

tor (ICD), stay at least 6 in (15 cm)

away from the EVSE.

• If you wear a pacemaker or an im-

plantable cardiovascular defibrilla-

tor (ICD), check with the electric

medical device manufacturer con-

cerning the effects that charging

may have on implanted devices be-

fore starting the charge operation.

Charging may affect the operation.

• In order to avoid an electric shock or

fire due to a short circuit, connect to

a GFI (Ground Fault Interrupter) cir-

cuit breaker and use a waterproof

electrical ground socket.

Charging CH-9

• Discontinue charger use immedi-

ately if plug or outlet becomes hot to

the touch or if you notice any un-

usual odors.

• Never use extension cords or plug

adapters with charger.

• Always unplug the charger when not

in use.

• The NISSAN Genuine L1 EVSE charg-

ing device draws 12 amps continu-

ously while charging the Li-ion bat-

tery with AC 110–120 volt outlet. Do

not plug in to any electrical circuit

unless it is inspected by a qualified

electrician to confirm that the elec-

trical circuit can accept a 12 amp

draw. Any electrical circuit has a

much higher likelihood of being

compromised in the following con-

ditions listed below.

– Improper use of the EVSE may re-

sult in a fire and serious injury or

death.

– Do not use the EVSE in structures

more than 40 years old.

– Do not use the EVSE in structures

using fuse-based circuit protec-

tion. Use only with electrical cir-

cuits protected by circuit

breakers.

– Do not use the EVSE on electrical

circuits with two-prong outlets.

– Do not use the EVSE if other de-

vices are plugged into the same

circuit.

– When unplugging, be sure to pull

by the plug or the EVSE, not the

cord.

– Do not pull, twist, bend, step on or

drag the cable.

– Do not attach or detach the Genu-

ine NISSAN Adapter while the

Genuine NISSAN Adapter is in-

serted into an outlet.

– Do not use the Genuine NISSAN

Adapter if the plug is not fully in-

serted and not locked.

– If you use the EVSE holder, handle

it with care to avoid injuries due to

contact with its edges or other

parts.

– Do not use the EVSE if the cable or

cord is frayed, has broken insula-

tion, or shows any other indica-

tions of damage.

– Stop using the EVSE immediately

if charging stops before comple-

tion when you move the plug or

cord.

– Do not use the EVSE if the control

box, plug, the EVSE or charge con-

nector is broken, cracked, open,

corroded or shows any other indi-

cations of damage.

– Do not use the EVSE if the plug has

a loose connection with the outlet

or if the outlet is damaged or

rusted.

– Before you connect the EVSE, be

sure to check the rated current

shown on the EVSE to ensure that

the outlet and circuit have enough

current capacity to charge your

vehicle safely. If the capacity of

the outlet and circuit is not

enough, wiring may cause over-

heating or a fire.

– If in any doubt about the outlet

and circuit, consult a qualified

electrician.

– The EVSE has parts that may

spark inside. Do not use it where

gasoline, paint, or flammable liq-

uids are used or stored.

– Do not use if a malfunction occurs

or if the EVSE has been damaged

in any manner. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for replacement.

CH-10 Charging

– The EVSE contains no user ser-

viceable parts. Do not attempt to

repair the EVSE, doing so will void

your warranty.

• Pass the lower side belt of the EVSE

case securely through the fastener

on the bottom of the luggage board.

If the case suddenly becomes loose,

it may cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION

• Only charge using a standard AC 110

- 120 volt, 15A dedicated electrical

outlet (for example, do not use an

electric generator). Failure to do so

may cause charging to fail and could

cause damage to the vehicle or the

EVSE equipment due to power

surges.

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN charging equipment to

charge the vehicle. Using non-

NISSAN equipment could cause the

Li-ion battery to not charge cor-

rectly and may damage the vehicle.

Precautions on storage

• Do not store the EVSE and Genuine

NISSAN Adapter in a place exposed to di-

rect sunlight.

• Do not store the EVSE and Genuine

NISSAN Adapter in a place exposed to

wind or rain.

• Be sure to store the EVSE with the protec-

tive cap on to keep the terminal of the

charge connector away from dirt and

dust.

• Do not store the EVSE with the cable

and/or cord wound around the control

box.

• Do not store the EVSE in a condition in

which the cable and/or cord are twisted.

• The control box will become hot while the

EVSE is charging. This is not a malfunction.

Charging CH-11

To start trickle charging:

NOTE:

Charging timer, remote charge (models

with navigation system) and immediate

charge can be performed in the trickle

charge mode. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Charging methods” in this

section.

1. Push the P (Park) position switch to place

the vehicle in the P (Park) position and

apply the parking brake.

2. When charging the Li-ion battery, place

the power switch in the OFF position.

When the power switch is in the ON po-

sition, the Li-ion battery will not start

charging.

3. Open the charge port lid. For additional

information, refer to “Charge port lid” in

the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section of this manual.

4. Take out the EVSE from the rear hatch.

5. Connect the electrical plug to the AC 110

- 120 volt, 15A dedicated electrical outlet.

If it is connected normally, the green light

on the EVSE control box indicator light

illuminates.

NOTE:

You can pass a rope through the

holes

䊊

in the control box in order

to hang it up while the Li-ion bat-

tery is charging. Use the EVSE with

the plug in an upright position (the

cord should extend down from the

outlet).

6. Open the charge port cap. For additional

information, refer to “Charge port cap” in

the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section of this manual.

CH-12 Charging

7. Remove the safety cap from the charge

connector.

8. Connect the charge connector to the

charge port. If it is connected normally, a

beep will sound once.

9. If charging has started, or if the Li-ion

battery is waiting for the charging timer,

a beep will sound twice and the charg-

ing status indicator light display will

change. For additional information, refer

to “Charging status indicator lights” in

this section.

10. When recharging outside, such as in

your driveway, use a commercially

available padlock attached in position

䊊

to prevent theft.

Charging CH-13

To stop trickle charge:

1. Ensure that the charge connector lock is

not engaged. For additional information,

refer to “Charge connector lock system”

in this section.

2. Press the button on the charge connec-

tor, release the lock and remove the

charge connector from the charge port.

3. Close the charge port cap.

4. Attach the safety cap to the EVSE.

5. Remove the electrical plug from the AC

110 - 120 volt, 15A dedicated electrical

outlet.

6. Store in its case.

NOTE:

Perform the following procedure to

store the EVSE in the case:

a. Wind the charge cable into a size that

will allow it to be stored in the case

(approximately 14 in (36 cm) in

diameter).

b. Place the EVSE into the case.

CH-14 Charging

c. Pass the lower side belt from the case

through the fastener on the bottom of

the luggage board.

d. Hang the hook from the case to the

ring from the trim.

e. Fix the belt with the hook-and-loop

fastener on the side of the case by

pulling the end of the belt.

WARNING

Pass the lower side belt of the EVSE

case securely through the fastener on

the bottom of the luggage board. If the

case suddenly becomes loose, it may

cause serious injury or death.

7. After closing the cap on the charge port,

close the charge port lid.

NOTE:

To stop charging mid-charge, remove

the charge connector. Charging auto-

matically stops.

HOW TO TRICKLE CHARGE (AC

110–120 VOLT) BY L1 & L2 EVSE

WARNING

• If you wear a pacemaker or an im-

plantable cardiovascular defibrilla-

tor (ICD), stay at least 6 in (15 cm)

away from the EVSE.

• If you use any medical electric de-

vices, such as an implantable car-

diac pacemaker or an Implantable

Cardiovascular Defibrillator (ICD),

check with the electric medical de-

vice manufacturer concerning the

effects that charging may have on

implanted devices before starting

the charge operation. Charging may

affect the operation.

• In order to avoid an electric shock or

fire due to a short circuit, connect to

a GFI (Ground Fault Interrupter) cir-

cuit breaker and use a waterproof

electrical ground socket.

• Discontinue charger use immedi-

ately if plug or outlet becomes hot to

the touch or if you notice any un-

usual odors.

Charging CH-15

• Never use extension cords or plug

adapters with charger.

• Always unplug the charger when not

in use.

• The NISSAN Genuine L1 & L2 EVSE

draws 12 amps continuously while

charging the Li-ion battery with AC

110–120 volt outlet. Do not plug in to

any electrical circuit unless it is in-

spected by a qualified electrician to

confirm that the electrical circuit can

accept a 12 amp draw. Any electrical

circuit has a much higher likelihood

of being compromised in the follow-

ing conditions listed below.

– Improper use of the EVSE may re-

sult in a fire and serious injury or

death.

– Do not use the EVSE in structures

more than 40 years old.

– Do not use the EVSE in structures

using fuse-based circuit protec-

tion. Use only with electrical cir-

cuits protected by circuit break-

ers.

– Do not use the EVSE on electrical

circuits with two-prong outlets.

– Do not use the EVSE if other de-

vices are plugged into the same

circuit.

– When unplugging, be sure to pull

by the plug or the Genuine NISSAN

Adapter, not the cord.

– Do not pull, twist, bend, step on or

drag the cable.

– Do not attach or detach the Genu-

ine NISSAN Adapter while the

Genuine NISSAN Adapter is in-

serted into an outlet.

– Do not use the Genuine NISSAN

Adapter if the plug is not fully in-

serted and not locked.

– If you use the EVSE holder, handle

it with care to avoid injuries due to

contact with its edges or other

parts.

– Do not use the EVSE or Genuine

NISSAN Adapter if the cable or

cord is frayed, has broken insula-

tion, or shows any other indica-

tions of damage.

– Stop using the EVSE or Genuine

NISSAN Adapter immediately if

charging stops before completion

when you move the Genuine

NISSAN Adapter, the plug or the

cord.

– Do not use the EVSE or Genuine

NISSAN Adapter if the control box,

plug, Genuine NISSAN Adapter or

charge connector is broken,

cracked, open, corroded or shows

any other indications of damage.

– Do not use the EVSE or Genuine

NISSAN Adapter if the plug or

Genuine NISSAN Adapter has a

loose connection with the outlet

or if the outlet is damaged or

rusted.

– Before connecting the EVSE, be

sure to check the rated current

shown on the EVSE to ensure that

the outlet and circuit have enough

current capacity to charge your

vehicle safely. If the capacity of

the outlet and circuit is not

enough, wiring may cause over-

heating or a fire.

– If in any doubt about the outlet

and circuit, consult a qualified

electrician.

– The device has parts that may

spark inside. Do not use it where

gasoline, paint, or flammable liq-

uids are used or stored.

CH-16 Charging

– Do not use if a malfunction occurs

or if the EVSE or Genuine NISSAN

Adapter has been damaged in any

manner. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for replacement.

– The EVSE or Genuine NISSAN

Adapter contains no user service-

able parts. Do not attempt to re-

pair the EVSE or Genuine NISSAN

Adapter, doing so will void your

warranty.

• Pass the lower side belt of the EVSE

case securely through the fastener

on the bottom of the luggage board.

If the case suddenly becomes loose,

it may cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION

• Only charge using a standard AC 110

- 120 volt, 15A dedicated electrical

outlet (for example, do not use an

electric generator). Failure to do so

may cause charging to fail and could

cause damage to the vehicle or the

EVSE due to power surges.

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN charging equipment to

charge the vehicle. Using non-

NISSAN equipment could cause the

Li-ion battery to not charge cor-

rectly and may damage the vehicle.

Precautions on storage

• Do not store the EVSE and Genuine

NISSAN Adapter in a place exposed to di-

rect sunlight.

• Do not store the EVSE and Genuine

NISSAN Adapter in a place exposed to

wind or rain.

• Be sure to store the EVSE with the protec-

tive cap on to keep the terminal of the

charge connector away from dirt and

dust.

Charging CH-17

• Do not store the EVSE with the cable

and/or cord wound around the control

box.

• Do not store the EVSE in a condition in

which the cable and/or cord are twisted.

• The control box will become hot while the

EVSE is charging. This is not a malfunction.

To start trickle charging:

NOTE:

Charging timer, remote charge (models

with navigation system) and immediate

charge can be performed in the trickle

charge mode. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Charging methods” in this

section.

CH-18 Charging

1. Push the P (Park) position switch to place

the vehicle in the P (Park) position and

apply the parking brake.

2. When charging the Li-ion battery, place

the power switch in the OFF position.

When the power switch is in the ON po-

sition, the Li-ion battery will not start

charging.

3. Open the charge port lid. For additional

information, refer to “Charge port lid” in

the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section of this manual.

4. Take out the EVSE from the rear hatch.

5. Connect the electrical plug to the AC 110

- 120 volt, 15A dedicated electrical outlet

using a NISSAN Genuine Adapter. . If it is

connected normally, the green light on

the EVSE control box indicator light

illuminates.

NOTE:

You can pass a rope through the

holes

䊊

on the control box to the

holder in order to hang it up while the

Li-ion battery is charging.

Use the EVSE with the plug in the up-

right position. (The cord should ex-

tend down from the outlet.)

6. Open the charge port cap. For additional

information, refer to “Charge port cap” in

the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section of this manual.

Charging CH-19

7. Remove the safety cap from the charge

connector.

8. Connect the charge connector to the

charge port. If it is connected normally, a

beep will sound once.

9. If charging has started, or if the Li-ion

battery is waiting for the charging timer,

a beep will sound twice and the charg-

ing status indicator light display will

change. For additional information, refer

to “Charging status indicator lights” in

this section.

10. When recharging outside, such as in

your driveway, use a commercially

available padlock attached in position

䊊

to prevent theft.

To stop trickle charge:

1. Ensure that the charge connector lock is

not engaged. For additional information,

refer to “Charge connector lock system”

in this section.

2. Press the button on the charge connec-

tor, release the lock and remove the

charge connector from the charge port.

3. Attach the safety cap to the EVSE.

4. Remove the electrical plug from the AC

110 - 120 volt, 15A dedicated electrical

outlet.

CH-20 Charging

5. Store in its case.

NOTE:

Perform the following procedure to

store the EVSE in the case.

a. Wind the charge cable into a size

that will allow it to be stored in the

case (approximately 14 in (36 cm)

in diameter). Winding the charge

cable in the direction shown below

avoids shortening of cable life.

b. Place the EVSE into the case.

c. Pass the lower side belt from the

case through the fastener on the

bottom of the luggage board.

d. Hang the hook from the case to the

ring from the trim.

e. Fix the belt with the hook-and-

loop fastener on the case, pulling

the belt from the case.

WARNING

Pass the lower side belt of the EVSE

case securely through the fastener

on the bottom of the luggage

board. If the case suddenly be-

comes loose, it may cause serious

injury or death.

Charging CH-21

6. After closing the cap on the charge port,

close the charge port lid.

NOTE:

To stop charging mid-charge, remove

the charge connector. Charging auto-

matically stops.

HOW TO NORMAL CHARGE (AC

220–240 VOLT) BY L1 & L2 EVSE

WARNING

• If you wear a pacemaker or an im-

plantable cardiovascular defibrilla-

tor (ICD), stay at least 6 in (15 cm)

away from the EVSE.

• If you wear a pacemaker or an im-

plantable cardiovascular defibrila-

tor (ICD), check with the electric

medical device manufacturer con-

cerning the effects that charging

may have on implanted devices be-

fore starting the charge operation.

Charging may affect the operation.

• In order to avoid an electric shock or

fire due to a short circuit, connect to

a GFI (Ground Fault Interrupter) cir-

cuit breaker and use a waterproof

electrical ground socket.

• Discontinue charger use immedi-

ately if plug or outlet becomes hot to

the touch or if you notice any un-

usual odors.

• Never use extension cords or plug

adapters with charger.

CH-22 Charging

• Always unplug the charger when not

in use.

• The NISSAN Genuine L1 &L2 EVSE

draws 30 amps continuously while

charging the Li-ion battery with AC

220–240 volt outlet. Do not plug in to

any electrical circuit unless it is in-

spected by a qualified electrician to

confirm that the electrical circuit can

accept a 30 amp draw. Any electrical

circuit has a much higher likelihood

of being compromised in the follow-

ing conditions listed below.

– Improper use of the EVSE may re-

sult in a fire and serious injury or

death.

– Do not use the EVSE in structures

more than 40 years old.

– Do not use the EVSE in structures

using fuse-based circuit protec-

tion. Use only with electrical cir-

cuits protected by circuit break-

ers.

– Do not use the EVSE on electrical

circuits with two-prong outlets.

– Do not use the EVSE if other de-

vices are plugged into the same

circuit.

– When unplugging, be sure to pull

by the plug and not the cord.

– Do not pull, twist, bend, step on or

drag the cable.

– If you use the EVSE holder, handle

it with care to avoid injuries due to

contact with its edges or other

parts.

– Do not use the EVSE if the cable or

cord is frayed, has broken insula-

tion, or shows any other indica-

tions of damage.

– Stop using the EVSE immediately

if charging stops before comple-

tion when you move the plug or

cord.

– Do not use the EVSE if the control

box, plug, the EVSE or charge con-

nector is broken, cracked, open,

corroded or shows any other indi-

cations of damage.

– Do not use the EVSE if the plug has

a loose connection with the outlet

or if the outlet is damaged or

rusted.

– Before you connect the EVSE, be

sure to check the rated current

shown on the EVSE to ensure that

the outlet and circuit have enough

current capacity to charge your

vehicle safely. If the capacity of

the outlet and circuit is not

enough, wiring may cause over-

heating or a fire.

– If in any doubt about the outlet

and circuit, consult a qualified

electrician.

– The EVSE has parts that may

spark inside. Do not use it where

gasoline, paint, or flammable liq-

uids are used or stored.

– Do not use if a malfunction occurs

or if the EVSE has been damaged

in any manner. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for replacement.

– The EVSE contains no user ser-

viceable parts. Do not attempt to

repair the EVSE, doing so will void

your warranty.

• Pass the lower side belt of the EVSE

case securely through the fastener

on the bottom of the luggage board.

If the case suddenly becomes loose,

it may cause serious injury or death.

Charging CH-23

CAUTION

• Only charge using a standard AC 220

- 240 volt, 50A dedicated electrical

outlet (for example, do not use an

electric generator). Failure to do so

may cause charging to fail and could

cause damage to the vehicle or the

EVSE due to power surges.

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN charging equipment to

charge the vehicle. Using non-

NISSAN equipment could cause the

Li-ion battery to not charge cor-

rectly and may damage the vehicle

or the EVSE.

Precautions on storage

• Do not store the EVSE in a place exposed

to direct sunlight.

• Do not store the EVSE in a place exposed

to wind or rain.

• Be sure to store the EVSE with the protec-

tive cap on to keep the terminal of the

charge connector away from dirt and

dust.

• Do not store the EVSE with the cable

and/or cord wound around the control

box.

• Do not store the EVSE in a condition in

which the cable and/or cord are twisted.

• The control box will become hot while the

EVSE is charging. This is not a malfunction.

• Normal charge (AC 220-240 volt) by L1 &

L2 EVSE is performed using an AC 220 -

240 volt, 50A dedicated electrical outlet

using the L1 & L2 EVSE provided with the

vehicle.

CH-24 Charging

To start normal charging:

NOTE:

Charging timer, remote charge (models

with navigation system) and immediate

charge can be performed in the trickle

charge mode. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Charging methods” in this

section.

1. Push the P (Park) position switch to place

the vehicle in the P (Park) position and

apply the parking brake.

2. When charging the Li-ion battery, place

the power switch in the OFF position.

When the power switch is in the ON po-

sition, the Li-ion battery will not start

charging.

3. Open the charge port lid. For additional

information, refer to “Charge port lid” in

the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section of this manual.

4. Take out the EVSE from the rear hatch.

Charging CH-25

5. Connect the electrical plug to the AC 220

- 240 volt, 50A dedicated electrical outlet.

If it is connected normally, the green light

on the EVSE control box indicator light

illuminates.

NOTE:

You can pass a rope through the

holes

䊊

on the control box or place

the control box to the holder in order

to hang it up while the Li-ion battery

is charging.

Use the EVSE with the plug in an up-

right position. (The cord should ex-

tend down from the outlet.)

6. Open the charge port cap. For additional

information, refer to “Charge port cap” in

the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section of this manual.

CH-26 Charging

7. Remove the safety cap from the charge

connector.

8. Connect the charge connector to the

charge port. If it is connected normally, a

beep will sound once.

9. If charging has started, or if the Li-ion

battery is waiting for the charging timer,

a beep will sound twice and the charg-

ing status indicator light display will

change. For additional information, refer

to “Charging status indicator lights” in

this section.

10. When recharging outside, such as in

your driveway, use a commercially

available padlock attached in position

䊊

to prevent theft.

To stop normal charging:

1. Ensure that the charge connector lock is

not engaged. For additional information,

refer to “Charge connector lock system”

in this section.

2. Press the button on the charge connec-

tor, release the lock and remove the

charge connector from the charge port.

3. Attach the safety cap to the EVSE.

4. Remove the electrical plug from the AC

220 - 240 volt, 50A dedicated electrical

outlet.

Charging CH-27

5. Store in its case.

NOTE:

Perform the following procedure to

store the EVSE in the case:

a. Wind the charge cable into a size

that will allow it to be stored in the

case (approximately 14 in (36 cm)

in diameter). Winding the charge

cable in the direction shown below

avoids shortening the cable life.

b. Place the EVSE into the case.

c. Pass the ring of the lower side belt

from the case through the fastener

on the bottom of the luggage

board.

d. Hang the hook from the case to the

ring from the trim.

e. Fix the belt with the hook-and-

loop fastener on the case, pulling

the belt from the case.

WARNING

Pass the lower side belt of the EVSE

case securely through the fastener on

the bottom of the luggage board. If the

case suddenly becomes loose, it may

cause serious injury or death.

CH-28 Charging

6. After closing the cap on the charge port,

close the charge port lid.

NOTE:

To stop charging mid-charge, remove

the charge connector. Charging auto-

matically stops.

HOW TO QUICK CHARGE (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

Quick charge uses public charging sta-

tions (up to 50 kW of power) to charge the

battery in a short period of time.

WARNING

• Always use a quick charger that is

compatible with the LEAF. Using an

incompatible quick charger may

cause a fire or malfunction resulting

in serious personal injury or death.

• Before starting the quick charge,

carefully read the instructions pro-

vided on the quick charger and

make sure the quick charge connec-

tor is properly connected and

locked. Failure to connect or operate

the quick charger correctly could

cause damage to the vehicle or the

charging equipment.

NOTE:

• Quick charging is possible (even several

times a day) if the battery temperature

is not near the red zone. If the battery

temperature reaches the red zone, in

order to protect the battery, quick

charging is not allowed and the power

limitation mode will be triggered. For

additional information, refer to “Li-ion

battery temperature gauge” in the “EV

Overview” and “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

• When the Li-ion battery available

charge and the Li-ion battery capacity

are shown on the quick charger unit, the

readings may differ from the Li-ion bat-

tery available charge/capacity reading

shown on the vehicle’s display.

Charging CH-29

To start charging:

1. Push the P (Park) position switch to place

the vehicle in the P (Park) position and

apply the parking brake.

2. When charging the Li-ion battery, place

the power switch in the OFF position.

When the power switch is in the ON po-

sition, the Li-ion battery will not start

charging.

3. Open the charge port lid and charge

port cap. For additional information, re-

fer to “Charge port lid” and “Charge port

cap” in the “Pre-driving checks and ad-

justments” section of this manual.

4. Align

䊊

with the groove of the charge

port and insert the charge connector.

CAUTION

•

Be sure to insert the charge connec-

tor straight into the quick charge port

right up to the base. Failure to do so

may result in the Li-ion battery not

charging or could cause damage to

the charging equipment.

CH-30 Charging

5. Grasp the lock lever and lock the charge

connector.

6. Follow the instructions on the quick

charge equipment to start charging.

When the equipment is properly in-

stalled and ready to charge a beep

sounds twice and the charging status

indicator light will change. For additional

information, refer to “Charge status indi-

cator lights” in this section.

Charging ends in the following situations:

• When charging is complete

• When the possible charge time set for the

quick charger is exceeded

NOTE:

• Charging may automatically stop even

if it is not completed.

• If charging stops mid-charge, you can

restart charging by pressing the start

button on the quick charger again.

• The charge connector is locked to the

charge port during charging and can-

not be disconnected. Follow the in-

structions on the quick charge equip-

ment to stop charging. Confirm

charging is stopped by looking at the

indicators on the instrument panel. The

charge connector can be disconnected

from the vehicle when charging is

stopped.

• When quick charging, the Li-ion battery

charging rate is slower as the percent-

age of available battery charge in-

creases.

To finish charging:

1. Confirm charging is stopped by looking

at the indicators on the instrument

panel. The charge connector can be dis-

connected from the vehicle when charg-

ing is stopped.

2. Unlock the charge connector, remove

from the vehicle and properly store it.

3. Close the quick charge port cap.

4. Shut the charge port lid.

Charging CH-31

CAUTION

• As the quick charge connector is

heavier in comparison to the other

charge connectors, allowing it to

drop could cause damage to the ve-

hicle or charge connector or per-

sonal injury. When removing the

connector, be sure to pull it out

straight and as carefully as possible.

CHARGE CONNECTOR LOCK

SYSTEM

The normal or trickle charge connector

can be locked to the normal charge port.

Perform the following steps and the

charge connector lock mode can be se-

lected:

1. Push the

button to select “EV

settings” and then push the OK button.

2. Push the

button until “Chg.

Connector Lock” is selected and then

push the OK button.

3. Push the

button until the

preferred mode of AUTO, LOCK or UN-

LOCK, is selected and then push the OK

button.

NOTE:

The charge connector lock can be acti-

vated when the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position and the charge connector

is connected. The charge connector lock

will not be activated if the charge con-

nector is not properly connected.

AUTO mode

To select AUTO mode, push the up and

down switch until "AUTO" is selected and

then push the OK button. The indicator

light for "AUTO" will illuminate.

When AUTO mode is selected, the charge

connector is locked while charging is in

process. The charge connector will be un-

locked automatically when charging is

complete.

CH-32 Charging

LOCK mode

To select the LOCK mode, push the up and

down switch until "LOCK" is selected and

then push the OK button. The indicator

light for "LOCK" will illuminate.

When LOCK mode is selected, the charge

connector will remain locked. The charge

connector will be unlocked when UNLOCK

mode is selected or temporary unlock op-

eration is performed.

UNLOCK mode

To select UNLOCK mode, push the up and

down switch until "UNLOCK" is selected

and then push the OK button. The indicator

light for "UNLOCK" will illuminate.

When UNLOCK mode is selected, the

charge connector will remain unlocked.

Temporary unlock mode:

When the charge connector lock system is

in the AUTO or LOCK mode, the charge

connector lock can be unlocked temporar-

ily by using the NISSAN Intelligent Key® or

the charge port lid opener switch.

Unlock operation using Intelligent

Key

1. Press the charge port lid opener button

on the Intelligent Key for more than

1 second.

2. The charging status indicator light

flashes three times and a beep sounds

three times. The charge connector lock

is unlocked for 30 seconds.

3. After 30 seconds, the charge connector

lock is locked.

The charge connector lock can also be un-

locked for 30 seconds when unlocking a

door or the rear hatch (in this case, the

charging status indicator light does not

operate). If the lock is operated again within

30 seconds after unlocking the door/rear

hatch, the charge connector lock is locked

again.

Charging CH-33

Unlock operation using charge

port lid opener switch

1. Push the charge port lid opener switch.

2. The charging status indicator light

flashes three times and a beep sounds

three times. The charge connector lock

is unlocked for 30 seconds.

3. After 30 seconds, the charge connector

lock is locked.

NOTE:

• Depending on the charging station, the

lock mechanism established by local

standards may not be compatible with

your vehicle. It may not be possible for

the charge connector to lock to your ve-

hicle.

• When the power source is cut off while

charging in AUTO mode, the connector

will be continuously locked for 5 min-

utes, then it will be released.

• When timer charging is set with AUTO

mode, the connector will not lock until

charging is started.

• When the following system(s) are oper-

ated individually or the 12-volt battery

is being charged, the charging connec-

tor lock will not lock:

– Climate Ctrl. Timer

– Remote climate control (if so

equipped)

– Li-ion battery warmer (if so

equipped)

If the charge connector cannot be

unlocked

1. Place power switch in the OFF position.

2. Open the hood.

3. Insert a flat head screwdriver or suitable

tool into the screw that is located on the

front of the hood lock.

4. Turn it clockwise to release the charge

connector lock.

5. Remove the charge connector.

CH-34 Charging

CHARGING TIMER

Use charging timer to schedule when the

Li-ion battery charges. The vehicle auto-

matically begins charging at the scheduled

times when the charge connector is con-

nected to the vehicle. The timers do not

need to be reset each time the Li-ion bat-

tery needs charging.

The charging timer can save two timer set-

tings that include the charging start time

and end time. The charging timer can be

applied to the timer settings for each day

of the week (models with Navigation Sys-

tem).

The vehicle automatically begins charging

at the scheduled times when the charge

connector is connected to the vehicle. The

timers do not need to be reset each time

the Li-ion battery needs to be charged.

1. Push the

button to select “EV

settings” and then push the OK button.

2. Push the

button to select

“Charge Timer1” or “Charge Timer2” and

then push the OK button.

3. Push the

button to select

“Timer” and then push the OK button.

The indicator light will turn on when the

timer setting is turned on.

4. Push the

button until to select

“Start time” and then push the OK

button.

5. Push the

button to set “Hour”

and then push the OK button.

6. Push the

button to set “Min-

ute” and then push the OK button.

7. Push the

button to select “End

time” and then push the OK button.

8. Push the

button to set “Hour”

and then push the OK button.

9. Push the

button to set “Min-

ute” and then push the OK button.

10. Models with Navigation System: Push

the

button to select the days

of the week you wish to activate the

Charging Timer and then push the OK

button. Push the Back button to return

to the previous display.

11. After the setting is complete, place the

power switch in the OFF position, and

then connect the charge connector to

the vehicle.

NOTE:

• Always place the power switch in the

OFF position after setting the charging

timers. When the power switch in the

ON position, the Li-ion battery will not

start charging.

CHARGING METHODS

Charging CH-35

• Some charging stations used to per-

form normal charge are equipped with

timer functions. If the charger timer

function and the vehicle timer are both

set, and the two timers are not set to

operate at the same time, it is possible

that the charger will not start or the bat-

tery will not be charged to the level ex-

pected.

• The Li-ion battery may not charge to

the expected level using the Charging

Timer while the Li-ion battery warmer

(if so equipped) operates.

• Charging timer is performed according

to the current time setting of the clock

on the vehicle information display.

When setting the charging timer func-

tion, be sure to check that the current

time displayed is correct.

• To turn off the charging timer function,

select "Timer" on the Charge Timer dis-

play (vehicle information display) using

the

button and push the OK

button to turn off the indicator light.

The start and end time settings are not

deleted, even if the charging timer func-

tion is turned off.

• If the day of the week is not selected on

the timer charge setting screen, the

charging timer will not operate on that

day. The system will wait until the next

set charging time to perform charging

(models with Navigation System).

• When either the charge start time or

charge end time is set, the charging

timer function is activated.

• When only the charging timer end time

is set, the system automatically deter-

mines when to begin charging. The Li-

ion battery may not be charged to the

expected level in the following condi-

tions:

• The Li-ion battery is charged in cold

weather.

• The charge connector is connected to the

vehicle too close to the scheduled charg-

ing end time. When only the charging

timer end time is set, the system auto-

matically stops charging when the Li-ion

battery charges to a full charge. Charging

may stop before the scheduled end time.

• If the charging timer and the Climate

Ctrl. Timer are operating at the same

time due to an overlap of the timer set-

tings, you can prioritize which function

receives electrical power first. For addi-

tional information, refer to the LEAF

Navigation System Owner's Manual.

• When charging is set as the first priority,

the Climate Ctrl. Timer does not start

until 10 segments (80%) of the Li-ion

battery available charge gauge are illu-

minated.

• Even when the climate control is set as

the first priority, the climate control sys-

tem will be turned off when the electric

demands of the climate control system

are more than can be provided to the

Li-ion battery for charging.

• Set only the Charging Timer End time

when charging in cold weather. The ve-

hicle automatically determines when to

start charging to fully charge the Li-ion

battery, even if the Li-ion battery

warmer (if so equipped) operates.

Charging ends before the set End time if

the Li-ion battery is fully charged.

CH-36 Charging

Timer Charge setting screen

Chg. Timer Only at HOME (models

with Navigation System):

If you register your home in the navigation

system and turn on “Chg. Timer Only at

HOME,” the timer charging is applied only

when the normal or trickle charge is per-

formed at home. For additional informa-

tion, refer to LEAF Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual for the registration. When the

charging is performed at a place other

than home, the charging automatically

starts when a normal or trickle charge con-

nector is connected to the vehicle.

Full charge has priority:

If “Full charge has priority” is turned on, the

charge start timer will be advanced if the

fully charged condition of the Li-ion battery

cannot be achieved during the start time

to end time interval. If the fully charged

battery condition cannot be achieved, the

charge continues until the battery is fully

charged.

Charging CH-37

NOTE:

If “Full charge has priority” is turned

on, it is possible that the battery is

not charged fully by the charge end

time due to the operating condition

of Climate Ctrl. Timer and the toler-

ance of charging time, etc. In that

case, the charging continues until the

Li-ion battery is fully charged.

TIMER DISPLAY

The timer display appears for approxi-

mately 30 seconds when the power switch

is placed in the OFF position.

䊊

Charging time

The estimated time of charging the Li-ion

battery (start time and end time) is dis-

played.

• When the charging timer is set, the charg-

ing system calculates the estimated time

to charge the Li-ion battery based on the

electrical power supplied in the last

charging using the timer, and the start

time and end time are displayed.

• When the charging timer is set to OFF, the

estimated end time to charge the Li-ion

battery to a full level in the case of per-

forming the immediate charge. The end

time is calculated based on the electrical

power selected in the “Charge Time

Screen”.

• When the Li-ion battery was fully charged,

the charging time will be displayed as

“--:--”.

䊊

Charging timer setting status

When the charging timer is set, the start

time and end time of the charging using

the timer are displayed

䊊

Climate Ctrl. timer setting status

When the Climate Ctrl. timer is set, the de-

parture time (end time) set for the Climate

Ctrl. Timer is displayed.

䊊

Charge connector lock setting status

The current mode of the charge connector

lock (AUTO, LOCK or UNLOCK) is displayed.

For the charge connector lock operation,

see “Charge connector lock system” in the

“Charging” section of this manual.

When the OK button on the steering wheel

is pushed, the display will be switched to

the “EV Settings” menu. In the EV Settings,

the setting of the charging timer, Climate

Ctrl. timer and charge connector lock

CH-38 Charging

mode can be changed. (See “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section of this manual for the set-

tings menu of the vehicle information dis-

play.)

When the

button on the steering

wheel is pushed while the timer display is

shown, the display is switched to the ECO

Drive Report (if the vehicle was driven).

Either display will continue to be displayed

for another 30 seconds when the button is

operated. If the doors are locked after the

power switch was placed in the OFF posi-

tion, the display will turn off before the pre-

set time.

For models with Navigation System, the

day of the week is displayed with the time

(hour and minute) in each information

䊊

–

䊊

In addition to the above, note the following

conditions for the charging time

䊊

infor-

mation:

• The charging time is displayed by the

10 minutes. If the estimated charging time

is longer than 24 hours, “Over 24h” is

displayed.

• When the charging is set to start immedi-

ately after connecting the charge con-

nector to the vehicle, the start time is dis-

played as “Charge Now”.

• While being charged, the time when the

charging has actually started is displayed

as the start time. The end time is dis-

played according to the estimated charg-

ing time that was calculated based on the

electrical power being supplied.

• For models with Li-ion battery warmer,

the charging system calculates the elec-

trical power used by the battery warmer

when the Li-ion battery temperature is

low, and longer charging time will be

displayed.

• When “Chg. Timer Only at HOME” is set to

ON (models with Navigation System) in

the EV Settings, the start time is displayed

only when the power switch is placed in

the OFF position at home. If the power

switch is placed in the OFF position other

than at home, the immediate charge

mode is selected and “Charge Now” will

appear as the start time.

• When “Full charge has priority” is set to ON

in the EV Settings and the Li-ion battery

cannot be charged to a full level within the

hours between the scheduled star t time

and end time of the charging timer, the

charging time shows the time that ex-

ceeds the scheduled hours in the charg-

ing timer.

• If you need to confirm the estimated

charging time depending on the available

electrical power (supplied to the charger),

see the Estimated Charge Time display.

(See “Trip computer” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.)

NOTE:

• The displayed end time of charging is

an estimation. The Li-ion battery may

not be charged to a full level by the es-

timated end time.

• If the charging timer and the Climate

Ctrl. timer are set to operate at the same

time, longer charging time will be dis-

played or the Li-ion battery may not be

charged to a full level at the scheduled

end time.

Charging CH-39

IMMEDIATE CHARGE

When a charging timer is not turned on,

charging automatically starts when a nor-

mal or trickle charge connector is con-

nected to the vehicle.

Use the immediate charge mode anytime

you want to start charging when a charg-

ing timer is turned on by performing the

following:

1. Place the power switch in the OFF

position.

2. Push the immediate charge switch.

3. Connect the normal or trickle charge

cable when the charging status indica-

tor light changes to display immediate

charge mode. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Charging status indicator

lights” in this section.

NOTE:

• You have 15 minutes to connect a nor-

mal or trickle charge connector to the

vehicle after the immediate charge

switch is pushed. If a charge connector

is not connected to the vehicle within

15 minutes, the vehicle automatically

returns to the previous setting.

• To cancel immediate charge mode push

the immediate charge switch again.

• If the charge cable is disconnected, the

Li-ion battery automatically switches to

charging timer. To perform an immedi-

ate charge again, push the immediate

charge switch and connect the charge

cable.

• If the charge cable is already connected,

push the immediate charge switch to

start performing an immediate charge.

CH-40 Charging

CHARGING RELATED REMOTE

FUNCTION (MODELS WITH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM)

This vehicle incorporates a communica-

tion device that is called a TCU (Telematics

Communication Unit). The communication

connection between this unit and NISSAN

Data Center allows for various remote

function services.

• Remote Battery status check:

The charging status of the Li-ion battery

is available using the NissanConnect®

EV & Services app or Owners Portal even

if you are not in the vehicle.

• Remote charge and remote climate

control:

The function of starting the Li-ion bat-

tery charge or starting the heater and air

conditioner is available using your per-

sonal computer or internet enabled

smart phone.

• Plug-in reminder:

A notification e-mail will be sent to your

personal computer or internet enabled

smart phone if the plug is not connected

at the specific time you selected, after

turning off the power switch.

NOTE:

• Establishing the NissanConnect® EV &

Services is necessary before using this

service. For additional information, re-

fer to the LEAF Navigation System Own-

er's Manual.

• To check the Li-ion battery charging

status using an internet enabled smart

phone or personal computer, the fol-

lowing conditions must be met:

– The vehicle must be located in a cel-

lular phone coverage area.

– The cellular phone must be located

in an area with cellular phone cover-

age.

– If using a computer, the computer

must be connected to the internet.

– Some cellular phones are not com-

patible and cannot be used to check

the Li-ion battery charging status.

Please confirm beforehand.

• Certain remote functions require a

compatible smart phone, which is not

included with the vehicle.

• NissanConnect® EV & Services informa-

tion system features are included

through a subscription service which

requires owner consent to activate. The

subscription must be active to use

these features.

• NissanConnect® EV & Services commu-

nications may be received at a verified

e-mail address or by SMS/text

messaging-enabled mobile phone.

• Standard text rates and/or data usage

may apply depending on your carrier.

Charging CH-41

CHARGING STATUS INDICATOR

LIGHTS

The charging status indicator lights

䊊

display the charging status, and are vis-

ible from both inside and outside the

vehicle.

When the normal charge connector lock

is unlocked

All of the indicator lights,

䊊

, will flash

and a beep will sound three times when

the normal charge connector lock switch

on the Intelligent Key or the charge port lid

opener switch is pushed.

When the normal charge connector is

connected incorrectly

All of the indicator lights,

䊊

, will flash

and a beep will sound three times within

30 seconds when the charge connector is

connected incorrectly to the normal

charge port.

Ready for charging timer

If the charging timer is set, the indicator

lights illuminate in order from

䊊

. The

indicator lights turn off after approximately

5 minutes.

CHARGING RELATED INDICATOR

LIGHTS

CH-42 Charging

Ready for immediate charge

When the power switch is off and if the

immediate charge switch is pushed while

the charge cable is not connected, the in-

dicator light

䊊

illuminates.

This indicator light

䊊

illuminates when the

vehicle is ready for immediate charge. You

have 15 minutes to connect the charge

connector to the vehicle. If the charge con-

nector is not connected within 15 minutes,

the indicator light

䊊

turns off and you

must start the immediate charge mode

again to charge the Li-ion battery.

When charging

When the Li-ion battery is being charged,

the charging status indicator lights will

change depending on the amount the Li-

ion battery is charged.

*: This value is also displayed by the battery

available charge gauge on the vehicle in-

formation display..

When fully charged

All of the indicator lights

䊊

illuminate

when the Li-ion battery is fully charged to

the selected charging mode level.

The indicator lights turn off after approxi-

mately 5 minutes or when the charge con-

nector is removed.

Charging CH-43

When the indicator light

䊊

flashes

The indicator light

䊊

flashes when the 12-

volt battery is being charged. For additional

information, refer to “Charging the 12-volt

battery” in the “EV overview” section of this

manual.

The indicator light will also flash for up to

5 minutes if the electrical power from the

EVSE or charging device is interrupted dur-

ing charging. Charging will restart auto-

matically when the electrical power from

the EVSE or charging device is restored if

the normal charge connector is con-

nected. The charge start beep will not

sound when charging restarts.

The indicator will also flash when the fol-

lowing systems are operating:

• Climate Ctrl. Timer

• Remote climate control (if so equipped)

• Li-ion battery warmer (if so equipped)

When not charging

None of the lights are illuminated when the

Li-ion battery and 12-volt battery are not

charging.

CH-44 Charging

EVSE (ELECTRIC VEHICLE SUPPLY

EQUIPMENT) CONTROL BOX

INDICATOR LIGHT

When a charge is being performed, the

charging status is shown by the indicator

light that is on the EVSE control box.

An indicator light also indicates if there is

an EVSE malfunction.

Meaning Light ON Blinking

Light

OFF

Symbol 䡩嘷

䡩

쏹

Charging CH-45

READY

CHARGE

or POWER

FAULT

Status and action to be taken

䡩䡩䡩All LED lamps will light for a 1/2 second check when EVSE is first connected to an outlet.

䡩 쏹쏹

After initial processing is completed, when the EVSE is not connected to the vehicle, or the EVSE is connected to the vehicle

but charging is not being performed. For additional information, refer to “Charging troubleshooting guide” in this section.

䡩䡩쏹 While the Li-ion battery is being charged

쏹쏹쏹

If the EVSE control box indicator light does not illuminate after connecting the plug to the outlet, check the GFCI and circuit

breaker for the outlet. If either the GFCI or breaker has tripped, the circuit may not be suitable for use with EVSE. You should

have a qualified electrician inspect and repair the electrical circuit. If the GFCI breaker is not tripped, stop using the EVSE. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

嘷

䡩

쏹쏹

The EVSE could not detect sufficient grounding at outlet for reliable EV charging. Consult a qualified electrician to have the out-

let checked.

嘷

䡩

嘷

䡩

When the temperature of the electrical plug is too hot or the EVSE is unable to detect the temperature of the electrical plug.

The EVSE is restricting the charging current for safety according to the temperature of the electrical plug.

POWER or CHARGE Lamp status:

䡩 = No charging current restricted.

嘷

䡩

= Charge current restricted

쏹 = Charge stopped

This problem may be caused by a failure in the outlet.

Stop using the outlet and consult a qualified electrician.

If the same indication continues after checking an outlet, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

嘷

䡩

嘷

䡩

嘷

䡩

嘷

䡩

쏹

嘷

䡩

嘷

䡩

嘷

䡩

L1&L2EVSEonly

The temperature detection circuit in the plug of the EVSE is malfunctioning.

Power Lamp status:

嘷

䡩

= Charge current reduced

쏹 = Charge stopped

Since the EVSE is restricting the charging current, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

嘷

䡩

쏹 䡩

䡩

쏹

嘷

䡩

This trouble is caused by a malfunction of the EVSE internal circuits.

Stop using the EVSE immediately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

䡩 쏹

嘷

䡩

The EVSE detected leakage current or PWM signal error

Stop using the EVSE immediately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

CH-46 Charging

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Charging cannot be per-

formed.

The vehicle power switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

Before charging, place the vehicle power switch in the OFF position.

Both the normal charge connector and the

quick charge connector (if so equipped) are

connected at the same time.

The normal charge connector and the quick charge connector cannot be connected at

the same time.

The Li-ion battery is already fully charged.

Confirm the available Li-ion battery capacity remaining by checking the Li-ion battery

available charge gauge. If the Li-ion battery charge gauge reaches 100%, the Li-ion battery

is already fully charged and cannot be charged. Charging automatically turns off if the

Li-ion battery is fully charged.

The temperature of the Li-ion battery is too

hot or cold to charge.

Confirm the Li-ion battery temperature by checking the Li-ion battery temperature gauge.

If the gauge indicates the Li-ion battery is too hot (red zone) or too cold (blue zone),

charging is not possible. Allow the Li-ion battery to cool or warm up before charging. For

additional information, refer to “Li-ion battery temperature gauge” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

The 12-volt battery is discharged.

If the vehicle electrical systems cannot be turned on even when the power switch is turned

on, the 12V battery may be discharged. Charge or replace the 12V battery.

The vehicle has a malfunction. The vehicle may have a malfunction. Confirm if the warning light on the meter is illumi-

nated. If a warning is displayed, stop charging. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer.

Normal charge or trickle

charge cannot be per-

formed.

There is no electrical power coming from

the outlet.

Confirm that there has not been a power failure. Make sure the breaker is on. If an outlet

with a timer device installed is used, power will only be available at the time set by the

timer.

The EVSE or charging device may have a

malfunction.

If Genuine NISSAN EVSE is used, refer to “Charging Troubleshooting.”

The charge connector is not connected

correctly.

Confirm the charge connector is connected correctly.

Plug might not be connected correctly. Confirm if the plug is connected correctly.

Immediate charge cannot

be performed.

Charging timer has been set.

Turn off the charging timer. For additional information, refer to “Charging timer ” in this

section.

CHARGING TROUBLESHOOTING

GUIDE

Charging CH-47

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Charging timer cannot be

performed.

The charge cable is not connected. Connect the charge cable.

The time on the clock is wrong. The charging timer function does not start charging based on the clock located on the

vehicle information display. Adjust the clock. For additional information, refer to “Clock” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual. If the 12-volt battery is discharged

or if the Li-ion battery is disconnected, the time setting must be updated. For models

with Navigation System, there must be a GPS signal to adjust the timer setting clock.

The immediate charge switch has been

pushed.

Charging timer does not operate when immediate charge is selected.

Charging timer has not been set. Set the charging timer schedule. For additional information, refer to “Charging timer” in

this section.

Charging does not start because the

charging timer start time and end time are

set and the current time is before the set

start time.

Confirm when the charging timer time is set to start charging. Change the charging timer

setting to the desired charge time or push the immediate charge switch. For additional

information, refer to “Charging timer” in this section.

The charge cable is not connected. Connect the charge cable beforehand.

Normal charge stops in

the middle of charging.

There is no power coming from the outlet. There may have been an electrical power failure, or the breaker may have failed. Charg-

ing will resume when the power source is reset.

The charge cable has been disconnected. Check that the charge cable has not been disconnected.

Both the normal charge connector and the

quick charge connector were connected at

the same time.

If the normal charge connector and the quick charge connector are connected at the

same time, charging will be stopped.

Charging timer end time has been

reached.

When the charging timer is set and the charge end time is reached, charging will be

stopped, even if the Li-ion battery is not fully charged.

The temperature of the Li-ion battery is

too hot or too cold to charge.

Confirm the Li-ion battery temperature by checking the Li-ion battery temperature

gauge. If the gauge indicates the Li-ion battery is too hot (red zone) or too cold (blue

zone), charging is not possible. Allow the Li-ion battery to cool or warm up before charg-

ing. For additional information, refer to “Li-ion battery temperature gauge” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

CH-48 Charging

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Quick charge cannot be

performed.

Incorrect charge connector connection, not

fully inserted or may not be locked.

Check that the charge connector is connected correctly and that it is locked.

The self-diagnostic function of the quick

charge device returns a negative result.

There is a possibility that the vehicle has a malfunction. Stop charging. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

The power switch of the quick charger is off.

Check the power switch of the quick charger.

Quick charge stops in the

middle of charging.

Charging is stopped by the quick charge

timer.

Charging will stop depending on the timer function setting of the quick charge device. If

you need to charge the Li-ion battery more, start the charging procedure again.

The power supply for the quick charger is

off.

Check whether the power supply for the quick charger is off.

Charging CH-49

NOTES

CH-50 Charging

1 Safety–Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats..............................1-2

Front manual seat adjustment

(for passenger’s seat and if so equipped for

driver’s seat) .......................1-3

Front power seat adjustment

(if so equipped for driver’s seat)...........1-4

Rearseats ........................1-6

Head restraints/headrests ................1-7

Adjustable head restraint/headrest

components .......................1-8

Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

components .......................1-8

Remove..........................1-9

Install ............................1-9

Adjust ...........................1-10

Seatbelts...........................1-11

Precautions on seat belt usage ..........1-11

Seat belt warning light ................1-14

Pregnant women ...................1-14

Injured persons.....................1-14

Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . .1-14

Seat belt extenders ..................1-18

Seat belt maintenance................1-19

Child safety .........................1-19

Infants ..........................1-20

Small children .....................1-20

Larger children .....................1-20

Child restraints .......................1-22

Precautions on child restraints ..........1-22

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system ...................1-24

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH.......................1-27

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts..................1-29

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH.......................1-32

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts..................1-35

Booster seats .....................1-40

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........1-43

Precautions on SRS ..................1-43

Supplemental air bag warning labels ......1-61

Supplemental air bag warning light .......1-61

WARNING

• Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will

not be against your body. In an acci-

dent, you could be thrown into it and

receive neck or other serious inju-

ries. You could also slide under the

lap belt and receive serious internal

injuries.

• For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back and upright in the seat

with both feet on the floor and ad-

just the seat properly. For additional

information, refer to “Precautions on

seat belt usage” in this section.

• After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely

locked.

• Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols or make the vehicle move.

Unattended children could become

involved in serious accidents.

• To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of

the vehicle and/or its systems, do

not leave children, people who re-

quire the assistance of others or

pets unattended in your vehicle. Ad-

ditionally, the temperature inside a

closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

• Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation. The seat

may move suddenly and could

cause loss of control of the vehicle.

• The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort.

Seat belts are most effective when

the passenger sits well back and

straight up in the seat. If the seat-

back is reclined, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and being injured

is increased.

SEATS

1-2 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts

to avoid possible injuries and/or dam-

age.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (FOR PASSENGER’S

SEAT AND IF SO EQUIPPED FOR

DRIVER’S SEAT)

Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-

ally. For additional information about ad-

justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined

in this section.

Forward and backward

Pull the bar up and hold it while sliding the

seat forward or backward to the preferred

position. Release the bar to lock the seat in

position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up

and lean back. To bring the seatback for-

ward, pull the lever up and lean your body

forward. Release the lever to lock the seat-

back in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the ve-

hicle is in the P (Park) position.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to

adjust the seat height to the preferred po-

sition.

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

(IF SO EQUIPPED FOR DRIVER’S

SEAT)

Operating tips

• The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motor

stops during operation, wait 30 seconds

then reactivate the switch.

• Do not operate the power seat switch for

a long period of time when the system is

not in the READY mode. This will discharge

the battery.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch as shown will slide the

seat forward or backward to the desired

position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch as shown until the

desired angle is obtained.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

1-4 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in P (Park).

Seat lifter

Move the switch as shown to adjust the

angle (if so equipped) and height of the

seat cushion.

Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped)

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Lumbar support

The lumbar support feature provides ad-

justable lower back support to the driver.

Move the switch as shown to adjust the

seat lumbar area.

REAR SEATS

Folding

Before folding the rear seats:

• Secure the seat belts on the seat belt

hooks located on the side wall. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Seat belt hook”

in this section.

To fold down the seatback, pull the release

knob.

To return the seatback to the seating posi-

tion, lift up each seatback and push it to the

upright position until it is latched.

WARNING

• Do not fold down the rear seats

when occupants are in the rear seat

area or any objects are on the rear

seats.

• Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seats when

they are in the folded-down posi-

tion. Use of these areas by passen-

gers without proper restraints could

result in serious injury or death in an

accident or sudden stop.

1-6 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

• Properly secure all cargo with ropes

or straps to help prevent it from slid-

ing or shifting. Do not place cargo

higher than the seatbacks. In a sud-

den stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal injury.

• When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched

position. If they are not completely

secured, passengers may be injured

in an accident or sudden stop.

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supple-

ment the other vehicle safety systems.

They may provide additional protec-

tion against injury in certain rear end

collisions. Adjustable head restraints/

headrests must be adjusted properly,

as specified in this section. Check the

adjustment after someone else uses

the seat. Do not attach anything to the

head restraint/headrest stalks or re-

move the head restraints/headrests.

Do not use the seat if the head

restraint/headrest has been removed.

If the head restraint/headrest was re-

moved, reinstall and properly adjust

the head restraint/headrest before an

occupant uses the seating position.

Failure to follow these instructions can

reduce the effectiveness of the head

restraint/headrest. This may increase

the risk of serious injury or death in a

collision.

The illustration shows the seating posi-

tions equipped with a head restraint/

headrest.

Indicates the seating position is

equipped with a head restraint.

+ Indicates the seating position is not

equipped with a head restraint or headrest

(if applicable).

• Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be inte-

grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

• Adjustable head restraints/headrests

have multiple notches along the stalks to

lock them in a desired adjustment

position.

• The non-adjustable head restraints/

headrests have a single locking notch to

secure them to the seat frame.

• Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the head

restraint/headrest so the center of

your ear is approximately level with the

center of the head restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher than

the recommended alignment, place

the head restraint/headrest at the

highest position.

• If the head restraint/headrest has been

removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and

locked in place before riding in that desig-

nated seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD

RESTRAINT/HEADREST

COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

1-8 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the

head restraint/headrest.

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to

the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest

from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest prop-

erly in a secure place so it is not loose in

the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position.

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks

with the holes in the seat. Make sure the

head restraint/headrest is facing the

correct direction. The stalk with the

notch (notches)

䊊

must be installed in

the hole with the lock knob

䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/

headrest before an occupant uses the

seating position.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the

center is level with the center of your ears. If

your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

For non-adjustable head restraint/

headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it

up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

1-10 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and

push the head restraint/headrest down

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted, and you are sitting upright and

well back in your seat with both feet on the

floor, your chances of being injured or killed

in an accident and/or the severity of injury

may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly

encourages you and all of your passengers

to buckle up every time you drive, even if

your seating position includes a supple-

mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be

worn at all times when a vehicle is being

driven.

SEAT BELTS

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

1-12 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

• Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be in the

rear seats and in an appropriate re-

straint.

• The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so

may reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase

the chance or severity of injury in an

accident. Serious injury or death can

occur if the seat belt is not worn

properly.

• Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your

chest. Never put the belt behind your

back, under your arm or across your

neck. The belt should be away from

your face and neck, but not falling

off your shoulder.

• Position the lap belt as low and snug

as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT

THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high

could increase the risk of internal in-

juries in an accident.

• Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-

curely fastened to the proper buckle.

• Do not wear the seat belt inside out

or twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

• Do not allow more than one person

to use the same seat belt.

• Never carry more people in the ve-

hicle than there are seat belts.

• If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the power switch

is turned ON with all doors closed

and all seat belts fastened, it may

indicate a malfunction in the sys-

tem. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

• No changes should be made to the

seat belt system. For example, do

not modify the seat belt, add mate-

rial, or install devices that may

change the seat belt routing or ten-

sion. Doing so may affect the opera-

tion of the seat belt system. Modify-

ing or tampering with the seat belt

system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

• Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have

activated, they cannot be reused

and must be replaced together with

the retractor. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service.

• All seat belt assemblies, including

retractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any colli-

sion. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for this service. NISSAN recom-

mends that all seat belt assemblies

in use during a collision be replaced

unless the collision was minor and

the belts show no damage and con-

tinue to operate properly. Seat belt

assemblies not in use during a colli-

sion should also be inspected and

replaced if either damage or im-

proper operation is noted.

• All child restraints and attaching

hardware should be inspected after

any collision. Always follow the re-

straint manufacturer’s inspection

instructions and replacement rec-

ommendations. The child restraints

should be replaced if they are dam-

aged.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

Both the driver’s and passenger’s front

seats are equipped with a seat belt warn-

ing light. The warning light, located on the

instrument panel, will show the status of

the driver and passenger seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warn-

ing light will not light up if the seat is

not occupied.

For additional information, refer to “Warn-

ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant

women use seat belts. The seat belt should

be worn snug, and always position the lap

belt as low as possible around the hips, not

the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never put

the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal

area. Contact your doctor for specific rec-

ommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons

use seat belts, depending on the injury.

Check with your doctor for specific recom-

mendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

• Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times.

• Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will

not be against your body. In an acci-

dent, you could be thrown into it and

receive neck or other serious inju-

ries. You could also slide under the

lap belt and receive serious internal

injuries.

• For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back and upright in the seat

with both feet on the floor and ad-

just the seat belt properly.

• Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions

are equipped with Automatic Lock-

ing Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts.

If the seat belt becomes wrapped

around a child’s neck with the ALR

mode activated, the child can be se-

riously injured or killed if the seat

belt retracts and becomes tight. This

can occur even if the vehicle is

parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-

lease the child. If the seat belt can-

not be unbuckled or is already un-

buckled, release the child by cutting

the seat belt with a suitable tool

1-14 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

(such as a knife or scissors) to re-

lease the seat belt.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Seats” in this section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retrac-

tor and insert the tongue into the buckle

until you hear and feel the latch engage.

• The retractor is designed to lock dur-

ing a sudden stop or on impact. A

slow pulling motion permits the belt

to move and allows you some free-

dom of movement in the seat.

• If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then smoothly

pull the belt out of the retractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and

snug on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure

the shoulder belt is routed over your

shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear

seating positions three-point seat belts

have two modes of operation:

• Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

• Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-

tend and retract to allow the driver and

passengers some freedom of movement

in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt

when the vehicle slows down rapidly or

during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks

the seat belt for child restraint installation.

When ALR mode is activated the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat

belt tongue is detached from the buckle

and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to

the ELR mode after the seat belt fully re-

tracts. For additional information, refer to

“Child restraints” in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During nor-

mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR

mode should not be activated. If it is ac-

tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat

belt tension. It can also change the op-

eration of the front passenger air bag.

For additional information, refer to

“Front passenger air bag and status

light” in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be cer-

tain that seatbacks are completely se-

cured in the latched position. If they

are not completely secured, passen-

gers may be injured in an accident or

sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, push the button

on the buckle. The seat belt automatically

retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock

seat belt movement by two separate

methods:

• When the belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor

• When the vehicle slows down rapidly

1-16 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

To increase your confidence in the seat

belts, check the operation as follows:

• Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and re-

strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this

check, get the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service, or to learn

more about seat belt operation.

Center of rear seat

Selecting correct set of seat belts:

The center seat belt buckle is identified by

the CENTER mark

䊊

. The center seat belt

tongue can be fastened only into the cen-

ter seat belt buckle.

Shoulder belt height adjustment

(front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position that is best for you.

For additional information, refer to “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” in this section.

To adjust, pull the adjustment button

䊊

and then move the shoulder belt anchor to

the preferred position

䊊

so that the belt

passes over the center of the shoulder. The

belt should be away from your face and

neck, but not falling off of your shoulder.

Release the adjustment button to lock the

shoulder belt anchor into position.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

WARNING

• After adjustment, release the ad-

justment button and then try to

move the shoulder belt anchor up

and down to make sure that it is se-

curely fixed in position.

• The shoulder belt anchor height

should be adjusted to the position

that is best for you. Failure to do so

may reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase

the chance or severity of injury in an

accident.

Seat belt hook

When the rear seat belts are not in use and

when folding down the rear seats, hook the

rear outer seat belts on the seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it

is not possible to properly fit the lap/

shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender

that is compatible with the installed seat

belts is available for purchase. The ex-

tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)

of length and may be used for either the

driver or front passenger seating position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for assistance with

purchasing an extender if an extender is

required.

WARNING

• Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company which

made the original equipment seat

belts, should be used with NISSAN

seat belts.

• Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use

could result in serious personal in-

jury in the event of an accident.

• Never use seat belt extenders to in-

stall child restraints. If the child re-

straint is not secured properly, the

child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

1-18 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

• To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or car-

pets. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the

seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow

the seat belts to retract until they are

completely dry.

• If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoul-

der belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

• Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on

the webbing is found, the entire seat belt

assembly should be replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the

seat belt becomes wrapped around a

child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-

vated, the child can be seriously in-

jured or killed if the seat belt retracts

and becomes tight. This can occur

even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle

the seat belt to release the child. If the

seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is al-

ready unbuckled, release the child by

cutting the seat belt with a suitable

tool (such as a knife or scissors) to re-

lease the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect

them. They need to be properly re-

strained.

In addition to the general information in

this manual, child safety information is

available from many other sources, includ-

ing doctors, teachers, government traffic

safety offices, and community organiza-

tions. Every child is different, so be sure to

learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child re-

straint systems:

• Rear-facing child restraint

• Forward-facing child restraint

• Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s

size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year

and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed

in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-

facing child restraints are available for chil-

dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-

straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster

seats are used to help position a vehicle

lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no

longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro-

tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may

not fit them properly. The shoulder belt

may come too close to the face or neck.

The lap belt may not fit over their small

hip bones. In an accident, an improp-

erly fitting seat belt could cause seri-

ous or fatal injury. Always use appro-

priate child restraints.

CHILD SAFETY

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved child

restraints for infants and small children. For

additional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the ve-

hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An-

chor and Tethers for CHildren) system or

with the vehicle seat belt. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints” in this

section.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear

seat. According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seat than in the front

seat.

This is especially important because

your vehicle has a supplemental re-

straint system (air bag system) for the

front passenger. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS)” in this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be

placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN

recommends that infants be placed in child

restraints that comply with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards.You should choose

a child restraint that fits your vehicle and

always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh

at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a

rear-facing child restraint as long as pos-

sible up to the height or weight limit of the

child restraint. Children who outgrow the

height or weight limit of the rear-facing

child restraint and are at least 1 year old

should be secured in a forward-facing child

restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-

facturer’s instructions for minimum and

maximum weight and height recommen-

dations. NISSAN recommends that small

children be placed in child restraints that

comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing

child restraint with a harness until they

reach the maximum height or weight limit

allowed by the child restraint manufac-

turer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight

limit of the harness-equipped forward-

facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends

that the child be placed in a commercially

available booster seat to obtain proper

seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the

booster seat should raise the child so that

the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the chest and the top, middle por-

tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt

should not cross the neck or face and

should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt

should lie snugly across the lower hips or

upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster

seat can only be used in seating positions

that have a three-point type seat belt. The

booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

have a label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

1-20 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

A booster seat should be used until the

child can pass the seat belt fit test below:

• Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?

• Is the child able to sit without slouching?

• Do the child’s knees bend easily over the

front edge of the seat with feet flat on the

floor?

• Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap

belt low and snug across the hips and

shoulder belt across mid-chest and

shoulder)?

• Is the child able to use the properly ad-

justed head restraint/headrest?

• Will the child be able to stay in position for

the entire ride?

If you answered no to any of these ques-

tions, the child should remain in a booster

seat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow

different guidelines. Check local and

state regulations to confirm your child is

using the correct restraint system before

traveling.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the

cargo areas. The child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in an accident or

sudden stop.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

•

Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use and in-

stallation of child restraints could

result in serious injury or death of a

child or other passengers in a sud-

den stop or collision:

–

The child restraint must be used

and installed properly. Always fol-

low all of the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for instal-

lation and use.

–

Infants and children should never

be held on anyone’s lap. Even the

strongest adult cannot resist the

forces of a collision.

–

Do not put a seat belt around both

a child and another passenger.

–

NISSAN recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Studies show that children

are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seat than in

the front seat. If you must install a

forward-facing child restraint in

the front seat, refer to “Forward-

facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts” in this

section.

–

Even with the NISSAN Advanced

Air Bag System, never install a

rear-facing child restraint in the

front seat. An inflating air bag

could seriously injure or kill a

child. A rear-facing child restraint

must only be used in the rear seat.

–

Be sure to purchase a child re-

straint that will fit the child and

vehicle. Some child restraints may

not fit properly in your vehicle.

–

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-22 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items

or equipment to the vehicle. Doing

so could damage the child restraint

anchorages. The child restraint will

not be properly installed using the

damaged anchorage, and a child

could be seriously injured or killed in

a collision.

–

Never use the anchor points for

adult seat belts or other items.

–

A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the

front passenger seat.

–

Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child

restraint.

–

Infants and children should al-

ways be placed in an appropriate

child restraint while in the vehicle.

•

When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, loose objects can injure occu-

pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating

surface and buckles before placing a

child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal

child restraint anchor system, referred to

as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system. Some child restraints

include rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to these an-

chors.

For additional information, refer to “LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

system” in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child re-

straints for infants and small children of

various sizes. When selecting any child re-

straint, keep the following points in mind:

• Choose only a restraint with a label certi-

fying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

• Check the child restraint in your vehicle to

be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s

seat and seat belt system.

• If the child restraint is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the child

restraint and check the various adjust-

ments to be sure the child restraint is

compatible with your child. Choose a child

restraint that is designed for your child’s

height and weight. Always follow all rec-

ommended procedures.

• If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg),

you may use either the LATCH anchors or

the seat belt to install the child restraint

(not both at the same time).

• If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint.

• Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-

facturer's instructions for installation.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved

child restraint at all times while the ve-

hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-

quires the top tether strap on forward-

facing child restraints be secured to the

designated anchor point on the vehicle.

LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND

TETHERS FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special an-

chor points that are used with LATCH sys-

tem compatible child restraints. This sys-

tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX

or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat

belt to secure the child restraint unless the

combined weight of the child and child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and child restraint

is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the ve-

hicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

install the child restraint. Be sure to follow

the child restraint manufacturer's instruc-

tions for installation.

The LATCH lower anchor points are pro-

vided to install child restraints in the rear

outboard seating positions only. Do not at-

tempt to install a child restraint in the cen-

ter position using the LATCH lower an-

chors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

• Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locations

shown in the illustration.

• Do not secure a child restraint in the

center rear seating position using

the LATCH lower anchors. The child

restraint will not be secured

properly.

1-24 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

• Inspect the lower anchors by insert-

ing your fingers into the lower an-

chor area. Feel to make sure there

are no obstructions over the an-

chors such as seat belt webbing or

seat cushion material. The child re-

straint will not be secured properly if

the lower anchors are obstructed.

• Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used to attach

adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so

could damage the child restraint an-

chorages. The child restraint will not

be properly installed using the dam-

aged anchorage, and a child could

be seriously injured or killed in a

collision.

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located at

the rear of the seat cushion near the seat-

back. A label is attached to the seatback to

help you locate the LATCH lower anchors.

Installing child restraint LATCH

lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include

two rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to two an-

chors located at certain seating positions

in your vehicle. With this system, you do not

have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the

child restraint. Check your child restraint for

a label stating that it is compatible with the

LATCH system. This information may also

be in the instructions provided by the child

restraint manufacturer.

LATCH lower anchor location LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

When installing a child restraint, carefully

read and follow the instructions in this

manual and those supplied with the child

restraint.

Top tether anchor

WARNING

• If the tonneau cover (if so equipped)

contacts the top tether strap when it

is attached to the top tether anchor,

remove the tonneau cover (if so

equipped) from the vehicle or secure

it on the cargo floor below its attach-

ment location. If the tonneau cover

(if so equipped) is not removed, it

may damage the top tether strap

during a collision.Your child could be

seriously injured or killed in a colli-

sion if the child restraint top tether

strap is damaged.

• Do not allow cargo to contact the top

tether strap when it is attached to

the top tether anchor. Properly se-

cure the cargo so it does not contact

the top tether strap.Cargo that is not

properly secured or that contacts

the top tether strap may damage

the top tether strap during a colli-

sion. Your child could be seriously in-

jured or killed in a collision if the

child restraint top tether strap is

damaged.

• Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used to attach

adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so

could damage the child restraint an-

chorages. The child restraint will not

be properly installed using the dam-

aged anchorage, and a child could

be seriously injured or killed in a col-

lision.

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

1-26 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Top tether anchor point locations:

Anchor points are located on the back side

of the seatbacks.

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing child restraints with

the LATCH lower anchor attachments or

seat belts. For additional information, refer

to “Installing top tether strap” in this sec-

tion.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for details.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” in this section before in-

stalling a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer's

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower anchors.

Check to make sure that the LATCH at-

tachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

3. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your hand to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and seat-

back while tightening the webbing of

the anchor attachments.

Rear-facing webbing-mounted — step 2 Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2 Rear-facing — step 3

1-28 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the seat

near the LATCH attachment path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try

to tug it forward and check to see if the

LATCH attachment holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure,

tighten the LATCH attachment as nec-

essary, or put the restraint in another

seat and test it again. You may need to

try a different child restraint or try install-

ing by using the vehicle seat belt (if ap-

plicable). Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to each

use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 2 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result

in the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and child restraint

exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined

weight of the child and child restraint is

greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehi-

cle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

install the child restraint. Be sure to follow

the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in

the rear seats:

Rear-facing — step 4

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the front

seat. Position the child restraint on the

seat. Always follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt re-

tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint

mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when

the seat belt is fully retracted.

Rear-facing — step 1 Rear-facing — step 2 Rear-facing — step 3

1-30 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack in

the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the

child restraint. Press downward and

rearward firmly in the center of the child

restraint with your hand to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback

while pulling up on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try

to tug it forward and check to see if the

belt holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint. Not

Rear-facing — step 4 Rear-facing — step 5 Rear-facing — step 6

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

all child restraints fit in all types of

vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to each

use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer's

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the LATCH sys-

tem:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower anchors.

Check to make sure that the LATCH at-

tachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

Forward-facing webbing-mounted —

step 2

1-32 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to the

tether anchor point. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Installing top tether

strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a top

tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, remove the head restraint/

headrest to obtain the correct child re-

straint fit. If the head restraint/headrest

is removed, store it in a secure place. Be

sure to reinstall the head restraint/

headrest when the child restraint is

removed. For additional information, re-

fer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this

section.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and

it is interfering with the proper child re-

straint fit, try another seating position or

a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your knee to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and seat-

back while tightening the webbing of

the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

Forward-facing rigid-mounted — step 2 Forward-facing — step 4

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps

1 through 6.

Installing top tether strap

䊊

Top tether strap

䊊

Tether anchor point

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

the LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchors (rear bench out-

board seating positions only).

Forward-facing — step 6

1-34 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure to

reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests" in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap

䊊

over the

seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-

chor point

䊊

on the bottom of the seat-

back behind the child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for details.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child

restraint will not be properly installed

using the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result

in the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

Forward-facing (front passenger seat)

— step 1

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

to follow the child restraint manufacturer's

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the vehicle seat

belt in the rear seat or in the front passen-

ger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in

the forward-facing direction only.

Move the seat to the rearmost posi-

tion. Child restraints for infants must

be used in the rear-facing direction

and therefore must not be used in the

front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the seatback.

If necessary, adjust the head restraint/

headrest to obtain the correct child re-

straint fit. If the head restraint/headrest

is removed, store it in a secure place. Be

sure to reinstall the head restraint/

headrest when the child restraint is

removed. For additional information,

refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in

this section.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and

it is interfering with the proper child re-

straint fit, try another seating position or

a different child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to the

Forward-facing — step 3

1-36 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

tether anchor point (rear seat installa-

tion only). For additional information, re-

fer to “Installing top tether strap” in this

section.

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a top

tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt re-

tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint

mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when

the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack in

the belt.

Forward-facing — step 4 Forward-facing — step 5

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt. Press downward and rearward

firmly in the center of the child restraint

with your knee to compress the vehicle

seat cushion and seatback while pulling

up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove

any slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try

to tug it forward and check to see if the

belt holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint. Not

all child restraints fit in all types of

vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps

2 through 8.

Forward-facing — step 6 Forward-facing — step 8

1-38 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

10. If the child restraint is installed on the

front passenger seat, push the power

switch to the ON position. The front

passenger air bag status light

should illuminate. If this light does not

illuminate, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

this service.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Installing top tether strap

䊊

Top tether strap

䊊

Tether anchor point

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

the seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat

belt.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest

and store it in a secure place. Be sure to

reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests" in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap

䊊

over the

seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-

chor point

䊊

on the bottom of the seat-

back behind the child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Position the top tether strap

䊊

over the

seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-

chor point

䊊

on the bottom of the seat-

back behind the child restraint.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child

restraint will not be properly installed

using the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a

booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-

structions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not

used properly, the risk of a child being

injured or killed in a sudden stop or

collision greatly increases:

•

Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s face

and neck and the lap portion of the

belt does not cross the stomach.

•

Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the child’s

arm.

• A booster seat must only be in-

stalled in a seating position that has

a lap/shoulder belt.

1-40 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Booster seats of various sizes are offered

by several manufacturers. When selecting

any booster seat, keep the following points

in mind:

• Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Ca-

nadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

• Check the booster seat in your vehicle to

be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s

seat and seat belt system.

• Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above

the center of the child’s ears. For example,

if a low back booster seat

䊊

is chosen, the

vehicle seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is

lower than the center of the child’s ears, a

high back booster seat

䊊

should be used.

• If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the booster

seat and check the various adjustments

to be sure the booster seat is compatible

with your child. Always follow all recom-

mended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved

child restraint at all times while the ve-

hicle is being operated.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

The instructions in this section apply to

booster seat installation in the rear seats

or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use the

lap/shoulder belt Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) mode when using a

booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in “Child safety”, “Child

restraints” and “Booster seats” sections of

this manual before installing a child re-

straint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat

on the rear seat or in the front passenger

seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rear-

most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in the forward-facing direc-

tion. Always follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned

on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct

booster seat fit. If the head restraint/

headrest is removed, store it in a secure

place. Be sure to reinstall the head

restraint/headrest when the booster

seat is removed. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Head restraints/

headrests” in this section.

Front passenger seat

1-42 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and

it is interfering with the proper booster

seat fit, try another seating position or a

different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt

low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure

to follow the booster seat manufactur-

er’s instructions for adjusting the seat

belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat

belt toward the retractor to take up ex-

tra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is

positioned across the top, middle por-

tion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s

instructions for adjusting the seat belt

routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-

structions for properly fastening a seat

belt. For additional information, refer to

“Three-point type seat belt with retrac-

tor” in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, push the power switch

to the ON position. The front passenger

air bag status light

may or may not

illuminate, depending on the size of the

child and the type of booster seat used.

For additional information, refer to “Front

passenger air bag and status light” in this

section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS

This SRS section contains important infor-

mation concerning the following systems.

• Driver and front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced

Air Bag System)

• Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag

• Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag

• Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag sys-

tem

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can

help cushion the impact force to the head

and chest of the driver and front passenger

in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the chest and pelvic area of the

driver and front passenger in certain side

impact collisions. The side air bags are de-

signed to inflate on the side where the ve-

hicle is impacted.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(SRS)

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the head of occupants in front and

rear outboard seating positions in certain

side impact collisions. In a side impact, the

curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the

side where the vehicle is impacted. In a roll-

over, the curtain air bags are designed to in-

flate and remain inflated for a short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement the

crash protection provided by the driver and

passenger seat belts and is not a substi-

tute for them. Seat belts should always be

correctly worn, and the occupant should

be seated a suitable distance away from

the steering wheel, instrument panel and

door finishers. For additional information,

refer to “Seat belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the power switch is in the ON position.

After the power switch is placed in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

1-44 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

• The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,

rear impact, rollover or lower sever-

ity frontal collision. Always wear

your seat belts to help reduce the

risk or severity of injury in various

kinds of accidents.

• The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag sta-

tus light is lit. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

• The seat belts and the front air bags

are most effective when you are sit-

ting well back and upright in the seat

with both feet on the floor. The front

air bags inflate with great force.

Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, if you are unrestrained,

leaning forward, sitting sideways or

out of position in any way, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in a

crash. You may also receive serious

or fatal injuries from the front air

bag if you are up against it when it

inflates. Always sit back against the

seatback and as far away as practi-

cal from the steering wheel or in-

strument panel. Always properly use

the seat belts.

• The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with sen-

sors that detect if the seat belts are

fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System monitors the severity of

a collision and seat belt usage then

inflates the air bags as needed. Fail-

ure to properly wear seat belts can

increase the risk or severity of injury

in an accident.

• The front passenger seat is

equipped with occupant classifica-

tion sensor (weight sensor) that

turns the front passenger air bag

OFF under some conditions. This

sensor is only used in this seat. Fail-

ure to be properly seated and wear-

ing the seat belt can increase the

risk or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. For additional information, re-

fer to “Front passenger air bag and

status light” in this section.

• Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could in-

crease the risk that they are injured

if the front air bag inflates.

WARNING

• Never let children ride unrestrained

or extend their hands or face out of

the window. Do not attempt to hold

them in your lap or arms. Some ex-

amples of dangerous riding posi-

tions are shown in the illustrations.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

• Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side

air bags or curtain air bags inflate if

they are not properly restrained.

Pre-teens and children should be

properly restrained in the rear seat,

if possible.

• Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint on the front

seat. An inflating front air bag could

seriously injure or kill your child. For

additional information, refer to

“Child restraints” in this section.

1-46 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bags:

• The side air bags and curtain air

bags ordinarily will not inflate in the

event of a frontal impact, rear im-

pact, or lower severity side collision.

Always wear your seat belts to help

reduce the risk or severity of injury in

various kinds of accidents.

• The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat. The side air bag

and curtain air bag inflate with great

force. Do not allow anyone to place

their hand, leg or face near the side

Do not lean against doors or windows.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

air bag on the side of the seatback of

the front seat or near the side roof

rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in

the front seats or rear outboard

seats to extend their hand out of the

window or lean against the door.

Some examples of dangerous riding

positions are shown in the previous

illustrations.

• When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front

seat. If the side air bag inflates, you

may be seriously injured. Be espe-

cially careful with children, who

should always be properly re-

strained. Some examples of danger-

ous riding positions are shown in the

illustrations.

• Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

side air bag inflation.

1-48 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1. Crash zone sensor

2. Supplemental front-impact air bag

modules

3. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules

4. Occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor)

5. Occupant classification system control

unit

6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag inflators

7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag modules

8. Satellite sensors

9. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

10. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

11. Door sensors

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the front

passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System, please observe the following

items.

• Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket.

• Do not place heavy loads heavier

than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback,

head restraint/headrest or in the

seatback pocket.

• Make sure that there is nothing

pressing against the rear of the

seatback, such as a child restraint

installed in the rear seat or an object

stored on the floor.

• Make sure that there is no object

placed under the front passenger

seat.

• Make sure that there is no object

placed between the seat cushion

and center console or between the

seat cushion and the door.

• If a forward-facing child restraint is

installed in the front passenger seat,

do not position the front passenger

seat so the child restraint contacts

the instrument panel. If the child re-

straint does contact the instrument

panel, the system may determine

the seat is occupied and the passen-

ger air bag may deploy in a collision.

Also the front passenger air bag sta-

tus light may not illuminate. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Child

restraints” in this section.

• Confirm the operating condition

with the front passenger air bag sta-

tus light.

• If you notice that the front passen-

ger air bag status light is not operat-

ing as described in this section, get

the occupant classification system

checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service.

• Until you have confirmed with a

dealer that your passenger seat oc-

cupant classification system is

working properly, position the occu-

pants in the rear seating positions.

• Do not position the front passenger

seat so it contacts the rear seat. If

the front seat does contact the rear

seat, the air bag system may deter-

mine a sensor malfunction has oc-

curred and the front passenger air

bag status light may illuminate and

the supplemental air bag warning

light may flash.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and

front passenger seats. This system is de-

signed to meet certification requirements

under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in

Canada. All of the information, cautions

and warnings in this manual apply and

must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air

bag is located in the center of the steering

wheel. The front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag is mounted in the in-

strument panel above the glove box. The

front air bags are designed to inflate in

higher severity frontal collisions, although

they may inflate if the forces in another

type of collision are similar to those of a

higher severity frontal impact. They may

1-50 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Ve-

hicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper front air bag operation.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

monitors information from the crash zone

sensor and the Air bag Control Unit (ACU).

Inflator operation is based on the severity

of a collision and seat belt usage for the

driver. For the front passenger, the occu-

pant classification sensor is also moni-

tored. Based on information from the sen-

sor, only one front air bag may inflate in a

crash, depending on the crash severity. Ad-

ditionally, the front passenger air bag may

be automatically turned OFF under some

conditions, depending on the weight de-

tected on the passenger seat and how the

seat belt is used. If the front passenger air

bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status

light will be illuminated. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section. One front

air bag inflating does not indicate improper

performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air

bag system, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer to ob-

tain information about the system. If you

are considering modification of your ve-

hicle due to a disability, you may also con-

tact NISSAN. Contact information is con-

tained in the front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud

noise may be heard, followed by release of

smoke. This smoke is not harmful and

does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irrita-

tion and choking. Those with a history of a

breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the head and chest of the front occupants.

They can help save lives and reduce seri-

ous injuries. However, an inflating front air

bag may cause facial abrasions or other

injuries. Front air bags do not provide re-

straint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and front passenger seated upright

as far as practical away from the steering

wheel or instrument panel. The front air

bags inflate quickly in order to help protect

the front occupants. Because of this, the

force of the front air bag inflating can in-

crease the risk of injury if the occupant is

too close to, or is against, the air bag mod-

ule during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a

collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

power switch is in the ON position.

After the power switch is placed in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

Front passenger air bag and status

light:

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is de-

signed to automatically turn OFF un-

der some conditions. Read this section

carefully to learn how it operates.

Proper use of the seat, seat belt and

child restraints is necessary for most

effective protection. Failure to follow

all instructions in this manual concern-

ing the use of seats, seat belts and

child restraints can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

Status light:

The front passenger seat is equipped with

an occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor) that turns the front passenger air

bag on or off depending on the weight ap-

plied to the front passenger seat. The sta-

tus of the front passenger air bag (ON or

OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air

bag status light

which is located on

the instrument panel.

After the power switch is placed in the “ON”

position, the front passenger air bag status

light on the instrument panel illuminates

for about 7 seconds and then turns off or

remains illuminated depending on the

front passenger seat occupied status. The

light operates as follows:

CONDITION DESCRIPTION

PASSENGER AIR BAG INDICA-

TOR LIGHT (

) RESULT

FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG

STATUS

Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Nobody/Somebody

Bag or Child or Child Restraint or

Small Adult in front passenger

seat

ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Adult

Adult in the front passenger

seat

OFF (dark) ACTIVATED

1-52 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

In addition to the above, certain objects

placed on the front passenger seat may

also cause the light to operate as de-

scribed above depending on their weight.

For additional information, refer to “Normal

operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this

section.

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as de-

scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu-

lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,

it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag

and other air bags in your vehicle are not

part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help

reduce the risk of injury or death from an

inflating air bag to certain front passenger

seat occupants, such as children, by requir-

ing the air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the

requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this

vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to

detect an occupant and objects on the

seat by weight. For example, if a child is in

the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn

the front passenger air bag OFF in accor-

dance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regula-

tions is on the seat, its weight and the

child’s weight can be detected and cause

the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who

are properly seated and using the seat belt

as outlined in this manual should not

cause the front passenger air bag to be

automatically turned OFF. For small adults

it may be turned OFF, however if the occu-

pant takes his/her weight off the seat

cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,

by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by

otherwise being out of position), this could

cause the sensors to turn the air bag OFF.

Always be sure to be seated and wearing

the seat belt properly for the most effective

protection by the seat belt and supple-

mental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and

children be properly restrained in a rear

seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-

propriate child restraints and booster

seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If

this is not possible, the occupant classifica-

tion sensor is designed to operate as de-

scribed above to turn the front passenger

air bag OFF for specified child restraints as

required by regulations. Failing to properly

secure child restraints and to use the ALR

mode may allow the restraint to tip or

move in a collision or sudden stop. This can

also result in the front passenger air bag

inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For

additional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied,

the front passenger air bag is designed not

to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects

placed on the seat could result in air bag

inflation, because of the object’s weight be-

ing detected by the occupant classification

sensor. Other conditions could also result

in air bag inflation, such as if a child is

standing on the seat, or if two children are

on the seat, contrary to the instructions in

this manual. Always be sure that you and all

vehicle occupants are seated and re-

strained properly.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

Using the front passenger air bag status

light, you can monitor when the front pas-

senger air bag is automatically turned OFF.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

front passenger air bag status light is illu-

minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),

it could be that the person is a small adult,

or is not sitting on the seat properly or not

using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front

seat, the front passenger air bag status

light may or may not be illuminated, de-

pending on the size of the child and the

type of child restraint being used. If the

front passenger air bag status light is not

illuminated (indicating that the air bag

might inflate in a crash), it could be that the

child restraint or seat belt is not being used

properly. Make sure that the child restraint

is installed properly, the seat belt is used

properly and the occupant is positioned

properly. If the front passenger air bag sta-

tus light is still not illuminated, reposition

the occupant or child restraint in a rear

seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light

will not illuminate even though you believe

that the child restraint, the seat belts and

the occupant are properly positioned, it is

recommended that you take your vehicle

to a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer. A NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer can check system

status by using a special tool. However, un-

til you have confirmed with a dealer that

your air bag is working properly, reposition

the occupant or child restraint in a rear

seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and

front passenger air bag status light will

take a few seconds to register a change in

the front passenger seat status. This is nor-

mal system operation and does not indi-

cate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-

ger air bag system, the supplemental air

bag warning light

, located in the me-

ter and gauges area of the instrument

panel, will be illuminated (blinking or

steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer for this service.

Normal operation:

In order for the occupant classification

sensor system to classify the front passen-

ger based on weight, please follow the pre-

cautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions:

• Make sure that there are no objects

weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the

seat or placed in the seatback pocket.

• Make sure that a child restraint or other

object is not pressing against the rear of

the seatback.

• Make sure that the rear passenger is not

pushing or pulling on the back of the front

passenger seat.

• Make sure that the front passenger seat

or seatback is not forced back against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

• Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger seat.

Steps:

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”

section of this manual. Sit upright, lean-

ing against the seatback, and centered

on the seat cushion with your feet com-

fortably ex tended to the floor.

1-54 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Make sure there are no objects on your

lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the

“Seat belts” section of this manual. Front

passenger seat belt buckle status is

monitored by the occupant classifica-

tion system, and is used as an input to

determine occupancy status. So, it is

highly recommended that the front pas-

senger fasten their seat belt.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds

allowing the system to classify the front

passenger before the vehicle is put into

motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by checking

the front passenger air bag status light.

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification

sensor system generally keeps the clas-

sification locked during driving, so it is

important that you confirm that the

front passenger is properly classified

prior to driving. However, the occupant

classification sensor may recalculate the

weight of the occupant under some con-

ditions (both while driving and when

stopped), so front passenger seat occu-

pants should continue to remain seated

as outlined above.

Troubleshooting:

If you think the front passenger air bag

status light is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying

the front passenger seat:

• Occupant is a small adult — the air bag

light is functioning as intended. The

front passenger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small

adult, then this may be due to the fol-

lowing conditions that may be interfer-

ing with the weight sensors:

• Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on

the seat cushion with his/her feet com-

fortably ex tended to the floor.

• A child restraint or other object press-

ing against the rear of the seatback.

• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

• Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

• An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

• An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console or between

the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed dur-

ing which the front passenger air bag

status light will remain lit for about

7 seconds initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person

should be advised not to ride in the front

passenger seat and the vehicle should

be checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child

or child restraint occupying the front

passenger seat.

This may be due to the following condi-

tions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

• Small adult or child is not sitting upright,

leaning against the seatback, and cen-

tered on the seat cushion with his/her

feet comfortably extended to the floor.

• The child restraint is not properly in-

stalled, as outlined in the “Child re-

straints” section of this manual.

• An object weighting over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)

hanging on the seat or placed in the

seatback pocket.

• A child restraint or other object press-

ing against the rear or the seatback.

• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

pushing or pulling on the seatback of

the front passenger seat.

• Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

• An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

• An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed dur-

ing which the front passenger air bag

status light will remain lit for about

7 seconds initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small

adult, child or child restraint should be

repositioned in the rear seat and the

vehicle should be checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

this service.

3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger

and no objects on the front passenger

seat the vehicle should be checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service.

Other supplemental front-impact air

bag precautions:

WARNING

• Do not place any objects on the

steering wheel pad or on the instru-

ment panel. Also, do not place any

objects between any occupant and

the steering wheel or instrument

panel. Such objects may become

dangerous projectiles and cause in-

jury if the front air bags inflate.

• Do not place objects with sharp

edges on the seat. Also, do not place

heavy objects on the seat that will

leave permanent impressions in the

seat. Such objects can damage the

seat or occupant classification sen-

sor (weight sensor). This can affect

the operation of the air bag system

and result in serious personal injury.

• Do not use water or acidic cleaners

(hot steam cleaners) on the seat.

This can damage the seat or occu-

pant classification sensor. This can

also affect the operation of the air

bag system and result in serious

personal injury.

1-56 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

• Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components

will be hot. Do not touch them; you

may severely burn yourself.

• No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the supplemental air bag system.

This is to prevent accidental infla-

tion of the supplemental air bag or

damage to the supplemental air bag

system.

• Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end

structure. This could affect proper

operation of the front air bag sys-

tem.

• Tampering with the front air bag

system may result in serious per-

sonal injury. Tampering includes

changes to the steering wheel and

the instrument panel assembly by

placing material over the steering

wheel pad and above the instru-

ment panel or by installing addi-

tional trim material around the air

bag system.

• Removing or modifying the front

passenger seat may affect the func-

tion of the air bag system and result

in serious personal injury.

• Modifying or tampering with the

front passenger seat may result in

serious personal injury. For ex-

ample, do not change the front seats

by placing material on the seat

cushion or by installing additional

trim material, such as seat covers,

on the seat that is not specifically

designed to assure proper air bag

operation. Additionally, do not stow

any objects under the front passen-

ger seat or the seat cushion and

seatback. Such objects may inter-

fere with the proper operation of the

occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor).

• No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the seat belt system. This may af-

fect the front air bag system. Tam-

pering with the seat belt system

may result in serious personal injury.

• It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

work on and around the front air bag

system. It is also recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for installation of electrical

equipment. The Supplemental Re-

straint System (SRS) wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or

disconnected. Unauthorized electri-

cal test equipment and probing de-

vices should not be used on the air

bag system.

• A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified

repair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and

roof-mounted curtain

side-impact and rollover

supplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside

of the seatback of the front seats. The cur-

tain air bags are located in the side roof

rails. All of the information, cautions, and

warnings in this manual apply and must

be followed. The side air bags and curtain

air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity side collisions, although they may

inflate if the forces in another type of colli-

sion are similar to those of a higher severity

side impact. They are designed to inflate on

the side where the vehicle is impacted.

They may not inflate in certain side colli-

sions on the side where the vehicle is im-

pacted.

If so equipped, the curtain air bags are also

designed to inflate in certain types of roll-

over collisions or near rollovers. As a result,

certain vehicle movements (for example,

during severe off-roading) may cause the

curtain air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always

an indication of proper side air bag and

curtain air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,

followed by release of smoke. This smoke is

not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those

with a history of a breathing condition

should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the chest and pelvic area of the front occu-

pants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the

impact force to the head of occupants in

the front and rear outboard seating posi-

tions. They can help save lives and reduce

serious injuries. However, side air bags and

curtain air bags may cause abrasions or

other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air

bags do not provide restraint to the lower

body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn

and the driver and passenger seated up-

right as far as practical away from the side

air bags. Rear seat passengers should be

seated as far away as practical from the

door finishers and side roof rails. The side

air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly

in order to help protect the occupants in

the outboard seating positions. Because of

this, the force of the side air bags and cur-

tain air bags inflating can increase the risk

of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is

against, these air bag modules during in-

flation. The side air bags and curtain air

bags will deflate quickly after the collision is

over.

1-58 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The side air bags and curtain air bags

operate only when the power switch is in

the ON position.

After turning the power switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light illuminates. The supplemental

air bag warning light will turn off after

about 7 seconds if the systems are op-

erational.

WARNING

• Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door fin-

isher and the front seat. Such ob-

jects may become dangerous pro-

jectiles and cause injury if a side air

bag inflates.

• Right after inflation, several side air

bag and curtain air bag system com-

ponents will be hot. Do not touch

them; you may severely burn your-

self.

• No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the side air bag and curtain air

bag systems. This is to prevent dam-

age to or accidental inflation of the

side air bag and curtain air bag sys-

tems.

• Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or side panel.

This could affect proper operation of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems.

• Tampering with the side air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal

injury. For example, do not change

the front seats by placing material

near the seatbacks or by installing

additional trim material, such as

seat covers, around the side air bag.

• It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

work around and on the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems. It is also

recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for in-

stallation of electrical equipment.

The Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not

be modified or disconnected. Unau-

thorized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not be

used on the side air bag and curtain

supplemental air bag systems.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems and guide the

buyer to the appropriate sections in this

Owner’s Manual.

Seat belt with pretensioner(s)

(front seats)

WARNING

• The pretensioner(s) cannot be re-

used after activation. They must be

replaced together with the retractor

and buckle as a unit.

• If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but pretensioner(s) are not

activated, be sure to have the pre-

tensioner system checked and, if

necessary, replaced. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer for this service.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

• No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the pretensioner system. This is to

prevent damage to or accidental ac-

tivation of the pretensioner(s). Tam-

pering with the pretensioner system

may result in serious personal injury.

• It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

work around and on the preten-

sioner system. It is also recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer for installation of

electrical equipment. Unauthorized

electrical test equipment and prob-

ing devices should not be used on

the pretensioner system.

• If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is

recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service. Incorrect disposal proce-

dures could cause personal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate

with the supplemental air bag system in

certain types of collisions. Working with the

seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help

tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-

comes involved in certain types of colli-

sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-

pants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased with the

seat belt retractor and to the seat belt an-

chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.

These seat belts are used the same way as

conventional seat belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indi-

cate a fire. Care should be taken not to

inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breath-

ing condition should get fresh air promptly.

After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load

limiters allow the seat belt to release web-

bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against

the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light

is used to indicate malfunctions in the

pretensioner system. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Supplemental air bag

warning light” in this section. If the opera-

tion of the supplemental air bag warning

light indicates there is a malfunction, have

the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for this service.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the preten-

sioner system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

1-60 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

A. Supplemental front-impact air bag sys-

tem warning labels

The warning labels are located on the sur-

face of the sun visors.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying

in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits of the Air bag Control

Unit (ACU), satellite sensors, crash zone

sensor, occupant classification sensor, the

supplemental front-impact air bag, front

seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag and seat belt preten-

sioner systems. The monitored circuits in-

clude air bag systems, pretensioner(s) and

all related wiring.

When the power switch is in the ON posi-

tion, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates for about 7 seconds and

then turns off. This means the system is

operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and pretensioner systems need servicing:

• The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately

7 seconds.

• The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

• The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-

sioner systems may not operate properly.

They must be checked and repaired. It is

recommended that you visit the nearest

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It

is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

Repair and replacement

procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to

activate on a one-time-only basis. As a re-

minder, unless it is damaged, the supple-

mental air bag warning light will remain

illuminated after inflation has occurred.

These systems should be repaired and/or

replaced as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,

curtain air bags and pretensioner(s) and

related parts should be pointed out to the

person performing the maintenance. The

power switch should always be in the LOCK

position when working under the hood or

inside the vehicle.

WARNING

• Once a front air bag, side air bag or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air

bag module will not function again

and must be replaced. Additionally,

the activated pretensioner(s) must

also be replaced. The air bag module

and pretensioner(s) should be re-

placed. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for this service. The air bag modules

and pretensioner system cannot be

repaired.

• The front air bag, side air bag and

curtain air bag systems, and preten-

sioner system should be inspected if

there is any damage to the front end

or side portion of the vehicle. It is

recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

• If you need to dispose of a supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner sys-

tem or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

Correct supplemental air bag and

pretensioner system disposal pro-

cedures are set forth in the appro-

priate NISSAN Service Manual. Incor-

rect disposal procedures could

cause personal injury.

• If there is an impact to your vehicle

from any direction, your Occupant

Classification Sensor (OCS) should

be checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer to verify it is still functioning

correctly. The OCS should be

checked even if no air bags deploy

as a result of the impact. Failure to

verify proper OCS function may re-

sult in an improper air bag deploy-

ment resulting in injury or death.

1-62 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 Instruments and controls

Cockpit ............................2-3

Instrument panel ......................2-5

Meters and gauges ....................2-6

Speedometer and odometer ............2-7

Li-ion battery temperature gauge.........2-8

Power meter.......................2-9

Driving range ......................2-10

Li-ion battery available charge gauge......2-10

Outside air temperature ...............2-11

Clock ...........................2-12

ECO mode indicator .................2-12

e-Pedal system indicator ..............2-13

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ..........................2-14

Checking lights ....................2-16

Warning lights .....................2-16

Indicator lights.....................2-23

Audible reminders ..................2-25

Vehicle information display ..............2-27

How to use the vehicle information display . .2-27

Startup display.....................2-27

Settings .........................2-28

Vehicle information display warnings and

indicators ........................2-36

Warning information displays (models with a

Navigation System) .................2-44

Security systems .....................2-46

Vehicle security system ...............2-46

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .......2-47

Wiper and washer switch................2-49

Washer operation...................2-50

Rear wiper operation ................2-50

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)

defroster switch ......................2-51

Headlight and turn signal switch ...........2-52

Headlight switch ...................2-52

Instrument brightness control ..........2-57

Turn signal switch...................2-57

light switch (if so equipped) ...........2-58

Horn .............................2-58

ECO switch .........................2-58

Heated seat switches (if so equipped) .......2-59

Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . .2-60

E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped) ..........2-61

Charge port lid switch ..................2-61

Charge timer OFF switch ................2-61

Steering Assist switch (if so equipped) .......2-62

Power outlet ........................2-62

Storage...........................2-63

Seatback Pocket (if so equipped).........2-63

Storagetray......................2-64

Glovebox........................2-64

Console box ......................2-64

Overhead sunglasses storage ..........2-65

Cup holders ......................2-65

Tonneau cover (if so equipped) ..........2-66

Stowing golf bags ..................2-68

Windows ..........................2-68

Power windows ....................2-68

Interior lights .......................2-70

Console light (if so equipped) ...........2-71

Map lights ........................2-71

Room light........................2-71

Cargo light .......................2-72

HomeLink® universal transceiver (if so

equipped) ..........................2-72

Programming HomeLink® .............2-73

Programming HomeLink® for Canadian

customers and gate openers ...........2-75

Operating the HomeLink® universal

transceiver .......................2-75

Programming trouble-diagnosis .........2-75

Clearing the programmed information.....2-76

Reprogramming a single HomeLink®

button..........................2-76

If your vehicle is stolen................2-76

1. TRIP RESET switch for twin trip odom-

eter (P. 2-6)

— Instrument brightness control switch

(P. 2-57)

2. Headlight, fog light (if so equipped) and

turn signal switch

— Headlight (P. 2-52)

— Turn signal light (P. 2-52)

— Fog light (if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

3. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

— Audio control (P. 4-45)

— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

control (without navigation) (P. 4-45)

— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

control (with navigation) (Refer to

NissanConnect® Manual (for Leaf))

4. Steering wheel

— Power steering system (P. 5-133)

— Horn (P. 2-58)

— Driver's supplemental air bag (P. 1-43)

5. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-49)

6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(right side)

— Cruise control switches (if so

equipped) (P. 5-54)

— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-56)

— ProPILOT

Assist switch (if so

equipped) (P. 5-79)

COCKPIT

Instruments and controls 2-3

7. Shift lever (P. 5-15)

— ECO switch (P. 2-58)

— e-Pedal switch (P. 5-22)

8. Console box (P. 2-63)

9. Parking brake (switch type) (if so

equipped) (P. 5-19)

10. Tilting steering wheel lever (P. 3-21)

11. Charge port lid switch (P. 3-19)

— Charge timer OFF switch (P. 2-61)

— Heated steering wheel switch (if so

equipped) (P. 2-60)

— Steering Assist switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-79)

12. Fuse box cover (P. 8-17)

2-4 Instruments and controls

1. Vents (P. 4-29)

2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-6)

3. Center multi-function control panel

— Navigation system (Refer to

NissanConnect® Manual (for Leaf))

— Without Navigation System (P. 4-45)

4. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

5. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-51)

6. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-43)

7. Glove box (P. 2-63)

8. Heater and air conditioner control

(P. 4-30)

9. Power outlet (P. 2-62)

10. Front heated seat switches (if so

equipped) (P. 2-59)

11. Auxiliary input jack (P. 4-64)

— iPod® connector/USB connector

(P. 4-45)

12. Push-button power switch (P. 5-10)

13. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-43)

14. Hood release handle (P. 3-16)

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instruments and controls 2-5

1. Vehicle information display (P. 2-27)

— Clock (P. 2-12)

— Outside air temperature (P. 2-11)

— Li-ion battery available charge gauge

(P. 2-10)

— Driving range (P. EV-19)

— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P. 2-7)

— Indicator for timer (P. CH-35)

— Power meter (P. 2-9)

2. Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-14)

— Turn signal/Hazard indicator light

(P. 2-52)

— READY to drive indicator light (P. 2-25)

— ECO mode indicator (P. 2-12

3. Speedometer (P. 2-6)

METERS AND GAUGES

2-6 Instruments and controls

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

The vehicle is equipped with a speedom-

eter and odometer. The speedometer is

located on the right side of the vehicle in-

formation display. The odometer is located

within the vehicle information display.

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the vehicle

speed.

Odometer/twin trip odometer

The odometer and twin trip odometer

䊊

are displayed on the vehicle information

display when the power switch is in the ON

or READY to drive position.

The odometer records the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the dis-

tance of individual trips.

Instruments and controls 2-7

Changing the display:

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch

䊊

located

on the left side of the combination meter

panel changes the display as follows:

Odometer → TRIP A → TRIP B → Odometer

For additional information about the ve-

hicle information display, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section.

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch

䊊

for ap-

proximately 1 second resets the currently

displayed trip odometer to zero.

LI-ION BATTERY TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the temperature of

the Li-ion battery.

The temperature of the Li-ion battery is

within the normal range when the display

is within the zone

䊊

shown in the illustra-

tion.

The temperature of the Li-ion battery var-

ies according to the outside air tempera-

ture and driving conditions.

NOTE:

• If the display indicates that the tem-

perature of the Li-ion battery is near the

red zone end of the normal range, re-

duce vehicle speed to decrease the

temperature. If the indicator is over the

normal range, the power provided to

the traction motor is reduced when the

power limitation indicator light is illumi-

nated. Therefore, the vehicle is not as

responsive when the accelerator is de-

pressed while the power limitation light

is illuminated. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Power limitation indicator

light” in this section.

• If the outside temperature is extremely

low, the Li-ion temperature gauge may

not display a temperature reading. The

vehicle may not be able to be put in the

READY to drive mode. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

this service.

2-8 Instruments and controls

POWER METER

This meter displays the actual traction mo-

tor power consumption

䊊

and the regen-

erative brake power provided to the Li-ion

battery

䊊

The power meter is in a neutral state

䊊

The white illuminated portion

䊊

in the dis-

play moves right or left depending on de-

mand.

The white illuminated portion

䊊

moves to

the right when power is provided to the

traction motor (Li-ion battery discharges).

The white illuminated portion

䊊

moves to

the left when power is generated and pro-

vided to the Li-ion battery by the regenera-

tive brake system (Li-ion battery charging).

The power meter also indicates if the

power provided to the motor is limited or if

regenerative braking is limited. When

power or regenerative braking is limited,

the illuminated segments on the display

are narrowed

䊊

Regenerative braking is automatically re-

duced when the Li-ion battery is fully

charged to prevent the Li-ion battery from

becoming overcharged. Regenerative

braking is also automatically reduced

when the Li-ion battery temperature is

high/low (indicated by the red/blue zones

on the Li-ion battery temperature gauge)

to prevent Li-ion battery damage.

The more regenerative braking is reduced,

the more illuminated segments on the dis-

play are narrowed

䊊

If the Li-ion battery charge is low, power

provided to the traction motor is reduced.

Motor output is also limited if the Li-ion

battery temperature is high/low (indicated

by the red/blue zones on the Li-ion battery

temperature gauge) or the Li-ion battery

charge level is low.

The more power provided to the traction

motor is reduced, the more illuminated

segments on the display are narrowed

䊊

NOTE:

If the power meter is selected on the

trip computer, the meter is not dis-

played.

Instruments and controls 2-9

DRIVING RANGE

The driving range

䊊

provides an esti-

mated distance that the vehicle can be

driven before recharging is necessary. The

driving range is constantly being calcu-

lated, based on the amount of available

Li-ion battery charge and the actual power

consumption average.

NOTE:

• The driving range display will flash

when the low battery charge indicator

illuminates. Additionally, if you continue

to drive the vehicle in this state and the

Li-ion battery is close to being com-

pletely discharged, “---” will be dis-

played. Charge the Li-ion battery as

soon as possible. When the Li-ion bat-

tery is charged, the original display will

be restored.

• After the vehicle is charged, the dis-

played driving range is calculated

based on the actual average energy

consumption of the previous driving.

The displayed driving range will vary ev-

ery time the vehicle is fully charged.

• The driving range increases or de-

creases when the air conditioner, heater

or Li-ion battery warmer (if so

equipped) is turned on or off, or when

the ECO mode is selected, or when any

other accessory is turned on or off

based on driving.

LI-ION BATTERY AVAILABLE

CHARGE GAUGE

䊊

This gauge indicates the approximate

available Li-ion battery charge to run the

vehicle.

䊊

This figure shows the current state of

charge (%) of the vehicle.

䊊

Low battery charge indicator

: This

indicator illuminates yellow when the avail-

able Li-ion battery charge is getting low.

Charge the Li-ion battery before the blue

bar of the gauge

䊊

disappears.

2-10 Instruments and controls

The low battery charge indicator

䊊

illuminates yellow when the available Li-ion

battery charge is getting low. Charge as

soon as it is convenient, preferably before

the blue bar of the gauge

䊊

disappears.

When the blue bar of the gauge

䊊

disap-

pears and the charge indicator

䊊

illuminates, there is a very small reserve of

Li-ion battery charge remaining.

NOTE:

• The length of the blue bar of the gauge

䊊

is determined by the available

charge and the amount of charge the

Li-ion battery is capable of storing at

the current temperature.

• Temperature affects the amount of

charge the Li-ion battery is capable of

storing. The Li-ion battery is capable of

storing less power when the Li-ion bat-

tery temperature is cold. The Li-ion bat-

tery is capable of storing more power

when the Li-ion battery temperature is

warm. The length of the blue bar of the

gauge

䊊

can change based on the

amount of power the Li-ion battery is

capable of storing. For example, when

the Li-ion battery becomes colder, a

longer blue bar of the gauge

䊊

illumi-

nates because the available charge is a

greater percentage of the Li-ion bat-

tery's capability of storing power. When

the Li-ion battery becomes warmer, a

shorter blue bar of the gauge

䊊

illumi-

nates because the remaining energy is

a lower percentage of the Li-ion bat-

tery's capability of storing power.

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE

The outside air temperature is displayed in

°F or °C.

The display may differ from the actual out-

side temperature displayed on various

signs or billboards.

Instruments and controls 2-11

CLOCK

For models without a Navigation Sys-

tem:

Adjust the clock on the setting screen of

the vehicle information display. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Settings” in this

section. If the power supply (12-volt batter y)

is disconnected, the clock will not indicate

the correct time. Readjust the time.

For models with a Navigation System:

This clock is synchronized with the clock

displayed on the navigation system

screen. For additional information, refer to

the separate NissanConnect® Manual (for

Leaf).

ECO MODE INDICATOR

This indicator in the vehicle information

display shows the status of the e-Pedal

system. When the e-Pedal system is turned

off, the indicator changes to "e-Pedal OFF".

For additional information, refer to "e-Pedal

system" in the "Starting and driving" sec-

tion of this manual.

2-12 Instruments and controls

E-PEDAL SYSTEM INDICATOR

This indicator "e-Pedal" illuminates within

the vehicle information display when the

e-Pedal system has been activated. The

"e-Pedal OFF" illuminates when the system

deactivated.

Instruments and controls 2-13

12-volt battery charge warning

light

Low tire pressure warning light High Beam Assist indicator light

(if so equipped)

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light

Master warning light (red/

yellow)

Plug-in indicator light

Approaching Vehicle Sound for

Pedestrians (VSP) system warn-

ing light

Power steering warning light Power limitation indicator light

Automatic Emergency Braking

(AEB) system warning light (if so

equipped)

Seat belt warning light READY to drive indicator light

Automatic Emergency Braking

(AEB) with Pedestrian Detection

system warning light (if so

equipped)

Supplemental air bag warning

light

Security indicator light

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS

AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

2-14 Instruments and controls

Brake system warning light

(yellow)

Electronic parking brake indica-

tor light

Slip indicator light

Brake warning light (red)

Ex terior light indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

Electronic parking brake system

warning light (yellow)

Front fog light indicator light

(if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

OFF indicator light

Electric shift control system

warning light

Front passenger air bag status

light

Electric Vehicle (EV) system

warning light

High beam indicator light (blue)

Instruments and controls 2-15

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking

brake, fasten the seat belts and place the

power switch for LEAF to the ON position

without starting the hybrid system. The fol-

lowing lights (if so equipped) will come on:

The following lights (if so equipped) come

on briefly and then turn off:

(yellow), , or (red),

or , , , , , ,

If any light does not come on or operate in

a way other than described, it may indicate

a burned-out bulb and/or a system mal-

function. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer for this service.

Some indicators and warnings are also dis-

played on the vehicle information display.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section.

WARNING LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section.

12-volt battery charge

warning light

The DC/DC converter converts 400 volt Li-

ion battery voltage to charge the 12-volt

battery.

This light illuminates continuously after the

bulb is checked when the power switch is

in the ON position, and turns off when the

power switch is placed in the READY to

drive position.

When this warning light illuminates, a

chime sounds and the following warnings

are also displayed.

• Master warning (red)

• EV system warning light

The following messages also flash on and

off on the vehicle information display.

If the vehicle is being driven; “Stop the ve-

hicle” and if the vehicle is stopped; “When

parked apply parking brake”. When these

messages flash, immediately stop the ve-

hicle in a safe location, pull the parking

brake switch and push the P (Park) position

switch on the shift lever to place the vehicle

in the P (Park) position. The warning on the

meter and the chime stops when the park-

ing brake is operated or the vehicle is in the

P (Park) position. Have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

CAUTION

• The DC/DC converter system may

not be functioning properly if the 12-

volt battery charge warning light il-

luminates continuously when the

power switch is in the READY to drive

position. Immediately stop the ve-

hicle in a safe location and have the

system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service.

• The DC/DC converter system may

not be functioning properly if the 12-

volt warning light illuminates con-

tinuously when the power switch is

in the READY to drive position. Do not

charge the 12-volt battery while this

warning light is illuminated. It may

lead to a malfunction of the DC/DC

converter system. Have the system

2-16 Instruments and controls

checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service.

NOTE:

• If the vehicle does not go into the READY

to drive position (when the power

switch is pushed and the brake pedal is

depressed), jump-start the vehicle to

place the power switch in the READY to

drive position. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Jump starting” in the “In

case of emergency” section of this

manual.

• Do not jump-start the vehicle if the con-

ditions below occur. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

this service:

– If the 12-volt charge warning light

turns off when the vehicle is in the

READYto drive mode, the 12-volt bat-

tery may be discharged or there may

be a malfunction in the 12-volt bat-

tery related system.

– If the 12-volt charge warning light

continues to illuminate when the ve-

hicle is in the READY to drive mode,

there may be a malfunction in the

DC/DC converter. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for this service.

or Anti-lock

Braking System

(ABS) warning light

When the power switch is in the ON or

READY to drive position, the Anti-lock Brak-

ing System (ABS) warning light illuminates

and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is

operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while

the power switch is in the READY to drive

position, or while driving, it may indicate the

ABS is not functioning properly. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system

then operates normally, but without anti-

lock assistance. For additional information,

refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Approaching Vehicle

Sound for Pedestrians

(VSP) system warning light

The Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedes-

trians (VSP) system warning light is located

on the instrument panel.

This light comes on if there is a malfunction

in the VSP system.

If the VSP system warning light illuminates

while the power switch is in the ON posi-

tion, or in the READY to drive position, it may

indicate the VSP system is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer for this service.

For additional information, refer to “Ap-

proaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestrians

( VSP) system” in the “EV overview” section of

this manual.

Automatic Emergency

Braking (AEB) system

warning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the power switch

is placed in the ON position. It turns off after

the hybrid system is started.

Instruments and controls 2-17

This light illuminates when the AEB system

is set to OFF on the meter display.

If the light illuminates when the AEB sys-

tem is on, it may indicate that the system is

unavailable. For additional information, re-

fer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Automatic Emergency

Braking (AEB) with

Pedestrian Detection system

warning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the power switch

is placed in the ON position. It turns off after

the hybrid system is started.

This light illuminates when the AEB with

Pedestrian Detection system is set to OFF

in the vehicle information display.

If the light illuminates when the AEB with

Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may

indicate that the system is unavailable. For

additional information, refer to “Automatic

Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian

Detection” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

Brake system warning

light (yellow)

This light functions for both the coopera-

tive regenerative brake and the electroni-

cally driven intelligent brake systems.

When the power switch is placed in the ON

position or in the READY to drive position,

the light remains illuminated for about 2 or

3 seconds. If the light illuminates at any

other time, it may indicate that the coop-

erative regenerative brake and/or the elec-

tronically driven intelligent brake systems

are not functioning properly. Have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

If the BRAKE warning light (red) also illumi-

nates, stop the vehicle immediately and

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service. For additional

information, refer to “Brake system” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

WARNING

• Pressing the brake pedal when the

power switch position is not in the

ON or READY to drive position and/or

low brake fluid level may increase

the stopping distance and braking

will require greater pedal effort as

well as pedal travel.

• If the brake fluid level is below the

minimum or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked. It is

recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

• The cooperative regenerative brake

system may not be working prop-

erly if the brake system warning

light illuminates when the READY to

drive indicator light is ON. If you

judge it to be safe, drive carefully to

the nearest service station for re-

pairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle

towed because driving could be

dangerous.

2-18 Instruments and controls

or Brake warning

light (red)

When the power switch is placed in the ON

position or in the READY to drive position,

the light remains illuminated for about a

few seconds. If the light illuminates at any

other time, it may indicate that the hydrau-

lic brake system is not functioning properly.

If the BRAKE warning light illuminates, stop

the vehicle immediately and have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

Parking brake indicator:

When the power switch is placed in the ON

position, the light comes on when the park-

ing brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light:

When the power switch is in the ON posi-

tion, the light warns of a low brake fluid

level. If this warning light illuminates, the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning

light and the brake system warning light

(yellow) also illuminate.

If the light illuminates while the power

switch is in the READY to drive position with

the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-

hicle and perform the following items.

1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake fluid is

necessary, add fluid and have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for this service. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warning system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

WARNING

• Your brake system may not be work-

ing properly if the warning light is

on. Driving could be dangerous. If

you judge the brake system to be

safe, drive carefully to the nearest

service station for repairs. Other-

wise, have your vehicle towed be-

cause driving it could be dangerous.

• Pressing the brake pedal when the

power switch position is not in the

ON or READY to drive position and/or

low brake fluid level may increase

the stopping distance and braking

will require greater pedal effort as

well as pedal travel.

• If the brake fluid level is below the

minimum or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked. It is

recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

Electronic brake system

warning light (yellow)

The electronic parking brake system warn-

ing light function for the electronic braking

brake system. When the power switch is

placed in the ON position, the light illumi-

nates for a few seconds. If the warning light

illuminates at any other time, it may indi-

cate that the electronic parking brake sys-

tem is not function properly. Have the sys-

tem checked immediately. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-19

Electric shift control

system warning light

This light illuminates to warn when a mal-

function occurs in the electric shift control

system. When the master warning light illu-

minates, the chime sounds and the mes-

sage, “When parked apply parking brake”, is

displayed on the vehicle information dis-

play.

When the power switch is in the OFF posi-

tion, the chime sounds continuously. Make

sure the parking brake is applied.

Have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

Electric Vehicle (EV)

system warning light

This light illuminates if there is a malfunc-

tion in the following systems. Have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

• Traction motor and inverter system

• Charge port or on board charger

• Li-ion battery system

• Cooling system

• Shift control system

• Emergency shut off system is activated.

For additional information, refer to “Emer-

gency shut-off system” in the “EV over-

view” section of this manual.

Low tire pressure warning

light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni-

tors the tire pressure of all tires.

The low tire pressure warning light warns

of low tire pressure or indicates that the

TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the power switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about

1 second and then turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

The “Low Tire Pressure — Add Air” warning

also appears on the vehicle information

display.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust the

tire pressure to the recommended COLD

tire pressure shown on the Tire and Load-

ing Information label. The low tire pressure

warning light does not automatically turn

off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After

the tire is inflated to the recommended

pressure, the vehicle must be driven at

speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate

the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure

warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to

check the tire pressure.

The “Low Tire Pressure — Add Air” warning

appears each time the power switch is

placed in the ON position as long as the low

tire pressure warning light remains illumi-

nated.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section, “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section and “In case

of emergency” section of this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute when the power

switch is placed in the ON position. The

light will remain on after the 1 minute. Have

2-20 Instruments and controls

the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for this service. The “Low Tire Pressure —

Add Air” warning does not appear if the low

tire pressure warning light illuminates to

indicate a TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section and

“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

WARNING

• Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should con-

tact the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

• If the light does not illuminate when

the power switch is placed in the ON

position, have the vehicle checked. It

is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer as soon

as possible for this service.

• If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers

or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle

speed, pull off the road to a safe lo-

cation and stop the vehicle as soon

as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently

damage the tires and increase the

likelihood of tire failure. Serious ve-

hicle damage could occur and may

lead to an accident and could result

in serious personal injury or death.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label to turn the low tire

pressure warning light OFF. If the

light still illuminates while driving

after adjusting the tire pressure, a

tire may be flat or the TPMS may be

malfunctioning. If you have a flat

tire, replace it with a spare tire as

soon as possible. If no tire is flat and

all tires are properly inflated, have

the vehicle checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer for this service.

• When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as a spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire

pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute. The light

will remain on after 1 minute. Have

the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer as soon as pos-

sible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

• Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could af-

fect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

CAUTION

• The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure

to check the tire pressure regularly.

• If the vehicle is being driven at

speeds of less than 16 mph

(25 km/h), the TPMS may not oper-

ate correctly.

• Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Master warning light

(red/yellow)

There are two types of master warning

lights: yellow and red. These lights illumi-

nate if any warning lights or indicator lights

are illuminated or if various vehicle infor-

mation warnings appear in the vehicle in-

formation display.

Yellow master warning light

This light illuminates when a yellow warn-

ing light within the vehicle information dis-

play is illuminated or when a message is

displayed on the vehicle information dis-

play.

Red master warning light

This light illuminates when a red warning

light within the vehicle information display

is illuminated or when a warning is dis-

played on the vehicle information display.

Power steering warning

light

When the power switch is in the ON posi-

tion, the electric power steering warning

light illuminates and turns off when the

power switch is placed in the READY to

drive position. This indicates the electric

power steering system is operational.

If the electric power steering warning light

illuminates while the READY to drive indica-

tor light is ON, it may indicate the electric

power steering system is not functioning

properly and may need servicing. Have the

electric power steering system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

When the electric power steering warning

light illuminates while the READY to drive

indicator is ON, the power assist to the

steering will cease operation but you will

still have control of the vehicle. At this time,

greater steering efforts are required to op-

erate the steering wheel, especially in

sharp turns and at low speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power

steering system” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

Seat belt warning

light

The light and chime remind you to fasten

your seat belts. The light illuminates when-

ever the power switch is placed in the ON

position, and will remain illuminated until

the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the

same time, the chime will sound for ap-

proximately 6 seconds unless the driver’s

seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light for the front

passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is

not fastened when the front passenger’s

seat is occupied. The front passenger seat

belt warning light does not activate until

5 seconds after the power switch is in the

ON position.

For additional information, refer to “Seat

belts” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual for precautions on seat belt

usage.

Supplemental air bag

warning light

After turning the power switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light will illuminate. The supplemental air

bag warning light will turn off after about

7 seconds if the supplemental front air bag

and supplemental side air bag, curtain

2-22 Instruments and controls

side-impact air bag systems and/or pre-

tensioner seat belt are operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and pretensioner systems need servicing

and your vehicle must be taken to your

nearest NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

• The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately

7 seconds.

• The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

• The supplemental air bag warning light

does not illuminate at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supple-

mental Restraint Systems and/or the pre-

tensioners may not function properly.

For additional information, refer to “Supple-

mental restraint system (SRS)” in the “Safety

— Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-

straint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer as soon as possible for this ser-

vice..

INDICATOR LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section.

or Electronic parking

brake indicator light

When the power switch is placed in the ON

position, the light comes on when the park-

ing brake is applied.

Exterior light indicator

light

This indicator illuminates when the head-

light switch is turned to the AUTO,

position and the front parking lights,

side marker lights, tail and license plate

lights are on. The indicator turns off when

these lights are turned off.

Front fog light indicator light

(if so equipped)

The front fog indicator light illuminates

when the front fog lights are on. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Fog light switch”

in this section.

Front passenger air bag

status light

The front passenger air bag status light

(located on the center of the instrument

panel) will be lit and the passenger front air

bag will be turned off depending on how

the front passenger seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light op-

eration, refer to “NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System (front seats)” in the “Safety — Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual.

High Beam Assist indicator

light (if so equipped)

The indicator light illuminates when the

headlights come on while the headlight

switch is in the AUTO position with the high

beam selected. This indicates that the high

Instruments and controls 2-23

beam assist system is operational. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Headlight

beam select” in this section.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This light illuminates when the headlight

high beam is on and goes out when the low

beam is selected.

Plug-in indicator

light

This light illuminates when the charge con-

nector is connected to the vehicle and

blinks during charging.

NOTE:

If the charge connector is connected to

the vehicle, the power switch cannot be

placed in the READY to drive position.

Power limitation indicator

light

When the power limitation indicator light is

illuminated, the power provided to the trac-

tion motor is reduced. Therefore the ve-

hicle is not as responsive when the accel-

erator is depressed while the power

limitation light is illuminated.

When this light comes on, the warning dis-

play appears within the vehicle information

display. Follow the instructions provided on

the vehicle information display.

This light illuminates in the following condi-

tions.

• Li-ion battery available charge is ex-

tremely low

• Li-ion battery temperature is very low (ap-

proximately −4°F (−20°C)

• When the temperature of the EV system is

high (motor, inverter, coolant system, Li-

ion battery etc.)

• When the EV system has a malfunction.

If the low battery charge indicator is illumi-

nated, charge the Li-ion battery as soon as

possible.

If this indicator illuminates because the Li-

ion battery is cold due to low outside tem-

peratures, move the vehicle to a warmer

location. The Li-ion battery temperature

may be increased by charging the Li-ion

battery.

If the light illuminates when the EV system

becomes hot due to continuous hill climb-

ing, either continue driving at a slower safe

speed or stop the vehicle in a safe location.

If this indicator does not turn off, have the

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

this service.

The indicator illuminates when a part in the

EV system has malfunctioned. If the indica-

tor illuminates in a situation other than

those described above, or if it does not turn

off, there may be a system malfunction.

Have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

WARNING

Power limitation mode can result in re-

duced power and vehicle speed. The

reduced speed may be lower than

other traffic, which could increase the

chance of a collision. Be especially

careful when driving. If the vehicle can-

not maintain a safe driving speed, pull

to the side of the road in a safe area.

Charge the Li-ion battery if the charge

is low or allow the Li-ion battery to

cool.

2-24 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

You can reduce charging time and

keep the Li-ion battery temperature

lower if you:

• Charge more frequently in smaller

amounts, and

• Keep the battery at a higher level of

charge.

READY to drive indicator

light

The READY to drive indicator light illumi-

nates when the EV system is powered and

the vehicle may be driven.

The READY to drive indicator light will turn

off in the following conditions.

• Cer tain EV system malfunctions.

• The READY to drive indicator light turns off

immediately before the Li-ion battery is

completely discharged. If the Li-ion bat-

tery becomes completely discharged, the

vehicle must be charged in order to be

driven. For additional information, refer to

“Low battery charge indicator” in this

section.

Security indicator

light

This light blinks when the power switch is in

the ACC, OFF or LOCK position. This func-

tion indicates the security system

equipped on the vehicle is operational.

If the security system is malfunctioning,

this light will remain on while the power

switch is in the ON position. For additional

information, refer to “Security systems” in

this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC sys-

tem or the traction control system is oper-

ating, thus alerting that the vehicle is near-

ing its traction limits. The road surface may

be slippery.

You may feel or hear the system working;

this is normal. The light will blink for a few

seconds after the VDC system stops limit-

ing wheel spin.

The indicator light also comes on when

you place the power switch in the ON

position.

The light will turn off after approximately

2 seconds if the system is operational. If the

light does not come on, have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this ser-

vice.

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

This light flashes when the turn signal

switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

This light illuminates when the Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) switch is pushed to

OFF. This indicates that the VDC system is

not operating. For additional information,

refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys-

tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a brake pad requires re-

placement, it will make a high pitched

Instruments and controls 2-25

scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-

tion. This scraping sound will first occur

only when the brake pedal is depressed.

After more wear of the brake pad, the

sound will always be heard even if the

brake pedal is not depressed. Have the

brakes checked as soon as possible if the

warning sound is heard.

Electric shift control system

reminder chime

If an improper shift operation is performed,

for safety reasons a chime will sound and

at the same time, depending on the condi-

tions, the operation will be canceled or the

shift position will switch to the N (Neutral)

position.

For additional information, refer to “Driving

the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

Key reminder chime

A chime will sound if the driver's side door is

opened while the power switch is pushed

to the ON or ACC position.

Make sure that the power switch is pushed

to the OFF position, and take the Intelligent

Key with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

The light reminder chime will sound when

the driver side door is opened with the light

switch in the

or position, and

the power switch is in the ACC, OFF or LOCK

position.

Turn the light switch off when you leave the

vehicle.

Parking brake reminder chime

A chime sounds if the parking brake is set

and the vehicle is driven. The chime will

stop if the parking brake is released or the

vehicle speed returns to zero.

Power switch reminder chime

The power switch reminder chime will

sound when the driver's door is opened

while the power switch is in the ON or

READY to drive position. Push the power

switch to the OFF position.

Seat belt warning chime

The seat belt warning chime will sound for

about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat

belt is securely fastened.

12-volt battery charge warning

chime

If the 12-volt battery charge warning light

illuminates, the chime will sound when a

warning message is displayed in the ve-

hicle information display.

When the chime sounds, immediately stop

the vehicle in a safe location and push the P

(Park) position switch on the shift lever and

apply the parking brake. The 12-volt battery

charge warning light turns off and the

chime will stop when the parking brake is

applied or the vehicle is placed in the P

(Park) position. Have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service. For

additional information, refer to “12-volt bat-

tery charge warning light” in this section.

2-26 Instruments and controls

The vehicle information display is located

to the left of the speedometer. It displays

items such as

• Battery information

• Energy economy

• Average vehicle speed

• Driving distance

• Driving time

• Cruise control information

• Intelligent Key information

• Indicators and warnings

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE

INFORMATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be

changed by using the

and OK switches located on the steer-

ing wheel.

䊊

Use this switch to change or

select items.

䊊

Use these switches to navigate

the vehicle information display.

䊊

Use this switch to return to the

previous menu.

䊊

Use these switches to navigate

the vehicle information display.

The OK,

switches

also control audio and control panel func-

tions in some conditions. Most screens and

menus offer instruction prompts of the

steering switches to indicate how to con-

trol the vehicle information display. White

dots appear on the left side of the vehicle

information display when there is more

than one page of menu items. The OK,

and switches change the audio

source and the buttons also control voice

recognition manual mode. For additional

information, refer to the separate

NissanConnect® Manual (for Leaf).

STARTUP DISPLAY

With the vehicle in the ON position, the ve-

hicle information display may display the

following screens:

• Battery information

• Audio

• Navigation

• Energy Economy

• Safety Shield

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

Instruments and controls 2-27

• Warnings

• Settings

Warnings will only display if there are any

present. For additional information, refer to

“Vehicle information display warnings and

indicators” in this section.

To control which items display in the ve-

hicle information display, refer to “Meter

settings” in this section.

SETTINGS

The settings mode allows you to change

the information displayed in the vehicle in-

formation display as well as enable and

disable various vehicle features and sys-

tems. The settings include:

• VDC Setting

• Driver Assistance

• Customize Display

• Vehicle Settings

• EV Settings

• TPMS Settings

• Maintenance

• Clock

• Unit/Language

• Factory Reset

VDC Setting

The VDC setting menu allows the user to

the adjust the VDC settings.

Menu Item Result

VDC Setting Allows user to turn the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on or off.

2-28 Instruments and controls

Driver Assistance

The driver assistance menu allows the user

to change the settings for driving, parking,

and braking aids.

Menu Item Result

Steering Assist (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the steering assist feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “ProPILOT

Assist” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Lane Displays the available lane options.

Lane Departure Warning Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning on and off. For additional information, refer to “Lane De-

parture Warning (LDW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Lane Departure Prevention Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning on and off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent

Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Blind Spot Displays the available blind spot options.

Blind Spot Warning Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning on and off. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot

Warning” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Side Indicator Brightness Allows user to set the brightness of the side indicator.

Emergency Brake Displays the available emergency brake options.

System Allows user to turn the emergency brake on and off. For additional information, refer to “Automatic Emer-

gency Braking (AEB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Parking Aids Displays the available parking aids.

Moving Object Allows user to turn the Moving Object Detection on and off. For additional information, refer to “Moving

Object Detection” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this

manual.

Cross Traffic Allows user to turn the cross traffic alert on and off. For additional information, refer to “Rear Cross Traffic

Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Driver Attention Alert

(if so equipped)

Allows user to turn the driver attention alert on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Driver

Alertness (I-DA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Timer Alert Allows user to set or reset an alert at a specific tune interval.

Instruments and controls 2-29

Menu Item Result

Low Temperature Alert Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off.

Chassis Control (if so equipped) Displays the available chassis controls.

Active Trace Control Allows user to turn the driver attention alert on or off. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Trace

Control (I-TC)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

e-Pedal Displays the available e-Pedal options.

Retain Mode Allows user to turn the retain mode on or off. For additional information, refer to “e-Pedal system” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

2-30 Instruments and controls

Customize Display

The customize display menu allows the

user to change the settings for the vehicle

information display.

Menu Item Result

Main Menu Selection Displays the available main menu selection options.

Cruise (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Cruise screen on or off in the vehicle information display.

Driving Aids Allows user to turn the safety shield screen on or off in the vehicle information display.

Status Allows user to turn the status screen on or off in the vehicle information display.

Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressures screen on or off in the vehicle information display.

Drive Computer Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display.

Chassis Control Allows user to turn the chassis control screen on or off in the vehicle information display.

ECO Info Settings Displays the available ECO Info Settings.

ECO Drive Report Allows user to turn the ECO drive report on or off.

View History Allows user to view and reset the ECO drive report history.

Navigation Settings Displays the available navigation settings.

Alerts Allows user to turn the navigation alerts on or off.

Cruise Screen Transition (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Cruise screen transition on or off.

Welcome Effect Displays the available welcome effects.

Gauges Allows user to turn the gauges effect on or off.

Animation Allows user to turn the animation effect on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-31

Vehicle Settings

The vehicle settings menu allows the user

to change the settings for the lights, locks

and wipers.

Menu Item Result

Lighting Displays the available lighting options.

Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off

Light Sensitivity Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle.

Light Off Delay Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the

vehicle is shut off.

Locking Displays the available locking options.

Ext. Door Switch Allows user to turn the exterior door switch on or off. When turned on, the request switch on

the door is activated.

Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the current door is un-

locked after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s

or front passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is un-

locked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again

within 5 seconds. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door un-

lock operation is performed once.

Wipers Displays the available wiper settings. For additional information, refer to “Wiper and washer

switch” in this section.

Speed Dependent Allows user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off.

2-32 Instruments and controls

EV Settings

The EV settings menu allows the user to

change the settings for charging the

vehicle.

Menu Item Result

Chg. Connector Lock Allows user to lock or unlock the charging connection.

Charge Timer1 Allows user to set charge timer 1.

Charge Timer2 Allows user to set charge timer 2.

Chg. Timer Only at HOME (if so equipped) Allows user to set charging timer only at home.

Charge Time Screen Allows user to select the display time screen based on charge method.

Climate Control Timer1 Allows user to set climate control timer 1.

Climate Control Timer2 Allows user to set climate control timer 2.

TPMS Settings

The TPMS settings menu allows the user to

change the tire pressure units displayed in

the vehicle information display.

Menu Item Result

TPMS Settings Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display.

Instruments and controls 2-33

Maintenance

The maintenance menu allows the user to

set reminders for various vehicle mainte-

nance items.

Menu Item Result

Maintenance Displays available maintenance reminder options.

Tire Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Other Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Clock

Menu Item Result

Clock When selected the following message appears: “Go to the settings menu on the

center display to set clock”. For additional information, refer to the separate

NissanConnect® Manual (for Leaf).

2-34 Instruments and controls

Unit/Language

The unit/language menu allows the user to

change the units shown in the vehicle in-

formation display.

Menu Item Result

Mileage/Energy Allows user to select the preferred mileage/energy unit of measure to display.

Tire Pressures Allows user to select the preferred tire pressure unit of measure to display.

Temperature Allows user to select the preferred temperature unit of measure to display.

Language Allows user to select the preferred language to display.

Factory Reset

The factory reset menu allows the user to

restore the vehicle information display set-

tings to factory status.

Menu Item Result

Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original fac-

tory settings. Once selected, the user can confirm or deny the reset.

Instruments and controls 2-35

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

2-36 Instruments and controls

1. Push brake and power switch to drive

2. No Key Detected

3. Key Battery Low

4. EV system operation for discharged In-

telligent Key system indicator

5. Door open

6. Low batter y charge indicator

7. Driver alert

8. Low outside air temperature

9. Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped)

10. Reminder Turn OFF Headlights

11. Tire Pressure Low — Add Air

12. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)

13. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indica-

tors (if so equipped)

14. Shift to Park

15. Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

16. Release Parking Brake

17. ProPILOT

Assist indicator (if so

equipped)

18. Not Available Seat Belt Not Fastened (if

so equipped)

19. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual

20. Indicators for maintenance

21. Steering Assist indicator (if so

equipped)

22. Steering Assist warning (if so equipped)

23. Not Available Front Radar Blocked (if so

equipped)

24. Not Available Visibility is impaired (if so

equipped)

25. Driver Attention Alert Take a Break? (if

so equipped)

26. Driver Attention Alert System Fault (if so

equipped)

27. Unavailable High Cabin Temperature (if

so equipped)

28. Not Available Parking Brake On (if so

equipped)

29. Not Available Poor Road Conditions (if

so equipped)

30. Currently not available (if so equipped)

31. Press Brake Pedal (if so equipped)

32. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) indi-

cator (if so equipped)

33. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)/

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

with Pedestrian Detection indicator (if

so equipped)

34. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

35. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross

Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so

equipped)

36. Headlight System Error: See Owner ’s

Manual (if so equipped)

37. When Parked Apply Parking Brake

38. T/M system malfunction Visit dealer

39. Check position of shift lever

40. Chassis control system error: See

Owner’s Manual

Instruments and controls 2-37

Push brake and power switch to

drive

This indicator appears while the vehicle is

in the P (Park) position. This indicator

means that the EV system will start when

the power switch is pressed with the brake

pedal depressed.

No Key Detected

This warning appears in either of the fol-

lowing conditions:

No key inside the vehicle:

This warning appears when the door is

closed with the Intelligent Key left outside

the vehicle and the power switch in the

ACC or ON position. Make sure that the

Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

Unregistered Intelligent Key:

This warning appears when the power

switch is placed in the ON, ACC or READY to

drive position and the Intelligent Key can-

not be recognized by the system. You can-

not place the power switch in the READY to

drive position with an unregistered key. Use

an Intelligent Key that has been registered.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key® system” in the “Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” section of this

manual.

Key Battery Low

This indicator appears when the Intelligent

Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator appears, replace the bat-

tery with a new one. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®

battery replacement” in the “Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

EV system operation for

discharged Intelligent Key system

indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelligent

Key battery is running out of power and

when the Intelligent Key system and ve-

hicle are not communicating normally.

If this indicator appears, touch the power

switch with the Intelligent Key while de-

pressing the brake pedal. For additional in-

formation, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®

battery discharge” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

Door open

This warning appears if any of the doors

and/or the rear hatch are open or not

closed securely. The vehicle icon indicates

which door or the rear hatch is open on the

display. Make sure that all of the doors and

the rear hatch are closed.

This warning also appears alternating with

the Shift to Park warning while the driver's

door is opened with the shift position in

any position other than the P (Park) posi-

tion. For additional information, refer to

“Shift to Park” in this section.

Low Battery Charge indicator

This light illuminates when the available Li-

ion battery charge is getting low. Charge as

soon as it is possible, preferably before the

Li-ion batter y available charge gauge

reaches 0%.

NOTE:

The low battery charge indicator

turns off immediately before the Li-

ion battery is completely discharged

2-38 Instruments and controls

and the vehicle will stop. If the Li-ion

battery becomes completely dis-

charged, the vehicle must be charged

in order to be driven.

Driver alert

This warning appears when the previously

set time for a break is reached. You can set

the time for up to 6 hours in the setting

menu. For additional information, refer to

“Vehicle information display” in this section.

Low outside air temperature

The outside air temperature is displayed in

°F or °C in the range of −20°F to 140°F (−30°C

to 60°C).

The outside air temperature mode in-

cludes a low temperature warning feature.

If the outside air temperature is below 37°F

(3°C), the warning is displayed on the

screen.

The outside temperature sensor is located

in front side of the vehicle. The sensor may

be affected by road, wind directions and

other driving conditions. The display may

differ from the actual outside temperature

or the temperature displayed on various

signs or billboards.

Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the washer

tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid

as necessary. For additional information,

refer to “Windshield washer fluid” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Reminder Turn OFF Headlights

This warning appears when the power

switch is turned to the OFF position but the

headlight switch is still on. Turn off the

headlight switch.

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

This warning appears when the low tire

pressure warning light in the meter illumi-

nates and low tire pressure is detected. The

warning appears each time the power

switch is placed in the ON position as long

as the low tire pressure warning light re-

mains illuminated.

If this warning appears, stop the vehicle

and adjust the tire pressure to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” in this section and “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Cruise control indicator (if so

equipped)

This indicator shows the cruise control sys-

tem status.

When cruise control is activated, a green

circle will illuminate to indicate it is set. The

vehicle information display will also display

the speed the cruise control was set at. If

you accelerate past the set speed, the

speed will blink until you either cancel

cruise control or go back to the set speed. If

cruise control is on and canceled, the

speed will be displayed to show the speed

the vehicle will return to if the resume but-

ton is activated.

For additional information, refer to “Cruise

control” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-39

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

indicators (if so equipped)

This indicator shows the Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC) system status. The status is

shown by the color. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Shift to Park

This warning appears alternately with

door/rear hatch open warning when the

driver's door is opened with the shift posi-

tion in any position other than the P (Park)

position. If this warning appears, push the P

(Park) position switch and place in the P

(Park) position.

For additional information, refer to “Door

open” in this section.

Key System Error: See Owner’s

Manual

After the power switch is pushed to the ON

position, this light comes on for about

2 seconds and then turns off.

The Key System Error message warns of a

malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys-

tem. If the light comes on while the motor is

stopped, it may be impossible to start the

motor.

If the light comes on while the motor is

running, you can drive the vehicle. However,

have it repaired as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer for this service.

Release Parking Brake

This warning appears when the vehicle

speed is above 4 mph (7 km/h) and the

parking brake is applied.

ProPILOT

Assist indicator (if so

equipped)

This indicator appears when the ProPILOT

Assist system is engaged. For additional

information, refer to “ProPILOT

Assist” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Not Available Seat Belt Not

Fastened

This indicator appears when the ProPI-

LOT

Assist system will not engage be-

cause the driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

For additional information, refer to “ProPI-

LOT

Assist” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears when one or more of

the following systems (if so equipped) is

not functioning properly:

• Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

• Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)

• Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

• Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

• ProPILOT

Assist

If one or more of these warning appears,

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

Indicators for maintenance

These indicators appear when the cus-

tomer set distance comes for replacing

tires or other maintenance items. You can

set or reset the distance for replacing tires

and other maintenance items.

2-40 Instruments and controls

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a

substitute for regular tire checks, in-

cluding tire pressure checks. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing

wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual. Many factors including tire in-

flation, alignment, driving habits and

road conditions affect tire wear and

when tires should be replaced. Setting

the tire replacement indicator for a

certain driving distance does not

mean your tires will last that long. Use

the tire replacement indicator as a

guide only and always perform regular

tire checks. Failure to perform regular

tire checks, including tire pressure

checks could result in tire failure. Seri-

ous vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to a collision, which could re-

sult in serious personal injury or death.

For scheduled maintenance items and in-

tervals, refer to the NISSAN Service and

Maintenance Guide.

Steering Assist indicator (if so

equipped)

This indicator appears when the Steering

Assist system is engaged. For additional

information, refer to “ProPilot

Assist” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Steering Assist warning (if so

equipped)

This message may appear when the Steer-

ing Assist system is engaged.

It will be displayed under the following con-

dition:

• When not holding the steering wheel or

when there is no steering wheel

operation.

Please hold the steering wheel immedi-

ately. When the steering operation is de-

tected, the warning turns off and the steer-

ing assist function is automatically

restored.

Not Available Front Radar Blocked

(if so equipped)

This message appears when one or more

of the following systems become unavail-

able due to an obstruction of the front ra-

dar.

• Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

• Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

• Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with

Pedestrian Detection

For additional information, refer to “Intelli-

gent Cruise Control (ICC)”, “Automatic

Emergency Braking (AEB)”, or “Automatic

Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian

Detection” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

Not Available Visibility is impaired

(if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Intel-

ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT

Assist) system is engaged.

Under the following conditions, the ICC

(with ProPILOT

Assist) system is auto-

matically canceled:

Instruments and controls 2-41

• The camera area of the windshield is

fogged up or covered with dirt, water, ice,

snow, etc.

• Strong light, such as sunlight or high

beams from oncoming vehicles, enters

the front camera

• When the wiper (HI) operates

The system will be available when the

above conditions no longer exist.

If the warning message continues to ap-

pear, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn

the hybrid system off and clean the wind-

shield.

Driver Attention Alert Take a

Break? (if so equipped)

This alert appears when the system has

detected the driver may be displaying fa-

tigue or a lack of attention.

Driver Attention Alert System

Fault (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the Intelligent

Driver Alertness (I-DA) system is not func-

tioning properly.

For additional information, refer to “Intelli-

gent Driver Alertness (I-DA)” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Unavailable High Cabin

Temperature (if so equipped)

This message appears when the camera

detects an interior temperature of more

than approximately 104°F (40°C).

For additional information, refer to “Lane

Departure Warning (LDW)” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Not Available Parking Brake On (if

so equipped)

This message may appear when the Intel-

ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT

Assist) system is engaged.

Under the following conditions, the ICC

(with ProPILOT

Assist) system is auto-

matically canceled:

• The electronic parking brake is applied.

The above system cannot be used when

the electronic parking brake is activated.

Not Available Poor Road

Conditions (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Intel-

ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT

Assist) system or the ICC is engaged.

Under the following conditions, the ICC

(with ProPILOT

Assist) system or the ICC

system is automatically canceled:

• When the VDC operates.

• When a wheel slips.

The above system cannot be used in some

situations (VDC operates and wheel slip.)

Currently not available (if so

equipped)

This message may appear when the Intel-

ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT

Assist) system or the ICC is engaged.

Under the following conditions, the ICC

(with ProPILOT

Assist) system or the ICC

system is automatically canceled:

• When the VDC operates.

• When a wheel slips.

• When the VDC system is turned off.

2-42 Instruments and controls

The above system cannot be used in some

situations (VDC operates, wheel slip, and

VDC system is off.)

Press Brake Pedal (if so equipped)

This message may appear in the following

situations:

• The driver tries to release the electronic

parking brake manually without depress-

ing the brake pedal.

• The vehicle is stopped on a steep hill; and

there is a possibility of moving backwards,

even if the electronic parking brake is

applied..

• The vehicle moves while the automatic

brake hold is activated.

For additional information, refer to “Elec-

tronic parking brake” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Lane Departure Warning

(LDW)/Intelligent Lane

Intervention (I-LI) indicator (if so

equipped)

This indicator shows when the LDW/I-LI

systems are engaged.

For additional information, refer to ”Warn-

ing systems switch” in this section and

“Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system”

and “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) sys-

tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

Automatic Emergency Braking

(AEB)/Automatic Emergency

Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian

Detection indicator (if so

equipped)

This indicator shows when the AEB or AEB

with Pedestrian Detection system is en-

gaged.

For additional information, refer to “Auto-

matic Emergency Braking (AEB)” or “Auto-

matic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe-

destrian Detection” the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Shipping Mode On Push Storage

Fuse

This warning may appear if the ex tended

storage switch is not pushed in. When this

warning appears, push in the extended

storage switch to turn off the warning.

For additional information, refer to “Ex-

tended storage switch” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear

Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator

(if so equipped)

This indicator shows when the BSW and

RCTA systems are engaged.

For additional information, refer to “Blind

Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic

Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

Headlight System Error: See

Owner’s Manual (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the LED head-

lights are not functioning properly.

If this warning appears, have your system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this ser-

vice.

When Parked Apply Parking Brake

This warning appears if there is a malfunc-

tion in the electric shift control system. This

Instruments and controls 2-43

warning appears when the parking brake

is not applied, even after the vehicle has

been parked. The master warning light

(red) also illuminates and the chime

sounds.

If the power switch cannot be placed in the

OFF position, apply the parking brake and

then place the power switch in the OFF

position. The warning turns off and the

chime stops.

If this warning appears, have your system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this ser-

vice.

T/M system malfunction Visit

dealer

This warning appears if there is a malfunc-

tion in the electric shift control system but

operation of the electric shift control is still

possible. The master warning light (yellow)

also illuminates and the chime sounds.

When this occurs, check the shift position

indicator by the shift lever or in the vehicle

information display to make sure that

shifting has been performed properly. It is

recommended that you contact a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer as soon as possible.

Check position of shift lever

This warning appears if the system cannot

detect the shift position. Make sure the ve-

hicle is placed in a position properly.

The master warning light (yellow) also illu-

minates and the chime sounds. Check the

shift position of the vehicle.

Chassis Control System Error: See

Owner’s Manual

This warning appears if the Integrated

Dynamics-control Module detects an error

in the Intelligent Trace Control, Intelligent

Engine Brake, or the Active Ride Control

systems. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer for this service. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Chassis control”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

WARNING INFORMATION DISPLAYS

(MODELS WITH A NAVIGATION

SYSTEM)

Low battery warning

When the low battery charge indicator

and the master warning light (yellow)

illuminate, the system displays a

message on the navigation system screen

that warns the driver that the Li-ion battery

power level is low.

2-44 Instruments and controls

1. The notification is displayed on the up-

per left side of the STATUS screen. Touch

[Show] to display the screen showing

detailed information.

2. The system displays a message screen

and announces the contents of the

message to warn that the Li-ion battery

power level is low. Check the message

displayed on the screen. Touch [Nearby

Stations] to search all charging stations

that are located around the current ve-

hicle position.

3. Touch [BACK] or push the MAP button to

return to the vehicle location screen.

NOTE:

• The low battery warning can be set to

off. Refer to LEAF Electric Vehicle Infor-

mation System Owner's Manual.

• When the battery power level is low, the

system automatically obtains charging

station information.

Instruments and controls 2-45

Your vehicle has two types of security sys-

tems, as follows:

• Vehicle security system

• NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security status is shown by the secu-

rity indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual

and audio alarm signals if someone opens

the doors, or rear hatch when the system is

armed. It is not, however, a motion detec-

tion type system that activates when a ve-

hicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but

cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the

theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-

nents in all situations. Always secure your

vehicle even if parking for a brief period.

Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and

always lock it when it is left unattended. Be

aware of your surroundings, and park in

secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protec-

tion, such as component locks, identifica-

tion markers, and tracking systems, are

available at auto supply stores and spe-

cialty shops. A NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

may also offer such equipment. Check with

your insurance company to see if you may

be eligible for discounts for various theft

protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows.

The system can be armed even if the

windows are open.

2. Place the power switch in the LOCK or

OFF position and remove the Intelligent

Key from the vehicle.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors

can be locked with:

• the LOCK

button on the Intelligent

Key

• any request switch

• the power door lock switch

• the mechanical key

4. Confirm that the security indicator light

illuminates. The security indicator light

stays on for about 30 seconds. The ve-

hicle security system is now pre-armed.

After about 30 seconds the vehicle se-

curity system automatically shifts into

the armed phase. The security light be-

gins to flash once every approximately

3 seconds. If, during this 30-second pre-

arm time period, the door is unlocked, or

SECURITY SYSTEMS

2-46 Instruments and controls

the power switch is placed in the ACC or

ON position, the system will not arm.

Even when the driver and/or passengers

are in the vehicle, the system will acti-

vate with all doors locked and the power

switch in the OFF position. When placing

the power switch to the ACC or ON posi-

tion, the system will be released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the

following alarm:

• The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

• The alarm automatically turns off after

approximately 50 seconds. However, the

alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tam-

pered with again.

The alarm is activated by:

• Unlocking the door without using the In-

telligent Key, the request switch or the key.

(Even if the door is opened by releasing

the door inside lock knob, the alarm will

activate.)

• Opening the hood.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm will stop when a door is un-

locked by pushing the UNLOCK

but-

ton on the Intelligent Key, door handle re-

quest switch or using the mechanical key,

or when the power switch is pushed in the

ACC or ON position.

If the system does not operate as de-

scribed above, have it checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer for this service.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the power switch to be placed

in the READY to drive position without the

use of the registered key.

If the power switch fails to place the vehicle

into the READY to drive position using the

registered key, it may be due to interfer-

ence caused by another registered key, an

automated toll road device or automated

payment device on the key ring. Restart the

EV system using the following procedure:

1. Leave the power switch in the ON posi-

tion for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the power switch in the OFF posi-

tion and wait approximately 10 seconds.

3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.

4. Place the power switch in the READY to

drive position while holding the device

(which may have caused the interfer-

ence) separate from the registered key.

If this procedure allows the power

switch to be placed in the READY to drive

mode, NISSAN recommends placing the

registered key on a separate key ring to

avoid interference from other devices.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Instruments and controls 2-47

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

Security Indicator Light

The security indicator light is located on

the meter panel. It indicates the status of

the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.

The light blinks after the power switch was

in the ACC or OFF position. This function

indicates the security systems equipped

on the vehicle are operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is

malfunctioning, this light will remain on

while the power switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

If the light still remains on and/or the

power switch cannot be placed in the

READY to drive position, have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

this service as soon as possible. Please

bring all registered keys that you have

when visiting a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for service.

2-48 Instruments and controls

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the windshield

and obscure your vision which may

lead to an accident. Warm the wind-

shield with the defroster before you

wash the windshield.

CAUTION

• Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

• Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

• Do not fill the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir with windshield-

washer fluid concentrates at full

strength. Some methyl alcohol

based windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates may permanently stain

the grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

• Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid

concentrates with water to the

manufacturer’s recommended lev-

els before pouring the fluid into the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

Do not use the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir to mix the

windshield-washer fluid concen-

trate and water.

NOTE:

If the windshield wiper operation is in-

terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may

stop moving to protect its motor. If this

occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF

position and remove the snow or ice that

is on and around the wiper arms. In ap-

proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on

again to operate the wiper.

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the power switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper

at the following speed:

䊊

Intermittent — intermittent operation

can be adjusted by turning the knob

toward

䊊

(Slower) or

䊊

(Faster). Also,

the intermittent operation speed var-

ies in accordance with the vehicle

speed. (For example, when the vehicle

speed is high, the intermittent opera-

tion speed will be faster.)

䊊

Low — continuous low speed opera-

tion.

䊊

High — continuous high speed opera-

tion.

䊊

MIST — one sweep operation of the

wiper .

The Speed Dependent feature may be

disabled. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in

this section.

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-49

WASHER OPERATION

To operate the washer, pull the lever to-

ward the back of the vehicle

䊊

until the

desired amount of windshield-washer fluid

is spread on the windshield. The wiper will

automatically operate several times.

Drip Wipe

A brief period of time after using the

washer the wiper will perform a one sweep

operation automatically to clear any re-

maining windshield-washer fluid from the

windshield.

REAR WIPER OPERATION

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the

windshield-washer fluid may freeze on

the rear window glass and obscure

your vision. Warm the rear window

with the defroster before you wash the

rear window.

CAUTION

• Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

• Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

• Do not fill the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir with windshield-

washer fluid concentrates at full

strength. Some methyl alcohol

based windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates may permanently stain

the grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

• Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid

concentrates with water to the

manufacturer’s recommended lev-

els before pouring the fluid into the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

Do not use the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir to mix the

windshield-washer fluid concen-

trate and water.

NOTE:

If the rear window wiper operation is in-

terrupted by snow etc., the wiper may

stop moving to protect its motor. If this

occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF

position and remove the snow etc. on

and around the wiper arms. After about

1 minute, turn the switch on again to op-

erate the wiper.

2-50 Instruments and controls

The rear window wiper and washer oper-

ate when the power switch is in the ON

position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF

position to operate the wiper.

䊊

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent opera-

tion (not adjustable)

䊊

Low (ON) — continuous low speed op-

eration

Push the switch forward

䊊

to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate

several times.

To defrost the rear window glass and out-

side mirrors, place the power switch in the

ON position and push the switch

䊊

on. The

indicator light will illuminate. Push the

switch again to turn the defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approxi-

mately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the

rear window, be careful not to scratch

or damage the rear window defroster.

Type A (if so equipped)

Type B (if so equipped)

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR (IF SO EQUIPPED)

DEFROSTER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-51

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

䊊

Rotate the switch to the posi-

tion, the front parking, tail, license

plate, and instrument panel lights

come on.

䊊

Rotate the switch to the posi-

tion, the headlights come on and all

the other lights remain on.

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights

and tail lights to be set so they turn on and

off automatically.

To set the autolight system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position

䊊

2. Place the power switch in the ON

position.

3. The autolight system automatically

turns the headlights and tail lights on

and off.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the

switch to the OFF,

or position.

The autolight system can turn on the

headlights and tail lights automatically

when it is dark and turn off the headlights

when it is light.

For US models: The headlights and tail

lights will also be turned on automatically

at twilight or in rainy weather (when the

windshield wiper is operated continuously).

If the power switch is placed in the OFF

position and one of the doors is opened

and this condition continues, the head-

lights remain on for 45 seconds.

Automatic headlights off delay:

You can keep the headlights on for up to

180 seconds after you push the power

switch to OFF and open any door then

close all the doors.

You can adjust the period of the automatic

headlights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF)

to 180 seconds. The factory default setting

is 45 seconds.

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

2-52 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

For additional information on adjust-

ing the automatic headlights off de-

lay, refer to “Vehicle information dis-

play” in this section.

Be sure not to put anything on top of the

photo sensor

䊊

located on the top of the

instrument panel. The photo sensor con-

trols the autolight; if it is covered, the

photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and

the headlights will illuminate.

Headlight beam select

䊊

To select the low beam, have the lever

in the neutral position as shown and

rotate the switch to the desired posi-

tion. For additional information, refer

to “Headlight switch” in this section.

䊊

To select the high beam, push the le-

ver forward while the switch is in the

position. The high beams will

come on and the high beam indicator

(blue)

will illuminate. Pull it back

to return to the low beam.

Instruments and controls 2-53

䊊

Pulling the lever toward you will flash

the headlight high beam even when

the headlight switch is in the OFF po-

sition.

High Beam Assist (if so equipped)

The High Beam Assist system will operate

when the vehicle is driven at speeds of ap-

proximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and above. If

an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle ap-

pears in front of your vehicle when the

headlight high beam is on, the headlight

will be switched to the low beam automati-

cally.

Precautions on High Beam Assist:

WARNING

• The High Beam Assist system is a

convenience but it is not a substitute

for safe driving operation. The driver

should remain alert at all times, en-

sure safe driving practices and

switch the high beams and low

beam manually when necessary.

• The high beam or low beam may not

switch automatically under the fol-

lowing conditions. Switch the high

beam and low beam manually.

– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, wind, etc.).

– When a light source similar to a

headlight or tail light is in the vi-

cinity of the vehicle.

– When the headlights of the on-

coming vehicle or the leading ve-

hicle are turned off, when the color

of the light is affected due to for-

eign materials on the lights, or

when the light beam is out of po-

sition.

– When there is a sudden, continu-

ous change in brightness.

– When driving on a road that

passes over rolling hills, or a road

that has level differences.

– When driving on a road with many

curves.

– When a sign or mirror-like surface

is reflecting intense light towards

the front of the vehicle.

– When the container, etc. being

towed by a leading vehicle is re-

flecting intense light.

– When a headlight on your vehicle

is damaged or dirty.

– When the vehicle is leaning at an

angle due to a punctured tire, be-

ing towed, etc.

• The timing of switching the low

beam and high beam may change

under the following situations.

– The brightness of the headlights

of the oncoming vehicle or lead-

ing vehicle.

– The movement and direction of

the oncoming vehicle and the

leading vehicle.

– When only one light on the on

coming vehicle or the leading ve-

hicle is illuminated.

– When the oncoming vehicle or the

leading vehicle is a two-wheeled

vehicle.

– Road conditions (incline, curve,

the road surface, etc.).

– The number of passengers and

the amount of luggage.

2-54 Instruments and controls

High Beam Assist operations:

To activate the High Beam Assist system,

turn the headlight switch to the AUTO po-

sition

䊊

and push the lever forward

䊊

(high beam position). The High Beam Assist

indicator light in the meter will illuminate

while the headlights are turned on.

If the High Beam Assist indicator light does

not illuminate in the above condition, it may

indicate that the system is not functioning

properly. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this ser-

vice.

When the vehicle speed lowers to less than

approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), the head-

light remains the low beam.

To turn off the High Beam Assist system,

turn the headlight switch to the

posi-

tion or select the low beam position by

placing the lever in the neutral position.

Ambient image sensor maintenance:

The ambient image sensor for the High

Beam Assist system is located above the

inside mirror

䊊

. To keep the proper opera-

tion of the High Beam Assist system and

prevent a system malfunction, be sure to

observe the following:

• Always keep the windshield clean.

• Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the ambient image sensor.

• Do not strike or damage the areas around

the ambient image sensor.

Instruments and controls 2-55

If the ambient image sensor is damaged

due to an accident, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

this service.

Battery saver system

• When the headlight switch is in the

or position while the power switch is

in the ON position, the lights will automati-

cally turn off 45 seconds after the power

switch has been placed in the OFF

position.

• When the headlight switch remains in the

or position after the lights

automatically turn off, the lights will turn

on when the power switch is placed in the

ON position.

CAUTION

• When you turn on the headlight

switch again after the lights auto-

matically turn off, the lights will not

turn off automatically. Be sure to

turn the light switch to the OFF posi-

tion when you leave the vehicle for

extended periods of time, otherwise

the battery will be discharged.

• Never leave the light switch on when

the power switch is in the OFF, ACC or

ON position for extended periods of

time even if the headlights turn off

automatically.

LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

system (if so equipped)

The LED portion of the headlights auto-

matically illuminates at 100% intensity

when the power switch is in the Ready to

Drive position with the parking brake re-

leased. The LED DRL system operates with

the headlight switch in the OFF position.

Turn headlight switch to the

position

for full illumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the

power switch is in the Ready to Drive posi-

tion, the LED DRL system does not operate.

The LED DRL system illuminates once the

parking brake is released. The LED DRL sys-

tem will remain on until the power switch is

pushed to the OFF position.

WARNING

When the LED DRL system is active, tail

lights on your vehicle are not on. It is

necessary at dusk to turn on your

headlights. Failure to do so could

cause an accident injuring yourself

and others.

2-56 Instruments and controls

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

Press the “+” button to increase the bright-

ness of the instrument panel lights.

Press the “-” to decrease the brightness of

the instrument panel lights.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

䊊

Move the lever up or down until it

latches to signal the turning direction.

When the turn is completed, the turn signal

cancels automatically.

Lane change signal

䊊

Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does

not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the

lever until the lane change is completed.

Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does

not latch, and release the lever. The turn

signal will automatically flash three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal

a lane change based on road and traffic

conditions.

Instruments and controls 2-57

To turn the fog lights on, rotate the head-

light switch to the

position, then ro-

tate the switch to the

position. To turn

them off, rotate the switch to the OFF posi-

tion.

The headlights must be on for the fog

lights to operate.

To sound the horn, push the center pad

area of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system.

Tampering with the supplemental

front air bag system may result in seri-

ous personal injury.

To turn on the ECO mode, push the ECO

switch. The ECO mode indicator appears

on the meter.

To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO

switch again. The ECO mode indicator will

turn off.

For additional information, refer to “Electric

shift control system” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (IF SO EQUIPPED) HORN ECO SWITCH

2-58 Instruments and controls

The front seats and the rear outboard

seats (if so equipped) can be warmed by

built-in heaters. The switches, located on

the center console and at the side of the

front passenger seatback, can be operated

independently of each other.

1. Place the power switch in the ON

position.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,

as desired, depending on the tempera-

ture. The indicator light in the switch will

illuminate.

3. To turn off the heater, return the switch

to the level position. Make sure the indi-

cator light goes off.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and

off. The indicator light will remain on as long

as the switch is on.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or

before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn

the switch off.

NOTE:

The heated seats consume less power

than the heater and can be used to either

help extend vehicle range by reducing

heater use or to maximize comfort by

supplementing the heater.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the seat heater if you or the occupants

cannot monitor elevated seat tem-

peratures or have an inability to feel

pain in those body parts in contact

with the seat. Use of the seat heater by

such people could result in serious in-

jury.

Rear

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

Instruments and controls 2-59

CAUTION

• Do not use the seat heater for ex-

tended periods or when no one is

using the seat.

• Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates heat, such as a blan-

ket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Other-

wise, the seat may become over-

heated.

• Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar object. This may result in

damage to the heater.

• Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately

with a dry cloth.

• When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, thinner, or any similar ma-

terials.

• If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn

the switch off and have the system

checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service.

The heated steering wheel system is de-

signed to operate only when the surface

temperature of the steering wheel is below

approximately 68°F (20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to

warm the steering wheel when the power

switch is in the ACC or ON position. The

indicator light

䊊

on the switch will illumi-

nate.

If the surface temperature of the steering

wheel is below approximately 68°F (20°C),

the system will heat the steering wheel and

cycle off and on to maintain a temperature

above 68°F (20°C). The indicator light will

remain on as long as the system is on.

Push the switch again to turn the heated

steering wheel system off manually. The

indicator light turns off.

NOTE:

• If the surface temperature of the steer-

ing wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the

switch is turned on, the system will not

heat the steering wheel. This is not a

malfunction.

• If the outside temperature is low (ap-

proximately 50°F (10°C) or less) and the

Climate Control Timer or Remote Cli-

mate Control are used, the steering

wheel heater will automatically operate

in the following conditions.

– When using the Climate Control

Timer: Operates from approximately

15 minutes before the set departure

time until the set departure time.

– When using Remote Climate Control:

Operates 15 minutes after Remote

Climate Control starts.

• The heated steering wheel consumes

less power than the heater and can be

used to either help extend vehicle range

by reducing heater use or to maximize

comfort by supplementing the heater.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH

(IF SO EQUIPPED)

2-60 Instruments and controls

The E-call (SOS) system switch is used in

combination with a NissanConnect® (for

Leaf) Services subscription to call for assis-

tance in case of an emergency.

Pushing the switch will (with a paid sub-

scription) reach a Response Specialist that

will provide assistance based on the situa-

tion described by the vehicle’s occupant.

For additional information, or to enroll your

vehicle, refer to www.NissanUSA.com/

connect or call 855–426–6628.

To open the charge port lid, push the

charge port lid switch. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Charge port lid” in the “Pre-

driving checks and adjustments” section of

this manual.

To turn off the charge timer, push the

charge timer OFF switch. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Charging timer” in the

“Charging” section of this manual.

E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (IF SO

EQUIPPED) CHARGE PORT LID SWITCH CHARGE TIMER OFF SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-61

The Steering Assist switch is used to turn

on and off the Steering Assist system and

the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

that is activated using the settings menu of

the vehicle information display.

The Steering Assist system controls the

steering system to help keep your vehicle

near the center of the lane when driving.

The Steering Assist system is combined

with the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC). For

additional information, refer to “Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) with ProPILOT™ Assist)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

CAUTION

• The outlet and plug may be hot dur-

ing or immediately after use.

• Do not use with accessories that ex-

ceed a 12-volt, 120W (10A) power

draw.

• Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

• Use the power outlet with the power

switch is in the ON or Ready to Drive

position to avoid discharging the 12-

volt battery.

STEERING ASSIST SWITCH (IF SO

EQUIPPED) POWER OUTLET

2-62 Instruments and controls

• Avoid using the power outlet when

the air conditioner, headlights or

rear window defroster are on.

• This power outlet is not designed for

use with a cigarette lighter unit.

• Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may open.

• Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, make sure that the electrical

accessory being used is turned OFF.

• When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water to contact

the outlet.

SEATBACK POCKET (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

The seatback pockets may be located on

the driver’s and/or passenger’s seat.. The

pocket can be used to store maps.

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-

senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System, please observe the following

items:

• Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket or head restraint.

• Do not place heavy loads heavier

than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback,

head restraint, or in the seatback

pocket.

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-63

STORAGE TRAY

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the

tray(s) to help prevent injury in an ac-

cident or sudden stop.

GLOVE BOX

To open the glove box, pull the handle.

To close, push the lid in until it latches.

WARNING

Keep the glove box lid closed while

driving to prevent injury in case of an

accident or a sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console box, pull up the lever

䊊

and pull up the lid. To close, push the lid

down until it is latched.

Instrument panel

2-64 Instruments and controls

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES

STORAGE

To open the sunglasses holder, push and

release. Only store one pair of sunglasses

in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed

while driving to avoid obstructing the

driver’s view and to help prevent an

accident.

CAUTION

• Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

• Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in di-

rect sunlight. The heat may damage

the sunglasses.

Cup holders

Front

Soft bottle holder (front)

Instruments and controls 2-65

WARNING

Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being used to

prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is

hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

CAUTION

Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an acci-

dent.

CAUTION

• Do not use the bottle holder for any

other objects that could be thrown

about in the vehicle and possibly in-

jure people during sudden braking

or an accident.

• Do not use the bottle holder for open

liquid containers.

TONNEAU COVER (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

WARNING

• Never put anything on the tonneau

cover, no matter how small. Any ob-

ject on it could cause an injury in an

accident or sudden stop.

• Do not leave the tonneau cover in

the vehicle with it disengaged from

the holder.

• Properly secure all cargo with ropes

or straps to help prevent it from slid-

ing or shifting. Do not place cargo

higher than the seatbacks. In a sud-

den stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal injury.

• Properly secure cargo and do not al-

low it to contact the top tether strap

when it is attached to the top tether

anchor. Cargo that is not properly

secured or cargo that contacts the

top tether strap may damage the

top tether strap during a collision. If

the cargo cover contacts the top

tether strap when it is attached to

the top tether anchor, remove the

Soft bottle holder (rear)

2-66 Instruments and controls

cargo cover from the vehicle or se-

cure it on the cargo floor below its

attachment location. If the cargo

cover is not removed, it may damage

the top tether strap during a colli-

sion. Your child could be seriously in-

jured or killed in a collision if the

child restraint top tether strap is

damaged.

The tonneau cover keeps the luggage

compartment contents hidden from the

outside.

To remove the tonneau cover:

1. Remove the straps from the rear hatch.

2. Pull up the tonneau cover.

3. Remove the tonneau cover holders

from the rear pillar.

4. Slide down the tonneau cover along the

rear seat back.

5. Remove the tonneau cover by pulling

either the left or right side backward

away from the pillar.

Instruments and controls 2-67

STOWING GOLF BAGS

Normally, two standard golf bags can be

stowed in the cargo area. Insert the top of

the golf bag into the right side of the cargo

area

䊊

then rotate the bag backward

䊊

Insert the top of the second golf bag into

right side of the cargo area

䊊

and stow the

bottom of golf bag forward all the way

䊊

In some cases, you may not be able to stow

two golf bags in your vehicle, depending on

their sizes or types.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

• Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle

while it is in motion and before clos-

ing the windows. Use the window

lock switch to prevent unexpected

use of the power windows.

•

Tohelpavoidriskofinjuryordeath

through unintended operation of the

vehicle or its systems, including en-

trapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assis-

tance of others, or pets unattended in

your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-

perature inside a closed vehicle on a

warm day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk of

injury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the

power switch is in the ACC or ON position,

or for about 45 seconds after the power

switch is placed in the OFF position. If the

driver’s or front passenger’s door is opened

during this period of about 45 seconds,

power to the windows is canceled.

Main power window switch

(driver's side)

1. Driver side window

2. Front passenger side window

3. Rear left passenger side window

4. Rear right passenger side window

5. Window lock button

To open or close a window, push down

䊊

or pull up

䊊

the corresponding switch and

hold it. The main switches, on the driver's

side, will open or close all the windows.

WINDOWS

2-68 Instruments and controls

Locking passengers' windows

When the lock button

䊊

is pushed in, only

the driver side window can be opened or

closed. Push it in again to cancel.

Passenger side power window

switch

The passenger's side power window

switch will open or close only the corre-

sponding window. To open or close the

window, push down or pull up the switch

and hold it.

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or

close only the corresponding windows. To

open the window, push the switch and hold

it down. To close the window, pull the

switch up.

Automatic operation

The automatic operation is available for

the switch that has an

mark on its

surface.

To fully open or close the window, com-

pletely push down or pull up the switch and

release it; the switch need not be held. The

window will automatically open or close all

the way.To stop the window, just push or lift

the switch in the opposite direction.

A light push or pull on the switch will cause

the window to open or close until the

switch is released.

Instruments and controls 2-69

Auto-reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position

which cannot be detected. Make sure

that all passengers have their hands,

etc., inside the vehicle before closing

the window.

If the control unit detects something

caught in the window as it is closing, the

window will be immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be activated

when the window is closed by automatic

operation when the power switch is in the

ON position or for 45 seconds after the

power switch is placed in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driv-

ing conditions, the auto reverse function

may be activated if an impact or load

similar to something being caught in the

window occurs.

If the windows do not close

automatically

If the power window automatic function

(closing only) does not operate properly,

perform the following procedure to initial-

ize the power window system.

1. Place the power switch in the ON

position.

2. Close the door.

3. Open the window completely by operat-

ing the power window switch.

4. Pull the power window switch and hold

it to close the window, and then hold the

switch more than 3 seconds after the

window is closed completely.

5. Release the power window switch. Op-

erate the window by the automatic

function to confirm the initialization is

complete.

If the power window automatic function

does not operate properly after perform-

ing the procedure above, have your vehicle

serviced. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this ser-

vice.

The interior lights can be turned on

䊊

re-

gardless of door position. The lights will go

off after a period of time unless the power

switch is placed in the ON position when

any door is opened.

The interior lights can be set to operate

when the doors are opened

䊊

. To turn off

the interior lights when a is door open,

push the switch; the interior lights will not

illuminate, regardless of door position.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-70 Instruments and controls

The lights will go off when the power switch

is placed in the ON position, or the driver’s

door is closed and locked. The lights will

also go off after a period of time when the

doors are open.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of

time with the power switch in the OFF

position. This could result in a dis-

charged 12-volt battery.

CONSOLE LIGHT (IF SO EQUIPPED)

The console light will turn on whenever the

parking lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be ad-

justed with the illumination brightness

control in the vehicle information display.

MAP LIGHTS

Press the button to turn the map lights on.

To turn them off, press the button again.

ROOM LIGHT

The room light switch has three positions:

ON, DOOR and OFF.

ON position

When the switch is in the ON position

䊊

the ceiling light will illuminate.

Instruments and controls 2-71

DOOR position

When the switch is in the DOOR position

䊊

the ceiling light will illuminate under the

following conditions:

• the power switch is placed in the LOCK

position

– remains on for about 15 seconds.

• doors are unlocked by pushing the

UNLOCK

button or the request

switch, with the power switch in the LOCK

position

– remains on for about 15 seconds.

• any door is opened and then closed with

the power switch in the LOCK position

– remains on for about 15 seconds.

• any door is opened while the power

switch in the ACC or ON position

– remains on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the light turns

off.

The light will automatically turn off after

10 minutes when the light remains illu-

minated to prevent the battery from be-

coming discharged.

OFF position

When the switch is in the OFF position

䊊

the ceiling light will not illuminate, regard-

less of the condition.

CARGO LIGHT

The light illuminates when the rear hatch is

opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the

light goes off. For additional information,

refer to “Exterior and interior lights” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro-

vides a convenient way to consolidate the

functions of up to three individual hand-

held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

• Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)

devices such as garage doors, gates,

home and office lighting, entry door locks

and security systems.

• Is powered by the vehicle’s 12-volt battery.

No separate batteries are required. If the

vehicle’s 12-volt batter y is discharged or is

disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all

programming.

Once the HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver is programmed, retain the original

transmitter for future programming pro-

cedures (for example, new vehicle pur-

chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver buttons should be erased for

security purposes. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Programming

HomeLink®” in this section.

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (IF SO EQUIPPED)

2-72 Instruments and controls

WARNING

• Do not use the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and re-

verse features as required by federal

safety standards. (These standards

became effective for opener models

manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A

garage door opener that cannot de-

tect an object in the path of a closing

garage door and then automatically

stop and reverse, does not meet cur-

rent federal safety standards. Using

a garage door opener without these

features increases the risk of serious

injury or death.

• During the programming procedure,

your garage door or security gate

will open or close (if the transmitter

is within range). Make sure that

people or objects are clear of the ga-

rage door, gate, etc. that you are pro-

gramming.

• Place the power switch in the ACC or

ON position while programming the

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

Place the power switch in the ACC posi-

tion when programming HomeLink®. It is

also recommended that a new battery

be placed in the hand-held transmitter

of the device being programmed to

HomeLink® for quicker programming

and accurate transmission of the

radio-frequency.

1. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8 cm) away

from the HomeLink® surface, keeping

the HomeLink® indicator light

䊊

in view.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press

and hold the desired HomeLink® button

and handheld transmitter button. DO

NOT release until the HomeLink® indica-

tor light

䊊

flashes slowly and then rap-

idly. When the indicator light flashes rap-

idly, both buttons may be released. (The

rapid flashing indicates successful

programming.)

Instruments and controls 2-73

NOTE:

Some devices may require you to re-

place Step 2 with the cycling proce-

dure noted in the “Programming

HomeLink® for Canadian customers

and gate openers” section.

3. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button and observe the indi-

cator light.

• If the indicator light

䊊

is solid/

continuous, programming is com-

plete and your device should activate

when the HomeLink® button is pressed

and released.

• If the indicator light

䊊

blinks rapidly for

two seconds and then turns to a

solid/continuous light, continue with

Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A

second person may make the following

steps easier. Please use a ladder or

other device. Do not stand on your ve-

hicle to perform the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage

door opener motor in the garage, locate

the “learn” or “smart” button (the name

and color of the button may vary by

manufacturer but it is usually located

near where the hanging antenna wire is

attached to the unit). If there is difficulty

locating the button, reference the ga-

rage door opener’s manual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”

button.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press

and hold the trained HomeLink® button

for two seconds and release. Repeat the

“press/hold/release” sequence up to

three times to complete the training

process. HomeLink® should now acti-

vate your rolling code equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site

at: www.homelink.com or call

1-800-355-3515.

2-74 Instruments and controls

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE

OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)

after several seconds of transmission –

which may not be long enough for

HomeLink® to pick up the signal during

training. Similar to this Canadian law, some

U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim-

eout” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-

culties training a gate operator or garage

door opener by using the “Training” proce-

dures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”

Step 2 with the following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door

opener, etc., unplug the device during

the “cycling” process to prevent possible

damage to the garage door opener

components.

1. Refer to “Programming HomeLink®” step

1 in this section.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press

and hold the desired HomeLink® button

and the hand-held transmitter button.

During training, your hand-held trans-

mitter may automatically stop transmit-

ting. Continue to press and hold the de-

sired HomeLink® button while you press

and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held

transmitter every two seconds until the

frequency signal has been learned. The

HomeLink® indicator light will flash

slowly and then rapidly after several

seconds upon successful training. DO

NOT release until the HomeLink® indica-

tor light flashes slowly and then rapidly.

When the indicator light flashes rapidly,

both buttons may be released. The rapid

flashing indicates successful training.

Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®”

step 3 to complete.

If the device was unplugged during the

programming procedure, remember to

plug it back in when programming is com-

pleted.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after

it is programmed, can be used to activate

the programmed device. To operate, sim-

ply press and release the appropriate pro-

grammed HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver button. The amber indicator light will

illuminate while the signal is being trans-

mitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmit-

ter of the device may also be used at any

time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

DIAGNOSIS

If HomeLink® does not quickly learn the

hand-held transmitter information, per-

form the following steps.

• Replace the hand-held transmitter bat-

teries with new batteries.

• Position the hand-held transmitter with

its battery area facing away from the

HomeLink® surface.

• Push and hold both the HomeLink® and

hand-held transmitter buttons without

interruption.

• Position the hand-held transmitter 1 to

3 inches (2 to 8 cm) away from the

HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter

in that position for up to 15 seconds. If

Instruments and controls 2-75

HomeLink® is not programmed within

that time, try holding the transmitter in

another position while keeping the indica-

tor light in view at all times.

If you continue to have programming diffi-

culties, please contact the NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs Department. The phone

numbers are located in the Foreword of

this Owner’s Manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

The following procedure clears the pro-

grammed information from both buttons.

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How-

ever, individual buttons can be repro-

grammed. For additional information, refer

to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink®

button” in this section.

To clear all programming:

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink®

buttons until the indicator light begins to

flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do

not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the programming

mode and can be programmed at any

time beginning with “Programming

HomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINK® BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver button, complete the following:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash af-

ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the

HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact

HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or

1–800–355–3515.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but-

ton has now been reprogrammed. The

new device can be activated by pushing

the HomeLink® button that was just pro-

grammed. This procedure will not affect

any other programmed HomeLink® but-

tons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change

the codes of any non-rolling code device

that has been programmed into

HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of

each device or call the manufacturer or

dealer of those devices for additional infor-

mation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni-

versal Transceiver with your new trans-

mitter information.

FCC notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

2-76 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

Instruments and controls 2-77

NOTES

2-78 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ..............................3-2

NISSAN Intelligent Key® ................3-2

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . .3-3

Doors .............................3-4

Locking with key (driver’s side only) ........3-5

Locking with inside lock knob............3-5

Locking with power door lock switch.......3-5

Automatic door locks .................3-6

Child safety rear door lock ..............3-6

NISSAN Intelligent Key® system.............3-6

NISSAN Intelligent Key® operating range of the

door lock/unlock function ..............3-8

Door locks/unlocks precaution...........3-9

NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation .........3-9

12-volt battery saver system ............3-11

Warning signals ....................3-11

Troubleshooting guide ................3-11

How to use remote keyless entry function. . .3-13

Hood .............................3-16

Rear hatch..........................3-17

Secondary rear hatch release ...........3-18

Charge port lid .......................3-19

Opening charge port lid ...............3-19

Charge port cap ....................3-21

Steering wheel .......................3-21

Tilt operation ......................3-22

Sun visors ..........................3-22

Vanity mirror ......................3-23

Mirrors ............................3-23

Inside rearview mirror ................3-23

Manual anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ....................3-23

Automatic anti-glare type (if so equipped). . .3-24

Outside mirrors ....................3-24

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it in

a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the

vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for duplicates by using the key

number. NISSAN does not record any key

numbers so it is very important to keep

track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all keys and do not have one to

duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can

be duplicated without knowing the key

number.

NOTE:

Do not leave the keys inside the vehicle

when leaving the vehicle.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

1. Intelligent Key (two sets)

2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key)

3. Key number plate (one plate)

Your vehicle can only be driven with the

Intelligent Keys which are registered to

your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com-

ponents and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System components.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. The

new keys must be registered by a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer prior to use with the

Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since

the registration process requires erasing all

memory in the Intelligent Key components

when registering new keys, be sure to take

all Intelligent Keys that you have to the

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you when driving. The Intelligent Key is

a precision device with a built-in trans-

mitter. To avoid damaging it, please

note the following.

• The Intelligent Key is water resis-

tant; however, wetting may damage

the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent

Key gets wet, immediately wipe until

it is completely dry.

• Do not bend, drop or strike it against

another object.

• If the outside temperature is below

14°F (-10°C) degrees, the battery of

the Intelligent Key may not function

properly.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key for

an extended period in a place where

temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

• Do not change or modify the Intelli-

gent Key.

• Do not use a magnet key holder.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key near

an electric appliance such as a tele-

vision set, personal computer or cel-

lular phone.

• Do not allow the Intelligent Key to

come into contact with water or salt

water, and do not wash it in a wash-

ing machine. This could affect the

system function.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,

NISSAN recommends erasing the ID

code of that Intelligent Key. This will

prevent the Intelligent Key from unau-

thorized use to unlock the vehicle. For

information regarding the erasing pro-

cedure, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

Mechanical key

To remove the mechanical key, release the

lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it

into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob

returns to the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock

the doors. For additional information, refer

to “Doors” in this section.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key in-

stalled in the Intelligent Key.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the

master keys which are registered to the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System com-

ponents in your vehicle. These keys have a

transponder chip in the key head.

The master key can be used for all the

locks.

To protect belongings when you leave a

key with someone, give them the Intelligent

Key only, not the mechanical key.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. A NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer can duplicate your ex-

isting key. As many as four NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System keys can be used with

one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you

have to the NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

registration. This is because the registra-

tion process will erase the memory of all

key codes previously registered into the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After

the registration process, these compo-

nents will only recognize keys coded into

the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

during registration. Any key that is not

given to the dealer at the time of registra-

tion will no longer be able to start your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system

key, which contains an electrical tran-

sponder, to come into contact with wa-

ter or salt water. This could affect sys-

tem function.

WARNING

• Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat

belts, this provides greater safety in

the event of an accident by helping

to prevent persons from being

thrown from the vehicle. This also

helps keep children and others from

unintentionally opening the doors,

and will help keep out intruders.

• Before opening any door, always

look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

• To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of

the vehicle and or its systems, in-

cluding entrapment in windows or

inadvertent door lock activation, do

not leave children, people who re-

quire the assistance of others or

pets unattended in your vehicle. Ad-

ditionally, the temperature inside a

closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors cannot be

opened using the inside or outside door

handles. The doors must be unlocked to

open the doors.

DOORS

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LOCKING WITH KEY (DRIVER’S SIDE

ONLY)

To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as

shown.

Manual

To lock a door, turn the key towards the

front of the vehicle

䊊

. To unlock, turn the

key toward the rear of the vehicle

䊊

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the

inside lock knob to the lock position

䊊

then close the door.

To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the

unlock position

䊊

When locking the door without a key, be

sure not to leave the key inside the ve-

hicle.

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

Operating the power door lock switch will

lock or unlock all the doors. The switches

are located on the driver’s and front pas-

senger’s door armrests.

To lock the doors, push the power door lock

switch to the lock position

䊊

with the driv-

er’s or front passenger’s door open, then

close the door.

When locking the door this way, be sure

not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

To unlock the doors, push the power door

lock switch to the unlock position

䊊

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch is moved

to the lock position while any door is open,

all doors will unlock automatically and a

chime will sound after the door is closed.

This function help to prevent the Intelligent

Key from being accidentally locked inside

the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

• All doors lock automatically when the ve-

hicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).

NOTE:

The automatic door unlock function can

be changed using the “Vehicle Settings”

of the vehicle information display. For

additional information refer to “Vehicle

information display” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety rear door locks help prevent

the rear doors from being opened acciden-

tally, especially when small children are in

the vehicle.

When the levers are in the lock position

䊊

, the rear doors can be opened only

from the outside.

To disengage, move the levers to the un-

lock position

䊊

WARNING

• Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should con-

tact the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

• The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are

pressed.The FAA advises that the ra-

dio waves may affect aircraft navi-

gation and communication sys-

tems. Do not operate the Intelligent

Key while on an airplane. Make sure

the buttons are not operated unin-

tentionally when the unit is stored

during a flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all

the door and the rear hatch locks by using

the remote control function or pushing the

request switch on the vehicle without tak-

ing the key out from a pocket or purse. The

operating environment and/or conditions

may affect the Intelligent Key system op-

eration.

Be sure to read the following items before

using the Intelligent Key system.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® SYSTEM

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when operating the ve-

hicle.

• Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicat-

ing with the vehicle because it receives ra-

dio waves. The Intelligent Key system

transmits weak radio waves. Environmen-

tal conditions may interfere with the op-

eration of the Intelligent Key system under

the following operating conditions.

• When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, such

as a TV tower, power station or broadcast-

ing station.

• When in possession of wireless equip-

ment, such as a cellular phone, transceiver

or a CB radio.

• When the Intelligent Key is in contact with

or covered by metallic materials.

• When any type of radio wave remote con-

trol is used nearby.

• When the Intelligent Key is placed near an

electric appliance such as a personal

computer.

• When the vehicle is parked near a parking

meter.

In such cases, correct the operating condi-

tions before using the Intelligent Key func-

tion or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies de-

pending on the operating conditions, the

battery’s life is approximately two years. If

the battery is discharged, replace it with a

new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost

discharged, firmly apply the foot brake and

touch the power switch with the Intelligent

Key. Then push the power switch while de-

pressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds

after the chime sound.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously re-

ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near

equipment that transmits strong radio

waves, such as signals from a TV or per-

sonal computer, the battery life may be-

come shorter.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key® battery replacement” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

Pay special attention that the vehicle bat-

tery is not completely discharged.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. For

information about the purchase and use of

additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer.

CAUTION

• Do not allow the Intelligent Key,

which contains electrical compo-

nents, to come into contact with wa-

ter or salt water.This could affect the

functioning of the system.

• Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

• Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

• Do not change or modify the Intelli-

gent Key.

• The Intelligent Key may be damaged

if it gets wet. If the Intelligent Key

gets wet, immediately wipe until it is

completely dry.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

• If the outside temperature is below

14°F (−10°C), the battery of the Intel-

ligent Key may not function prop-

erly.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key for

an extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

• Do not attach the Intelligent Key to a

key holder that contains a magnet.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a mag-

netic field, such as a TV, audio equip-

ment, personal computer or cellular

phone.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that

Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may

prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-

gent Key to operate the vehicle. For addi-

tional information, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

The Intelligent Key function can be dis-

abled. For additional information, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

OPERATING RANGE OF THE DOOR

LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION

The Intelligent Key functions can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range from the request

switch

䊊

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or strong radio waves are present

near the operating location, the Intelligent

Key system’s operating range becomes

narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not

function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in

(80 cm) from each request switch

䊊

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door

glass, handle or rear bumper, the request

switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the oper-

ating range, it is possible for anyone who

does not carry the Intelligent Key to push

the request switch to lock/unlock the

doors including the rear hatch.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

• Do not push the door handle request

switch with the Intelligent Key held in your

hand as illustrated. The close distance to

the door handle will cause the Intelligent

Key system to have difficulty recognizing

that the Intelligent Key is outside the

vehicle.

• After locking with the door handle request

switch, verify the doors are securely

locked by testing them.

• To prevent the Intelligent Key from being

left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry

the key with you and then lock the doors.

• Do not pull the door handle before push-

ing the door handle request switch. The

door will be unlocked but will not open.

Release the door handle once and pull it

again to open the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without

taking the key out from your pocket or bag.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,

you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing

the door handle request switch (driver’s or

front passenger’s)

䊊

or rear hatch request

switch

䊊

within the range of operation.

When you lock or unlock the doors or the

rear hatch, the hazard indicator will flash

and the horn (or the outside chime) will

sound as a confirmation. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Hazard warning flasher

switch” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual and “Horn” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

Locking doors

1. Push the power switch into the OFF po-

sition and make sure you carry the Intel-

ligent Key with you.

2. Close all the doors and the rear hatch.

3. Push the door handle request switch

(driver’s or front passenger’s)

䊊

or the

rear hatch request switch

䊊

while car-

rying the Intelligent Key with you.*1

4. All the doors and the rear hatch will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and

the outside chime sounds twice.

*1: Doors will not lock by pushing the door

handle request switch when the Intelligent

Key is left inside the vehicle. A chime

sounds to alert that the Intelligent Key is in

the vehicle. However, when an Intelligent

Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be

locked with another registered Intelligent

Key.

CAUTION

• After locking the door using the re-

quest switch, make sure that the

doors have been securely locked by

operating the door handles.

• When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure to have the

Intelligent Key in your possession

before operating the request switch

to prevent the Intelligent Key from

being left in the vehicle.

• The request switch is operational

only when the Intelligent Key has

been detected by the Intelligent Key

system.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Unlocking doors

1. Push the door handle request switch

䊊

or the rear hatch request switch

䊊

once

while carrying the Intelligent Key with

you.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once and

the outside chime sounds once. The

corresponding door or the rear hatch

will unlock.

3. Push the door handle request or the rear

hatch request switch again within one

minute.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once and

the outside chime sounds once again.

All the doors and the rear hatch will

unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically un-

less one of the following operations is per-

formed within one minute after pushing

the request switch while the doors are

locked.

• Opening any door.

• Pushing the power switch.

During this one minute time period, if the

button on the Intelligent Key is

pressed, all doors will be locked automati-

cally after another one minute.

NOTE:

If “Selective Unlock” is turned off in

the “Vehicle Settings,” all doors will

unlock upon first request switch

press.

Opening rear hatch

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the rear hatch opener switch

䊊

3. The rear hatch will unlock and open.

12-VOLT BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

When all the following conditions are met

for a period of time, the battery saver sys-

tem will cut off the power supply to prevent

12-volt battery discharge.

• The power switch is in the ACC or ON

position,

• All doors are closed, and

• The vehicle is in the P (Park) position.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly by erroneous operation of

the Intelligent Key listed on the following

chart or to help prevent the vehicle from

being stolen, chime or beep sounds inside

and outside the vehicle and a warning dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

When a chime or beep sounds or the warn-

ing displays, be sure to check the vehicle

and Intelligent Key.

For additional information, refer to the

”Troubleshooting guide” in this section and

“Vehicle information display” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that

are programmed for the vehicle. If another

Intelligent Key is in range or inside the ve-

hicle, the vehicle system may respond dif-

ferently than expected.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

Symptom Possible cause Action to take

When opening the driver’s door

to get out of the vehicle

The inside warning chime sounds continu-

ously.

The power switch is pushed to the OFF

position while the driver's door is open.

Close the driver's door.

The power switch is in the ACC position.

Push the power switch to the OFF position

then close the driver's door.

When closing the door after get-

ting out of the vehicle

The Key is not detected warning appears on

the display, the outside chime sounds three

times and the inside warning chime sounds

for a few seconds.

The power switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Push the power switch to the OFF position.

The outside chime sounds continuously.

The power switch is in the ACC or OFF

position, the electric shift control sys-

tem has malfunctioned and the vehicle

cannot be placed in the P (Park) position

when the parking brake is not applied.

Make sure the parking brake is applied.

When closing the door with the

inside lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for a few sec-

onds and all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle

or cargo area.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the request

switch or the

button

on the Intelligent Key to lock the

door

The outside chime sounds for a few sec-

onds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle

or a cargo area.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the power switch

in the READY to drive position

The Intelligent Key battery discharge indica-

tor appears on the display.

The Intelligent Key battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one. For

additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key® battery replacement” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

The Key is not detected warning appears on

the display and the inside warning chime

sounds for a few seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the power switch

The Intelligent Key system warning indica-

tor appears on the display.

It warns of a malfunction with the Intel-

ligent Key system.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY FUNCTION

WARNING

• Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should con-

tact the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

• The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are

pressed.The FAA advises that the ra-

dio waves may affect aircraft navi-

gation and communication sys-

tems. Do not operate the Intelligent

Key while on an airplane. Make sure

the buttons are not operated unin-

tentionally when the unit is stored

during a flight.

CAUTION

• Do not allow the Intelligent Key,

which contains electrical compo-

nents, to come into contact with wa-

ter or salt water.This could affect the

system function.

• Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

• Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

• Do not change or modify the Intelli-

gent Key.

• Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,

immediately wipe until it is com-

pletely dry.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key for

an extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

• Do not attach the Intelligent Key

with a key holder that contains a

magnet.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a mag-

netic field, such as a TV, audio equip-

ment, personal computers or cellu-

lar phone.

The remote keyless entry function can op-

erate all door locks using the remote key-

less entry function of the Intelligent Key.

The remote keyless entry function can op-

erate at a distance of approximately 33 ft

(10 m) from the vehicle. The operating dis-

tance depends upon the conditions

around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not

operate:

• When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range.

• When the doors are open or not closed

securely.

• When the Intelligent Key battery is

discharged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intel-

ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key

in the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Locking doors

䊊

Lock button

䊊

Unlock button

䊊

Charge port unlock

䊊

Panic button

When you lock or unlock the doors, the haz-

ard indicator will flash and the horn will

sound as a confirmation. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Hazard warning flasher

switch” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion and “Horn” in the “Instruments and

controls” sections of this manual.

1. Push the power switch to the OFF posi-

tion and make sure you carry the Intelli-

gent Key with you.

2. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

3. Close all the doors.

4. Press the

button

䊊

on the Intelli-

gent Key.

5. All the doors and the rear hatch will lock.

6. The hazard indicator flashes twice and

the horn chirps once.

Operate the door handles to confirm that

the doors have been securely locked.

Unlocking doors

1. Press the button

䊊

on the Intelli-

gent Key once.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The

driver’s door will unlock.

3. Press the

button on the Intelligent

Key again within one minute.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once again.

All the doors and the rear hatch will

unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically un-

less one of the following operations is per-

formed within one minute after pressing

the

button while the doors are locked.

• Opening any door (including the rear

hatch).

• Pushing the power switch.

During this one minute time period, if the

button on the Intelligent Key is

pressed, all doors will be locked automati-

cally after another one minute.

Opening charge port lid

The charge port lid may be opened by

pressing and holding the

button

䊊

For additional information, refer to "Open-

ing charge port lid" in this section.

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-

ened, you may activate the alarm to call

attention as follows:

1. Push the

button

䊊

on the Intelli-

gent Key for more than 1 second.

2. The panic alarm and headlights will stay

on for a period of time.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3. The panic alarm stops when:

• It has run for a period of time, or

• Any of the buttons on the Intelligent Key

is pushed. (Note: The

button must

be pushed for more than 1 second.)

Setting hazard indicator and horn

mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and

horn mode when you first receive the ve-

hicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when

the

button

䊊

is pressed, the hazard

indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps

once. When the

button

䊊

is pressed,

the hazard indicator flashes once.

If horns are not necessary, the system can

be switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the

button is pressed, the hazard indicator

flashes twice. When the

button is

pressed, neither the hazard indicator nor

the horn operates.

Hazard indicator and horn mode:

Operation DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Pushing door handle request switch or rear hatch request

switch

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - twice

HAZARD - once

OUTSIDE CHIME - once

Pressing

or button

HAZARD - twice

HORN - once

HAZARD - once

HORN - none

Hazard indicator mode:

Operation DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Pushing door handle request switch or rear hatch request

switch

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - none

HAZARD - none

OUTSIDE CHIME - none

Pressing

or button

HAZARD - twice

HORN - none

HAZARD - none

HORN - none

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

Switching procedure:

To switch the hazard indicator and horn

(chime) operation, press the

䊊

and

䊊

buttons on the Intelligent Key si-

multaneously for more than two seconds.

• When the hazard indicator mode is set,

the hazard indicator flashes three times.

• When the hazard indicator and horn

mode is set, the hazard indicator flashes

once and the horn chirps once.

WARNING

• Make sure that the hood is com-

pletely closed and latched before

driving. Failure to do so could cause

the hood to open during driving and

result in an accident.

• If steam or smoke is emitting from

the motor compartment, do not

open the hood. Doing so could cause

an injury.

HOOD

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When opening the hood:

1. Securely close the charge port door.

2. Pull the hood lock release handle

䊊

lo-

cated below the instrument panel. The

hood will then spring up slightly.

3. Locate the lever

䊊

in between the hood

and charge port lid, and push the lever

upward with your fingertips.

4. Raise the hood

䊊

5. Remove the support rod

䊊

from the

hood and insert it into the slot

䊊

Hold the coated part

䊊

when removing

or resetting the support rod. Avoid direct

contact with the metal parts because

they may be hot immediately after the

EV system has been stopped.

When closing the hood:

1. Return the support rod to its original

position.

2. Slowly move the hood down to latch the

lock.

3. Push the hood down to lock the hood

securely into place.

WARNING

• Always make sure that the rear

hatch has been closed securely to

prevent it from opening while driv-

ing.

• Do not drive with the rear hatch

open.

• Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle

before closing the rear hatch.

REAR HATCH

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

To open the rear hatch, unlock it and push

the rear hatch opener switch

䊊

. Pull up the

rear hatch to open.

The rear hatch can be unlocked by:

• Pushing the rear hatch request switch. For

additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key® system” in this section.

• Pressing the

button on the Intelli-

gent Key. For additional information, refer

to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® system” in this

section.

• Pressing the

button on the remote

control. For additional information, refer to

“NISSAN Intelligent Key® system” in this

section.

• Pushing the power door lock switch to the

unlock position.

SECONDARY REAR HATCH

RELEASE

Follow the following steps to unlock the

liftgate when the battery is discharged.

NOTE:

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer as soon

as possible for inspection.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Unlocking the rear hatch:

1. Move the cover

䊊

by using a screwdriver

or a similar tool available on hand.

2. Then move the inside lever

䊊

by using a

screwdriver or similar tool available on

hand. The rear hatch will open.

OPENING CHARGE PORT LID

CAUTION

Make sure that the charge port lid is

completely closed and latched before

driving. Failure to do so could cause the

lid to open suddenly during driving.

Switch

Button

CHARGE PORT LID

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

When opening the charge port lid perform

one of the following:

• Push the charge port lid opener switch

located on the instrument panel, or

• Press and hold the

button on the

Intelligent Key for more than one second.

When opening the charge port lid:

1. The charging status indicator lights flash

and a chime sounds three times and the

charge port lid will then spring up slightly.

2. Put your hand into the underside of the

lid and open until it is in the fully open

position.

When closing the charge port lid:

1. Slowly move the lid down.

2. Lock it securely into place.

If the charge port lid cannot be unlocked

1. Open the hood.

2. Move the lever behind the charge port

lid in the direction of the arrow using a

flat head screwdriver or suitable tool,

and the port is unlocked.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CHARGE PORT CAP

When opening the charge port cap, press

the tab inward and the cap will spring open.

When the charge port cap is closed to its

previous position, it will lock automatically.

CAUTION

• When charging is finished, be sure to

close the charge port cap. If water or

dust gets inside the charge port, this

may cause a malfunction.

• Pay particular attention when using

the normal charge port as the

charge port lid can be closed even

when the normal charge port cap is

open.

• Close the quick charge (if so

equipped) port cap before closing

the charging lid. The quick charge

port cap can be damaged if it is open

when closing the charge port lid.

WARNING

• Do not adjust the steering wheel

while driving. You could lose control

of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent.

• Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for

proper steering operation and com-

fort. The driver’s air bag inflates with

great force. If you are unrestrained,

leaning forward, sitting sideways or

out of position in any way, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in a

crash. You may also receive serious

or fatal injuries from the air bag if

you are up against it when it inflates.

Always sit back against the seat-

back and as far away as practical

from the steering wheel. Always use

the seat belts.

STEERING WHEEL

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

TILT OPERATION

Push the lock lever down

䊊

and adjust the

steering wheel up or down

䊊

to the de-

sired position.

Pull the lock lever up

䊊

to lock the steering

wheel in place.

1. To block out glare from the front, swing

down the sun visor

䊊

2. To block glare from the side, remove the

sun visor from the center mount and

swing it to the side

䊊

3. Slide the extension sun visor in or out as

needed

䊊

CAUTION

• Do not store the sun visor before re-

turning the extension to its original

position.

• Do not pull the extension sun visor

forcedly downward.

SUN VISORS

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

VANITY MIRROR

To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the

sun visor and pull up the cover.

INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR

Adjust the angle of the inside rearview mir-

ror to the preferred position.

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW

MIRROR (IF SO EQUIPPED)

The night position

䊊

reduces glare from

the headlights of vehicles behind you at

night.

Use the day position

䊊

when driving in

daylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when nec-

essary, because it reduces rearview

clarity.

MIRRORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE TYPE (IF

SO EQUIPPED)

The inside mirror is designed so that it au-

tomatically changes reflection based on

the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle

behind.

When the system is turned on, the indicator

light

䊊

will illuminate and excessive glare

from the headlights of the vehicle behind

you will be reduced.

Push the “䡩” switch

䊊

to make the inside

rearview mirror operate normally. The indi-

cator light will turn off. Push the “I” switch

䊊

to turn the system on.

Do not allow any object to cover the sen-

sors

䊊

or apply glass cleaner on them.

Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the

sensor, resulting in improper operation.

Do not hang any objects on the mirror or

apply glass cleaner to it. Doing so will

reduce the sensitivity of the sensor

䊊

resulting in improper operation.

WARNING

Use the night position only when nec-

essary, because it reduces rear view

clarity.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

Adjusting outside mirrors

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror

on the passenger side are closer than

they appear. Be careful when moving

to the right. Using only this mirror

could cause an accident. Use the inside

mirror or glance over your shoulder to

properly judge distances to other ob-

jects.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The outside mirror control switch is lo-

cated on the armrest.

The outside mirror will operate only when

the power switch is in the ACC or ON posi-

tion.

Turn the switch right or left to select the

right or left side mirror

䊊

, then adjust the

mirror using the control switch

䊊

Move the switch to the center (neutral) po-

sition to prevent accidentally moving the

mirror.

Defrosting outside mirrors (if so

equipped)

The outside mirrors will be heated when

the rear window defroster switch is oper-

ated. For additional information, refer to

“Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

Folding outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it to-

ward the rear of the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

NOTES

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and

voice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Manual (for Leaf)...........4-3

RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ...........4-4

RearView Monitor system operation .......4-5

How to read the displayed lines ..........4-6

Difference between predicted and actual

distances .........................4-6

How to park with predicted course lines

(models with Navigation System) .........4-8

Adjusting the screen .................4-10

How to turn on and off predicted course lines

(models with navigation) ..............4-11

RearView Monitor system limitations ......4-11

System maintenance ................4-12

ntelligent Around View Monitor (if so equipped) . . .4-13

Intelligent Around View Monitor system

operation ........................4-15

Difference between predicted and actual

distances ........................4-18

How to park with predicted course lines . . . .4-19

How to switch the display .............4-20

Adjusting the screen .................4-21

Intelligent Around View Monitor system

limitations........................4-22

System Maintenance ................4-24

Moving Object Detection (if so equipped) .....4-25

MOD system operation ...............4-26

Turning MOD ON and OFF .............4-27

MOD system limitations...............4-27

System maintenance ................4-28

Vents .............................4-29

Heater and air conditioner (automatic).......4-30

Operating tips .....................4-32

In-cabin microfilter ..................4-33

Automatic climate control (models without

Navigation System)..................4-33

Automatic climate control (models with

Navigation System)..................4-37

Climate ctrl. timer...................4-40

Servicing climate control ..............4-44

Audio system (models without Navigation

System) ...........................4-45

Radio ...........................4-45

FM radio reception ..................4-45

AM radio reception ..................4-46

Satellite radio reception...............4-46

Audio operation precautions ...........4-47

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player...........................4-54

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port . .4-60

iPod® player operation................4-61

Bluetooth® streaming audio............4-64

Aux device player operation ............4-64

CD care and cleaning ................4-65

Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . .4-65

Antenna ...........................4-66

Car phone or CB radio..................4-67

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without

Navigation System (if so equipped) .........4-67

Regulatory information ...............4-69

Using the system ...................4-69

Control buttons ....................4-70

Connecting procedure ................4-71

Voice commands ...................4-72

Making a call ......................4-73

Receiving a call.....................4-74

During a call ......................4-74

Ending a call ......................4-74

Text messaging (if so equipped) .........4-75

Bluetooth® settings .................4-76

Manual controls ....................4-77

Troubleshooting guide ...............4-78

Refer to the NissanConnect® Manual (for

Leaf) that includes the following informa-

tion.

• EV-Specific functions

• Audio

• Hands-Free Phone

• NissanConnect® EV and Services

• Apple CarPlay

• Android Auto

• Navigation

• Voice recognition

• Information and settings viewable on the

system

NISSANCONNECT® MANUAL (FOR

LEAF)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

1. CAMERA button (if so equipped)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Rear-

View Monitor system could result in se-

rious injury or death.

• RearView Monitor is a convenience

feature and is not a substitute for

proper backing. Always turn and

look out the windows and check

mirrors to be sure that it is safe to

move before operating the vehicle.

REARVIEW MONITOR (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Always back up slowly.

• The system is designed as an aid to

the driver in showing large station-

ary objects directly behind the ve-

hicle, to help avoid damaging the ve-

hicle.

• The distance guide line and the ve-

hicle width line should be used as a

reference only when the vehicle is on

a level paved surface. The distance

viewed on the monitor is for refer-

ence only and may be different than

the actual distance between the ve-

hicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of

the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati-

cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when

the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)

position. The radio can still be heard while

the RearView Monitor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-

tor system uses a camera located just

above the vehicle’s license plate

䊊

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

OPERATION

With the EV (electric vehicle) system on,

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-

sition or press the CAMERA button (if so

equipped) to operate the RearView

Monitor.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle

width and distances to objects with refer-

ence to the vehicle body line

䊊

are dis-

played on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

• Red line

䊊

: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

• Yellow line

䊊

: approx. 3 ft (1 m )

• Green line

䊊

: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

• Green line

䊊

: approx. 10 ft (3 m )

Vehicle width guide lines

䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing

up.

Predicted course lines (models with

navigation system)

䊊

Indicate the predicted course when back-

ing up. The predicted course lines will be

displayed on the monitor when the shift

lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the

steering wheel is turned. The predicted

course lines will move depending on how

much the steering wheel is turned and will

not be displayed while the steering wheel is

in the straight-ahead position.

The vehicle width guide lines and the width

of the predicted course lines are wider than

the actual width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their loca-

tions on the ground are for approximate

reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill

surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-

ally located at distances different from

those displayed in the monitor relative to

the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects

as you are backing up, or park and exit the

vehicle to view the positioning of objects

behind the vehicle.

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the ac-

tual distance. Note that any object on the

hill is further than it appears on the

monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill,

the distance guide lines and the vehicle

width guide lines are shown farther than

the actual distance. Note that any object

on the hill is closer than it appears on the

monitor.

Backing up near a projecting

object

The predicted course lines (models with

navigation system)

䊊

do not touch the

object in the display. However, the vehicle

may hit the object if it projects over the

actual backing up course.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position

䊊

is shown farther than the

position

䊊

in the display. However, the po-

sition

䊊

is actually at the same distance as

the position

䊊

. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position

䊊

if the object projects over the actual back-

ing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES (MODELS WITH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM)

WARNING

• If the tires are replaced with differ-

ent sized tires, the predicted course

lines may be displayed incorrectly.

• On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predicted course line and the ac-

tual course line.

• If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted

course lines may be displayed incor-

rectly. If this occurs, please perform

the following procedures:

- Turn the steering wheel from lock

to lock while the EV (electric vehicle)

system is running.

- Drive the vehicle on a straight road

for more than 5 minutes.

• When the steering wheel is turned

with the power switch in the ACC po-

sition, the predicted course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Visually check that the parking space is

safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed

on the screen

䊊

when the shift lever is

moved to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predicted

course lines

䊊

enter the parking space

䊊

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make

the vehicle width guide lines

䊊

parallel

to the parking space

䊊

while referring

to the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position and apply the parking

brake.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. While on a RearView Monitor screen,

press the ENTER/SETTING button until

the Brightness or Contrast setting bar is

displayed below the RearView Monitor

screen.

2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust

the level.

3. To complete the adjustment, press the

ENTER/SETTING button until the Bright-

ness or Contrast setting bar disappears

from the RearView Monitor screen.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display

settings of the RearView Monitor

while the vehicle is moving. Make

sure the parking brake is firmly ap-

plied

1. While on a RearView Monitor screen,

touch the touch-screen display. The

Camera Setting screen will come up.

2. Touch the “Brightness,” “Contrast,” “Tint,”

“Color,” or “Black Level” key.

3. Adjust the item by touching the + or - key

on the touch-screen display.

Models without navigation system Models with navigation system

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF

PREDICTED COURSE LINES

(MODELS WITH NAVIGATION)

To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course

lines while in the P (Park) position:

1. Touch the Settings key.

2. Touch the Camera key.

3. Touch the Predicted Course Lines key to

turn the feature ON or OFF.

To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course

lines while in the R (Reverse) position:

1. Touch the touch-screen display.

2. Touch the Predicted Course Lines key to

turn the feature ON or OFF.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for RearView Monitor. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance

with these system limitations could

result in serious injury or death.

• The system cannot completely

eliminate blind spots and may not

show every object.

• Underneath the bumper and the

corner areas of the bumper cannot

be viewed on the RearView Monitor

because of its monitoring range

limitation. The system will not show

small objects below the bumper,

and may not show objects close to

the bumper or on the ground.

• Objects viewed in the RearView

Monitor differ from actual distance

because a wide-angle lens is used.

• Objects in the RearView Monitor will

appear visually opposite compared

to when viewed in the rearview and

outside mirrors.

• Use the displayed lines as a refer-

ence. The lines are highly affected by

the number of occupants, fuel level,

vehicle position, road conditions

and road grade.

• Make sure that the rear hatch is se-

curely closed when backing up.

• Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is in-

stalled above the license plate.

• When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray

it around the camera. Otherwise,

water may enter the camera unit

causing water condensation on the

lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric

shock.

• Do not strike the camera. It is a pre-

cision instrument. Otherwise, it may

malfunction or cause damage re-

sulting in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and

do not represent a system malfunction:

• When the temperature is extremely high

or low, the screen may not clearly display

objects.

• When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

• Vertical lines may be seen in objects on

the screen. This is due to strong reflected

light from the bumper.

• The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light.

• The colors of objects on the RearView

Monitor may differ somewhat from the

actual color of objects.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

• Objects on the monitor may not be clear

in a dark environment.

• There may be a delay when switching be-

tween views.

• If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the

camera, RearView Monitor may not dis-

play objects clearly. Clean the camera.

• Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe

off any wax with a clean cloth dampened

with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then

wipe with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin-

ner to clean the camera. This will

cause discoloration.

• Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely af-

fected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the

camera

䊊

, the RearView Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera

by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent and the wiping

it with a dry cloth.

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. CAMERA button

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Intelli-

gent Around View Monitor system

could result in serious injury or death.

• The Intelligent Around View Monitor

is a convenience feature and is not a

substitute for proper vehicle opera-

tion because it has areas where ob-

jects cannot be viewed. The four cor-

ners of the vehicle in particular, are

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW

MONITOR (IF SO EQUIPPED)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

areas where objects do not always

appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or

rear views. Always check your sur-

roundings to be sure that it is safe to

move before operating the vehicle.

Always operate the vehicle slowly.

• The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other ma-

neuvers.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of

the camera.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-

tem is designed as an aid to the driver in

situations such as slot parking or parallel

parking. The monitor displays various

views of the position of the vehicle in a split

screen format. Not all views are available at

all times.

Available views:

• Front View

An approximately 150–degree view of

the front of the vehicle.

• Rear View

An approximately 150–degree view of

the rear of the vehicle.

• Bird’s-Eye View

The surrounding views of the vehicle

from above.

• Front-Side View

The view around and ahead of the front

passenger’s side wheel.

• Full screen rear view

The view to the rear of the vehicle (which

is a little wider than the standard rear

view).

To display the multiple views, the Intelligent

Around View Monitor system uses cam-

eras located in the front grille, on the vehi-

cle’s outside mirrors and one just above

the vehicle’s license plates

䊊

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW

MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION

With the EV (electric vehicle) system on,

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-

sition or press the CAMERA button to oper-

ate the Intelligent AroundView Monitor.The

screen displayed on the Intelligent Around

View Monitor will automatically return to

the previous screen 3 minutes after the

CAMERA button has been pressed with the

shift lever in a position other than the R

(Reverse) position.

Available views

WARNING

• The distance guide lines and the ve-

hicle width lines should be used as a

reference only when the vehicle is on

a paved, level surface. The apparent

distance viewed on the monitor may

be different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed

objects.

• Use the displayed lines and the

bird’s eye view as a reference. The

lines and the bird’s-eye view are

greatly affected by the number of

occupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle

position, road condition and road

grade.

• If the tires are replaced with differ-

ent sized tires, the predicted course

lines and the bird’s-eye view may be

displayed incorrectly.

• When driving the vehicle up a hill,

objects viewed in the monitor are

further than they appear. When driv-

ing the vehicle down a hill, objects

viewed in the monitor are closer

than they appear.

• Objects in the rear view will appear

visually opposite compared to when

viewed in the rear view and outside

mirrors.

• Use the mirrors or actually look to

properly judge distances to other

objects.

• On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predicted course lines and the

actual course line.

• The vehicle width and predicted

course lines are wider than the ac-

tual width and course.

• The displayed lines will appear

slightly off to the right, because the

rearview camera is not installed in

the rear center of the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

Front and rear view:

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate

vehicle width and distance to objects with

reference to the vehicle body lines

䊊

are

displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:

• Red line

䊊

: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

• Yellow lines

䊊

: approximately 3 ft (1 m)

• Green lines

䊊

: approximately 7 ft (2 m)

• Green lines

䊊

: approximately 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines

䊊

Indicate the approximate vehicle width

when backing up.

Predicted course lines

䊊

Indicate the predicted course when oper-

ating the vehicle. The predicted course

lines will be displayed on the monitor when

the steering wheel is turned. The predicted

course lines will move depending on how

much the steering wheel is turned and

may not be displayed while the steering

wheel is in the straight-ahead position. The

front view will not be displayed when the

vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front

view and the steering wheel turns

about 90 degrees or less from the

straight-ahead position, both the

right and left predicted course lines

䊊

are displayed. When the steering

wheel turns about 90 degrees or

more, a line is displayed only on the

opposite side of the turn.

Front View Rear View

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Birds-eye view:

The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead

view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the

vehicle position and the predicted course

to a parking space. The vehicle icon

䊊

shows the position of the vehicle. Note that

the apparent distance between objects

viewed in the bird’s-eye view may differ

somewhat from the actual distance to the

vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover

䊊

are indicated in black.

After the EV system is placed in the ON

position, the non-viewable areas

䊊

are

highlighted in yellow for several seconds

after the bird’s-eye view is displayed. It will

be shown only the first time after the

power switch is placed in the ON position.

WARNING

• Objects in the bird’s-eye view will

appear further than the actual dis-

tance.

• Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,

may be misaligned or not displayed

at the seam of the views.

• Objects that are above the camera

cannot be displayed.

• The view for the bird’s-eye view may

be misaligned when the camera po-

sition alters.

• A line on the ground may be mis-

aligned and is not seen as being

straight at the seam of the views.

The misalignment will increase as

the line proceeds away from the ve-

hicle.

Front-side view:

Guiding lines

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate

width and the front end of the vehicle are

displayed on the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line

䊊

shows the front

part of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line

䊊

shows the ap-

proximate vehicle width including the out-

side mirrors.

The extensions

䊊

of both the front

䊊

and

side

䊊

lines are shown with a green dotted

line.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their loca-

tions on the ground are for approximate

reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill

surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-

ally located at distances different from

those displayed in the monitor relative to

the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects

as you are backing up, or park and exit the

vehicle to view the positioning of objects

behind the vehicle.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the ac-

tual distance. Note that any object on the

hill is further than it appears on the

monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill,

the distance guide lines and the vehicle

width guide lines are shown farther than

the actual distance. Note that any object

on the hill is closer than it appears on the

monitor.

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up near a projecting

object

The predicted course lines

䊊

do not touch

the object in the display. However, the ve-

hicle may hit the object if it projects over

the actual backing up course.

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position

䊊

is shown farther than the

position

䊊

in the display. However, the po-

sition

䊊

is actually at the same distance as

the position

䊊

. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position

䊊

if the object projects over the actual back-

ing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

WARNING

• If the tires are replaced with differ-

ent sized tires, the predicted course

lines may be displayed incorrectly.

• On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predicted course line and the ac-

tual course line.

• If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted

course lines may be displayed incor-

rectly. If this occurs, please perform

the following procedures:

- Turn the steering wheel from lock

to lock while the EV (electric vehicle)

System is running.

- Drive the vehicle on a straight road

for more than 5 minutes.

• When the steering wheel is turned

with the power switch in the ACC po-

sition, the predicted course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

1. Visually check that the parking space is

safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed

on the screen

䊊

when the shift lever is

moved to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predicted

course lines

䊊

enter the parking space

䊊

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make

the vehicle width guide lines

䊊

parallel

to the parking space

䊊

while referring

to the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position and apply the parking

brake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

With the power switch in the ON position,

press the CAMERA button or move the shift

lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate

the Intelligent Around View Monitor.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor dis-

plays different split screen views depend-

ing on the position of the shift lever. Press

the CAMERA button to switch between the

available views.

If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,

the available views are:

• Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen

• Rear view/front-side view split screen

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

• Full screen rear view

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the

available views are:

• Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen

• Front view/front-side view split screen

If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position,

the available views are:

• Front view/front bird’s-eye view split

screen

• Front view/front-side view split screen

The display will switch from the Intelligent

Around View Monitor screen when:

• The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position

and the vehicle speed increases above

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

• A different screen is selected.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. Touch the touch-screen display with the

Intelligent Around View Monitor on.

2. Touch the “Brightness,” “Contrast,” “Tint,”

“Color,” or “Black Level” key.

3. Adjust the item by touching the + or —

key on the touch-screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display set-

tings of the Intelligent Around View

Monitor while the vehicle is moving.

Make sure the parking brake is firmly

applied.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW

MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for Intelligent Around View Moni-

tor. Failure to operate the vehicle in ac-

cordance with these system

limitations could result in serious in-

jury or death.

• Do not use the Intelligent Around

View Monitor with the outside mir-

rors in the stored position, and make

sure that the rear hatch is securely

closed when operating the vehicle

using the Intelligent Around View

Monitor.

• The apparent distance between ob-

jects viewed on the Intelligent

Around View Monitor differs from

the actual distance.

• The cameras are installed on the

front grille, the outside mirrors and

above the rear license plate. Do not

put anything on the vehicle that cov-

ers the cameras.

• When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray

it around the cameras. Otherwise,

water may enter the camera unit

causing water condensation on the

lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric

shock.

• Do not strike the cameras. They are

precision instruments. Doing so

could cause a malfunction or cause

damage resulting in a fire or an elec-

tric shock.

There are some areas where the system

will not show objects and the system does

not warn of moving objects. When in the

front or rear view display, an object below

the bumper or on the ground may not be

viewed

䊊

. When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall

object near the seam

䊊

of the camera

viewing areas will not appear in the moni-

tor.

The following are operating limitations and

do not represent a system malfunction:

• There may be a delay when switching be-

tween views.

• When the temperature is extremely high

or low, the screen may not display objects

clearly.

• When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

• The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light.

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

• The colors of objects on the Intelligent

Around View Monitor may differ some-

what from the actual color of objects.

• Objects on the Intelligent Around View

Monitor may not be clear and the color of

the object may differ in a dark

environment.

• There may be differences in sharpness

between each camera view of the bird’s-

eye view.

• Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe

off any wax with a clean cloth that has

been dampened with a diluted mild clean-

ing agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

System temporarily unavailable

When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,

there are abnormal conditions in the

Around View® Monitor. This will not hinder

normal driving operation but the system

should be inspected. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for this service.

When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the

screen, the camera image may be receiv-

ing temporary electronic disturbances

from surrounding devices. This will not hin-

der normal driving operation but the sys-

tem should be inspected if it occurs fre-

quently. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin-

ner to clean the camera. This will

cause discoloration.

• Do not damage the cameras as the

monitor screen may be adversely af-

fected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of

the cameras

䊊

, the Intelligent Around

View Monitor may not display objects

clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a

cloth dampened with a diluted mild clean-

ing agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. CAMERA button

WARNING

• Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use of the

Moving object Detection (MOD) sys-

tem could result in serious injury or

death.

• The MOD system is not a substitute

for proper vehicle operation and is

not de-signed to prevent contact

with objects surrounding the ve-

hicle. When maneuvering, always

use the outside mirrors and rear-

view mirror and turn and check the

surroundings to ensure it is safe to

maneuver.

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

• The system is deactivated at speeds

above 5 mph (8 km/h). It is reacti-

vated at lower speeds.

• The MOD system is not designed to

detect surrounding stationary ob-

jects.

The MOD system can inform the driver of

moving objects near the vehicle when

backing out of garages, maneuvering in

parking lots and in other such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects

by using image processing technology on

the image shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION

The MOD system will turn on automatically

under the following conditions:

• When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position.

• When vehicle speed decreases below ap-

proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and the cam-

era screen is displayed.

Front and bird’s-eye views

Rear and bird’s-eye views

Rear and front-side views

Rear-wide view

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The MOD system operates in the following

conditions when the camera view is dis-

played:

• When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position and the vehicle is

stopped, the MOD system detects moving

objects in the bird’s-eye view. The MOD

system will not operate if the outside mir-

rors are moving in or out, in the stowed

position, or if either front door is opened.

• When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) po-

sition and the vehicle speed is below ap-

proximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the MOD sys-

tem detects moving objects in the front

view.

• When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position and the vehicle speed is below

approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the MOD

system detects moving objects in the rear

view. The MOD system will not operate if

the rear hatch is open.

The MOD system does not detect moving

objects in the front-side view. The MOD

icon is not displayed on the screen when in

this view.

When the MOD system detects moving ob-

jects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard

and a yellow frame will be displayed on the

view where the objects are detected. While

the MOD system continues to detect mov-

ing objects, the yellow frame continues to

be displayed.

NOTE:

While the Rear Cross Traffic Alert chime

(if so equipped) is beeping, the MOD sys-

tem does not chime.

In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame

䊊

displayed on each camera image (front,

rear, right, left) depending on where mov-

ing objects are detected.

The yellow frame

䊊

is displayed on each

view in the front view and rear view modes.

A blue MOD icon

䊊

is displayed in the view

where the MOD system is operative. A gray

MOD icon is displayed in the view where the

MOD system is not operative.

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD

icon

䊊

is not displayed.

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF

Some vehicles include the option to allow

the MOD system to be turned on or off in

the vehicle information display.

To turn the MOD system on or off:

1. Using either the

or menu con-

trol switch on the steering wheel to se-

lect “Settings” and press the OK button.

2. Select “Driver Assistance” and press the

OK button.

3. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK

button.

4. Toggle ON or OFF “Moving Object” using

the OK button.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for MOD. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these sys-

tem limitations could result in serious

injury or death.

• Do not use the MOD system when

towing a trailer. The system may not

function properly.

• Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume or open vehicle win-

dow) will interfere with the chime

sound, and it may not be heard.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

• The MOD system performance will

be limited according to environmen-

tal conditions and surrounding ob-

jects such as:

– When there is low contrast be-

tween background and the mov-

ing objects.

– When there is a blinking source of

light.

– When strong light such as another

vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is

present.

– When camera orientation is not in

its usual position, such as when a

mirror is folded.

– When there is dirt, water drops or

snow on the camera lens.

– When the position of the moving

objects in the display is not

changed.

• The MOD system might detect flow-

ing water droplets on the camera

lens, white smoke from the muffler,

moving shadows, etc.

• The MOD system may not function

properly depending on the speed,

direction, distance or shape of the

moving objects.

• If your vehicle sustains damage to

the parts where the camera is in-

stalled, leaving it misaligned or bent,

the sensing zone may be altered and

the MOD system may not detect ob-

jects properly.

• When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not dis-

play objects clearly. This is not a

malfunction.

NOTE:

The blue MOD icon will change to orange

if one of the following has occurred:

• When the system is malfunctioning.

• When the component temperature

reaches a high level (icon will blink).

If the icon light continues to illuminate

orange, have the MOD system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin-

ner to clean the camera. This will

cause discoloration.

• Do not damage the cameras as the

monitor screen may be adversely af-

fected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of

the cameras

䊊

, the Intelligent Around

View Monitor may not display objects

clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a

cloth dampened with a diluted mild clean-

ing agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Open/close the vents by moving the vent

slide in the appropriate direction.

: This symbol indicates that the vents

are closed.

: This symbol indicates that the vents

are open.

Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by

moving the vent slide (up/down) until the

desired position is achieved.

Side vent

Center Vent

VENTS

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

WARNING

• The air conditioning cooling func-

tion operates only when the power

switch is in the ON position or when

the READY to drive indicator light is

ON.

• Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadver-

tent operation of the vehicle. Also,

on hot, sunny days, temperatures in

a closed vehicle could quickly be-

come high enough to causes severe

or possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals.

• Do not use the recirculation mode

for long periods as it may cause the

interior air to become stale and the

windows to fog up.

NOTE:

• Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air conditioner

unit. Odor can enter the passenger

compartment through the vents.

• When parking, set the heater or air con-

ditioner controls to turn off air recircu-

lation to allow fresh air into the passen-

ger compartment. This should help

reduce odors inside the vehicle.

The climate control system (air conditioner

and heater functions) can be operated

when the READY to drive indicator light is

illuminated. However, while charging, the

climate control system can be used when

the power switch is in the ON position.

The fan, heater and air conditioning can be

turned on manually, using the timer func-

tion and using the remote climate control

function.

These functions operate in the following

conditions.

Power switch position LOCK/OFF ACC ON READY to drive

Fan - - Available Available

Heater and air conditioner - - Available*1 Available

Timer (Climate Ctrl. Timer) Available Available - -

Remote control*2 Available Available - -

*1: The climate control system will only start when charging is being performed. After charging is complete, it will continue to operate if the EVSE (Electric Vehicle

Supply Equipment) is connected.

*2: Models with Navigation System.

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(AUTOMATIC)

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

• A series of operation sounds may be

heard immediately after climate con-

trol ON/OFF operation. This is not a mal-

function.

• Compressor and motor fan may sud-

denly start to operate during charging

operation. This is not a malfunction.

• Condensation forms inside the air con-

ditioning unit when the air conditioner

is running, and is safely discharged un-

derneath your vehicle. Traces of water

on the ground are therefore normal.

Water may drop underneath the vehicle

when climate control is operating.

DISPLAYING CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

STATUS SCREEN (MODELS WITH NAVIGA-

TION SYSTEM)

Touch the Info key on the display screen,

then touch the “Climate Control and Audio”

key to display the climate control system

status on the display screen. For additional

information, please refer to the separate

LEAF Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

NOTE:

• If the READY to drive indicator light is

illuminated and the EVSE (Electric Ve-

hicle Supply Equipment) is connected

to the vehicle, the power switch will

change to the ON position. At the same

time, the climate control system will

stop operating. However, the fan will

continue to operate. If you want to turn

on climate control again, place the

power switch in the OFF position and

then place it in the ON position again

after confirming that the vehicle has

started charging.

• When the power switch is in the ON po-

sition, if the power supply from the EVSE

(Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment) is

interrupted due to an electrical outage,

etc., the system will operate in the fol-

lowing ways.

– If it occurs while charging is being

performed:

The climate control system will stop

once. If the power supply is restored

within approximately 5 minutes, the

climate control system will restart.

However, if more than 5 minutes

have elapsed, the climate control

system will not restart.

– If it occurs after charging has fin-

ished:

The climate control system will stop.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

OPERATING TIPS

• The automatic climate control is

equipped with sensors as illustrated. The

sensors

䊊

and

䊊

help maintain a con-

stant temperature. Do not put anything

on or around these sensors.

•

Power consumption of the climate control

system varies depending on the outside

temperature and the temperature set for

the climate control system. Power con-

sumption increases if the interior tempera-

ture is cooled down too much in summer or

if it warmed up too much in winter. This will

result in a reduced driving range.

• Using the AUTO mode will help reduce the

power consumption of the climate

control.

• When the AUTO button is pressed, the

AUTO indicator illuminates. The

HEAT

button indicator and the A/C button indi-

cator lights turn off.

• If any of the MODE, A/C,

HEAT,

fan speed control,

front defroster is

pushed when the AUTO indicator illumi-

nates, the AUTO indicator will be turned

off.

• If the charge connector is connected to

the vehicle when it is in the READY to drive

mode and the air conditioner or heater is

on, the power switch automatically

changes to the ON position. The climate

control system automatically turns off the

heater or air conditioner and switches to

the air recirculation mode. Place the

power switch in the off position to begin

charging. Turn on the desired climate con-

trol function.

• For normal charge, the climate control

system is operative when charging opera-

tion is complete. For quick charge how-

ever, the climate control system stops op-

erating when charging operation stops.

• The climate control timer or remote cli-

mate control (for models with Navigation

System) may fog up windows depending

on the set temperature (for models with

Navigation System) or outside

temperature.

• When turning on the seat heater switch

prior to operating the climate control

timer or the remote climate control (for

models with Navigation System), the seat

heater will also turn on automatically

when the outside temperature is low.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The climate control system is equipped

with an in-cabin microfilter which collects

dirt, dust etc. To make sure the air condi-

tioner heats defogs, and ventilates effi-

ciently, replace the filter regularly. To re-

place the filter, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

The filter should be replaced if the air

flow decreases significantly or if win-

dows fog up easily when operating the

climate control system.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

(MODELS WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM)

1. fan speed control dial

intake air control button

front defroster button

4. Climate Ctrl. display

Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch

6. Temperature control dial

7. AUTO climate control ON button

8. A/C (air conditioner) button

9. MODE (manual air flow control) button

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

10. HEAT button

11. Climate control system OFF button

Automatic operation (AUTO)

The AUTO mode may be used year-round

as the system automatically controls con-

stant temperature, air flow distribution and

fan speed.

1. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indica-

tor will be illuminated.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

When any of the following functions are

operated, the AUTO indicator will turn off.

• The

HEAT or A/C button is pressed.

• The fan speed control or ventilator air flow

control is operated.

However, the functions that were not oper-

ated continue operating in AUTO mode.

NOTE:

• If the fan speed control dial, MODE

button, or

intake air control button

is operated while AUTO is in use, all the

other buttons operate in AUTO mode.

• While the AUTO indicator is illuminated,

electric power consumption of the air

conditioner can be economized com-

pared to the amount consumed while

the AUTO indicator is not illuminated.

The HEAT indicator light and the A/C indi-

cator light illuminates according to the op-

eration modes of the climate control sys-

tem.

Operation

mode

A/C

indicator

HEAT

indicator

Cooling

(HEAT off)

ON OFF

Heating (A/C

off)

OFF ON

Manual operation

The manual mode can be used to control

the heater and air conditioner to your de-

sired temperature.

The HEAT indicator light and the A/C indi-

cator light illuminates according to the op-

eration modes.

Operation

mode

A/C

indicator

HEAT

indicator

Cooling

(HEAT off)

ON OFF

Operation

mode

A/C

indicator

HEAT

indicator

Dehumidi-

fied heating

ON ON

Heating (A/C

off)

OFF ON

Ventilation OFF OFF

Cooling:

1. Press the A/C button to illuminate the

A/C indicator light.

2. Press the

HEAT button to turn off

the HEAT indicator light.

• Do not set the temperature higher than

the outside air temperature. Doing so may

prevent the temperature from being con-

trolled properly.

• A visible mist may be seen coming from

the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as

the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indi-

cate a malfunction.

Dehumidified heating:

1. Press the A/C button to illuminate the

A/C indicator light.

2. Press the

HEAT button to illuminate

the HEAT indicator light

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

Electric power consumption of climate

control increases while A/C button indi-

cator and

HEAT button indicator si-

multaneously illuminate. As a result, the

driving range may be decreased.

Heating (A/C off):

1. Press the

HEAT button to illuminate

the HEAT indicator light.

2. Press the A/C button to turn off the A/C

indicator light.

• Do not set temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Doing so may

prevent the temperature from being con-

trolled properly.

• If the windows fog up, use dehumidified

heating instead of the A/C off heating.

Ventilation:

Press the

HEAT button and A/C but-

ton if the indicator lights are on so that

both indicator lights turn off.

NOTE:

• The ventilation mode requires a lower

power consumption, so cruising dis-

tance will increase.

• In ventilation mode, temperature is not

indicated on the air conditioner display.

Dehumidified defrosting/defogging:

Press the

front defroster button (the

indicator light will illuminate).

• To remove moisture or fog on the front

window quickly, set the temperature to

the high temperature and the fan speed

to their maximum level.

• After the windshield is cleared, press the

front defroster button again (the in-

dicator light will turn off).

• When the

front defroster button is

pressed, the air conditioner will automati-

cally turn on to defog the windshield. The

outside air recirculation mode will be se-

lected to improve the defogging

performance.

Fan speed control:

Turn the

fan speed control dial to

manually control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to change the fan

speed to the automatic mode.

Air flow control:

Press the MODE button to change the air

flow mode.

—

Air flows from the center and side

ventilators.

—

Air flows from the center and side

ventilators and foot outlets.

—

Air flows mainly from the foot

outlets.

—

Air flows from the defroster out-

lets and foot outlets.

—

Air flows from the defroster vents.

Temperature control:

Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

Recirculation:

Press the

intake air control button to

change the air circulation mode. When the

indicator light illuminates, the flowing air is

recirculated inside the vehicle.

When the outside temperature exceeds

70°F (21°C) the air conditioning system may

default to air recirculation mode automati-

cally to reduce overall power consumption.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

To exit air recirculation mode, deselect the

air recirculation button (indicator will turn

off) to enter fresh mode.

Fresh air:

Press the

intake air control button to

change the air circulation mode. When the

indicator light does not illuminate, the flow-

ing air is drawn from outside the vehicle.

Automatic air intake control:

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be

controlled automatically. When the outside

temperature exceeds 70°F (21°C), the air

conditioning system may default to air re-

circulation mode automatically to reduce

overall power consumption.

To set the automatic control mode, press

and hold the

intake air control button.

The indicator light will blink twice and the

inside/outside circulation will then be con-

trolled automatically. When in automatic

mode, the indicator light will come on when

inside air recirculation is active.

Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch:

For additional information, refer to “Rear

window and outside mirror (if so equipped)

defroster switch” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual

To turn the system off

To turn off the climate control, press the

Climate control system OFF button. The

same operating mode (Heater or A/C) that

was active when the system is turned off is

active when system is turned back on.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

(MODELS WITH NAVIGATION

SYSTEM)

1. Temperature control button

HEAT button

3. Climate Ctrl. Timer indicator

front defroster button

fan speed control button

Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch

intake air control button

8. Climate control system ON·OFF button

9. AUTO climate control ON button

10. MODE (manual air flow control) button

11. A/C (air conditioner) ON·OFF button

Automatic operation (AUTO)

The AUTO mode may be used year-round

as the system automatically controls con-

stant temperature, air flow distribution and

fan speed.

1. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indica-

tor will be illuminated.

2. Press the temperature control button to

set the desired temperature.

When any of the following functions are

operated, the AUTO indicator will turn off.

• The

HEAT or A/C button is pressed.

• The fan speed control or ventilator air flow

control is operated.

However, the functions that were not oper-

ated continue operating in AUTO mode.

NOTE:

• If the fan speed control button,

MODE button, or

intake air control

button is operated while AUTO is in use,

all the other buttons operate in AUTO

mode.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

• While the AUTO indicator is illuminated,

electric power consumption of the air

conditioner can be economized com-

pared to the amount consumed while

the AUTO indicator is not illuminated.

The HEAT indicator light and the A/C indi-

cator light illuminates according to the op-

eration modes of the climate control sys-

tem.

Operation

mode

A/C

indicator

HEAT

indicator

Cooling

(HEAT off)

ON OFF

Heating (A/C

off)

OFF ON

Manual operation

The manual mode can be used to control

the heater and air conditioner to your de-

sired temperature.

The HEAT indicator light and the A/C indi-

cator light illuminates according to the op-

eration modes.

Operation

mode

A/C

indicator

HEAT

indicator

Cooling

(HEAT off)

ON OFF

Dehumidi-

fied heating

ON ON

Heating (A/C

off)

OFF ON

Ventilation OFF OFF

Cooling:

1. Press the A/C button to illuminate the

A/C indicator light.

2. Press the

HEAT button to turn off

the HEAT indicator light.

• Do not set the temperature higher than

the outside air temperature. Doing so may

prevent the temperature from being con-

trolled properly.

• A visible mist may be seen coming from

the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as

the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indi-

cate a malfunction.

Dehumidified heating:

1. Press the A/C button to illuminate the

A/C indicator light.

2. Press the

HEAT button to illuminate

the HEAT indicator light

NOTE:

Electric power consumption of climate

control increases while A/C button indi-

cator and

HEAT button indicator si-

multaneously illuminate. As a result, the

driving range may be decreased.

Heating (A/C off):

1. Press the

HEAT button to illuminate

the HEAT indicator light.

2. Press the A/C button to turn off the A/C

indicator light.

• Do not set temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Doing so may

prevent the temperature from being con-

trolled properly.

• If the windows fog up, use dehumidified

heating instead of the A/C off heating.

Ventilation:

Press the

HEAT button and A/C but-

ton if the indicator lights are on so that

both indicator lights turn off.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

• The ventilation mode requires a lower

power consumption, so cruising dis-

tance will increase.

• In ventilation mode, temperature is not

indicated on the navigation monitor or

on the air conditioner display.

Dehumidified defrosting/defogging:

Press the

front defroster button (the

indicator light will illuminate).

• To remove moisture or fog on the front

window quickly, set the temperature to

the high temperature and the fan speed

to their maximum level.

• After the windshield is cleared, press the

front defroster button again (the in-

dicator light will turn off).

• When the

front defroster button is

pressed, the air conditioner and heater will

automatically turn on to defog the wind-

shield. The outside air recirculation mode

will be selected to improve the defogging

performance.

Fan speed control:

Press the

fan speed control button to

manually control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to change the fan

speed to the automatic mode.

Air flow control:

Press the MODE button to change the air

flow mode.

—

Air flows from the center and

side ventilators.

—

Air flows from the center and

side ventilators and foot outlets.

—

Air flows mainly from the foot

outlets.

—

Air flows from the defroster out-

lets and foot outlets.

—

Air flows from the defroster

vents.

Temperature control:

Press the temperature control buttons to

set the desired temperature.

Air recirculation:

Press the

intake air control button to

change the air circulation mode. When the

indicator light illuminates, the flowing air is

recirculated inside the vehicle.

When the outside temperature exceeds

70°F (21°C) the air conditioning system may

default to air recirculation mode automati-

cally to reduce overall power consumption.

To exit air recirculation mode, deselect the

air recirculation button (indicator will turn

off) to enter fresh mode.

Outside air circulation:

Press the

intake air control button to

change the air circulation mode. When the

indicator light does not illuminate, the flow-

ing air is drawn from outside the vehicle.

Automatic air intake control:

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be

controlled automatically. When the outside

temperature exceeds 70°F (21°C), the air

conditioning system may default to air re-

circulation mode automatically to reduce

overall power consumption.

To set the automatic control mode, press

and hold the

intake air control button.

The indicator light will blink twice and the

inside/outside circulation will then be con-

trolled automatically. When in automatic

mode, the indicator light will come on when

inside air recirculation is active.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch:

For additional information, refer to “Rear

window and outside mirror (if so equipped)

defroster switch” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual

To turn the system off

To turn off the climate control, press the

Climate control system ON·OFF button.

The same operating mode (Heater or A/C)

that was active when the system is turned

off is active when system is turned back on.

CLIMATE CTRL. TIMER

This function pre-heats or pre-cools the

passenger compartment of the vehicle to

the temperature before driving. This helps

reduce power consumption from the Li-ion

battery.

The Climate Ctrl. Timer operates the air

conditioner using power from the charger

or the Li-ion battery. While the charging

connector is connected to the vehicle,

electric power from the Li-ion battery is not

used.

The Climate Ctrl. Timer function allows two

timer settings.

Once the Climate Ctrl. Timer is set, it will

complete air conditioning by the time that

is set. It is not necessary to set the Climate

Ctrl. Timer every day.

*models with Navigation System

WARNING

Even if the Climate Ctrl. Timer is set, the

temperature in the passenger com-

partment may become high or low if

the system automatically stops. Do not

leave children or adults who would

normally require the support of others

alone in your vehicle. Pets should not

be left alone either. On hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals. Also on cold days,

temperature in a vehicle could become

low enough to cause severe or pos-

sible fatal injuries to people or animals.

How to set Climate Ctrl. Timer

1. OK button

button

3. Back button

button

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Push the

button to select “Set-

tings” on the vehicle information display.

2. Push the

button to select “EV

Settings” and then push the OK button.

3. Push the

button to select “Cli-

mate Ctrl. Timer1” or “Climate Ctrl.

Timer2” and then push the OK button.

4. Push the

button to select

“Timer” and then push the OK button

and turn on the setting. The indicator

light will turn on when the timer setting

is turned on.

5. Push the

button to select “De-

parture time” and then push the OK button.

6. Push the button to set “Hour”

and then push the OK button.

7. Push the

button to set “Minute”

and then push the OK button. The set-

ting can be changed with an increment

step of 10 minutes.

8. Push the

button to select “Cli-

mate Temperature” and then push the

OK button.

9. Push the

button to set Climate

Temperature and then push the OK

button.

10. * Push the

button to select

"Days" and then push the OK button.

The current day of the week is dis-

played with an underline.

Push the

button to select the

days of the week you wish to activate

the Climate Control system and then

push the OK button. The indicator light

of the selected button will turn on.

11. * After setting the day of the week, push

the Back button and return to the pre-

vious screen.

The set day of the week is lit in white.

12. After the setting is complete, place the

power switch in the OFF position, and

then connect the charge connector to

the vehicle.

* models with Navigation System

INFO

The Climate Ctrl. Timer does not activate if

the charge connector is not connected to

the vehicle. When the “Battery Operation

OK” is turned on and the charging connec-

tor is not connected to the vehicle, the Cli-

mate Ctrl. Timer will activate for 15 minutes.

When the outside temperature is high, the

interior temperature may not reach the set

temperature within the 15 minutes.

Turn "Battery Operation OK" to OFF when it

is not necessar y to operate air condition-

ing timer in order to prevent Li-ion battery

from discharging.

For models without Navigation System, the

Climate Ctrl. Timer operates repeatedly ev-

ery day once it is turned on.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

Operating tips for using Climate

Ctrl. Timer

• The Climate Ctrl. Timer will only start when

the power switch is in the LOCK/OFF or

ACC position.

• To turn off the Climate Ctrl. Timer function,

turn off the “Climate Ctrl. Timer1” and "Cli-

mate Ctrl. Timer2" setting in the video in-

formation display using the

but-

ton on the steering wheel. The start and

stop time settings will not be deleted even

if the Climate Ctrl. Timer function is turned

off.

• While the Climate Ctrl. Timer is operating,

the Climate Ctrl. Timer indicator and the

charging status indicator lights flash. If the

Climate Ctrl. Timer is set to activate, the

Climate Ctrl. Timer indicator illuminates.*

• If the Climate Ctrl. Timer starts operating

while the vehicle is being charged, the

time required for charging will be longer.

• Operating the Climate Ctrl. Timer or re-

mote climate control in an environment

where the temperature is low may de-

crease the rate of battery charge.

• Timer setting can also be changed while

Climate Ctrl. Timer is operated. When the

power position is switched to OFF, the air

conditioner starts or enters waiting mode

depending on the new timer settings.

• When the difference in temperature be-

tween the air conditioner setting tem-

perature and the temperature outside the

vehicle is large, the temperature inside the

vehicle may not be maintained at the set-

ting temperature.

• The charging status indicator lights illumi-

nate in a specific pattern when the Li-ion

battery warmer operates. The charging

status indicator lights use the same pat-

tern to indicate 12–volt battery charging,

Climate Ctrl. Timer operation or Remote

Climate Control operation. The charging

status indicator lights do not change if the

Li-ion battery warmer operates at the

same time as the above features.

• The temperature in the passenger com-

partment may not be comfortable if en-

tering the vehicle too soon before or too

long after the scheduled time of

departure.

• Air conditioning is limited to the capacity

of the electric power when the charge

connector is connected. Therefore, the

temperature may not reach the set tem-

perature due to limitations in air condi-

tioning performance, if ambient tempera-

ture is excessively high or low, or if the

charge connector is connected to a 120–

volt plug outlet.

• The Climate Ctrl. Timer operates the cli-

mate control function so that a comfort-

able temperature is provided in the pas-

senger compartment at the scheduled

time of departure. The climate control is

set to stop at the scheduled time of

departure.

• Depending on the facilities of charging

station, there may be time when it is not

available for charging. Confirm the avail-

ability of the charging facility before set-

ting the Climate Ctrl. Timer. Be sure that

the power switch of the charger is turned

on when setting the Climate Ctrl. Timer.

• When the power switch is turned OFF af-

ter changing the setting, the new setting

will be applied.

*models with Navigation System

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Remote climate control

This vehicle incorporates a communica-

tion device that is called a TCU (Telematics

Control Unit). The communication connec-

tion between this unit and Nissan Data

Center allows for various remote function

services.

Even when away from the vehicle, climate

control can be started by accessing the

Nissan Data Center website using a cellular

phone or a personal computer.

When operation is started, or at the set

start time, the Nissan Data Center ac-

cesses the vehicle. When the vehicle re-

ceives a command for remote operation,

the climate control immediately turns ON

and operates for the specified period of

time. Confirmation of the ON/OFF of the

climate control operation can be checked

by accessing the website or by e-mail.

Completing registration for the

NissanConnect® EV and Services is neces-

sary before using the service. For additional

information, refer to the separate LEAF

Navigation System Owner's Manual.

WARNING

• Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. For ad-

ditional information, refer to your

electric medical equipment manu-

facturer for the possible effect on

pacemakers before using the re-

mote climate control.

• Even if the remote climate control is

set, the temperature in the passen-

ger room may become high if the

system automatically stops. Do not

leave children or adults who would

normally require the support of oth-

ers alone in your vehicle. Pets should

not be left alone either. On hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a

closed vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or pos-

sibly fatal injuries to people or ani-

mals.

NOTE:

• To check the Li-ion battery charging

status using an internet enabled smart

phone or personal computer.

– The vehicle must be located in a cel-

lular phone coverage area.

– The cellular phone must be located

in an area with cellular phone cover-

age.

– The computer must be connected to

the internet.

• Some cellular phones are not compat-

ible with this system and cannot be

used to check the Li-ion battery charg-

ing status. Confirm this beforehand.

Operating tips

• When the charge connector is connected,

the climate control operates using electric

power. When the charge connector is dis-

connected from the vehicle, the climate

control operates using vehicle battery

electric power.

• The climate control can be operated for a

maximum of 2 hours when the charge

connector is connected to the vehicle, or a

maximum of 15 minutes when the charge

connector is disconnected.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

• The remote climate control will only start

to operate when the power switch is in the

LOCK/OFF or ACC position.

• Remote climate control operation is not

available when the vehicle is in an area of

cellular communication range.

• Communication becomes unavailable

when the vehicle is not used for two

weeks or more. When the power switch is

placed in the ON position, communication

with the Nissan Data Center can be

restored.

• Air conditioning is limited to the capacity

of the electric power when the charge

connector is connected to the vehicle.

Therefore, the temperature may not reach

a comfortable level due to performance of

the air conditioning being limited, if the

outside temperature is excessively high or

low, or if the charge connector is con-

nected to a 110 – 120-volt outlet.

• If the power switch is in the ON position or

the charge connector is disconnected,

while the remote climate control is being

operated, remote climate control opera-

tion is automatically stopped and an

e-mail is sent.

• If remote climate control operation is

started while the vehicle is in normal

charge mode, the climate control oper-

ates in climate control priority mode and

charging is continued.

• If remote climate control operation is

started and charging is stopped while the

vehicle is in quick charge mode, climate

control operation is also stopped.

• If the quick charge connector is con-

nected and charging is not performed, re-

mote climate control operation starts us-

ing the battery electric power of the

vehicle.

SERVICING CLIMATE CONTROL

The climate control system in your NISSAN

is charged with a refrigerant designed with

the environment in mind. This refrigerant

will not harm the earth’s ozone layer. Spe-

cial charging equipment and lubricant are

required when servicing your NISSAN cli-

mate control. Using improper refrigerants

or lubricants will cause severe damage to

your climate control system. For additional

information, refer to “Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer to service your envi-

ronmentally friendly climate control

system.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

RADIO

Push the power switch to the ACC or ON

position and press the radio band select

button to turn on the radio. If you listen to

the radio while the READY to drive indicator

light is off, the power switch should be

pushed to the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station sig-

nal strength, distance from radio transmit-

ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other

external influences. Intermittent changes

in reception quality normally are caused by

these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-

hicle may influence radio reception qual-

ity.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en-

hance radio reception. These circuits are

designed to extend reception range, and to

enhance the quality of that reception.

However, there are some general charac-

teristics of both FM and AM radio signals

that can affect radio reception quality in a

moving vehicle, even when the finest

equipment is used. These characteristics

are completely normal in a given reception

area and do not indicate any malfunction

in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly

change because of vehicle movement.

Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter-

ference from other vehicles can work

against ideal reception. Described below

are some of the factors that can affect your

radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 –

30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single

channel) FM having slightly more range

than stereo FM. External influences may

sometimes interfere with FM station re-

ception even if the FM station is within

25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal

is directly related to the distance between

the transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol-

low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of

the same characteristics as light. For ex-

ample, they will reflect off objects.

AUDIO SYSTEM (MODELS WITHOUT

NAVIGATION SYSTEM)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away

from a station transmitter, the signals will

tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interfer-

ence from buildings, large hills or due to

antenna position (usually in conjunction

with increased distance from the station

transmitter), static or flutter can be heard.

This can be reduced by adjusting the treble

control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflec-

tive characteristics of FM signals, direct and

reflected signals reach the receiver at the

same time. The signals may cancel each

other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss

of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency,

can bend around objects and skip along

the ground. In addition, the signals can be

bounced off the ionosphere and bent back

to earth. Because of these characteristics,

AM signals are also subject to interference

as they travel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas

with many tall buildings. It can also occur

for several seconds during ionospheric tur-

bulence even in areas where no obstacles

exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic

lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION

When the satellite radio is used for the first

time or the battery has been replaced, the

satellite radio may not work properly. This

is not a malfunction. Wait more than

10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the

vehicle outside of any metal or large build-

ing for satellite radio to receive all of the

necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available and

“NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT band

option is selected unless optional satellite

receiver and antenna are installed and a

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscrip-

tion is active. Satellite radio is not available

in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be af-

fected if cargo carried on the roof blocks

the satellite radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satel-

lite antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio an-

tenna can affect satellite radio perfor-

mance. Remove the ice to restore satellite

radio reception.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

• Do not force a compact disc into the

CD insert slot. This could damage

the CD and/or CD player.

• Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or

CD player.

• Only one CD can be loaded into the

CD player at a time.

• Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or

packaging.

• During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the hu-

midity. If this occurs, remove the CD and

dehumidify or ventilate the player

completely.

• The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

• The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high or low. Decrease/

increase the temperature before use.

• Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

• CDs that are in poor condition or are

dirty, scratched or covered with finger-

prints may not work properly.

• The following CDs may not work

properly.

– Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

– Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

– Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

• Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to

malfunction:

– 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

– CDs that are not round

– CDs with a paper label

– CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

• This audio system can only play prere-

corded CDs. It has no capability to re-

cord or burn CDs.

• If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

• Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly

(the label side is facing up, etc.).

• Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-

perature inside the player. Remove the

CD by pressing the EJECT button. After a

short time, reinsert the CD. The CD can be

played when the temperature of the

player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-

tem (only MP3 orWMA(if so equipped)

CD).

Compressed audio files

(MP3/WMA)

Terms

• MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well-known compressed digital au-

dio file format. This format allows for near

“CD quality” sound, but at a fraction of the

size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion

of an audio track from CD-ROM can re-

duce the file size by approximately a

10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss

in quality. MP3 compression removes the

redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound

signal that the human ear doesn’t hear.

• WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a

compressed audio format created by Mi-

crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression

than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of

more digital audio tracks in the same

amount of space when compared to

MP3s at the same level of quality.

• Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digi-

tal audio file is determined by the bit rate

used when encoding the file.

• Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-

quency is the rate at which the samples of

a signal are converted from analog to digi-

tal (A/D conversion) per second.

• Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is

called a multisession.

• ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital

music file such as song title, artist, encod-

ing bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag

information is displayed on the Artist/

song title line on the display.

* Windows® and Windows Media® are reg-

istered trademarks and trademarks in the

United States of America and other coun-

tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Playback order

Musical playback order of a CD with MP3 or

WMA files is as illustrated.

• The names of folders not containing

MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the

display.

• If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

• The playback order is the order in which

the files were written by the writing soft-

ware. Therefore, the files might not play in

the desired order.

Playback order chart

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

Specification chart

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not sup-

ported.

Supported versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling fre-

quency

8kHz-48kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling fre-

quency

32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only) VER2.4

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Displayable character codes*2

01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big En-

dian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8)

*1 Files created with a combination of

48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit

rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of

media, versions and information are going

to be displayed.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using

the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will

be played.

Files with ex tensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and

number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long time before

the music starts playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required be-

fore the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc.,

might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to the next song

when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by

Songs do not play back in the desired

order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play

in the desired order.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

connection port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

• Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure

that the USB device is connected

correctly into the USB port.

• Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

• Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintention-

ally. Pulling the cable may damage

the port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de-

vice. USB devices should be purchased

separately as necessary. This system can-

not be used to format USB devices. To for-

mat a USB device, use a personal com-

puter. In some states/area, the USB device

for the front seats plays only sound without

images for regulatory reasons, even when

the vehicle is parked.

This system supports various USB

memory devices, USB hard drives and

iPod® players. Some USB devices may not

be supported by this system.

Partitioned USB devices may not play cor-

rectly.

Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear

properly in the display. Using English lan-

guage characters with a USB device is rec-

ommended.

General notes for USB use:

For additional information refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

Notes for iPod® use:

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

• Improperly plugging in the iPod® may

cause a checkmark to be displayed on

and off (flickering). Always make sure that

the iPod® is connected properly.

• An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re-

main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is

connected during a seek operation. In this

case, please manually reset the iPod®.

• An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con-

tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is dis-

connected during a seek operation.

• An incorrect song title may appear when

the Play Mode is changed while using an

iPod® nano (2nd Generation).

• Audiobooks may not play in the same or-

der as they appear on an iPod®.

• Large video files cause slow responses in

an iPod®. The vehicle center display may

momentarily black out, but will soon

recover.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

• If an iPod® automatically selects large

video files while in the shuffle mode, the

vehicle center display may momentarily

black out, but will soon recover.

Bluetooth® streaming audio

• Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not

be recognized by the in-vehicle audio

system.

• It is necessary to set up the wireless con-

nection between a compatible

Bluetooth® audio device and the in-

vehicle Bluetooth® module before using

the Bluetooth® audio.

• Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®

audio will vary depending on the devices.

Make sure how to operate your audio de-

vice before using it with this system.

• The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped

under the following conditions:

– Receiving a call on the Hands-Free

Phone System.

– Checking the connection to the hands-

free phone.

• Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device

in an area surrounded by metal or far

away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth® mod-

ule to prevent tone quality degradation

and wireless connection disruption.

• While an audio device is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless connec-

tion, the battery power of the device may

discharge quicker than usual.

• This system supports the Bluetooth® Au-

dio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed

to Visteon.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER

1. CD eject button

2. RPT (repeat) button

3. RDM (random) button

4. Display screen

5. SCAN button

6. SEEK/CAT button

7. iPod MENU button

BACK button

9. ENTER/SETTING button / TUNE/

SCROLL knob

10. Station select (1–6) buttons

11.

(power) button /VOL (volume)

control knob

12. DISP button

13. MEDIA button

14. XM button*

15. FM·AM button

*No satellite radio reception is available

when the XM button is pressed to access

satellite radio stations unless optional sat-

ellite receiver and antenna are installed

and a SiriusXM® Satellite radio service sub-

scription is active, Satellite radio is not avail-

able in Alaska, Hawaii, and Guam.

For additional information, refer to “Audio

operation precautions” regarding all opera-

tion precautions in this section.

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio main operation

(Power)/VOL (Volume) control knob

Place the power switch in the ACC or ON

position, and then press the

button

while the system is off to turn on the last

audio source, which was playing immedi-

ately before the system was turned off.

While the system is on, pressing the

button turns the system off.

Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the

volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with speed

sensitive volume. When this feature is ac-

tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-

ing speed changes.

ENTER/SETTING button

When the audio screen is displayed, press

the ENTER/SETTING button to show the

Settings screen on the display. Turn the

TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the op-

tions and then press the ENTER/SETTING

button to make a selection.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

Audio

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right

speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear

speakers.

Brightness Adjust the brightness to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Contrast Adjust the contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Clock Adjust Allows the user to set time manually. To set the clock:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select CLOCK.

3. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select “set time”.

5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

6. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust hours.

7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

8. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust minutes.

9. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

10. Press the

BACK button to finish.

On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.

RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.

Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as

the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the

more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliar y device volume. A setting of

0 provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.

Language Select Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be

adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING

button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL con-

trol knob to select the item to adjust. When

the desired item is shown on the display,

turn the tuning to adjust and then press

the ENTER/SETTING button until the dis-

play returns to the main audio screen. If the

button is not pressed for approximately

10 seconds, the radio or CD display will au-

tomatically reappear.

DISP button

Display of the screen can be canceled by

pressing the DISP button. You can then lis-

ten to music that is being played back. If

you want to display the screen again, either

press the DISP button once more or press

the FM·AM, XM Satellite Radio or CD·AUX

button.

MEDIA button

Pressing the MEDIA button will switch the

displays as follows:

iPod®/USB→Bluetooth

Audio→AUX→CD→iPod®/USB

BACK button

When the BACK button is pressed, it returns

to the previous display.

iPod MENU button

Press the iPod MENU button while the

iPod® is connected to show the iPod® op-

eration menu on the audio display. Scroll

through the menu list using the TUNE/

SCROLL knob. Press the ENTER/SETTING

button to select a menu item.

For additional information, refer to the

iPod® Owner’s Manual.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM∙AM band select

Pressing the radio band select button will

change the band as follows:

AM→FM1→FM2→AM

XM band select

Pressing the XM band select button will

change the band as follows:

XM1→XM2→XM3→XM1

When the XM band select button is pressed

while the power switch is in the ACC or ON

position, the radio will come on at the

channel last played.

The last station played will also come on

when the

button is pressed to radio

ON.

*When the XM button is pressed, the satel-

lite radio mode will be skipped unless a

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscrip-

tion is active. Satellite radio is not available

in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the XM

button is pressed, the compact disc will

automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will come on.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or

right for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning

Press the SEEK/CAT

or button or

to tune from low to high or high to low

frequencies and to stop at the next broad-

casting station.

SCAN tuning

Press the SCAN button to stop at each

broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN

will appear on the screen while the radio is

scan tuning.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

Pressing the button again during this

5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and

the radio will remain tuned to that station. If

the SCAN button is not pressed within

5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for the AM band.

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band

(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2). Eighteen channels can

be set for the satellite radio (6 for XM1, 6 for

XM2, 6 for XM3).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or

FM2 using the FM·AM select button, or

choose the satellite band XM1, XM2 or

XM3 using the XM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using

manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and

hold any of the desired station memory

buttons (1 – 6) until the preset number is

updated on the display and the sound is

briefly muted.

3. The channel indicator will then come on

and the sound will resume. Program-

ming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-

celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-

tions.

Compact disc (CD) player

operation

Place the power switch in the ACC or ON

position and insert the Compact Disc (CD)

into the slot with the label side facing up.

The CD will be guided automatically into

the slot and start playing.

After loading the CD, the number of tracks

on the CD and the play time will appear on

the display.

If the radio is already operating, it will auto-

matically turn off and the CD will play.

If the system has been turned off while the

CD was playing, pressing the

(power)

button will start the CD.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.

SEEK/CAT buttons

When the FF or REW button is pressed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is be-

ing played, the CD will play while fast for-

warding or rewinding. When the button is

released, the CD will return to normal play

speed.

When the FF or REW button is pressed for

less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being

played, the next track or the beginning of

the current track on the CD will be played.

Repeat (RPT)

When the RPT play button is pressed while

the CD is played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

(CD)

Normal↔1 Track Repeat

(CD with compressed audio files)

Normal→1 Folder Repeat→1 Track Repeat-

→Normal

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Random (RDM)

When the RDM play button is pressed while

a CD is being played, the play pattern can

be changed as follows:

(CD)

Normal↔1 Disc Random

(CD with compressed audio files)

Normal→1 Disc Random→1 Folder Ran-

dom→Normal

CD eject

When the CD eject button is pressed with a

compact disc loaded, the CD will be

ejected.

When this button is pressed while the CD is

being played, the CD will be ejected.

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it

will be pulled back into the slot to protect it.

AUX IN jack

The AUX IN jack is located beneath the

heater and air conditioner controls. The

AUX IN audio jack accepts any standard

analog audio input such as from a portable

cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or lap-

top computer.

MEDIA

With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button

until the CD mode is displayed on the

screen. Pressing the MEDIA button repeat-

edly will maneuver through CD, USB,

Bluetooth® Audio and AUX modes.

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain

text may be displayed on the screen if the

CD has been encoded with the text infor-

mation. Depending on how the MP3/WMA

CD is encoded, information such as artist,

song and folder will be displayed.

The track number and total number of

tracks in the current folder or on the cur-

rent disc are displayed on the screen as

well.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)

If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is

playing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to

change folders. Turn the knob to the left to

skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right

to skip ahead a folder.

Additional features

For additional information about the iPod®

player available with this system, refer to

“iPod® player operation” in this section.

For additional information about the USB

(Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port

available with this system, refer to “USB

(Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port Op-

eration” in this section.

For additional information about the

Bluetooth® audio interface available with

this system, refer to “Bluetooth® streaming

audio” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

USB (UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS)

CONNECTION PORT

Connecting a device to the USB

(Universal Serial Bus) connection

port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

• Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure

that the USB device is connected

correctly into the USB port.

• Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

• Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintention-

ally. Pulling the cable my damage

the port.

For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

The USB connection port is located be-

neath the heater and air conditioner con-

trols. Insert the USB device into the port.

When a compatible storage device is

plugged into the port, compatible audio

files on the storage device can be played

through the vehicle’s audio system.

Audio file operation

MEDIA button

Place the power switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the MEDIA button to

switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is

playing or another audio source is plugged

in through the AUX input jack, the MEDIA

button toggles among four sources.

SEEK/CAT buttons

When the

or button is pressed

for more than 1.5 seconds while a USB

memory is being played, the USB memory

will play while fast forwarding or rewinding.

When the button is released, the USB

memory will return to normal play speed.

When the

or button is pressed

for less than 1.5 seconds while the USB

memory is being played, the next track or

the beginning of the current track on the

USB memory will be played.

The multi-function controller can also be

used to select tracks when the USB

memory is being played.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REPEAT (RPT)

When the RPT button is pressed while the

USB memory is being played, the play pat-

tern can be changed as follows:

To change the play mode, press the RPT

button repeatedly and the mode will

change as follows:

Normal→1 Folder Repeat→1 Track Repeat-

→Normal

RANDOM (RDM)

When the RDM button is pressed while a

USB memory device is being playing, the

play pattern can be changed as follows:

To change the play mode, press the RDM

button repeatedly and the mode will

change as follows:

Normal→All Random→1 Folder Random-

→Normal

TUNE/SCROLL knob

If there are multiple folders with audio files

on the USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL

knob to change folders. Turn the knob to

the left to skip back a folder. Turn the knob

to the right to skip ahead a folder. If there is

only one folder of audio files on the USB

device, turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob in

either direction will return to the first track

on the USB device.

BACK button

When the

BACK button is pressed, it

returns to the previous display.

IPOD® PLAYER OPERATION

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

CAUTION

• Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure

that the USB device is connected

correctly into the USB port.

• Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

• Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintention-

ally. Pulling the cable my damage

the port.

For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that

the iPod® can be controlled with the audio

system controls and display screen, use the

USB connection port located beneath the

heater and air conditioner controls. Connect

the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the

iPod® and the USB end of the cable to the

USB connection port on the vehicle. If your

iPod® supports charging via a USB connec-

tion, its batter y will be charged while con-

nected to the vehicle with the power switch

in the ACC or ON position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®

can only be operated by the vehicle audio

controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,

remove the USB end of the cable from the

USB connection port on the vehicle, then

remove the cable from the iPod®.

*iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc, regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are available:

• Third generation iPhone® (Firmware ver-

sion IOS 2.1–4.2.1)

• Fourth generation iPhone® (Firmware ver-

sion IOS 4.0–6.1.3)

• Fifth generation iPhone® (firmware ver-

sion IOS6/6.0)

• Fifth generation iPod® (Firmware version

iOS 6.0.0–6. 1.4)

• First generation iPod Classic® (Firmware

version 1.1.1 or 2.0.1)

• Second generation iPod Classic® (Firm-

ware version 2.0.1)

• First generation iPod touch® (Firmware

version 1.1–2.2.1)

• Second generation iPod touch® (Firmware

version IOS 2.1.1–2.2.1)

• Third generation iPod touch® (Firmware

version IOS 3.1–3.1.3)

• Fourth generation iPod touch® (Firmware

version IOS 4.1–6.1.3)

• Fifth generation iPod touch® (Firmware

version IOS 6.0.0–6. 1.3)

• First generation iPod nano® (Firmware

version 1.3.1)

• Second generation iPod nano® (Firmware

version 1.1.3)

• Third generation iPod nano® (Firmware

version 1.0.0–1.1.3)

• Fourth generation iPod nano® (Firmware

version 1.0.2–1.0.4)

• Fifth generation iPod nano® (Firmware

version 1.0.1–1.0.2)

• Sixth generation iPod nano® (Firmware

version 1.0–1.2)

• Seventh generation iPod nano® (Firmware

version 1.0.0–1.0.1)

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The iPod touch® may not respond quickly

with the system in some cases.

Make sure that the iPod® firmware is up-

dated.

Audio main operation

Place the power switch in the ACC or ON

position. Then, press the MEDIA button re-

peatedly to switch to the iPod® mode.

If the system has been turned off while the

iPod® was playing, pressing the

(power) button will start the iPod®.

iPod MENU button

Press the iPod MENU button while the

iPod® operation menu on the audio display.

Scroll through the menu list using the

TUNE/SCROLL knob. Press the ENTER but-

ton to select a menu item. Items in the

iPod® menu appear on the display in the

following order:

• Now playing

• Playlists

• Artists

• Albums

• Songs

• Podcasts

• Genres

• Composers

• Audiobooks

• Shuffle songs

For additional information about each iten,

refer to the iPod® Owner’s Manual.

MEDIA button

Place the power switch in the ACC or ON

position. Then, press the MEDIA button to

switch to the iPod® mode.

If another audio source is playing and the

iPod® is connected, pressing the MEDIA

button changes to the iPod® mode.

If the system has been turned off while the

iPod® was playing, pressing the

(power) button will start the iPod®.

When the MEDIA button is pressed while

the iPod® is connected, the interface for

iPod® operation is shown on the audio dis-

play. The items on the menu list can be

scrolled by turning the TUNE/SCROLL dial

while the iPod® is operational. To select an

item, press ENTER/SETTING. Items in the

iPod® menu appear on the display in the

following order:

• Now Playing

• Playlists

• Artists

• Albums

• Songs

• Podcasts

• Genres

• Composers

• Audiobooks

• Shuffle Songs

For additional information, refer to the

iPod® Owner’s Manual.

SEEK/CAT buttons

When the

or button is pressed

for more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is

playing, the iPod® will play while fast for-

warding or rewinding. When the button is

released , the iPod® will return to the nor-

mal play speed.

When the

or button is pressed

for less than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is

playing, the next track or the beginning of

the current track on the iPod® will be

played.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

REPEAT (RPT)

When the RPT play button is pressed while

a track is being played, the play pattern can

be changed as follows:

Repeat Off→1 Track Repeat→All Repeat-

→Repeat Off

RANDOM (RDM)

When the RDM play button is pressed while

a track is being played, the play pattern can

be changed as follows:

Shuffle Off→Track Shuffle→Album Shuffle-

→Shuffle Off

BACK button

When the

BACK button is pressed, it

returns to the previous display.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio

device that is capable of playing audio files,

the device can be connected to the vehi-

cle’s audio system so that the audio files on

the device play through the vehicle’s

speakers. For additional information, refer

to “FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) player” in this section.

NOTE:

For additional information regarding

Bluetooth® Streaming Audio, refer to

the Cellular Phone Owner’s Manual.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device

to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Select “Bluetooth”.

3. Select “Add Phone”. This same screen

can be accessed to remove, replace or

select a different Bluetooth® device.

4. The system acknowledges the com-

mand and asks you to initiate connect-

ing from the phone handset. The con-

necting procedure of the cellular phone

varies according to each cellular phone

model. For additional information, refer

to the cellular phone’s Owner’s Manual.

You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instruc-

tions on connecting NISSAN-

recommended cellular phones.

Audio main operation:

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,

press the MEDIA button repeatedly until the

Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the

screen. Use the vehicle audio controls or

the Bluetooth® device’s controls to play,

pause, skip or reverse tracks.

AUX DEVICE PLAYER OPERATION

The AUX input jack is located beneath the

heater and air conditioner controls. The

AUX input jack accepts any standard ana-

log audio input such as from a portable

cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or lap-

top computer.

NISSAN strongly recommends using a ste-

reo mini plug when connecting your music

device to the audio system. Music may not

play properly when monaural cable is used.

To switch the AUX mode, press the MEDIA

button until the AUX mode is selected,

while the power switch is in the “ON” or

“ACC” position.

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CD CARE AND CLEANING

• Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

• Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

• To clean a disc, wipe the sur face from the

center to the outer edge using a clean,

soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a

circular motion.

• Do not use a conventional record cleaner

or alcohol intended for industrial use.

• A new disc may be rough on the inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges by

rubbing the inner and outer edges with

the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using

the controls on the steering wheel.

1. Volume control switch

Seek/Track switches

3. OK button

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch to increase

or decrease the volume.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

OK button

Push the OK button to cycle through audio

options both in the vehicle information dis-

play and on the display screen.

Seek/Track switches

AM and FM:

• Push or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.

• Push or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to

seek up or down to the next station.

XM:

• Push or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.

• Push or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to

go to the next or previous category.

iPod®:

• Push or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

• Push or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the folder number.

CD:

• Push or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

• Push or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the folder number (if

playing compressed audio files).

USB:

• Push or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

• Push or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the folder number.

The vehicle is equipped with a shark fin

antenna and an antenna pattern is printed

inside the rear window.

CAUTION

• Do not place metalized film near the

rear window glass or attach any

metal parts to it. This may cause

poor reception or noise.

• When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window antenna.

Lightly wipe along the antenna with

a dampened soft cloth.

ANTENNA

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When installing a CB, ham radio or car

phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe

the following precautions; otherwise, the

new equipment may adversely affect the

EV control system and other electronic

parts.

WARNING

• A cellular phone should not be used

for any purpose while driving so full

attention may be given to vehicle

operation. Some jurisdictions pro-

hibit the use of cellular phones while

driving.

• If you must make a call while your

vehicle is in motion, the hands free

cellular phone operational mode is

highly recommended. Exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full at-

tention may be given to vehicle op-

eration.

• If you are unable to devote full at-

tention to vehicle operation while

talking on the phone, pull off the

road to a safe location and stop your

vehicle.

CAUTION

• Keep the antenna as far away as

possible from the electronic control

modules.

• Keep the antenna wire more than

20 cm (8 in) away from the electronic

control system harnesses. Do not

route the antenna wire next to any

harness.

• Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the manu-

facturer.

• Connect the ground wire from the

CB radio chassis to the body.

• For additional information, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer.

WARNING

• Use a phone after stopping your ve-

hicle in a safe location. If you have to

use a phone while driving, exercise

extreme caution at all times so full

attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

• If you are unable to devote full at-

tention to vehicle operation while

talking on the phone, pull off the

road to a safe location and stop your

vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery,

use a phone after the READY to drive

indicator light is on.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (IF SO EQUIPPED)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

Your NISSAN is equipped with the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If

you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled

cellular phone, you can set up the wireless

connection between your cellular phone

and the in-vehicle phone module. With

Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone

call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to

the in-vehicle phone module, no other

phone connecting procedure is required.

Your phone is automatically connected

with the in-vehicle phone module when

the power switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion with the previously connected cellular

phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.

NOTE:

Some devices require the user to accept

specific connections for certain features

(such as phonebook download). If your

phone does not connect automatically

to the system, consult the phone’s Own-

er’s Manual for details on device

operation.

You can connect up to five different

Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-

vehicle phone module. However, you can

talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System, refer to the following notes:

• Set up the wireless connection between a

compatible cellular phone and the in-

vehicle phone module before using the

hands-free phone system.

• Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized or work properly.

Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and connecting

instructions.

• You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular

service area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive a cellular signal; such

as in a tunnel, in an underground park-

ing garage, near a tall building or in a

mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent

it from being dialed.

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

• When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice

during a call.

• Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connec-

tion disruption.

• While a cellular phone is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless connec-

tion, the battery power of the cellular

phone may discharge quicker than usual.

The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem cannot charge cellular phones.

• For additional information, refer to

“Troubleshooting guide” in this section.

You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help if the hands-free phone

system seems to be malfunctioning.

• Some cellular phones or other devices

may cause interference or a buzzing noise

to come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

• For additional information, refer to the cel-

lular phone Owner’s Manual regarding the

telephone charges, cellular phone an-

tenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the

supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could dam-

age the transmitter and may violate FCC

regulations.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference

and

2. this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the

device.

IC Regulatory information

• Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation

of the device.

• This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian

Interference-Causing Equipment

Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed

to Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system al-

lows hands-free operation of the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands

may not be available so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the power switch is placed in the ON

position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial-

ized, which takes a few seconds. If the

button is pressed before the initialization

completes, the system will announce

“Hands-free phone system not ready” and

will not react to voice commands.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the

NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe

the following:

• Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Point all vents away from the mi-

crophone area and close the windows to

eliminate surrounding noises (traffic

noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may

prevent the system from recognizing

voice commands correctly.

• Wait until the tone sounds before speak-

ing a command. Otherwise, the com-

mand will not be received properly.

• Start speaking a command within 5 sec-

onds after the tone sounds.

• Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,

press and release the

button located

on the steering wheel. After the tone

sounds, speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the

microphone, and voice feedback is given

when the command is accepted.

• If you need to hear the available com-

mands for the current menu again, say

“Help” and the system will repeat them.

• If a command is not recognized, the sys-

tem announces, “Command not recog-

nized. Please try again.” Make sure the

command is said exactly as prompted by

the system and repeat the command in a

clear voice.

• If you want to go back to the previous

command, you can say “Go back” or “Cor-

rection” any time the system is waiting for

a response.

• You can cancel a command when the sys-

tem is waiting for a response by saying,

“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces

“Cancel” and ends the Voice Recognition

session. You can also press and hold the

button on the steering wheel for

5 seconds at any time to end the Voice

Recognition session. Whenever the Voice

Recognition session is canceled, a double

beep is played to indicate you have exited

the system.

• If you want to adjust the volume of the

voice feedback, press the volume control

switches (+ or -) on the steering wheel

while being provided with feedback. You

can also use the radio volume control

knob.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

In most cases you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pressing the

button on the steering

wheel. After interrupting the system, wait

for a beep before speaking your command.

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak

the second level commands with the main

menu command on the main menu. For

example, press the

button and after

the tone say “Call Redial”.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System are located on

the steering wheel.

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Phone/send

Press the button to initiate a Voice

Recognition session or answer an incom-

ing call.

You can also use the

button to inter-

rupt the system feedback and give a com-

mand at once. For additional information,

refer to “Voice commands” and “During a

call” in this section.

Phone/end

While the Voice Recognition system is ac-

tive, press and hold the

button for

5 seconds to quit the Voice Recognition

system at any time.

Tuning switch (left side)

While using the Voice Recognition system,

push the

or switch on the steer-

ing wheel to manually control the phone

system.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If

the vehicle starts moving during the pro-

cedure, the procedure will be canceled.

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Bluetooth” and then press the ENTER/

SETTING button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

Menu Item Result

Bluetooth ON/OFF Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.

On Turns Bluetooth® functionality on.

Off Turns Bluetooth® functionality off.

Add Phone or Device Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. Operate the Bluetooth® phone to

enter the PIN and complete the connection process.

Replace Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voicetags

that were recorded using the previous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.

The connecting procedure varies accord-

ing to each phone. For additional informa-

tion, refer to the phone’s Owner’s Manual.

You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth or call the

NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for

instructions on connecting recommended

cellular phones.

VOICE COMMANDS

Voice commands can be used to operate

the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Press the

button to bring up the

phone command menu. The available op-

tions are:

• Call

• Phonebook

• Recent Calls

• Messaging (if so equipped)

• Show Applications (if so equipped)

• Select Phone or Device

“Call”

For additional information, refer to “Making

a call” in this section.

“Phonebook”

The following commands are available un-

der “Phonebook”:

• (a name)

Say a name in the phonebook to bring

up a list of options for a list of options for

that phonebook entry. The system will

say the name it interpreted based on the

voice command provided. If the name is

incorrect, say “Correction” to hear an-

other name.

Once the correct phonebook entry is iden-

tified, say “Dial” to dial the number or “Send

Text” to send a text message to that num-

ber. Say “Record Name” to record a name

for the phonebook entry. Say “Delete Re-

cording” to delete a recorded name for the

phonebook entry.

• List Names

Speak this command to have the sys-

tem list the names in the phonebook

one by one alphabetically. Say “Dial” to

dial the number of the current name or

“Send Text” to send a text message to

that number. Say “Next Entry”, “Previous

Entry” or Help to move through the list

alphabetically. Say “Record Name” to re-

cord a name for the current phonebook

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a

recorded name for the current phone-

book entry.

“Recent Calls”

The following commands are available un-

der “Recent Calls”:

• Incoming

Speak this command to list the last five

incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is

from an entry in the phonebook, the

name will be displayed. Otherwise, the

phone number of the incoming call will

be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”

to send a text message to that number.

Say “Next Entry”, “Previous Entry” or Help to

move through the list of incoming calls.

• Missed

Speak this command to list the last five

missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is

from an entry in the phonebook, the

name will be displayed. Otherwise, the

phone number of the missed call will be

displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”

to send a text message to that number.

Say “Next Entry”, “Previous Entry” or Help to

move through the list of missed calls.

• Outgoing

Speak this command to list the last five

outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call

was to an entry in the phonebook, the

name will be displayed. Otherwise, the

phone number of the outgoing call will

be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text”

to send a text message to that number.

Say “Next Entry”, “Previous Entry” or Help to

move through the list of outgoing calls.

• Redial

Speak this command to call the last

number dialed.

• Call back

Speak this command to call the number

of the last incoming call to the vehicle.

“Messaging” (if so equipped)

Speak this command to access text mes-

saging functions. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Text messaging” in this sec-

tion.

“Show Applications” (if so

equipped)

Speak this command to display list of

smartphone apps available.

“Select Phone or Device”

Speak this command to select a phone to

use from a list of those phones connected

to the vehicle.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call from a phone connected to

the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System:

1. Press the

button.

2. The system will prompt you for a com-

mand. Say “Call”.

3. Select one of the available voice com-

mands to continue:

• “(a name)” — Speak the name of a

phonebook entry to place a call to that

entry. The system will respond with the

name it interpreted from your com-

mand and will prompt you to confirm

that the name is correct. Say “Yes” to

initiate the call or “No” to hear another

name from the phonebook.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

• “Number” — Speak this command to

place a call by inputting numbers.

• For 7- and 10-digit phone numbers,

speak the numbers. When finished, say

“Dial” to initiate the call. Say “Correction”

at any time in the process to correct a

misspoken or misinterpreted number.

• For phone numbers with more digits or

special characters, say “Special Num-

ber”, then speak the digits. Up to 24 dig-

its can be entered. Available special

characters are “star”, “pound”, “plus” and

“pause”. When finished, say “Dial” to initi-

ate the call. Say “Correction” at any time

in the process to correct a misspoken

or misinterpreted number or character.

• “Redial” — Speak this command to dial

the number of the last outgoing call.

The system will display “Redialing

<name/number>”. The name of the

phonebook entry will be displayed if it

available, otherwise the number being

redialed will be displayed.

• “Call Back” — Speak this command to

dial the number of the last incoming

call. The system will display “Calling

back <name/number>”. The name of

the phonebook entry will be displayed if

it available, otherwise the number be-

ing called back will be displayed.

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is received by the phone con-

nected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System, the call information is

displayed on the control panel display.

Press the

button to accept the call.

Press the

button to reject the call.

DURING A CALL

When a call is active, press the button

to access additional options. Speak one of

the following commands.

• “Send” — Speak this command followed by

the digits to enter digits during the phone

call.

• “Mute On” or “Mute Off” — Speak the com-

mand to mute or unmute the system.

• “Transfer Call” — Speak this command to

transfer the call to the handset. To transfer

the call back from the handset to the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System,

press the

button and confirm when

prompted.

If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System allows for call

waiting functionality. If a call is received

while another call is already active, a mes-

sage will be displayed on the screen. Press

the

button to hold the active call and

switch to the second call. Press the

button to reject the second call.

While the second call is active, pressing the

button will allow the same com-

mands that are available during any calls

as well as two additional commands:

• “Switch Call” — Speak this command to

hold the second call and switch back to

the original call.

• “End Other Call” — Speak this command to

stay with the second call and end the

original call.

Press the

button to accept the call.

Press the

button to reject the call.

ENDING A CALL

To end an active call, press the button.

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TEXT MESSAGING (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

WARNING

• Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.

Check local regulations before using

this feature.

• Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of some of the applica-

tions and features, such as social

networking and texting. Check local

regulations for any requirements.

• Use the text messaging feature af-

ter stopping your vehicle in a safe

location. If you have to use the fea-

ture while driving, exercise extreme

caution at all times so full attention

may be given to vehicle operation.

• If you are unable to devote full at-

tention to vehicle operation while

using the text messaging feature,

pull off the road to a safe location

and stop your vehicle.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special

permission to enable text messaging.

Check the phone’s screen during

Bluetooth® pairing. For some phones,

you may need to enable ‘Notifica-

tions’ in the phone’s Bluetooth® menu

for text messages to appear on the

headunit. Please consult your phone’s

Owner’s manual. Text message inte-

gration requires that the phone sup-

port MAP (Message Access Profile) for

both receiving and sending text mes-

sages. Some phones may not support

all text messaging features. For addi-

tional information about compatibil-

ity, please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth, as well as

your device’s Owner’s manual.

The system allows for the sending and re-

ceiving of text messages through the ve-

hicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Press the

button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

4. The system will provide a list of available

commands in order to determine the

recipient of the text message. Choose

from the following:

• (a name)

• Missed Calls

• Incoming Calls

• Outgoing Calls

For additional information, refer to

“Voice commands” in this section.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system

prompts for which message to send.

Five predefined messages are available

as well as three custom messages. To

choose one of the predefined mes-

sages, speak one of the following after

the tone:

• “Driving, can’t text”

• “Call me”

• “On my way”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

• “Running late”

• “Custom message”

To send one of the custom messages,

say “Custom Messages”. If more than

one custom message is stored, the sys-

tem will prompt for the number of the

desired custom message. For addi-

tional information on setting and man-

aging custom text messages, refer to

“Bluetooth® settings” in this section.

Reading a received text message:

1. Press the

button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Messaging” after the tone.

3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.

The text message, sender and delivery

time are shown on the screen. Use the tun-

ing switch to scroll through all text mes-

sages if more than one are available. Press

the

button to exit the text message

screen. Press the

button to access the

following options for replying to the text

message:

• Call Back

Speak this command to call the sender

of the text message using the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

• Send Text

Speak this command to send a text

message response to the sender of the

text message.

• Read Text

Speak this command to read the text

message again.

• Previous Text

Speak this command to move to the

previous text message.

• Next Text

Speak this command to move to the

next text message.

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if

the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph

(8 km/h).

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

To access and adjust the settings for the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Bluetooth” and then press the ENTER/

SETTING button:

• Bluetooth

Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s

Bluetooth® system on or off.

• Add Phone or Device

For additional information, refer to “Con-

necting procedure” in this section.

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

• Delete Phone or Device

Select to delete a phone from the dis-

played list. The system will ask to confirm

before deleting the phone.

• Replace Phone

Select to replace a phone from the dis-

played list. When a selection is made, the

system will ask to confirm before pro-

ceeding. The recorded phonebook for

the phone being deleted will be saved as

long as the new phone’s phonebook is

the same as the old phone’s phonebook.

• Select Phone or Device

Select to connect to a previously con-

nected phone from the displayed list.

• Phonebook Download

Select to turn on or off the automatic

download of a connected phone’s

phonebook.

• Show Incoming Calls

Select “Driver Only” to have incoming call

information displayed only in the vehicle

information display. Select “Both” to have

incoming call information displayed in

both the vehicle information display and

the center display screen.

• Text Message (if so equipped)

Select to adjust the volume of the sound

that plays when a new text is received by

a phone connected to the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. The setting

all the way to the left indicates that the

new text sound will be muted.

• Show Incoming Text (if so equipped)

Select “Driver Only” to have incoming

text messages displayed only in the ve-

hicle information display. Select “Both” to

have incoming text messages displayed

in both the vehicle information display

and the center display screen. Select

“None” to have no display of incoming

text messages.

• Edit Custom Messages (if so equipped)

Select to set a custom message that will

be available with the standard options

when sending a text message. To set a

custom message, send a text message

to your own phone number while the

phone is connected to the system. Three

custom messages can be set. Custom

messages can only be set while the ve-

hicle is stationary.

• Auto Reply (if so equipped)

Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply

function. When enabled, the vehicle will

automatically send a predefined text

message to the sender when a text

message is received while driving.

• Auto Reply Message

Select to choose the message that is

sent when the Auto Reply function is en-

abled. Choose from “I’m Driving” or one of

the three custom messages stored in

the system.

• Vehicle Signature On/Off

Select to choose whether or not the ve-

hicle signature is added to outgoing text

messages from the vehicle. This mes-

sage cannot be changed or customized.

MANUAL CONTROLS

While using the Voice Recognition system,

it is possible to select menu options by

using the steering wheel controls instead

of speaking voice commands. This can be

especially helpful if the noise of driving

makes it difficult for Voice Recognition sys-

tem to accurately interpret commands.

The manual control mode does not allow

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

dialing a phone number by digits. The user

may select an entry from the Phonebook

or Recent Calls lists. To re-activate Voice

Recognition, exit the manual control mode

by pressing and holding the PHONE/END

button. At the time, pressing the

PHONE/SEND

button will start the

Hands Free Phone System.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all

voice commands without difficulty. If prob-

lems are encountered, try the following so-

lutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number,

try each solution in turn, starting with num-

ber 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interrupt the command

correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “Voice commands” in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: if it is too noisy

to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve

the recognition response for the speaker.

The system consistently selects the

wrong entry from the phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by us-

ing the “List Names” command. For additional information, refer to “Phonebook” in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

3. Say First Name and Last Name of the desired contact to improve recognition.

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving .......5-4

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).....5-4

Avoiding collision and rollover............5-7

Off-roadrecovery ...................5-8

Rapid air pressure loss ................5-8

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ........5-9

Push-button power switch ...............5-10

NISSAN Intelligent Key® system ..........5-10

Operating range for EV start function ......5-10

Power switch operation ...............5-11

Power switch positions ...............5-12

Emergency EV shut off................5-12

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge . . .5-13

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .......5-13

Before starting the EV system .............5-14

Starting the EV system .................5-14

Driving the vehicle.....................5-15

Electric shift control system ............5-15

Parking brake........................5-19

Pedal type ........................5-19

Switch type (models with electronic parking

brake system) .....................5-20

e-Pedal system ......................5-22

e-Pedal system operation .............5-22

e-Pedal system limitations.............5-24

System malfunction .................5-25

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

(if so equipped) ......................5-26

LDW system operation ...............5-26

How to enable/disable the LDW system . . . .5-27

LDW system limitations ...............5-27

System temporarily unavailable .........5-29

System malfunction .................5-30

System maintenance ................5-30

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) (if so

equipped) ..........................5-31

I-LI system operation ................5-32

How to enable/disable the I-LI system .....5-33

I-LI

system

limitations ................5-34

System temporarily unavailable .........5-35

System malfunction .................5-36

System maintenance ................5-36

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) .....5-37

BSW system operation ...............5-38

How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . .5-39

BSW system limitations ...............5-40

BSW driving situations ................5-41

System temporarily unavailable .........5-44

System maintenance ................5-45

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . .5-46

RCTA system operation ...............5-47

How to enable/disable the RCTA system . . .5-49

RCTA system limitations ..............5-50

System temporarily unavailable .........5-52

System maintenance ................5-52

Cruise control (if so equipped) ............5-54

Precautions on cruise control ...........5-54

Cruise control operations .............5-54

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles without

ProPILOT™ Assist) (if so equipped) ..........5-56

How to select the cruise control mode.....5-58

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode. . .5-58

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

operation ........................5-59

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

switches .........................5-61

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

limitations........................5-67

System temporarily unavailable..........5-71

System maintenance ................5-73

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode ...........................5-74

ProPILOT™ Assist (if so equipped) ..........5-79

ProPILOT™ Assist system operation .......5-81

Turning the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode on ...................5-84

Operating ProPILOT™ Assist ............5-85

How to enable/disable the Steering Assist . .5-89

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with

ProPILOT™ Assist)...................5-90

Steering Assist.....................5-99

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode ..........................5-106

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) (if so

equipped) .........................5-110

AEB system operation................5-111

Turning the AEB system on/off..........5-112

AEB system limitations ...............5-113

System temporarily unavailable .........5-114

System malfunction.................5-115

System maintenance ................5-115

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with

Pedestrian Detection (if so equipped) .......5-117

AEB with Pedestrian Detection system

operation........................5-118

Turning the AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system on/off ....................5-120

AEB with Pedestrian Detection system

limitations .......................5-120

System temporarily unavailable .........5-123

System malfunction ................5-124

System maintenance................5-124

Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) (if so

equipped) .........................5-126

I-DA system operation ...............5-127

How to enable/disable the I-DA system . . .5-128

I-DA system limitations ..............5-128

Increasing power economy..............5-130

ECO drive report .....................5-131

Parking/parking on hills ................5-132

Power steering system.................5-133

Brake system .......................5-134

Brake precautions ..................5-134

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .........5-136

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ......5-137

Chassis control ......................5-139

Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) ..........5-139

Hill start assist system .................5-140

Cold weather driving ..................5-141

Freeing a frozen door lock .............5-141

Antifreeze........................5-141

12-volt battery .....................5-141

Draining of coolant water .............5-142

Tire equipment ....................5-142

Special winter equipment .............5-142

Driving on snow or ice ...............5-142

Freeing a frozen charge port lid .........5-143

Parking brake .....................5-143

WARNING

• Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. They

could accidentally injure themselves

or others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a

closed vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or pos-

sibly fatal injuries to people or ani-

mals.

• Properly secure all cargo with ropes

or straps to help prevent it from slid-

ing or shifting. Do not place cargo

higher than the seatbacks. In a sud-

den stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal injury.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as pos-

sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces power efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-

tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is

the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-

rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation

has not reached the level to trigger illumi-

nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously illu-

minated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as

the malfunction exists. When the malfunc-

tion indicator is illuminated, the system

may not be able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions

may occur for a variety of reasons, includ-

ing the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Additional information

• When replacing a wheel without the TPMS

such as the spare tire, the TPMS does not

monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND

DRIVING

5-4 Starting and driving

• The TPMS will activate only when the ve-

hicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-

tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example, a flat tire while driving).

• The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-

flated to the recommended pressure, the

vehicle must be driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS

and turn off the low tire pressure warning

light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check

the tire pressure.

• The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

also appears on the vehicle information

display when the low tire pressure warn-

ing light is illuminated and low tire pres-

sure is detected. The “Tire Pressure Low -

Add Air” warning turns off when the low

tire pressure warning light turns off.

• The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

appears each time the power switch is

placed in the ON position as long as the

low tire pressure warning light remains

illuminated.

• The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

does not appear if the low tire pressure

warning light illuminates to indicate a

TPMS malfunction.

• Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by operation of the ve-

hicle and the outside temperature. Do not

reduce the tire pressure after driving be-

cause the tire pressure rises after driving.

Low outside temperature can lower the

temperature of the air inside the tire,

which can cause a lower tire inflation

pressure. This may cause the low tire

pressure warning light to illuminate. If the

warning light illuminates in low ambient

temperature, check the tire pressure for all

four tires.

• The pressure of all tires can also be

checked on the display screen. The order

of the tire pressure figures displayed on

the screen does not correspond with the

actual order of the tire position.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire

pressure warning light” in the “Instruments

and controls” section and “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

WARNING

• Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should con-

tact the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

•If

the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop the

vehicle as soon as possible. Driving

with under-inflated tires may perma-

nently damage the tires and increase

the likelihood of tire failure. Serious ve-

hicle damage could occur and may

lead to an accident and could result in

serious personal injury. Check the tire

pressure for all four tires. Adjust the

tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning light off.

If the tire is flat, repair it as soon as

possible. (For additional information,

refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.)

Starting and driving 5-5

• When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS

will not function and the low tire

pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute. The light

will remain on after 1 minute. Have

your tires replaced and/or TPMS

system reset as soon as possible. It

is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

• Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could af-

fect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

• Do not inject any tire liquid or aero-

sol tire sealant into the tires, as this

may cause a malfunction of the tire

pressure sensors.

CAUTION

• The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with

tire chains or the wheels are buried

in snow.

• Do not place metalized film or any

metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the

windows. This may cause poor re-

ception of the signals from the tire

pressure sensors, and the TPMS will

not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem-

porarily interfere with the operation of the

TPMS and cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate. Some examples

are:

• Facilities or electric devices using similar

radio frequencies that are near the

vehicle.

• If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is

being used in or near the vehicle.

• If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near

the vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light may

illuminate in the following cases:

• If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and

tire without TPMS.

• If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID

has not been registered.

• If the wheel is not originally specified by

NISSAN.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party re-

sponsible for compliance could void

the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

5-6 Starting and driving

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert

When tire pressure is low, the low tire pres-

sure warning light illuminates.

This vehicle provides visual and audible

signals to help you inflate the tires to the

recommended COLD tire pressure.

Vehicle set-up:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and push the P

(Park) position switch on the shift lever.

3. Place the power switch in the ON posi-

tion. Do not place in the READY to drive

mode.

Operation:

1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica-

tors will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is

reached, the horn beeps once and the

hazard indicators stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

• If the tire is over-inflated more than ap-

proximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn beeps

and the hazard indicators flash three

times. To correct the pressure, push the

core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to

release pressure. When the pressure

reaches the designated pressure, the

horn beeps once.

• If the hazard indicator does not flash

within approximately 15 seconds after

starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that

the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not operating.

• The TPMS will not activate the Easy-Fill Tire

Alert under the following conditions:

– If there is interference from an external

device or transmitter.

– The air pressure from the inflation de-

vice is not sufficient to inflate the tire,

such as those using a power socket.

– If electrical equipment is being used in

or near the vehicle.

– There is a malfunction in the TPMS sys-

tem.

– There is a malfunction in the horn or

hazard indicators.

– If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not oper-

ate due to TPMS interference, move the

vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or

forward and try again.

If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a

tire pressure gauge.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss

of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.

Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive

speed, high speed cornering, or sudden

steering maneuvers because these driving

practices could cause you to lose control of

your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of

control could result in a collision with

other vehicles or objects or cause the ve-

hicle to rollover, particularly if the loss of

control causes the vehicle to slide side-

ways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid

driving when tired. Never drive when under

Starting and driving 5-7

the influence of alcohol or drugs (including

prescription or over-the-counter drugs

which may cause drowsiness). Always

wear your seat belt as outlined in “Seat

belts” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual, and also instruct your passen-

gerstodoso.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,

an unbelted or improperly belted person

is significantly more likely to be injured

or killed than a person properly wearing

a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side

wheels may unintentionally leave the road

surface. If this occurs, maintain control of

the vehicle by following the procedure be-

low. Please note that this procedure is only

a general guide. The vehicle must be driven

as appropriate based on the conditions of

the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the ac-

celerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the

vehicle to follow the road while the ve-

hicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt

to drive the vehicle back onto the road

surface until the vehicle speed is

reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn

the steering wheel until both tires return

to the road surface. When all tires are on

the road surface, steer the vehicle to

stay in the appropriate driving lane.

• If you decide that it is not safe to return

the vehicle to the road sur face based

on vehicle, road or traffic conditions,

gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a

safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can

occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged

due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air

pressure loss can also be caused by driving

on under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-

dling and stability of the vehicle, especially

at highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by

maintaining the correct air pressure and

visually inspecting the tires for wear and

damage. For additional information, refer

to “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-

out” while driving, maintain control of the

vehicle by following the procedure below.

Please note that this procedure is only a

general guide. The vehicle must be driven

as appropriate based on the conditions of

the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle

if there is a sudden loss of tire air pres-

sure. Losing control of the vehicle may

cause a collision and result in personal

injury.

5-8 Starting and driving

• The vehicle generally moves or pulls

in the direction of the flat tire.

• Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

• Do not rapidly release the accelera-

tor pedal.

• Do not rapidly turn the steering

wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the ac-

celerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe lo-

cation off the road and away from traffic

if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-

ally stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

contact a roadside emergency service

to change the tire. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-

stream reduces coordination, delays

reaction time and impairs judgement.

Driving after drinking alcohol in-

creases the likelihood of being in-

volved in an accident injuring yourself

and others. Additionally, if you are in-

jured in an accident, alcohol can in-

crease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-

ever, you must choose not to drive under

the influence of alcohol. Every year thou-

sands of people are injured or killed in

alcohol-related accidents. Although the lo-

cal laws vary on what is considered to be

legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol

affects all people differently and most

people underestimate the effects of

alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!

That is true for drugs, too (over-the-

counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Do

not drive if your ability to operate your ve-

hicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some

other physical condition.

Starting and driving 5-9

WARNING

Do not operate the power switch while

driving the vehicle except in an emer-

gency. (The EV system shuts down

when the power switch is pushed three

consecutive times or the power switch

is pushed and held for more than 2 sec-

onds.) If the EV system stops while the

vehicle is being driven, this could lead

to a crash and serious injury.

Before operating the power switch, make

sure the vehicle is in the P (Park) position.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

SYSTEM

The Intelligent Key system allows the driver

to star t the EV system without taking the

key out of a pocket or purse. The operating

environment and/or conditions may affect

Intelligent Key system operation.

Some indicators and warnings for opera-

tion are displayed on the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

CAUTION

• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when operating the ve-

hicle.

• Never leave the Intelligent Key inside

the vehicle when you leave the ve-

hicle.

OPERATING RANGE FOR EV START

FUNCTION

The Intelligent Key function can only be

used for starting the EV system when the

Intelligent Key is within the specified oper-

ating range

䊊

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost

discharged or strong radio waves are pres-

ent near the operating location, the Intelli-

gent Key system’s operating range be-

comes narrower and it may not function

properly.

PUSH-BUTTON POWER SWITCH

5-10 Starting and driving

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even some-

one who does not carry the Intelligent Key,

to push the power switch to start the EV

system.

• The cargo area is not included in the op-

erating range but the Intelligent Key may

function.

• If the Intelligent Key is placed on the in-

strument panel or inside the glove box or

door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not

function.

• If the Intelligent Key is placed near a door

or window outside the vehicle, the Intelli-

gent Key may not function.

POWER SWITCH OPERATION

Starting and driving 5-11

When the power switch is pushed without

depressing the brake pedal, the power

switch position will change as follows:

• Push once to change to ACC.

• Push two times to change to ON.

• Push three times to change to OFF.

• Push four times to return to ACC.

• Open or close any door to return to LOCK

while in the OFF position.

The power switch illuminates when in the

ACC or ON position.

The power lock is designed so that the

power switch position cannot be switched

to the LOCK position until the vehicle is

placed in the P (Park) position.

When the power switch cannot be placed

in the LOCK position, proceed as follows:

1. Push the P (Park) position switch on the

shift lever to place the vehicle in the P

(Park) position.

2. Push the power switch to the OFF posi-

tion. The power switch will not

illuminate.

3. Open the door. The power switch will

change to the LOCK position.

POWER SWITCH POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The power switch can only be locked in this

position.

The power switch will be unlocked when it

is pushed to the ACC position while the

driver is carrying the Intelligent Key.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accesso-

ries, such as the radio, when the EV system

is off.

This position turns on the EV system and

electrical accessories.

READY (Normal operating

position)

This position turns on the EV system and

electrical accessories and the vehicle can

be driven.

OFF

This position turns off the EV system.

The power switch cannot be placed in the

LOCK position until the vehicle is in the P

(Park) position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the power

switch in the ACC position for an ex-

tended period of time. This can dis-

charge the 12-volt battery.

NOTE:

If the power switch is pushed quickly or

is pushed twice quickly, the switch may

not function even if a chime sound is

heard. Push the switch again more

slowly.

EMERGENCY EV SHUT OFF

To shut off the EV system in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

• Rapidly push the power switch three con-

secutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or

• Push and hold the power switch for more

than 2 seconds.

5-12 Starting and driving

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

BATTERY DISCHARGE

If the Intelligent Key battery is discharged

or environmental conditions interfere with

the Intelligent Key operation, start the EV

system in the READY to drive mode accord-

ing to the following procedure:

1. Push the P (Park) position switch on the

shift lever.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the power switch with the Intelli-

gent Key as illustrated. (A chime will

sound.)

4. Push the power switch while depressing

the brake pedal within 10 seconds after

the chime sounds. The power switch

position changes to the READY to drive

mode.

After step 3 is performed, if the power

switch is pushed without depressing the

brake pedal, the power switch position will

change to ACC.

NOTE:

•

When the power switch is pushed to the

ACC or ON position or READY to drive mode

by the above procedure, the EV system op-

eration for discharged Intelligent Key sys-

tem indicator appears on the vehicle infor-

mation display even if the Intelligent Key is

inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunc-

tion. To stop the warning indicator from

blinking, touch the power switch with the

Intelligent Key again.

•

If the Intelligent Key battery discharge in-

dicator appears on the vehicle informa-

tion display, replace the battery as soon as

possible. For additional information, refer

to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery re-

placement” in the “Maintenance and do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the power switch to be placed

in the READY to drive position without the

use of the registered key.

If the power switch fails to place the vehicle

into the READY to drive position using the

registered key, it may be due to interfer-

ence caused by another registered key, an

automated toll road device or automated

payment device on the key ring. Restart the

EV system using the following procedure:

1. Leave the power switch in the ON posi-

tion for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the power switch in the OFF posi-

tion and wait approximately 10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 again.

4. Place the power switch in the READY to

drive position while holding the device

(which may have caused the interfer-

ence) separate from the registered key.

If this procedure allows the power

switch to be placed in the READY to drive

mode, NISSAN recommends placing the

registered key on a separate key ring to

avoid interference from other devices.

Starting and driving 5-13

• Make sure that the area around the ve-

hicle is clear.

• Check fluid levels such as coolant, brake

fluid, and windshield-washer fluid as fre-

quently as possible.

• Check that all windows and lights are

clean.

• Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

• Check that all doors are closed.

• Position the seat and adjust the head

restraints/headrests.

• Adjust the inside and outside mirrors.

• Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers

to do likewise.

• Check the operation of the warning lights

when the power switch is pushed to the

ON position. For additional information,

refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights

and audible reminders” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this

manual.

1. Confirm the parking brake is applied.

2. Confirm that the vehicle is in the P (Park)

position.

When the power switch is placed in the

ON position, the EV is designed not to

operate unless the shift lever is in the P

(Park) or N (Neutral) positions.

The Intelligent Key must be carried

with you when operating the power

switch.

3. Depress the brake pedal and push the

power switch to place the EV system in

the READY to drive position.

To place the vehicle in the READY to drive

position immediately, push and release

the power switch while depressing the

brake pedal with the power switch in

any position. The READY to drive indica-

tor light

in the meter illuminates.

4. To stop the EV system, push the P (Park)

position switch on the shift lever, and

push the power switch to the OFF

position.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situa-

tions that can lead to potential bat-

tery discharge and potential no-start

conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the EV system is not

running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. The vehicle is not driven regularly

and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

BEFORE STARTING THE EV SYSTEM STARTING THE EV SYSTEM

5-14 Starting and driving

ELECTRIC SHIFT CONTROL

SYSTEM

This vehicle is electronically controlled to

produce maximum available power and

smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures

for this vehicle are shown on the following

pages.

Starting the vehicle

1. After placing the vehicle in the READY to

drive position, fully depress the foot

brake pedal before moving the shift lever

to the D (Drive) position.

The shift lever of this vehicle is de-

signed so that the foot brake pedal

must be depressed before shifting

from the P (Park) position to any driv-

ing position while the power switch is

in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out

of the P (Park) position and into any of

the other positions if the power

switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or

ACC position or if the key is removed.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed,

and move the shift lever to the D (Drive)

position.

3. Release the parking brake and foot

brake pedal, and then gradually start the

vehicle in motion.

WARNING

• Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N

(Neutral) to the R (Reverse) or D

(Drive) position. Always depress the

brake pedal until shifting is com-

pleted. Failure to do so could cause

you to lose control, which could re-

sult in an accident.

• Never shift to the P (Park) or R (Re-

verse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and the P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is

reversing. This could cause you to

lose control and have an accident.

• Do not shift to the B position

abruptly on slippery roads. This may

cause a loss of control.

CAUTION

• To avoid possible damage to your

vehicle, when stopping the vehicle

on an uphill grade, do not hold the

vehicle by depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. The foot brake should be

used for this purpose.

• Do not hang items on the shift lever.

This may cause an accident due to a

sudden start.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

Starting and driving 5-15

Shifting

To move the shift lever,

: Slide along the gate while the brake

pedal is depressed.

: After sliding, maintain it in the same

position until the vehicle is placed in the N

(Neutral) position.

: When in the D (Drive) position, slide

along the gate.

NOTE:

• Confirm that the vehicle is in the desired

shift position by checking the shift indi-

cator

䊊

located near the shift lever or

the vehicle information display in the

meter.

• To place the vehicle into the D (Drive)

position from the B mode, move the

shift lever into the D (Drive) position.

After placing the vehicle in the READY to

drive position, fully depress the brake pedal,

and move the shift lever to any of the pre-

ferred shift positions.

If the power switch is placed in the OFF or

ACC position for any reason while the shift

position is in any position other than the P

(Park) position, the power switch cannot be

placed in the LOCK position.

If the power switch cannot be placed in the

LOCK position, perform the following steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the ve-

hicle is stopped.

2. Place the power switch in the ON posi-

tion while depressing the foot brake

pedal.

3. Push the P (Park) position switch and

confirm the vehicle is in the P (Park)

position.

4. Place the power switch in the OFF

position.

NOTE:

The vehicle automatically applies the P

(Park) position when the power switch is

in the OFF position.

WARNING

• The shift lever is always in the center

position when released. When the

power switch is placed in the READY

to drive position, the driver needs to

confirm that the vehicle is in the P

(Park) position. The indicator next to

the “P” by the shift lever is illumi-

nated and the “P” is displayed on the

meter. If the vehicle is in the D (Drive)

position or R (Reverse) position

when the power switch is placed in

the READY to drive position, this may

cause a sudden start which could re-

sult in an accident.

5-16 Starting and driving

• On a hilly road, do not allow the ve-

hicle to roll backwards while in the D

(Drive) position or B position or allow

the vehicle to roll forward while in

the R (Reverse) position. This may

cause an accident.

CAUTION

• Do not slide the shift lever while

pushing the P (Park) position switch.

This may damage the electric motor.

• When switching to the preferred po-

sition by operating the shift lever,

check that the shift lever returns to

the central position by releasing

your hand from the lever. Holding

the shift lever in a mid-way position

may also damage the shift control

system.

• Do not operate the shift lever while

the accelerator pedal is depressed,

except when switching to the B po-

sition. This may cause a sudden

start which could result in an acci-

dent.

• The following operations are not al-

lowed because excessive force

would be applied to the traction mo-

tor and this may result in damage to

the vehicle:

– Moving the shift lever to the R (Re-

verse) position when driving for-

ward

– Moving the shift lever to the D

(Drive) position when reversing

If these operations are attempted, a

chime sounds and the vehicle shifts

to the N (Neutral) position.

P (Park):

Use this shift position when the vehicle is

parked or when placing the vehicle in the

READY to drive position. Make sure that the

vehicle is completely stopped. In order to

switch to the P (Park) position, push the P

(Park) position switch as shown in the

illustration above once the vehicle has

come to a complete stop. If the P (Park)

position switch is pushed while the ve-

hicle is in motion, a chime sounds and

the current shift position is maintained.

After switching to the P (Park) position, ap-

ply the parking brake. When parking on a

Starting and driving 5-17

hill, apply the parking brake first while keep-

ing the foot brake pedal depressed then

push the P (Park) position switch and place

the vehicle in the P (Park) position. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Parking brake”

in this section.

NOTE:

• While the vehicle is stationary, if the

shift position is placed in any position

other than the P (Park) position when

the power switch is set to OFF, it will

automatically switch to the P (Park) po-

sition.

• If the P (Park) position switch is pushed

while sliding the shift lever, the shift po-

sition will not switch to the P (Park) po-

sition. When pushing the P (Park) posi-

tion switch be sure to first allow the

shift lever to return to its center posi-

tion.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Make sure that

the vehicle is completely stopped before

selecting the R (Reverse) position. If the ve-

hicle is placed in the D (Drive) position

while reversing,the chime will sound and

the vehicle will switch into the N (Neutral)

position.

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-

gaged. The vehicle can be placed in the

READY to drive position in this position.

Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while

driving. The regenerative brake system

does not operate in the N (Neutral) position.

However, the vehicle brakes will still stop

the car.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward

driving. If the vehicle is placed in the D

(Drive) position while reversing, the

chime will sound and the vehicle will

switch into the N (Neutral) position.

B mode:

The B mode engages the regenerative

braking system more aggressively on

downhill slopes, and helps reduce brake

use. It is activated by moving the shift lever

left and down. The shift lever will then re-

turn to the center position. For additional

information, refer to “Brake system” in this

section.

ECO mode:

Use the ECO mode in order to help extend

the driving range.

5-18 Starting and driving

In comparison to the D (Drive) position, the

ECO mode consumes less power for the

traction motor and enables the range of

the vehicle to be extended. To turn on the

ECO mode, push the ECO mode switch lo-

cated near the shift lever. For additional

information, refer to “ECO switch” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this

manual.

WARNING

• Be sure the parking brake is released

before driving. Failure to do so could

cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

• Do not release the parking brake

from outside the vehicle.

• To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of

the vehicle and/or its systems, do

not leave children, people who re-

quire the assistance of others or

pets unattended in your vehicle. Ad-

ditionally, the temperature inside a

closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

• When leaving the vehicle, apply the

parking brake and push the P (Park)

position switch on the shift lever.

PEDAL TYPE

To engage: Firmly depress the parking

brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal

and it will release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn-

ing light goes out.

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-19

SWITCH TYPE (MODELS WITH

ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE

SYSTEM)

The electronic parking brake can be ap-

plied or released automatically or by oper-

ating the electronic parking brake switch.

Automatic operation

The electronic parking brake is automati-

cally released as soon as the vehicle starts

and the accelerator pedal is depressed.

In order for the electronic parking brake to

disable when the driver pushes the accel-

erator, the driver’s seat belt must be fas-

tened.

WARNING

• The electronic parking brake will not

be automatically applied when the

EV system is stopped without using

the power switch (for example, by EV

system stalling).

• Before leaving the vehicle, move the

shift lever to the P (Park) position

and check that the electronic park-

ing brake indicator light (

or PARK)

is illuminated to confirm that the

electronic parking brake is applied.

The electronic parking brake indica-

tor light (

or PARK) will remain on

for a period of time after the driver’s

door is locked.

CAUTION

When parking in an area where the

outside temperature is below 32°F

(0°C), do not apply the parking brake to

prevent it from freezing.

For safe parking, place the shift lever in

the P (Park) position and securely

block the wheels.

NOTE:

• If a malfunction occurs in the electronic

parking brake system (for example, due

to battery discharge), it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer.

• If the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)

position when the brake force is main-

tained by the automatic brake hold

function, the electronic parking brake

will apply automatically.

• If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened

when the brake force is maintained by

the automatic brake hold function, the

electronic parking brake will apply au-

tomatically.

• When the ICC system (if so equipped) is

canceled under the following condi-

tions at a standstill, the electronic park-

ing brake is automatically activated:

– Any door is open.

– The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

5-20 Starting and driving

– Your vehicle has been stopped by

the ICC system for approximately

3 minutes or longer.

– The shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

position or B mode.

– The VDC system is turned off.

– When distance measurement be-

comes impaired due to adhesion of

dirt or obstruction to the sensor.

– When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted.

Manual operation

The electronic parking brake will not be au-

tomatically applied if the EV system is

stopped without using the power switch

(for example, by EV system stalling). In such

a case, you have to apply the parking brake

manually.

To apply: Pull the switch up

䊊

. The indica-

tor light

䊊

will illuminate.

To release: With the power switch in the ON

position, depress the brake pedal and push

the switch down

䊊

. The indicator light

䊊

will turn off.

Before driving, check that the electronic

parking brake indicator light (

or PARK)

goes out. For additional information, refer

to “Warning lights, indicator lights and au-

dible reminders” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

NOTE:

• A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is

driven without releasing the parking

brake. For additional information, refer

to “Warning lights, indicator lights and

audible reminders” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

• While the electronic parking brake is ap-

plied or released, an operating sound is

heard from the lower side of the rear

seat. This is normal and does not indi-

cate a malfunction.

• When the electronic parking brake is

frequently applied and released in a

short period of time, the parking brake

may not operate in order to prevent the

parking brake system from overheat-

ing. If this occurs, operate the electronic

parking brake switch again after wait-

ing approximately 1 minute.

• If the electronic parking brake must be

applied while driving in an emergency,

pull up and hold the electronic parking

brake switch. When you release the

electronic parking brake switch, the

parking brake will be released.

• While pulling up the electronic parking

brake switch during driving, the parking

brake is applied and a chime sounds.

The electronic parking brake indicator

light (

or PARK) in the meter and in

the electronic parking brake switch illu-

minates. This does not indicate a mal-

function. The electronic parking brake

indicator light (

or PARK) in the me-

ter and in the electronic parking brake

switch turns off when the parking brake

is released.

• When pulling the electronic parking

brake switch up with the power switch

in the OFF or ACC position, the elec-

tronic parking brake switch indicator

light will continue to illuminate for a

short period of time.

Starting and driving 5-21

WARNING

Never rely solely on the e-Pedal sys-

tem, as there is a performance limit to

the system function. Always drive

carefully and attentively. The brake

pedal should be operated to slow or

stop the vehicle, depending on traffic

or road conditions.

The e-Pedal system enables the driver to

slow or stop the vehicle or to keep the ve-

hicle stopped by operating only the accel-

erator pedal. This systems helps to keep

the driver from moving his/her foot be-

tween the accelerator pedal and the brake

pedal.

E-PEDAL SYSTEM OPERATION

1. Acceleration

2. Deceleration (instead of brake pedal)

3. Making a stop (instead of brake pedal

When the e-Pedal system is activated, the

regenerative brake is enhanced and the

driver can adjust the vehicle speed by only

depressing or returning the accelerator

pedal. When you release (take your foot off)

the accelerator pedal, the vehicle slows

down and comes to a stop smoothly with-

out depressing the brake pedal. After a

stop, the vehicle remains at a stop auto-

matically.

E-PEDAL SYSTEM

5-22 Starting and driving

To activate or deactivate the e-Pedal sys-

tem, place the power switch in the ON po-

sition and pull the e-Pedal switch located

on the center console. The e-Pedal system

turns on or off each time the e-Pedal

switch is pulled. (The e-Pedal indicator in

the vehicle information display shows the

status of the e-Pedal system.)

To turn the e-Pedal system off while the

vehicle is stopped by the e-Pedal system,

depress the brake pedal and then pull the

e-Pedal switch.

NOTE:

• When the e-Pedal system is switched

on or off, the degree of vehicle decelera-

tion changes.

• The e-Pedal system automatically turns

off when the EV system restarts.

• To keep the e-Pedal system activated

even after the EV system restarts, turn

on “Retain Mode” in the “Driver Assis-

tance” menu of the vehicle information

display. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

• The setting for “Retain Mode” does not

reset after selecting “Factory Reset” in

the “Settings” menu of the vehicle infor-

mation display. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Vehicle information dis-

play” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

When the e-Pedal system is activated, the

characteristics of the accelerator pedal

change significantly and the accelerator

pedal operates differently than a conven-

tional accelerator pedal operates. Be sure

to confirm the status of the e-Pedal system

in the vehicle information display before

driving.

The e-Pedal system provides the following

driving features:

When driving and stopping the vehicle:

• Depressing or returning the accelerator

pedal changes the degree of acceleration

and deceleration accordingly.

• Returning the accelerator pedal gener-

ates more deceleration than normal. (The

maximum deceleration changes accord-

ing to the vehicle speed.)

• Releasing (taking your foot off) the accel-

erator pedal reduces the vehicle speed

until the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The vehicle’s brake lights illuminate when

the deceleration level reaches an ordinary

braking operation.

If the deceleration is not sufficient when the

accelerator pedal is returned or released,

depress the brake pedal. The brake pedal

can be operated to reduce the vehicle

speed in the same way as normal even

when the e-Pedal system is activated.

Starting and driving 5-23

When restarting the vehicle:

• After the vehicle comes to a stop by the

e-Pedal system function, the vehicle re-

mains at a stop as long as the accelerator

pedal is released.

• The vehicle’s brake lights remain illumi-

nated when the vehicle is stopped by the

e-Pedal system.

• Depress the accelerator pedal to start the

vehicle again from a stop.

When the vehicle needs to be stopped for a

certain period of time, place the vehicle in

the P (Park) position and apply the parking

brake.

CAUTION

When the e-Pedal system is turned off,

remember to depress the brake pedal

firmly to prevent the vehicle from mov-

ing with the shift lever in any position

other than P (Park).

When backing up the vehicle:

• With the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi-

tion, operating the accelerator pedal ad-

justs the vehicle speed (acceleration, de-

celeration, or stopping) in the same way

as the D (Drive) position.

Other driving tips for the e-Pedal

system:

• For smooth deceleration when the

e-Pedal system is activated, it is recom-

mended that you adjust the accelerator

pedal by either depressing or returning,

not releasing, the pedal.

• Moving the shift lever from D (Drive) to B

mode or from B mode to D (Drive) does

not affect the e-Pedal system feature.

• The e-Pedal system does not function un-

der the following conditions:

– When the vehicle is placed in the P

(Park) or N (Neutral) position

– When cruise control (if so equipped),

ProPILOT™ Assist (if so equipped), or

Automatic Emergency Braking (if so

equipped) operates

E-PEDAL SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the e-Pedal system. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance with

these system limitations could result

in serious injury or death.

• If the “Press brake pedal to prevent

rolling” warning message appears in

the vehicle information display, de-

press the brake pedal. The vehicle

may start moving.

• If the deceleration force provided by

the e-Pedal system is not sufficient,

depress the brake pedal.

• If the vehicle starts to move while it

is stopped by the e-Pedal system,

depress the brake pedal immedi-

ately.

• Under the following conditions,

place the vehicle in the P (Park) posi-

tion and make sure the parking

brake is securely applied. The ve-

hicle may start moving suddenly.

– When getting in and out of the ve-

hicle

– When loading and unloading the

vehicle

5-24 Starting and driving

– When stopping the vehicle for a

long period of time

• Under the following conditions, the

e-Pedal system may not decelerate

or stop the vehicle sufficiently. De-

press the brake pedal whenever

necessary.

– When excessively heavy baggage

is loaded in the vehicle

– When driving on steep downhill

roads

– When driving on icy roads

• On a slope, the e-Pedal system may

not stop the vehicle completely or

may not keep the vehicle stopped.

Depress the brake pedal whenever

necessary.

CAUTION

• Turn the e-Pedal system off and

place the vehicle in the N (Neutral)

position under the following condi-

tions:

– When the vehicle enters an auto-

matic car wash

– When the vehicle is towed

• Be careful not to operate the e-Pedal

switch mistakenly or unintention-

ally.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the e-Pedal system malfunctions, the “e-

Pedal system failure! Press brake pedal to

slow or stop” warning message appears in

the vehicle information display. When the

warning message appears, the e-Pedal

system will be turned off automatically.

Have the system checked as soon as pos-

sible. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this ser-

vice.

Starting and driving 5-25

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the LDW

system could result in serious injury or

death.

• This system is only a warning device

to inform the driver of a potential

unintended lane departure. It will

not steer the vehicle or prevent loss

of control. It is the driver’s responsi-

bility to stay alert, drive safely, keep

the vehicle in the traveling lane, and

be in control of the vehicle at all

times.

The LDW system will operate when the ve-

hicle is driven at speeds of approximately

37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only

when the lane markings are clearly visible

on the road.

The LDW system monitors the lane mark-

ers on the traveling lane using the camera

unit

䊊

located above the inside mirror.

The LDW system warns the driver with an

indicator in the vehicle information display

and a steering vibration that the vehicle is

beginning to leave the driving lane. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “LDW system

operation” in this section.

LDW SYSTEM OPERATION

The LDW system provides a lane departure

warning function when the vehicle is driven

at speeds of approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h) and above and the lane mark-

ings are clear. When the vehicle ap-

proaches either the left or the right side of

the traveling lane, the steering wheel will

vibrate and the LDW indicator in the vehicle

information display will blink to alert the

driver.

The warning function will stop when the

vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

(IF SO EQUIPPED)

5-26 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

LDW SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the LDW system:

1. Press the

button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select “Driver As-

sistance.” Then press the OK button.

2. Select “Lane” and press the OK button.

3. Select “Lane Departure Warning” and

use the OK button to turn the system on

or off.

LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the LDW system. Failure to fol-

low the warnings and instructions for

proper use of the LDW system could

result in serious injury or death.

• The system will not operate at

speeds below approximately 37

mph (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect

lane markers.

Starting and driving 5-27

• Do not use the LDW system under

the following conditions as it may

not function properly:

– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.).

– When driving on slippery roads,

such as on ice or snow.

– When driving on winding or un-

even roads.

– When there is a lane closure due to

road repairs.

– When driving in a makeshift or

temporary lane.

– When driving on roads where the

lane width is too narrow.

– When driving without normal tire

conditions (for example, tire wear,

low tire pressure, installation of

spare tire, tire chains, nonstan-

dard wheels).

– When the vehicle is equipped with

non-original brake parts or sus-

pension parts.

– When you are towing a trailer or

other vehicle.

5-28 Starting and driving

• The system may not function prop-

erly under the following conditions:

– On roads where there are multiple

parallel lane markers; lane mark-

ers that are faded or not painted

clearly; yellow painted lane mark-

ers; non-standard lane markers;

or lane markers covered with wa-

ter, dirt, snow, etc.

– On roads where the discontinued

lane markers are still detectable.

– On roads where there are sharp

curves.

– On roads where there are sharply

contrasting objects, such as shad-

ows, snow, water, wheel ruts,

seams or lines remaining after

road repairs. (The LDW system

could detect these items as lane

markers.)

– On roads where the traveling lane

merges or separates.

– When the vehicle’s traveling direc-

tion does not align with the lane

marker.

– When traveling close to the ve-

hicle in front of you, which ob-

structs the lane camera unit de-

tection range.

– When rain, snow, dirt or an object

adheres to the windshield in front

of the lane camera unit.

–

When the headlights are not bright

due to dirt on the lens or if the aim-

ing is not adjusted properly.

– When strong light enters the lane

camera unit (for example, the light

directly shines on the front of the

vehicle at sunrise or sunset).

– When a sudden change in bright-

ness occurs (for example, when

the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel

or under a bridge).

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight

under high temperature conditions (over

approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then

started, the LDW system may be deacti-

vated automatically and the following

message will appear in the vehicle infor-

mation display: “Unavailable: High Cabin

Temp.”

When the interior temperature is reduced,

the LDW system will resume operating au-

tomatically

The LDW system is not designed to warn

under the following conditions:

• When you operate the lane change signal

and change traveling lanes in the direc-

tion of the signal. (The LDW system will

become operable again approximately

2 seconds after the lane change signal is

turned off.)

• When the vehicle speed lowers to less

than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).

After the above conditions have finished

and the necessary operating conditions

are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.

Starting and driving 5-29

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the LDW system malfunctions, it will can-

cel automatically and “Malfunction: See

Owner’s Manual” will appear in the vehicle

information display. If “Malfunction: See

Owner’s Manual” appears in the vehicle in-

formation display, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop the vehicle. Place the

shift lever in the P (Park) position and the

power switch in the OFF position and re-

start the EV system. If “Malfunction: See

Owner’s Manual” continues to appear in

the vehicle information display, have the

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The lane camera unit

䊊

for the LDW sys-

tem is located above the inside mirror. To

keep the proper operation of the LDW sys-

tem and prevent a system malfunction, be

sure to observe the following:

• Always keep the windshield clean.

• Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the camera unit.

• Do not place reflective materials, such as

white paper or a mirror, on the instrument

panel. The reflection of sunlight may ad-

versely affect the camera unit’s capability

of detecting the lane markers.

• Do not strike or damage the areas around

the camera unit. Do not touch the camera

lens or remove the screw located on the

camera unit. If the camera unit is dam-

aged due to an accident, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer.

5-30 Starting and driving

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the I-LI

system could result in serious injury or

death.

• The I-LI system will not steer the ve-

hicle or prevent loss of control. It is

the driver’s responsibility to stay

alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in

the traveling lane, and be in control

of the vehicle at all times.

• The I-LI system is primarily intended

for use on well-developed freeways

or highways. It may not detect the

lane markers in certain road,

weather, or driving conditions.

The I-LI system must be turned on with the

ProPILOT™ Assist switch on the steering

wheel every time the power switch is

placed in the ON position.

The I-LI system will operate when the ve-

hicle is driven at speeds of approximately

37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only

when the lane markings are clearly visible

on the road.

The I-LI system warns the driver when the

vehicle has left the center of the traveling

lane with an indicator in the vehicle infor-

mation display and a steering vibration.

The system helps assist the driver to return

the vehicle to the center of the traveling

lane by applying the brakes to the left or

right wheels individually (for a short period

of time).

The I-LI system monitors the lane markers

on the traveling lane using the camera unit

䊊

located above the inside mirror.

INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION

(I-LI) (IF SO EQUIPPED)

Starting and driving 5-31

I-LI SYSTEM OPERATION

The I-LI system operates above approxi-

mately 37 mph (60 km/h). When the vehicle

approaches either the left or the right side

of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will

vibrate and the I-LI indicator (orange) in the

vehicle information display will blink to alert

the driver. Then, the I-LI system will auto-

matically apply the brakes for a short pe-

riod of time to help assist the driver to re-

turn the vehicle to the center of the

traveling lane.

To turn on the I-LI system, push the ProPI-

LOT™ Assist switch on the steering wheel.

Push the ProPILOT Assist switch again to

turn off the I-LI system.

5-32 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-LI

SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the I-LI system:

1. Press the

button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select “Driver As-

sistance.” Then press the OK button.

2. Select “Lane” and press the OK button.

3. Select “Lane Depar ture Prevention” and

use the OK button to turn the system on

or off.

NOTE:

Turning on the ProPILOT™ Assist sys-

tem (if so equipped) will turn on the

I-LI system at the same time. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “ProPI-

LOT™ Assist” in this section.

Starting and driving 5-33

I-LI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the I-LI system. Failure to fol-

low the warnings and instructions for

proper use of the I-LI system could re-

sult in serious injury or death.

• The I-LI system may activate if you

change lanes without first activat-

ing your turn signal or, for example,

if a construction zone directs traffic

to cross an existing lane marker. If

this occurs you may need to apply

corrective steering to complete your

lane change.

• Because the I-LI may not activate

under the road, weather, and lane

marker conditions described in this

section, it may not activate every

time your vehicle begins to leave its

lane and you will need to apply cor-

rective steering.

• When the I-LI system is operating,

avoid excessive or sudden steering

maneuvers. Otherwise, you could

lose control of the vehicle.

• The I-LI system will not operate at

speeds below approximately

37 mph (60 km/h) or if it cannot de-

tect lane markers.

• Do not use the I-LI system under the

following conditions as it may not

function properly:

– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.).

– When driving on slippery roads,

such as on ice or snow.

– When driving on winding or un-

even roads.

– When there is a lane closure due to

road repairs.

– When driving in a makeshift or

temporary lane.

– When driving on roads where the

lane width is too narrow.

– When driving without normal tire

conditions (for example, tire wear,

low tire pressure, installation of

spare tire, tire chains, nonstan-

dard wheels).

– When the vehicle is equipped with

nonoriginal brake parts or sus-

pension parts.

– When you are towing a trailer or

other vehicle.

– On roads where there are multiple

parallel lane markers; lane mark-

ers that are faded or not painted

clearly; yellow painted lane mark-

ers; non-standard lane markers;

or lane markers covered with wa-

ter, dirt, snow, etc.

– On roads where discontinued lane

markers are still detectable.

– On roads where there are sharp

curves.

– On roads where there are sharply

contrasting objects, such as shad-

ows, snow, water, wheel ruts,

seams or lines remaining after

road repairs. (The I-LI system

could detect these items as lane

markers.)

– On roads where the traveling lane

merges or separates.

– When the vehicle’s traveling direc-

tion does not align with the lane

marker.

– When traveling close to the ve-

hicle in front of you, which ob-

structs the lane camera unit de-

tection range.

– When rain, snow or dirt adheres to

the windshield in front of the lane

camera unit.

5-34 Starting and driving

– When the headlights are not

bright due to dirt on the lens or if

the aiming is not adjusted prop-

erly.

– When strong light enters the lane

camera unit (for example, the light

directly shines on the front of the

vehicle at sunrise or sunset).

– When a sudden change in bright-

ness occurs (for example, when

the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel

or under a bridge).

While the I-LI system is operating, you may

hear a sound of brake operation. This is

normal and indicates that the I-LI system is

operating properly.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

Condition A:

The warning and assist functions of the I-LI

system are not designed to work under the

following conditions:

• When you operate the lane change signal

and change the traveling lanes in the di-

rection of the signal. (The I-LI system will

be deactivated for approximately 2 sec-

onds after the lane change signal is

turned off.)

• When the vehicle speed lowers to less

than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).

After the above conditions have finished

and the necessary operating conditions

are satisfied, the warning and assist func-

tions will resume.

Condition B:

The assist function of the I-LI system is not

designed to work under the following con-

ditions (warning is still functional):

• When the brake pedal is depressed.

• When the steering wheel is turned as far

as necessary for the vehicle to change

lanes.

• When the vehicle is accelerated during I-LI

system operation.

• When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

approach warning occurs.

• When the hazard warning flashers are

operated.

• When driving on a curve at high speed.

After the above conditions have finished

and the necessary operating conditions

are satisfied, the I-LI system application of

the brakes will resume.

Condition C:

If the following messages appear in the

vehicle information display, a chime will

sound and the I-LI system will be turned off

automatically.

• “Not Available - Poor Road Conditions”:

When the VDC system (except Traction

Control System [TCS] function) or ABS

operates.

• “Currently not available”: When the VDC

system is turned off.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

turn off the I-LI system. Push the ProPILOT™

Assist switch to turn the I-LI system back

on.

Temporary disabled status at high tem-

perature:

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight

under high temperature conditions (over

approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then the

I-LI system is turned on, the I-LI system

may be deactivated automatically and the

Starting and driving 5-35

following message will appear on the ve-

hicle information display: “Unavailable: High

Cabin Temperature.” When the interior

temperature is reduced, the system will re-

sume operating automatically.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the I-LI system malfunctions, it will cancel

automatically. The I-LI system warning light

(orange) will illuminate in the display.

If the I-LI system warning light (orange) illu-

minates in the display, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the

EV system off and restart the EV system. If

the I-LI system warning light (orange) con-

tinues to illuminate, have the I-LI system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this ser-

vice.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The lane camera unit

䊊

for the I-LI system

is located above the inside mirror. To keep

the proper operation of the I-LI system and

prevent a system malfunction, be sure to

observe the following:

• Always keep the windshield clean.

• Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the camera unit.

• Do not place reflective materials, such as

white paper or a mirror, on the instrument

panel. The reflection of sunlight may ad-

versely affect the camera unit’s capability

of detecting the lane markers.

• Do not strike or damage the areas around

the camera unit. Do not touch the camera

lens or remove the screw located on the

camera unit. If the camera unit is dam-

aged due to an accident, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer.

5-36 Starting and driving

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the BSW

system could result in serious injury or

death.

• The BSW system is not a replace-

ment for proper driving procedures

and is not designed to prevent con-

tact with vehicles or objects. When

changing lanes, always use the side

and rear mirrors and turn and look in

the direction your vehicle will move

to ensure it is safe to change lanes.

Never rely solely on the BSW system.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of

other vehicles in adjacent lanes when

changing lanes.

The BSW system uses radar sensors

䊊

installed near the rear bumper to detect

other vehicles in an adjacent lane.

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on

either side of your vehicle within the detec-

tion zone shown as illustrated. This detec-

tion zone starts from the outside mirror of

your vehicle and extends approximately

10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and

approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

Detection zone

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

Starting and driving 5-37

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

The BSW system operates above approxi-

mately 20 mph (32 km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the

detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica-

tor light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is

then activated, the system chimes (twice),

the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes,

and the BSW/RCTA indicator (2) illuminates

(yellow) in the vehicle information display.

The side BSW/RCTA indicator light contin-

ues to flash until the detected vehicle

leaves the detection zone.

The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illumi-

nates for a few seconds when the power

switch is placed in the ON position.

The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indi-

cator light is adjusted automatically de-

pending on the brightness of the ambient

light.

If a vehicle comes into the detection zone

after the driver activates the turn signal,

then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light

flashes and no chime sounds. For addi-

tional information, refer to “BSW driving

situations” in this section

5-38 Starting and driving

The BSW system automatically turns on

every time the EV system is started, as long

as it is activated using the settings menu

on the vehicle information display.

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

BSW SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the BSW system:

1. Press the

button until “Settings dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select “Driver As-

sistance.” Then press the OK button.

2. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK

button.

3. Select “Blind Spot Warning” and use the

OK button to turn the system on or off.

NOTE:

When enabling/disabling the system,

the system will retain current settings

even if the EV system is restarted.

Starting and driving 5-39

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the BSW system. Failure to op-

erate the vehicle in accordance with

these system limitations could result

in serious injury or death.

• The BSW system cannot detect all

vehicles under all conditions.

• The radar sensors may not be able

to detect and activate BSW when

certain objects are present such as:

– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.

– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low

height vehicles, or high ground

clearance vehicles.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Vehicles remaining in the detec-

tion zone when you accelerate

from a stop.

– A vehicle merging into an adja-

cent lane at a speed approxi-

mately the same as your vehicle.

– A vehicle approaching rapidly

from behind.

– A vehicle which your vehicle over-

takes rapidly.

– A vehicle that passes through the

detection zone quickly.

– When overtaking several vehicles

in a row, the vehicles after the first

vehicle may not be detected if

they are traveling close together.

• The radar sensor’s detection zone is

designed based on a standard lane

width. When driving in a wider lane,

the radar sensors may not detect

vehicles in an adjacent lane. When

driving in a narrow lane, the radar

sensors may detect vehicles driving

two lanes away.

• The radar sensors are designed to

ignore most stationary objects;

however, objects such as guardrails,

walls, foliage and parked vehicles

may occasionally be detected. This

is a normal operation condition.

• The following conditions may re-

duce the ability of the radar to de-

tect other vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice/frost/dirt/snow build-up on

the vehicle

• Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install acces-

sories or apply additional paint near

the radar sensors. These conditions

may reduce the ability of the radar to

detect other vehicles.

• Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume, open vehicle win-

dow) will interfere with the chime

sound, and it may not be heard.

5-40 Starting and driving

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator on

Indicator off

Indicator flashing

Another vehicle approaching

from behind

Illustration 1: The side indicator light illumi-

nates if a vehicle enters the detection zone

from behind in an adjacent lane.

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the

turn signal when another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

• The radar sensors may not detect ve-

hicles which are approaching rapidly

from behind.

• If the driver activates the turn signal be-

fore a vehicle enters the detection zone,

the side indicator light will flash but no

chime will sound when the other vehicle

is detected.

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

Illustration 2 – Approaching from

behind

Starting and driving 5-41

Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 3: The side indicator light illu-

minates if you overtake a vehicle and that

vehicle stays in the detection zone for ap-

proximately 2 seconds.

Illustration 4: If the driver activates the

turn signal while another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

• When overtaking several vehicles in a

row, the vehicles after the first vehicle

may not be detected if they are travel-

ing close together.

• The radar sensors may not detect

slower moving vehicles if they are

passed quickly.

• If the driver activates the turn signal be-

fore a vehicle enters the detection zone,

the side indicator light will flash but no

chime will sound when the other vehicle

is detected.

Illustration3–Overtaking another

vehicle

Illustration4–Overtaking another

vehicle

5-42 Starting and driving

Entering from the side

Illustration 5: The side indicator light illu-

minates if a vehicle enters the detection

zone from either side.

Illustration 6: If the driver activates the

turn signal while another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

• If the driver activates the turn signal be-

fore a vehicle enters the detection zone,

the side indicator light will flash but no

chime will sound when the other vehicle

is detected.

• The radar sensors may not detect a ve-

hicle which is traveling at about the

same speed as your vehicle when it en-

ters the detection zone.

Illustration 5 – Entering from the side Illustration 6 – Entering from the side

Starting and driving 5-43

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the sys-

tem will be deactivated automatically. The

BSW/RCTA indicator

䊊

will blink (yellow) in

the vehicle information display. The indica-

tor next to “Blind spot” in the “Driving Aids”

䊊

will also blink (yellow).

The system is not available until the condi-

tions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi-

tion may also be caused by objects such as

ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sen-

sors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the system will resume automatically.

5-44 Starting and driving

Malfunction

If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn

off automatically. The BSW/RCTA indicator

will blink (yellow) in the vehicle information

display. The indicator next to “Blind spot” in

the “Driving Aids” menu will also blink (yel-

low).

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the EV

system off and restart the EV system. If the

indicators continue to appear, have the

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors

䊊

for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear

bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-

dar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing

the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-

ent material), install accessories or apply

additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the radar sensors. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer if

the area around the radar sensors is dam-

aged due to a collision.

Starting and driving 5-45

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC : OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment

For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the RCTA

system could result in serious injury or

death.

• The RCTA system is not a replace-

ment for proper driving procedures

and is not designed to prevent con-

tact with vehicles or objects. When

backing out of a parking space, al-

ways use the side and rear mirrors

and turn and look in the direction

your vehicle will move. Never rely

solely on the RCTA system.

The RCTA system will assist you when

backing out from a parking space. When

the vehicle is in reverse, the system is de-

signed to detect other vehicles approach-

ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If the

system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)

(IF SO EQUIPPED)

5-46 Starting and driving

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

The RCTA system can help alert the driver

of an approaching vehicle when the driver

is backing out of a parking space.

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and

the vehicle speed is less than approxi-

mately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is

operational.

If the radar detects an approaching vehicle

from either side, the system chimes (once)

and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1)

flashes on the side the vehicle is approach-

ing from.

Starting and driving 5-47

The RCTA system uses radar sensors

䊊

installed on both sides near the rear bum-

per to detect an approaching vehicle.

The radar sensors

䊊

can detect an ap-

proaching vehicle from up to approxi-

mately 66 ft (20 m) away.

5-48 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

RCTA SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the RCTA system.

1. Press the

button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select “Driver As-

sistance.” Then press the OK button.

2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK

button.

3. Select “Cross Traffic” and use the OK but-

ton to turn the system on or off.

NOTE:

When enabling/disabling the system,

the system setting will be retained even

if the EV system is restarted.

Starting and driving 5-49

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the RCTA system. Failure to

operate the vehicle in accordance with

these system limitations could result

in serious injury or death.

• Always check surroundings and turn

to check what is behind you before

backing up. The radar sensors de-

tect approaching (moving) vehicles.

The radar sensors cannot detect ev-

ery object such as:

– Pedestrians, bicycles, motor-

cycles, animals or child-operated

toy vehicles

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

greater than approximately

19 mph (30 km/h)

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

lower than approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h)

• The radar sensors may not detect

approaching vehicles in certain situ-

ations:

– Illustration a: When a vehicle

parked next to you obstructs the

beam of the radar sensor.

5-50 Starting and driving

– Illustration b: When the vehicle is

parked in an angled parking

space.

– Illustration c: When the vehicle is

parked on inclined ground.

– Illustration d: When an approach-

ing vehicle turns into your vehi-

cle’s parking lot aisle.

– Illustration e: When the angle

formed by your vehicle and ap-

proaching vehicle is small.

• The following conditions may re-

duce the ability of the radar to de-

tect other vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice/frost/dirt/snow build-up on

the vehicle

• Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install acces-

sories or apply additional paint near

the radar sensors. These conditions

may reduce the ability of the radar to

detect other vehicles.

• Excessive noise (e.g., audio system

volume, open vehicle window) will

interfere with the chime sound, and

it may not be heard.

NOTE:

In the case of several vehicles approach-

ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo-

site direction (Illustration 2), a chime may

not be sounded by the RCTA system af-

ter the first vehicle passes the sensors.

Illustration 1 Illustration 2

Starting and driving 5-51

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the sys-

tem will be deactivated automatically.

The systems are not available until the

conditions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the system will resume automatically.

Malfunction

When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will

turn off automatically.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

Action to take

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the EV

system off and restart the EV system. If the

system does not resume automatically,

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors

䊊

for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear

bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-

dar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing

the area around the radar sensors.

5-52 Starting and driving

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-

ent material), install accessories or apply

additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the radar sensors. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer if

the area around the radar sensors is dam-

aged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC : OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment

For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

Starting and driving 5-53

1. CANCEL switch

2. RES+ switch

3. SET- switch

4. Cruise control switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

• If the cruise control system malfunctions,

it cancels automatically. The cruise

indicator in the vehicle information display

then blinks to warn the driver.

• If the cruise

indicator blinks, turn the

cruise control switch off and have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

• The cruise

indicator may blink when

the cruise control switch is turned on

while pushing the RES+, SET- or CANCEL

switch. To properly set the cruise control

system, use the following procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when

driving under the following conditions:

• When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed

• In heavy traffic or in traffic that var-

ies in speed

• On winding or hilly roads

• On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.)

• In very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h)

without keeping your foot on the accelera-

tor pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

cruise control switch on. The cruise

indicator in the vehicle information display

will illuminate.

To set the cruising speed, accelerate the

vehicle to the preferred speed, push the

SET- switch and release it. Take your foot off

the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will

maintain the set speed.

• To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle will return to the previ-

ously set speed.

• The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed on winding or hilly roads. If this hap-

pens, drive without using the cruise

control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following methods:

1. Push the CANCEL switch.

2. Tap the brake pedal.

CRUISE CONTROL (IF SO EQUIPPED)

5-54 Starting and driving

3. Turn the cruise control switch off. The

cruise

indicator in the vehicle infor-

mation display will turn off.

• If you depress the brake pedal while push-

ing the RES+ or SET- switch and reset at

the cruising speed, the cruise control will

disengage. Turn the cruise control switch

off once and then turn it on again.

• The cruise control will automatically can-

cel if the vehicle slows more than 8 mph

(13 km/h) below the set speed.

• If you move the shift lever to the N (Neu-

tral) position, the cruise control will be

canceled.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use

one of the following methods:

• Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the preferred speed, push

and release the SET- switch.

• Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the

vehicle attains the preferred speed, re-

lease the switch.

• Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed will

increase by about 1 mph or 1.6 km/h.

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following methods:

• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the preferred speed, push the

SET- switch and release it.

• Push and hold the SET- switch. Release

the switch when the vehicle slows down

to the preferred speed.

• Push, then quickly release, the SET- switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed will

decrease by about 1 mph or 1km/h.

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will

resume the last set cruising speed when

the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-55

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the ICC

system could result in serious injury or

death.

• The ICC system is only an aid to as-

sist the driver and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert,

drive safely, and be in control of the

vehicle at all times.

• Always observe posted speed limits

and do not set the speed over them.

• Always drive carefully and atten-

tively when using the ICC system.

Read and understand the Owner’s

Manual thoroughly before using the

ICC system. To avoid serious injury or

death, do not rely on the system to

prevent accidents or to control the

vehicle’s speed in emergency situa-

tions. Do not use the ICC system ex-

cept in appropriate road and traffic

conditions.

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)

(FOR VEHICLES WITHOUT

PROPILOT™ ASSIST) (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

5-56 Starting and driving

• In the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, a warning

chime will not sound to warn you if

you are too close to the vehicle

ahead. Pay special attention to the

distance between your vehicle and

the vehicle ahead of you or a colli-

sion could occur

The ICC system maintains a selected dis-

tance from the vehicle in front of you within

the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to

144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set

speed can be selected by the driver be-

tween 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h).

The vehicle travels at a set speed when the

road ahead is clear.

The ICC system can be set to one of two

cruise control modes:

• Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode: For maintaining a selected dis-

tance between your vehicle and the ve-

hicle in front of you up to the present

speed

• Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

trol mode: For cruising at a preset speed

Push the ICC switch

䊊

to choose the

cruise control mode between the vehicle-

to-vehicle distance control mode and the

conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode.

Once a control mode is activated, it cannot

be changed to the other cruise control

mode. To change the mode, push the ICC

switch

䊊

once to turn the system off. Then

push the ICC switch

䊊

again to turn the

system back on and select the desired

cruise control mode.

Always confirm the setting in the ICC sys-

tem display.

For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode, refer to “Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode” in this section.

For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode, refer to “Conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode” in this section.

Starting and driving 5-57

HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE

CONTROL MODE

Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode:

To choose the vehicle-

to-vehicle distance control mode

䊊

, quickly

push and release the ICC switch

䊊

Selecting the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode: To choose the con-

ventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode

䊊

, push and hold the ICC switch

䊊

for

longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For

additional information, refer to “Conven-

tional (fixed speed) cruise control mode” in

this section.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode, the ICC system automatically main-

tains a selected distance from the vehicle

traveling in front of you according to that

vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at

the set speed when the road ahead is clear.

The ICC system is intended to enhance the

operation of the vehicle when following a

vehicle traveling in the same lane and di-

rection.

5-58 Starting and driving

If the radar sensor

䊊

detects a slower

moving vehicle ahead, the system will re-

duce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle

follows the vehicle in front at the selected

distance.

The system automatically controls the

throttle and applies the brakes (up to ap-

proximately 40% of vehicle braking power)

if necessary.

The detection range of the sensor is ap-

proximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE OPERATION

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode is designed to maintain a selected

distance from the vehicle in front of you

and can reduce the speed to match a

Starting and driving 5-59

slower vehicle ahead. The system will de-

celerate the vehicle as necessary and if the

vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle

decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC

system can only apply up to 40% of the

vehicle’s total braking power.

This system should only be used when traf-

fic conditions allow vehicle speeds to re-

main fairly constant or when vehicle

speeds change gradually. If a vehicle

moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a

vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates,

the distance between vehicles may be-

come closer because the ICC system can-

not decelerate the vehicle quickly enough.

If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a

warning chime and blink the system dis-

play to notify the driver to take necessary

action.

The system will cancel and a warning

chime will sound if the speed is below ap-

proximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle

is not detected ahead. The system will also

disengage when the vehicle goes above

the maximum set speed.

For additional information, refer to “Ap-

proach warning” in this section.

The following items are controlled in the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

• When there are no vehicles traveling

ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode maintains the speed set by

the driver. The set speed range is between

approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and

144 km/h).

• When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,

the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode adjusts the speed to maintain the

distance, selected by the driver, from the

vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes

to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a

standstill within the limitations of the sys-

tem. The system will cancel once it judges

a standstill with a warning chime.

• When the vehicle traveling ahead has

moved out from its lane of travel, the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

accelerates and maintains vehicle speed

up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle

speed or warn you when you approach

stationary and slow moving vehicles. You

must pay attention to vehicle operation to

maintain proper distance from vehicles

ahead when approaching toll gates or traf-

fic congestion.

When driving on the freeway at a set speed

and approaching a slower traveling vehicle

ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed

to maintain the distance, selected by the

driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle

ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway,

the ICC system will accelerate and main-

tain the speed up to the set speed. Pay

attention to the driving operation to main-

tain control of the vehicle as it accelerates

to the set speed.

5-60 Starting and driving

The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed on winding or hilly roads. If this oc-

curs, you will have to manually control the

vehicle speed.

Normally when controlling the distance to

a vehicle ahead, this system automatically

accelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac-

cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead.

Depress the accelerator to properly accel-

erate your vehicle when acceleration is re-

quired for a lane change. Depress the brake

pedal when deceleration is required to

maintain a safe distance to the vehicle

ahead due to its sudden braking or if a

vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when us-

ing the ICC system.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE SWITCHES

The system is operated by the ICC switch

and four control switches, all mounted on

the steering wheel.

1. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing

the set speed.

2. RES+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally.

3. SET- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces

speed incrementally.

4. DISTANCE switch:

Changes the vehicle’s following dis-

tance:

• Long

• Middle

• Short

5. ICC switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

Starting and driving 5-61

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode display and

indicators

The display is shown in the vehicle infor-

mation display.

1. Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is dis-

played in km/h.

2. This indicator indicators the ICC system

status depending on a color:

• ICC system ON indicator (gray): Indi-

cates that the ICC switch is on.

• ICC system SET indicator (green): Indi-

cates that the cruising speed is set.

• ICC system warning (yellow): Indicates

that there is a malfunction in the ICC

system.

3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in

front of you.

4. Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance between

vehicles set with the distance switch.

Operating vehicle-to-vehicle

distance control mode

To turn on the cruise control, quickly push

and release the ICC switch

䊊

. The ICC sys-

tem ON indicator (gray), set distance indi-

cator and set vehicle speed indicator

䊊

come on in a standby state for setting.

5-62 Starting and driving

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push the SET–

switch

䊊

and release it. The ICC system set

indicator (green), vehicle ahead detection

indicator, set distance indicator and set ve-

hicle speed indicator

䊊

will come on. Take

your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your

vehicle will maintain the set speed.

When the SET– switch is pushed under the

following conditions, the system cannot be

set and the ICC indicators will blink for ap-

proximately 2 seconds:

• When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)

and a vehicle ahead is not detected

• When the shift lever is not in D (Drive) or B

mode

• When the parking brake is applied

• When the brakes are operated by the

driver

When the SET– switch is pushed under the

following conditions, the system cannot be

set.

A warning chime will sound and a message

will pop up:

• When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC

system, turn on the VDC system. Push the

ICC switch to turn off the ICC system and

reset the ICC switch by pushing the ICC

switch again.)

For additional information about the

VDC system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” in this section.

• When ABS or VDC is operating

• When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC

system, make sure the wheels are no lon-

ger slipping.)

Starting and driving 5-63

1. System set display with vehicle ahead

2. System set display without vehicle

ahead

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed

based on the road conditions. The ICC sys-

tem maintains the set vehicle speed, simi-

lar to standard cruise control, as long as no

vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The

ICC system displays the set speed.

Vehicle detected ahead

When a vehicle is detected in the lane

ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve-

hicle by controlling the throttle and apply-

ing the brakes to match the speed of a

slower vehicle ahead. The system then

controls the vehicle speed based on the

speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the

driver selected distance.

NOTE:

• The stoplights of the vehicle come on

when braking is performed by the ICC

system.

• When the brake operates, a noise may

be heard. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the ve-

hicle ahead detection indicator comes on.

The ICC system will also display the set

speed and selected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected

When a vehicle is no longer detected

ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-

ates your vehicle to resume the previously

set vehicle speed. The ICC system then

maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the

vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.

If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera-

tion to the set vehicle speed or any time the

ICC system is in operation, the system con-

trols the distance to that vehicle.

When a vehicle is no longer detected under

approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the sys-

tem will be canceled.

5-64 Starting and driving

When passing another vehicle, the set

speed indicator

䊊

will flash when the ve-

hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The ve-

hicle detect indicator will turn off when the

area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the

pedal is released, the vehicle will return to

the previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set in the

ICC system, you can depress the accelera-

tor pedal when it is necessary to accelerate

your vehicle rapidly.

How to change the set vehicle

speed

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following methods:

• Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.

• Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed

indicator will go out.

• Turn the ICC switch off. The ICC indicators

will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use

one of the following methods:

• Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

and release the SET– switch.

• Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set

vehicle speed will increase by approxi-

mately 5 mph (5 km/h).

• Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed will

increase by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following methods:

• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the

SET– switch and release it.

• Push and hold the SET– switch. The set

vehicle speed will decrease by approxi-

mately 5 mph (5 km/h).

• Push, then quickly release the SET– switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed will

decrease by approximately 1 mph

(1 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will

resume the last set cruising speed when

the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-65

How to change the set distance

to the vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be

selected at any time depending on the traf-

fic conditions.

Each time the DISTANCE switch

䊊

pushed, the set distance will change to

long, middle, short and back to long again,

in that sequence.

Distance Approximate dis-

tance at 60 mph

(100 km/h) [ft (m)]

1. Long 200 (60)

2. Middle 150 (45)

3. Short 90 (30)

• The distance to the vehicle ahead will

change according to the vehicle speed.

The higher the vehicle speed, the longer

the distance.

• If the EV system is stopped, the set dis-

tance becomes “long.” (Each time the EV

system is started, the initial setting be-

comes “long.”)

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle

ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve-

hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys-

tem warns the driver with the chime and

ICC system display. Decelerate by depress-

ing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve-

hicle distance if:

• The chime sounds.

• The vehicle ahead detection indicator

blinks.

The warning chime may not sound in

some cases when there is a short distance

between vehicles. Some examples are:

• When the vehicles are traveling at the

same speed and the distance between

vehicles is not changing.

• When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster

and the distance between vehicles is

increasing.

• When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.

5-66 Starting and driving

The warning chime will not sound when:

• The vehicle approaches other vehicles

that are parked or moving slowly.

• The accelerator pedal is depressed, over-

riding the system.

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound

and the system display may blink when the

ICC sensor detects objects on the side of

the vehicle or on the side of the road. This

may cause the ICC system to decelerate or

accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may

detect these objects when the vehicle is

driven on winding roads, narrow roads, hilly

roads, or when entering or exiting a curve.

In these cases you will have to manually

control the proper distance ahead of your

vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be af-

fected by vehicle operation (steering

maneuver or driving position in the

lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for

example, if a vehicle is being driven with

some damage).

Automatic cancellation

A chime sounds under the following condi-

tions and the control is automatically can-

celed:

• When the vehicle ahead is not detected

and your vehicle is traveling below the

speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)

• When the system judges the vehicle is at a

standstill

• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

position or B mode

• When the parking brake system is applied

• When the VDC system is turned off

• When ABS or VDC operates

• When distance measurement becomes

impaired due to adhesion of dirt or ob-

struction to the sensor

• When a wheel slips

• When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the ICC system. Failure to op-

erate the vehicle in accordance with

these system limitations could result

in serious injury or death.

• The ICC system is primarily intended

for use on straight, dry, open roads

with light traffic. It is not advisable to

use the ICC system in city traffic or

congested areas.

• The ICC system will not adapt auto-

matically to road conditions. This

system should be used in evenly

flowing traffic. Do not use the sys-

tem on roads with sharp curves, or

on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.

• As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely

solely on the ICC system. This sys-

tem does not correct careless, inat-

tentive or absentminded driving, or

overcome poor visibility in rain, fog,

or other bad weather. Decelerate the

vehicle speed by depressing the

Starting and driving 5-67

brake pedal, depending on the dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead and the

surrounding circumstances in order

to maintain a safe distance between

vehicles.

• If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,

the vehicle decelerates to a stand-

still within the limitations of the sys-

tem. The system will cancel once it

judges that the vehicle has come to

a standstill and sound a warning

chime. To prevent the vehicle from

moving, the driver must depress the

brake pedal.

• Always pay attention to the opera-

tion of the vehicle and be ready to

manually control the proper follow-

ing distance. The ICC system may

not be able to maintain the selected

distance between vehicles (follow-

ing distance) or selected vehicle

speed under some circumstances.

• The system may not detect the ve-

hicle in front of you in certain road or

weather conditions. To avoid acci-

dents, never use the ICC system un-

der the following conditions:

– On roads where the traffic is heavy

or there are sharp curves

– On slippery road surfaces such as

on ice or snow, etc.

– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.)

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to

the bumper around the distance

sensor

–

On steep downhill roads (the vehicle

may go beyond the set vehicle

speed and frequent braking may re-

sult in overheating the brakes)

– On repeated uphill and downhill

roads

– When traffic conditions make it

difficult to keep a proper distance

between vehicles because of fre-

quent acceleration or decelera-

tion

– Interference by other radar

sources.

• Do not use the ICC system if you are

towing a trailer. The system may not

detect a vehicle ahead.

• In some road or traffic conditions, a

vehicle or object can unexpectedly

come into the sensor detection zone

and cause automatic braking. Al-

ways stay alert and avoid using the

ICC system where not recom-

mended in this warning section.

The radar sensor will not detect the follow-

ing objects:

• Stationary and slow moving vehicles

• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

• Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel

lane

The sensor generally detects the signals

returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore,

if the sensor cannot detect the reflection

from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system

may not maintain the selected distance.

The following are some conditions in which

the sensor cannot properly detect a ve-

hicle ahead and the system may not oper-

ate properly:

• When snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.

• When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.

• When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the liftgate of

your vehicle.

The ICC system is designed to automati-

cally check the sensor’s operation within

the limitations of the system.

5-68 Starting and driving

When the sensor is covered with dirt or is

obstructed, the system will automatically

be canceled. If the sensor is covered with

ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag,

etc., the ICC system may not detect them.

In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance control mode may not cancel and

may not be able to maintain the selected

following distance from the vehicle ahead.

Be sure to check and clean the sensor

regularly.

The detection zone of the radar sensor is

limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de-

tection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance detection mode to maintain the se-

lected distance from the vehicle ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the

detection zone due to its position within

the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may

not be detected in the same lane ahead if

they are traveling offset from the center

line of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the

lane ahead may not be detected until the

vehicle has completely moved into the

lane.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn

you by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime. The driver may

have to manually control the proper dis-

tance away from the vehicle traveling

ahead.

Starting and driving 5-69

When driving on some roads, such as wind-

ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads

which are under construction, the ICC sen-

sor may detect vehicles in a different lane,

or may temporarily not detect a vehicle

traveling ahead. This may cause the ICC

system to decelerate or accelerate the ve-

hicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be af-

fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-

neuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.)

or vehicle condition.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn

you by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime unexpectedly. You

will have to manually control the proper

distance away from the vehicle traveling

ahead.

5-70 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

The following are conditions in which the

ICC system may be temporarily unavail-

able. In these instances, the ICC system

may cancel and may not be able to main-

tain the selected following distance from

the vehicle ahead.

Condition A

Under the following conditions, the ICC sys-

tem is automatically canceled. A chime will

sound and the system will not be able to be

set:

• When the VDC system is turned off

• When ABS or VDC is operating

• When a vehicle ahead is not detected and

your vehicle is traveling below the speed

of 15 mph (24 km/h)

• When the system judges the vehicle is at a

standstill

• When the shift lever is not in D (Drive) or B

mode

• When the parking brake is applied

• When a wheel slips

• When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted

Starting and driving 5-71

Action to take

When the conditions listed above are no

longer present, turn the system off using

the ICC switch. Turn the ICC system back on

to use the system.

Condition B

When the radar sensor area of the front

bumper is covered with dirt or is ob-

structed, the ICC system will automatically

be canceled.

The chime will sound and the “Not Avail-

able: Front Radar Blocked” warning mes-

sage will appear in the vehicle information

display.

When driving on roads with limited road

structures or bridges (for example, long

bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to

long walls), the system may illuminate the

system warning light (orange) and display

the “Not Available: Front Radar Blocked”

message.

Action to take

If the warning message appears, stop the

vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever

in the P (Park) position, and turn the EV

system off. When the radar signal is tempo-

rarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of

the front bumper and restart the EV sys-

tem. If the “Not Available: Front Radar

Blocked” warning message continues to

be displayed, have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer for this service.

Condition C

When the ICC system is not operating

properly, a chime sounds and the ICC sys-

tem warning light (orange) will come on.

5-72 Starting and driving

Action to take

If the warning light comes on, park the ve-

hicle in a safe place. Turn the EV system off,

restart the EV system, resume driving and

set the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or

the indicator stays on, it may indicate

that the system is malfunctioning. Al-

though the vehicle is still drivable under

normal conditions, have the vehicle

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor for the ICC system

䊊

is located

on the front of the vehicle.

To keep the ICC system operating properly,

be sure to observe the following:

• Always keep the sensor area clean.

• Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensor.

• Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the sensor.This could cause failure or

malfunction.

• Do not attach metallic objects near the

sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could

cause failure or malfunction.

• Do not alter, remove, or paint the front

bumper. Before customizing or restoring

the front bumper, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-73

For Canada

Model: ARS4–B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with Industry Canada licence-

exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the

device.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-

eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation

est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv-

antes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radio électrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Infor-

mation:

This equipment complies with FCC radia-

tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-

trolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of 30 cm

between the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located or

operating in conjunction with any other an-

tenna or transmitter.

Cet équipement est conforme aux limites

d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies

pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet

équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec

un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la

source de rayonnement et votre corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED)

CRUISE CONTROL MODE

This mode allows driving at a speed be-

tween 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) with-

out keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

WARNING

• In the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, a warning

chime does not sound to warn you if

you are too close to the vehicle

ahead, as neither the presence of

the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-

vehicle distance is detected.

• Pay special attention to the distance

between your vehicle and the ve-

hicle ahead of you or a collision

could occur.

• Always confirm the setting in the ICC

system display.

• Do not use the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode when

driving under the following condi-

tions:

– When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed

– In heavy traffic or in traffic that

varies in speed

5-74 Starting and driving

– On winding or hilly roads

– On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.)

– In very windy areas

• Doing so could cause a loss of ve-

hicle control and result in an acci-

dent.

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control switches

1. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing

the set speed.

2. RES+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally.

3. SET- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces

speed incrementally.

4. ICC switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

Starting and driving 5-75

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode display and

indicators

The display is located in the vehicle infor-

mation display.

1. Cruise indicator: This indicator indi-

cates the ICC system status depending

on a color:

• Cruise control ON indicator (gray): In-

dicates that the ICC switch is on.

• Cruise control SET indicator (green):

Indicates that the cruising speed is set.

• Cruise control warning (yellow): Indi-

cates that there is a malfunction in the

ICC system.

2. Set vehicle speed indicator: This indi-

cator indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is dis-

played in km/h.

Operating conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, push and hold the ICC

switch

䊊

for longer than about 1.5 sec-

onds.

When pushing ICC switch on, the conven-

tional (fixed speed) cruise control mode

display and indicators

䊊

are displayed in

the vehicle information display. After you

hold the ICC switch for longer than about

1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns

off. The cruise indicator appears. You can

5-76 Starting and driving

now set your desired cruising speed. Push-

ing the ICC switch again will turn the sys-

tem completely off. When the power switch

is placed in the OFF position, the system is

also automatically turned off.

To use the ICC system again, quickly push

and release the ICC switch (vehicle-to ve-

hicle distance control mode) or push and

hold it (conventional cruise control mode)

again to turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging cruise

control, make sure to turn the ICC

switch off when not using the ICC sys-

tem.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push the SET-

䊊

switch and release it. (The color of the

cruise indicator changes to green and set

vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take

your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your

vehicle will maintain the set speed.

• To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle will return to the previ-

ously set speed.

• The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep hills.

If this happens, manually maintain vehicle

speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the

following methods:

1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle

speed indicator will turn off.

2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed

indicator will turn off.

3. Turn the ICC switch off. Both the cruise

indicator and vehicle speed indicator will

turn off.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

and release the SET- switch.

2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

release the switch.

3. Push, then quickly release the RES+

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will increase by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-77

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the SET- switch and release it.

2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release

the switch when the vehicle slows down

to the desired speed.

3. Push, then quickly release the SET-

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will decrease by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the RES+ switch. The vehicle will re-

sume the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

System temporarily unavailable

A chime sounds under the following conditions

and the control is automatically canceled:

• When the vehicle slows down more than

8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed

5-78 Starting and driving

• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

or B mode

• When the parking brake is applied

• When the VDC operates (including the

traction control system)

• When a wheel slips

When the system is not operating properly,

the chime sounds and the color of the

cruise indicator will change to orange.

Action to take

If the color of the cruise indicator changes

to orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place

and place the shift lever in the P (Park) po-

sition. Turn the EV system off, restart the EV

system, resume driving, and then perform

the setting again.

If it is not possible to set or the indicator

stays on, it may indicate that the system

is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle

is still drivable under normal conditions,

have the vehicle checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the ProPI-

LOT Assist system could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

• ProPILOT Assist is not a self-driving

system. Within the limits of its capa-

bilities, as described in this manual,

it helps the driver with certain driv-

ing activities.

• The ProPILOT Assist system is not a

replacement for proper driving pro-

cedures and is not designed to cor-

rect careless, inattentive or absent-

minded driving. ProPILOT Assist will

not always steer the vehicle to keep

it in the lane. The ProPILOT Assist

system is not designed to prevent

loss of control. It is the driver’s re-

sponsibility to stay alert, drive

safely, keep the vehicle in the travel-

ing lane, and be in control of the ve-

hicle at all times.

• There are limitations to the ProPILOT

Assist system capability. The ProPI-

LOT Assist system does not function

in all driving, traffic, weather, and

road conditions. It is the driver’s re-

sponsibility to stay alert, drive

safely, keep the vehicle in the travel-

ing lane, and be in control of the ve-

hicle at all times.

• The ProPILOT Assist system is only

an aid to assist the driver and is not a

collision warning or avoidance de-

vice.

• The ProPILOT Assist system is for

highway use only and is not in-

tended for city driving. Failure to ap-

ply the brake or steer the vehicle

when necessary may result in a seri-

ous accident.

• Always observe posted speed limits

and do not set the speed over them.

• Never take your hands off the steer-

ing wheel when driving. Always keep

your hands on the steering wheel

and drive your vehicle safely.

• Never unfasten your safety belt

when using ProPILOT Assist. Doing

so automatically cancels the ProPI-

LOT Assist system.

PROPILOT™ ASSIST (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

Starting and driving 5-79

• The ProPILOT Assist system does not

react to stationary and slow moving

vehicles.

• Always drive carefully and atten-

tively when using the ProPILOT As-

sist system. Read and understand

the Owner’s Manual thoroughly be-

fore using the ProPILOT Assist sys-

tem. To avoid serious injury or death,

do not rely on the system to prevent

accidents or to control the vehicle’s

speed in emergency situations. Do

not use the ProPILOT Assist system

except in appropriate road and traf-

fic conditions.

The ProPILOT Assist system is intended to

enhance the operation of the vehicle when

following a vehicle traveling in the same

lane and direction.

The ProPILOT Assist system uses a multi-

sensing front camera unit

䊊

installed be-

hind the windshield and a radar sensor lo-

cated on the front of the vehicle

䊊

measure the distance to the vehicle ahead

in the same lane and to monitor the lane

markers. If the vehicle detects a slower

moving vehicle ahead, the system will re-

duce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle

follows the vehicle in front at the selected

distance.The system will also help keep the

vehicle centered in the traveling lane when

clear lane markings are detected.

5-80 Starting and driving

PROPILOT™ ASSIST SYSTEM

OPERATION

1. Steering-wheel-mounted control (left)

2. Vehicle information display

3. Steering-wheel-mounted control (right)

4. ProPILOT Assist switch

The ProPILOT Assist system has the follow-

ing two functions:

1. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

The ICC system can be set to one of two

cruise control modes:

• Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode: For cruising at a preset

speed

NOTE:

Steering Assist is not available in the

conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode.

• Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode: The ICC system maintains a se-

lected distance from the vehicle in front

of you within the speed range of 0 to

90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set

speed. The set speed can be selected

by the driver between 20 to 90 mph (32

to 144 km/h). When the vehicle ahead

slows to a stop, your vehicle gradually

Starting and driving 5-81

decelerates to a standstill. When the ve-

hicle is stopped, the ICC system main-

tains braking force to keep your vehicle

stopped.

NOTE:

When your vehicle is stopped for less

than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead

begins to move, your vehicle will start

moving again automatically.

– When the vehicle ahead begins to

move forward, push the RES+ switch

on the steering-wheel-mounted

control or lightly depress the accel-

erator pedal to release the brake.

The ICC system will restart to main-

tain a selected distance from the ve-

hicle in front of you.

– When no vehicle is detected ahead

within the driver selected distance,

the vehicle travels at the speed set

by the driver. The speed must be

above 20 mph (32 km/h) to use this

function.

NOTE:

Even if the Automatic Emergency

Braking (AEB) setting is turned off by

the driver using the “Settings” menu

in the vehicle information display,

AEB will be automatically turned on

when ICC is used.

2. Steering Assist

The Steering Assist function controls

the steering system to help keep your

vehicle within the traveling lane.

When there is no vehicle ahead, Steering

Assist is not available at speeds under

37 mph (60 km/h).

5-82 Starting and driving

ProPILOT™ Assist switches

1. DISTANCE switch:

• Long

• Middle

• Short

2. RES+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the ProPILOT Assist system

4. SET- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces

speed incrementally

5. ProPILOT Assist switch:

Turns the ProPILOT Assist system on or

off

6. Steering Assist switch:

Turns the Steering Assist function on or

off

The ProPILOT™ Assist system

display and indicators

1. Steering Assist indicator

Indicates the status of the Steering As-

sist function by the color of the indicator

• Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering

Assist standby

• Steering Assist indicator (green): Steer-

ing Assist active

• Steering Assist indicator (orange):

Steering Assist malfunction

Starting and driving 5-83

2. ProPILOT Assist activation

Displays once the ProPILOT Assist sys-

tem is activated

3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

Indicates whether the system detects a

vehicle in front of you

4. ProPILOT Assist status indicator

Indicates the status of the ProPILOT As-

sist system by the color of the indicator

• ProPILOT Assist status indicator (white):

ProPILOT Assist is on but in standby

• ProPILOT Assist status indicator (blue):

ProPILOT Assist active

5. Lane marker indicator

Indicates whether the system detects

lane markers

• No lane markers displayed: Steering As-

sist is turned off

• Lane marker indicator (gray): No lane

markers detected

• Lane marker indicator (green): Lane

markers detected

• Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane de-

parture is detected

6. Set distance indicator

Displays the selected distance

7. Steering Assist status

indicator/warning

Displays the status of the Steering As-

sist by the color of the indicator/

warning

• No Steering Assist status indicator dis-

played: Steering Assist is turned off

• Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering

Assist standby

• Steering Assist indicator (green): Steer-

ing Assist active

• Steering Assist indicator (yellow): Steer-

ing Assist malfunction

8. Speed control status

indicator/warning

Displays the status of speed control by

the color and shape of the indicator/

warning

• Speed control status indicator/warning

(gray): ICC standby

• Speed control status indicator/warning

(solid green

): ICC (distance control

mode) is active (vehicle detected

ahead). Your vehicle matches the speed

of the vehicle ahead.

•

Speed control status indicator/warning

(green outline

): ICC (maintain speed

control mode) is active (no vehicle de-

tected ahead). Your vehicle maintains

the driver-selected set speed.

• Speed control status indicator/warning

(orange): Indicates an ICC malfunction

9. Set vehicle speed indicator

Indicates the set vehicle speed

TURNING THE CONVENTIONAL

(FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL

MODE ON

NOTE:

ProPILOT™ Assist provides no ap-

proach warnings, automatic braking,

or steering assist in the conventional

(fixed speed) cruise control mode.

To choose the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, push and hold the

ProPILOT Assist switch for longer than ap-

proximately 1.5 seconds. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode” in this section.

5-84 Starting and driving

OPERATING PROPILOT™ ASSIST

1. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch

䊊

. This

turns on the ProPILOT Assist system and

displays the status of the ProPILOT As-

sist system on the vehicle information

display

䊊

2. Accelerate or decelerate your vehicle to

the desired speed.

3. Push the SET- switch

䊊

. The ProPILOT

Assist system begins to automatically

maintain the set speed. The ProPILOT

Assist activation indicator

䊊

and ProPI-

LOT Assist status indicator

䊊

illuminate

(blue). When a vehicle ahead is traveling

at a speed of 20 mph (32 km/h) or below

and the SET- switch is pushed, the set

speed of your vehicle is 20 mph

(32 km/h).

NOTE:

Turning the ProPILOT Assist system on

will turn on the Intelligent Lane Interven-

tion (I-LI) system at the same time. For

additional information, refer to “Intelli-

gent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” in this

section.

When the SET- switch is pushed under the

following conditions, the ProPILOT Assist

system cannot be set and the set vehicle

speed indicator

䊊

blinks for approximately

2 seconds:

• When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)

and the vehicle ahead is not detected

• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

position or B mode

• When the parking brake is applied

• When the brakes are operated by the

driver

Starting and driving 5-85

• When the VDC system is off. For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” in this section.

• When the VDC system (including the trac-

tion control system) is operating

• When a wheel is slipping

• When any door is open

• When the driver’s seat belt is not fastened

How to change the set vehicle

speed

The set vehicle speed can be adjusted.

To change to a faster cruising speed:

• Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set

vehicle speed increases by approximately

5 mph (5 km/h).

• Push, then quickly release, the RES+

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed increases by approximately 1 mph

(1 km/h).

To change to a slower cruising speed:

• Push and hold the SET- switch. The set

vehicle speed decreases by approxi-

mately 5 mph (5 km/h).

• Push, then quickly release, the SET- switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed de-

creases by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

How to momentarily accelerate or

decelerate

• Depress the accelerator pedal when ac-

celeration is required. Release the accel-

erator pedal to resume the previously set

vehicle speed.

• Depress the brake pedal when decelera-

tion is required. Control by the ProPILOT™

Assist system is canceled. Push the RES+

switch to resume the previously set ve-

hicle speed.

5-86 Starting and driving

WARNING

When the accelerator pedal is de-

pressed and you are approaching the

vehicle ahead, the ICC system will nei-

ther control the brake nor warn the

driver with the chime and display. The

driver must manually control the ve-

hicle speed to maintain a safe distance

to the vehicle ahead. Failure to do so

could result in severe personal injury

or death.

NOTE:

When you accelerate by depressing

the accelerator pedal or decelerate by

pushing the SET- switch and the ve-

hicle travels faster than the speed set

by the driver, the set speed vehicle

indicator will blink.

How to change the set distance

to the vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be

selected at any time.

Each time the DISTANCE switch

䊊

pushed, the set distance will change to

long, middle, short and back to long again

in that sequence.

Starting and driving 5-87

Distance Approximate dis-

tance at 60 mph

(100 km/h) [ft (m)]

1. Long 200 (60)

2. Middle 150 (45)

3. Short 90 (30)

• The distance to the vehicle ahead

changes automatically according to the

vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle

speed, the longer the distance.

• If the EV system is stopped, the set dis-

tance becomes “long.” (Each time the EV

system is started, the initial setting be-

comes “long.”)

5-88 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

STEERING ASSIST

1. Steering-wheel mounted control (right)

2. Vehicle information display

3. Steering Assist switch

Use the following methods to enable or

disable the Steering Assist.

Steering Assist switch:

To turn the Steering Assist on or off, push

the Steering Assist switch

䊊

on the instru-

ment panel.

NOTE:

• When the Steering Assist switch is used

to turn the system on or off, the system

remembers the setting even if the

power switch is cycled. The switch must

be pushed again to change the setting

to on or off.

• The Steering Assist switch changes the

status of the “Steering Assist” selection

made in the “Settings” screen in the ve-

hicle information display.

Setting in the vehicle information dis-

play:

1. Press the

button on the steering

wheel

䊊

until “Settings” displays in the

vehicle information display

䊊

and then

press the OK button

䊊

Starting and driving 5-89

2. Use the button

䊊

to select “Driver

Assistance.” Then press the OK button

䊊

3. Select “Steering Assist” and press the OK

button

䊊

NOTE:

• When the Cruise screen is displayed on

the vehicle information display, press

the OK button on the steering wheel to

call up the “Driver Assistance” setting

display.

• When enabling/disabling the system

through the vehicle information display

or when pressing the Steering Assist

switch, the system retains the current

settings even if the EV system is re-

started.

How to cancel the ProPILOT™

Assist system

To cancel the ProPILOT Assist system, use

one of the following methods:

• Push the CANCEL switch.

• Tap the brake pedal (except at a standstill).

• Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn

the system off. The ProPILOT Assist status

indicator will go out.

When the ProPILOT Assist system is can-

celed while the vehicle is stopped, the elec-

tronic parking brake is automatically acti-

vated.

WARNING

When you leave the vehicle, make sure

to push the ProPILOT Assist switch to

turn the system off, place the shift le-

ver in the P (Park) position, and turn the

EV system off.

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL

(ICC) (FOR VEHICLES WITH

PROPILOT™ ASSIST)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the ICC

system could result in serious injury or

death.

• The ICC system is only an aid to as-

sist the driver and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. It is for

highway use only and it is not in-

tended for congested areas or city

driving. It is the driver’s responsibil-

ity to stay alert, drive safely, and be

in control of the vehicle at all times.

• There are limitations to the ICC sys-

tem capability. The ICC system does

not function in all driving, traffic,

weather, and road conditions. It is

the driver’s responsibility to stay

alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in

the traveling lane, and be in control

of the vehicle at all times.

• Always observe posted speed limits

and do not set the speed over them.

• The ICC system does not react to

stationary and slow moving ve-

hicles.

• Always drive carefully and atten-

tively when using the ICC system.

Read and understand the Owner’s

Manual thoroughly before using the

ICC system. To avoid serious injury or

death, do not rely on the system to

prevent accidents or to control the

5-90 Starting and driving

vehicle’s speed in emergency situa-

tions. Do not use the ICC system ex-

cept in appropriate road and traffic

conditions.

ICC system operation

The ICC system is designed to maintain a

selected distance from the vehicle in front

of you and can reduce the speed to match

a slower vehicle ahead. The system decel-

erates the vehicle as necessary and if the

vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle

decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC

system can only apply up to 40% of the

vehicle’s total braking power. This system

should only be used when traffic condi-

tions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly

constant or when vehicle speeds change

gradually. If a vehicle moves into the travel-

ing lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling

ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance be-

tween vehicles may become closer be-

cause the ICC system cannot decelerate

the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs,

the ICC system sounds a warning chime

and blinks the system display to notify the

driver to take necessary action.

The ICC system cancels and a warning

chime sounds if the speed is below ap-

proximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle

is not detected ahead.

The ICC system operates as follows:

• When there are no vehicles traveling

ahead, the ICC system maintains the

speed set by the driver. The set speed

range is between approximately 20 and

90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).

• When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,

the ICC system adjusts the speed to

maintain the distance, selected by the

driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the ve-

hicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle

decelerates to a standstill. Once your ve-

hicle stops, the ICC system keeps the ve-

hicle stopped.

• When your vehicle is at a standstill for

more than 3 seconds and the vehicle

ahead begins to accelerate, push the RES+

switch or lightly depress the accelerator

pedal. The ICC system starts to follow the

vehicle ahead.

• When the vehicle traveling ahead moves

to a different traveling lane, the ICC system

accelerates and maintains vehicle speed

up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle

speed or warn you when you approach

stationary and slow moving vehicles. You

must pay attention to vehicle operation to

maintain proper distance from vehicles

ahead when approaching toll gates or traf-

fic congestion.

Starting and driving 5-91

When driving on the freeway at a set speed

and approaching a slower traveling vehicle

ahead, the ICC system adjusts the speed to

maintain the distance, selected by the

driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle

ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway,

the ICC system accelerates and maintains

the speed up to the set speed. Pay atten-

tion to the driving operation to maintain

control of the vehicle as it accelerates to

the set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed on winding or hilly roads. If this oc-

curs, you will have to manually control the

vehicle speed.

Normally when controlling the distance to

a vehicle ahead, the system automatically

accelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac-

cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead.

Depress the accelerator to properly accel-

erate your vehicle when acceleration is re-

quired for a lane change. Depress the brake

pedal when deceleration is required to

maintain a safe distance to the vehicle

ahead due to sudden braking or if a vehicle

cuts in. Always stay alert when using the

ICC system.

No vehicle detected ahead

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed

based on the road conditions. The ICC sys-

tem maintains the set vehicle speed, simi-

lar to standard cruise control, as long as no

vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The

ICC system displays the set speed.

System set display with no vehicle de-

tected ahead

5-92 Starting and driving

Vehicle detected ahead

When a vehicle is detected in the lane

ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve-

hicle by controlling the throttle and apply-

ing the brakes to match the speed of a

slower vehicle ahead. The ICC system then

controls the vehicle speed based on the

speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the

driver selected distance.

NOTE:

• The stoplights of the vehicle come on

when braking is performed by the ICC

system.

• When the brake is applied by the sys-

tem, a noise may be heard. This is not a

malfunction.

When the ICC system detects a vehicle

ahead, the vehicle ahead detection indica-

tor and the speed control status indicator

(distance control mode) illuminates (solid

green

Vehicle ahead stops

When the vehicle ahead decelerates to

stop, your vehicle decelerates to a stand-

still. Once your vehicle stops, the ICC sys-

tem automatically applies the brakes to

keep the vehicle stopped. When your ve-

hicle is at a standstill, the “(RES+) Press to

start” message is displayed on the vehicle

information display.

NOTE:

When your vehicle stops for less than

3 seconds, your vehicle will automati-

cally follow the vehicle as it acceler-

ates from a stop.

Vehicle ahead accelerates

When your vehicle is stopped and the ve-

hicle ahead begins to accelerate, push the

RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelera-

tor pedal. The ICC system starts to follow

the vehicle ahead.

Vehicle ahead not detected

When a vehicle is no longer detected

ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-

ates your vehicle to resume the previously

set vehicle speed. The ICC system then

maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the

vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off

and the speed control status indicator

(maintain speed control mode) illuminates

(green outline

The ICC system gradually accelerates to

the set speed, but you can depress the

accelerator pedal to quickly accelerate.

When a vehicle is no longer detected and

your vehicle is traveling under approxi-

mately 15 mph (24 km/h), the ICC system

automatically cancels.

System set display with vehicle ahead

Starting and driving 5-93

When passing another vehicle, the set

speed indicator

䊊

flashes when the ve-

hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The ve-

hicle ahead detection indicator turns off

when the area ahead of the vehicle is open.

When the pedal is released, the vehicle re-

turns to the previously set speed. Even

though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC

system, you can depress the accelerator

pedal when it is necessary to accelerate

your vehicle rapidly.

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle

ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve-

hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys-

tem warns the driver with the chime and

ICC system display. Decelerate by depress-

ing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve-

hicle distance if:

• The chime sounds.

• The vehicle ahead detection indicator and

set distance indicator blink.

• You judge it necessary to maintain a safe

distance.

The warning chime may not sound in

some cases when there is a short distance

between vehicles. Some examples are:

• When the vehicles are traveling at the

same speed and the distance between

vehicles is not changing.

• When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster

and the distance between vehicles is

increasing.

• When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.

The warning chime will not sound when:

• Your vehicle approaches other vehicles

that are parked or moving slowly.

• The accelerator pedal is depressed, over-

riding the system.

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound

and the system display may flash when

the radar sensor detects objects on the

side of the vehicle or on the side of the

road. This may cause the ICC system to

decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The

radar sensor may detect these objects

when the vehicle is driven on winding,

narrow, or hilly roads or when the vehicle

is entering or exiting a curve. In these

cases, you will have to manually control

the proper distance ahead of your

vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be af-

fected by vehicle operation (steering

maneuver or driving position in the

lane) or traffic or vehicle conditions (for

example, if a vehicle is being driven with

some damage).

5-94 Starting and driving

ICC system limitations

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the ICC system. Failure to op-

erate the vehicle in accordance with

these system limitations could result

in serious injury or death:

• The ICC system is primarily intended

for use on straight, dry, open roads

with light traffic. It is not advisable to

use the ICC system in city traffic or

congested areas.

• The ICC system will not adapt auto-

matically to road conditions. This

system should be used in evenly

flowing traffic. Do not use the sys-

tem on roads with sharp curves or

on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.

• As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely

solely on the ICC system. This sys-

tem does not correct careless, inat-

tentive or absentminded driving or

overcome poor visibility in rain, fog,

or other bad weather. Decelerate the

vehicle speed by depressing the

brake pedal, depending on the dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead and the

surrounding circumstances in order

to maintain a safe distance between

vehicles.

• When the ICC system automatically

brings the car to a stop, your vehicle

can automatically accelerate if the

vehicle is stopped for less than ap-

proximately 3 seconds. Be prepared

to stop your vehicle if necessary.

• Always pay attention to the opera-

tion of the vehicle and be ready to

manually control the proper follow-

ing distance. The ICC system may

not be able to maintain the selected

distance between vehicles (follow-

ing distance) or selected vehicle

speed under some circumstances.

• The system may not detect the ve-

hicle in front of you in certain road or

weather conditions. To avoid acci-

dents, never use the ICC system un-

der the following conditions:

– On roads with heavy, high-speed

traffic or sharp curves

– On slippery road surfaces such as

on ice or snow, etc.

– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.)

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to

the bumper around the distance

sensor

– On steep downhill roads (the ve-

hicle may go beyond the set ve-

hicle speed and frequent braking

may result in overheating the

brakes)

– On repeated uphill and downhill

roads

– When traffic conditions make it

difficult to keep a proper distance

between vehicles because of fre-

quent acceleration or decelera-

tion

– Interference by other radar

sources

• Do not use the ICC system if you are

towing a trailer. The system may not

detect a vehicle ahead.

• In some road or traffic conditions, a

vehicle or object can unexpectedly

come into the sensor detection zone

and cause automatic braking. Al-

ways stay alert and avoid using the

ICC system where not recom-

mended in this warning section.

Starting and driving 5-95

The ICC system will not detect the following

objects:

• Stationary or slow moving vehicles

• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

• Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel

lane

The following are some conditions in which

the radar sensor cannot properly detect a

vehicle ahead and the system may not op-

erate properly:

• When the sensor detection is reduced

(conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust

storms, sandstorms, and road spray from

other vehicles)

• Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads

with sharp curves

• Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as

an uneven dirt road

• If dirt, ice, snow or other material is cover-

ing the radar sensor area

• A complicated-shaped vehicle such as a

car carrier trailer or flatbed truck/trailer is

near the vehicle ahead

• Interference by other radar sources

• When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.

• When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of

your vehicle

The ICC system is designed to automati-

cally check the radar sensor’s operation

within the limitations of the system.

The detection zone of the radar sensor is

limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de-

tection zone for the ICC system to maintain

the selected distance from the vehicle

ahead. A vehicle ahead may move outside

of the detection zone due to its position

within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles

may not be detected in the same lane

ahead if they are traveling offset from the

center line of the lane. A vehicle that is en-

tering the lane ahead may not be detected

until the vehicle has completely moved into

the lane.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you

by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime. The driver may have

to manually control the proper distance

away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

The ICC system (with ProPILOT™ Assist)

uses a multi-sensing front camera. The fol-

lowing are some conditions in which the

camera may not properly detect a vehicle

and detection of a vehicle ahead may be

delayed:

• Poor visibility (conditions such as rain,

snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms, and

road spray from other vehicles)

• The camera area of the windshield is

fogged up or covered with dirt, water

drops, ice, snow, etc.

• Strong light (for example, sunlight or high

beams from oncoming vehicles) enters

the front camera

• Strong light causes the area around the

pedestrian to be cast in a shadow, making

it difficult to see

• A sudden change in brightness occurs (for

example, when the vehicle enters or exits

a tunnel or shaded area or lightning

flashes)

5-96 Starting and driving

When driving on some roads, such as wind-

ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads

which are under construction, the radar

sensor may detect vehicles in a different

lane, or may temporarily not detect a ve-

hicle traveling ahead. This may cause the

radar system to decelerate or accelerate

the vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be af-

fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-

neuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.)

or vehicle condition.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you

by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will

have to manually control the proper dis-

tance away from the vehicle traveling

ahead.

Automatic cancellation

The following are conditions in which the

ICC system may be temporarily unavail-

able. In these instances, the ICC system

may not cancel and may not be able to

maintain the selected following distance

from the vehicle ahead.

Starting and driving 5-97

Condition A

Under the following conditions, the ICC sys-

tem is automatically canceled. A chime will

sound and the system will not be able to be

set:

• Any door is open.

• The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

• The vehicle ahead is not detected and

your vehicle is traveling below the speed

of 15 mph (24 km/h).

• Your vehicle has been stopped by the ICC

system for approximately 3 minutes or

longer.

• The shift lever is not in the D (Drive) posi-

tion or B mode.

• The electronic parking brake is applied.

• The VDC system is turned off.

• The AEB applies harder braking.

• VDC (including the traction control sys-

tem) operates.

• A wheel slips.

• When distance measurement becomes

impaired due to adhesion of dirt or ob-

struction to the sensor.

• When the radar signal is temporarily

interrupted.

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no

longer present, turn the system off using

the ProPILOT™ Assist switch. Turn the Pro-

PILOT Assist system back on to use the

system.

NOTE:

When the ICC system is canceled un-

der the following conditions at a

standstill, the electronic parking

brake is automatically activated:

• Any door is open.

• The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

• Your vehicle has been stopped by the

ICC system for approximately 3 minutes

or longer.

• The shift lever is not in the D (Drive) po-

sition or B mode.

• The VDC system is turned off.

• When distance measurement becomes

impaired due to adhesion of dirt or ob-

struction to the sensor.

• When the radar signal is temporarily in-

terrupted.

Condition B

When the radar sensor of the front bumper

is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC

system will automatically be canceled.

The chime will sound and the “Not Avail-

able: Front Radar Blocked” warning mes-

sage will appear in the vehicle information

display.

Action to take:

If the warning message appears, stop the

vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever

in the P (Park) position, and turn the EV

system off. When the radar signal is tempo-

rarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of

the front bumper and restart the EV sys-

tem. If the “Not Available: Front Radar

Blocked” warning message continues to

be displayed, have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer for this service.

5-98 Starting and driving

Condition C

When driving on roads with limited road

structures or buildings (for example, long

bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to

long walls), the system may illuminate the

system warning light and display the “Not

Available: Front Radar Blocked” message.

Action to take:

When the above driving conditions no lon-

ger exist, turn the system back on.

ICC system malfunction

If the ICC system malfunctions, it will be

turned off automatically, a chime will

sound, and the speed control status warn-

ing (orange) will illuminate.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, stop the ve-

hicle in a safe place. Turn the EV system off,

restart the EV system and set the ICC sys-

tem again. If it is not possible to set the ICC

system or the indicator stays on, it may be

a malfunction. Although the normal driving

can be continued, the ICC system should

be inspected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

ICC sensor maintenance

The radar sensor is located on the front of

the vehicle.

To keep the ICC system operating properly,

be sure to observe the following:

• Always keep the sensor area clean.

• Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensor.

• Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the sensor.This could cause failure or

malfunction.

• Do not attach metallic objects near the

sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could

cause failure or malfunction.

• Do not alter, remove, or paint the front

bumper.

Before customizing or restoring the front

bumper, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

The camera sensor is located above the

inside mirror.

To keep the proper operation of the sys-

tems and prevent a system malfunction,

be sure to observe the following:

• Always keep the windshield clean.

• Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the camera unit.

• Do not place reflective materials, such as

white paper or a mirror, on the instrument

panel. The reflection of sunlight may ad-

versely affect the camera unit’s capability

of detecting the lane markers.

• Do not strike or damage the areas around

the camera unit. Do not touch the camera

lens or remove the screw located on the

camera unit.

If the camera unit is damaged due to an

accident, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

STEERING ASSIST

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Steer-

ing Assist could result in serious injury

Starting and driving 5-99

or death.

• The Steering Assist is not a replace-

ment for proper driving procedures

and is not designed to correct care-

less, inattentive or absent-minded

driving. The Steering Assist will not

always steer the vehicle to keep it in

the lane. It is not designed to prevent

loss of control. It is the driver’s re-

sponsibility to stay alert, drive

safely, keep the vehicle in the travel-

ing lane, and be in control of the ve-

hicle at all times.

• As there is a performance limit to the

Steering Assist’s capability, never

rely solely on the system. The Steer-

ing Assist does not function in all

driving, traffic, weather, and road

conditions. Always drive safely, pay

attention to the operation of the ve-

hicle, and manually control your ve-

hicle appropriately.

• The Steering Assist is intended for

use on well-developed freeways or

highways with gentle (moderate)

curves. To avoid risk of an accident,

do not use this system on local or

non-highway roads.

• The Steering Assist only steers the

vehicle to maintain its position in the

center of a lane. The vehicle will not

steer to avoid objects in the road in

front of the vehicle or to avoid a ve-

hicle moving into your lane.

• It is the driver’s responsibility to stay

alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in

the traveling lane, and be in control

of the vehicle at all times. Never take

your hands off the steering wheel

when driving. Always keep your

hands on the steering wheel and

drive your vehicle safely.

• Always drive carefully and atten-

tively when using the Steering As-

sist. Read and understand the Own-

er’s Manual thoroughly before using

the Steering Assist. To avoid serious

injury or death, do not rely on the

system to prevent accidents or to

control the vehicle’s speed in emer-

gency situations. Do not use the

Steering Assist except in appropri-

ate road and traffic conditions.

Steering Assist operation

The Steering Assist controls the steering

system to help keep your vehicle near the

center of the lane when driving. The Steer-

ing Assist is combined with the Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system. For additional

information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Con-

trol (ICC) (with ProPILOT™ Assist)” in this

section.

The Steering Assist can be activated when

the following conditions are met:

• The ICC system is activated.

• Lane markers on both sides are clearly

detected.

• A vehicle ahead is detected (when the ve-

hicle is driven at speeds under 37 mph

[60 km/h]).

• The driver grips the steering wheel.

• The vehicle is driven at the center of the

lane.

• The turn signals are not operated.

• The windshield wiper is not operated in

the low (LO) or high (HI) speed operation

(the steering assist function is disabled

after the wiper operates for approxi-

mately 10 seconds).

5-100 Starting and driving

Steering Assist display and

indicators

1. Steering Assist status

indicator/warning

Displays the status of the Steering As-

sist by the color of the indicator/

warning

• Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering

Assist standby

• Steering Assist indicator (green): Steer-

ing Assist active

• Steering Assist indicator (yellow): Steer-

ing Assist malfunction

2. Steering Assist indicator

Indicates the status of the Steering As-

sist by the color of the indicator

• Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering

Assist standby

• Steering Assist indicator (green): Steer-

ing Assist active

3. Lane marker indicator

Indicates whether the system detects

the lane marker

• Lane marker indicator (gray): Lane

markers not detected

• Lane marker indicator (green): Lane

markers detected

• Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane de-

parture is detected

When the Steering Assist is in operation,

the Steering Assist status indicator

䊊

, the

Steering Assist indicator

䊊

, and the lane

marker indicator

䊊

on the vehicle infor-

mation display turn green. A chime sounds

when the Steering Assist initially activates.

When the Steering Assist deactivates, the

Steering Assist status indicator

䊊

, the

Steering Assist indicator

䊊

, and the lane

marker indicator

䊊

on the vehicle infor-

mation display turn gray and a chime

sounds twice.

Intelligent Lane Inter vention (I-LI)

When a curve or strong cross wind exceeds

the capabilities of the Steering Assist and

your vehicle approaches either the left or

the right side of the traveling lane, a warn-

ing chime sounds and the I-LI indicator

light (orange) on the instrument panel

flashes to alert the driver. Then, the I-LI sys-

tem automatically applies the brakes for a

short period of time to help assist the

driver to return the vehicle to the center of

the traveling lane. This action is in addition

to any Steering Assist actions.

Starting and driving 5-101

Hands on detection

When the Steering Assist is activated, it

monitors the driver’s steering wheel opera-

tion.

If the steering wheel is not operated or the

driver takes his/her hands off the steering

wheel for a period of time, the warning

䊊

appears in the vehicle information display.

If the driver does not operate the steering

wheel after the warning has been dis-

played, an audible alert sounds and the

warning flashes in the vehicle information

display, followed by a quick brake applica-

tion to request the driver to take control of

the vehicle again.

If the driver still does not respond, the Pro-

PILOT™ Assist turns on the hazard flasher

and slows the vehicle to a complete stop.

The driver can cancel the deceleration at

any time by steering, braking, accelerating,

or operating the ProPILOT Assist switch.

WARNING

Steering Assist is not a system for

hands-free driving. Always keep your

hands on the steering wheel and drive

your vehicle safely. Failure to do so

5-102 Starting and driving

could cause a collision resulting in se-

rious personal injury or death.

NOTE:

If the driver softly touches (instead of

firmly grips) the steering wheel, the

Steering Assist may not detect the

steering wheel operation and the

warning may be displayed. When the

driver holds and operates the steer-

ing wheel again, the warning turns off

and the Steering Assist resumes au-

tomatically.

Steering Assist limitations

WARNING

• In the following situations, the cam-

era may not detect lane markers

correctly or may detect lane mark-

ers incorrectly and the Steering As-

sist may not operate properly:

– When driving on roads where

there are multiple parallel lane

markers, lane markers that are

faded or not painted clearly, non-

standard lane markers, or lane

markers covered with water, dirt,

snow, etc.

– When driving on roads with dis-

continued lane markers

– When driving on roads with a wid-

ening or narrowing lane width

– When driving on roads where

there are multiple lanes or unclear

lane markers due to road con-

struction

– When driving on roads where

there are sharply contrasting ob-

jects, such as shadows, snow, wa-

ter, wheel ruts, seams, or lines re-

maining after road repairs (the

Steering Assist could detect these

items as lane markers)

– When driving on roads where the

traveling lane merges or sepa-

rates

• Do not use the Steering Assist under

the following conditions because

the system may not properly detect

lane markers.Doing so could cause a

loss of vehicle control and result in

an accident.

– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, dust, etc.)

– When rain, snow, sand, etc., is

thrown up by the wheels of other

vehicles

– When dirt, oil, ice, snow, water, or

another object adheres to the

camera unit

– When the lens of the camera unit

is foggy

– When strong light (for example,

sunlight or high beams from on-

coming vehicles) shines on the

camera

– When the headlights are not

bright due to dirt on the lens or

the headlights are off in tunnels or

in darkness

– When a sudden change in bright-

ness occurs (for example, when

the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel

or is under a bridge)

– When driving on roads where the

traveling lane merges or sepa-

rates or where there are tempo-

rary lane markers because of road

construction

– When there is a lane closure due to

road repairs

– When driving on a bumpy road

surface, such as an uneven dirt

road

Starting and driving 5-103

– When driving on sharp curves or

winding roads

– When driving on repeated uphill

and downhill roads

• Do not use the Steering Assist under

the following conditions because

the system will not operate properly:

– When driving with a tire that is not

within normal tire conditions (for

example, tire wear, abnormal tire

pressure, installation of a spare

tire, tire chains, nonstandard

wheels)

– When the vehicle is equipped with

non-original brake or suspension

parts

– When an object such as a sticker

or cargo obstructs the camera

– When excessively heavy baggage

is loaded in the rear seat or lug-

gage area of your vehicle

– When the vehicle load capacity is

exceeded

– When towing a trailer or other ve-

hicle

• Excessive noise will interfere with

the warning chime sound, and the

beep may not be heard.

• For the ProPILOT™ Assist system to

operate properly, the windshield in

front of the camera must be clean.

Replace worn wiper blades. The cor-

rect size wiper blades must be used

to help make sure the windshield is

kept clean. Only use Genuine NISSAN

wiper blades, or equivalent wiper

blades, that are specifically de-

signed for use on your vehicle model

and model year. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for the correct parts for your

vehicle.

Steering Assist temporary

standby

Automatic standby due to driving opera-

tion:

When the driver activates the turn signal,

the Steering Assist is temporarily placed in

a standby mode. (The Steering Assist re-

starts automatically when the operating

conditions are met again.)

Automatic standby:

In the following cases, a warning message

is displayed along with the chime, and the

Steering Assist is placed in a temporary

standby mode. (The Steering Assist re-

starts automatically when the operating

conditions are met again.)

• When lane markers on both sides are no

longer detected

• When a vehicle ahead is no longer de-

tected under approximately 37 mph

(60 km/h)

Steering Assist cancel

Under the following conditions, the Steer-

ing Assist cancels, and the Steering Assist

status indicator and the Steering Assist in-

dicator turn off:

• When unusual lane markers appear in the

traveling lane or when the lane marker

cannot be correctly detected for some

time due to certain conditions (for ex-

ample, a snow rut, the reflection of light on

a rainy day, the presence of several un-

clear lane markers)

• When the windshield wiper operates in

the low (LO) or high (HI) speed operation

(the Steering Assist is disabled when the

wiper operates for more than approxi-

mately 10 seconds)

5-104 Starting and driving

Action to take:

Turn the ICC system off using the CANCEL

switch. When the conditions listed above

are no longer present, turn the ICC system

on again.

Steering Assist malfunction

When the system malfunctions, it turns off

automatically. The Steering Assist status

warning illuminates (orange). A chime may

sound depending on the situation.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the EV

system off, restart the EV system, resume

driving, and set the Intelligent Cruise Con-

trol system again. If the warning (orange)

continues to illuminate, the Steering Assist

is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is

still drivable under normal conditions, have

the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for this service.

Steering Assist maintenance

The camera sensor is located above the

inside mirror.

To keep the proper operation of the system

and prevent a system malfunction, be sure

to observe the following:

• Always keep the windshield clean.

• Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the camera unit.

• Do not place reflective materials, such as

white paper or a mirror, on the instrument

panel. The reflection of sunlight may ad-

versely affect the camera unit’s capability

of detecting the lane markers.

• Do not strike or damage the areas around

the camera unit. Do not touch the camera

lens or remove the screw located on the

camera unit.

If the camera unit is damaged due to an

accident, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

For Canada

Model: ARS4–B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with Industry Canada licence-

exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Starting and driving 5-105

Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-

eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation

est autorisee aux deux conditions suiv-

antes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-

lage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioelectrique subi,

meme si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Infor-

mation:

This equipment complies with FCC radia-

tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-

trolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of 30 cm

between the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located or

operating in conjunction with any other an-

tenna or transmitter.

Cet equipement est conforme aux limites

d’exposition aux rayonnements IC etablies

pour un environnement non controle. Cet

equipement doit etre installe et utilise avec

un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la

source de rayonnement et votre corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED)

CRUISE CONTROL MODE

NOTE:

ProPILOT™ Assist provides no ap-

proach warnings, automatic braking,

or steering assist in the conventional

(fixed speed) cruise control mode.

This mode allows driving at a speed be-

tween 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) with-

out keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

WARNING

• In the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, a warning

chime does not sound to warn you if

you are too close to the vehicle

ahead, as neither the presence of

the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-

vehicle distance is detected.

• Pay special attention to the distance

between your vehicle and the ve-

hicle ahead of you or a collision

could occur.

• Always confirm the setting in the ICC

system display.

• Do not use the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode when

driving under the following condi-

tions:

– When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed

– In heavy traffic or in traffic that

varies in speed

– On winding or hilly roads

– On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.)

– In very windy areas

• Doing so could cause a loss of ve-

hicle control and result in an acci-

dent.

5-106 Starting and driving

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control switches

1. DISTANCE switch:

• Long

• Middle

• Short

2. RES+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing

the set speed

4. SET- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces

speed incrementally

5. ProPILOT™ Assist switch:

Master switch to activate the system

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode display and

indicators

The display is located in the vehicle infor-

mation display:

1. Cruise indicator:

This indicator indicates the condition of

the ICC system depending on a color.

•

Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indicates

that the ProPILOT™ Assist switch is on

• Cruise control SET indicator (green): In-

dicates that the cruising speed is set

• Cruise control warning (yellow): Indi-

cates that there is a malfunction in the

ICC system

Starting and driving 5-107

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:

This indicator indicates the set vehicle

speed. For Canadian models, the speed

is displayed in km/h.

Operating conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, push and hold the

ProPILOT™ Assist switch

䊊

for longer than

about 1.5 seconds.

When pushing the ProPILOT Assist switch

on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode display and indicators

䊊

are

displayed in the vehicle information dis-

play. After you hold ProPILOT Assist switch

on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the

ICC system display turns off. The cruise in-

dicator appears. You can now set your de-

sired cruising speed. Pushing the ProPILOT

Assist switch again will turn the system

completely off. When the power switch is

placed in the OFF position, the system is

also automatically turned off.

To use the ICC system again, quickly push

and release the ProPILOT Assist switch

(vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

or push and hold it (conventional cruise

control mode) again to turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging cruise

control, make sure to turn the ProPILOT

Assist switch off when not using the

ICC system.

5-108 Starting and driving

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push the SET-

䊊

switch and release it. (The color of the

cruise indicator changes to green and set

vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take

your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your

vehicle will maintain the set speed.

• To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle will return to the previ-

ously set speed.

• The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep hills.

If this happens, manually maintain vehicle

speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the

following methods:

1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle

speed indicator will turn off.

2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed

indicator will turn off.

3. Turn the ProPILOT Assist switch off. Both

the cruise indicator and vehicle speed

indicator will turn off.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

and release the SET- switch.

2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

release the switch.

3. Push, then quickly release the RES+

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will increase by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the SET- switch and release it.

2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release

the switch when the vehicle slows down

to the desired speed.

3. Push, then quickly release the SET-

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will decrease by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the RES+ switch. The vehicle will re-

sume the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-109

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the AEB

system could result in serious injury or

death.

• The AEB system is a supplemental

aid to the driver. It is not a replace-

ment for the driver’s attention to

traffic conditions or responsibility to

drive safely. It cannot prevent acci-

dents due to carelessness or dan-

gerous driving techniques.

• The AEB system does not function in

all driving, traffic, weather and road

conditions.

The AEB system can assist the driver when

there is a risk of a forward collision with the

vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

The AEB system uses a radar sensor

䊊

located on the front of the vehicle to mea-

sure the distance to the vehicle ahead in

the same lane.

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING

(AEB) (IF SO EQUIPPED)

5-110 Starting and driving

AEB SYSTEM OPERATION

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. AEB emergency warning indicator

3. AEB system warning light

The AEB system will function when your

vehicle is driven at speeds above approxi-

mately 3 mph (5 km/h).

If a risk of a forward collision is detected,

the AEB system will provide an initial warn-

ing to the driver by both a visual and au-

dible alert.

If the driver applies the brakes quickly and

forcefully after the warning, and the AEB

system detects that there is still the possi-

bility of a forward collision, the system will

automatically increase the braking force. If

the driver does not take action, the AEB

system issues the second visual warning

(red) and audible warning and also applies

partial braking.

If the risk of a collision becomes imminent,

the AEB system applies harder braking au-

tomatically.

NOTE:

The vehicle’s brake lights come on when

braking is performed by the AEB system.

Starting and driving 5-111

Depending on vehicle speed and distance

to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and

roadway conditions, the system may help

the driver avoid a forward collision or may

help mitigate the consequences of a colli-

sion, should one be unavoidable. If the

driver is handling the steering wheel, accel-

erating or braking, the AEB system will

function later or will not function.

The automatic braking will cease under the

following conditions.

• When the steering wheel is turned as far

as necessary to avoid a collision.

• When the accelerator pedal is depressed.

• When there is no longer a vehicle detected

ahead.

If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle,

the vehicle will remain at a standstill for

approximately 2 seconds before the

brakes are released.

TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM

ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the AEB

system ON or OFF:

5-112 Starting and driving

1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select “Driver As-

sistance.” Then press the OK button.

2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the

OK button.

3. Select “System” and use the OK button

to turn the system on or off.

When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB

system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

The AEB system will be automatically

turned on when the EV system is

restarted.

AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the AEB system. Failure to op-

erate the vehicle in accordance with

these system limitations could result

in serious injury or death.

• The AEB system cannot detect all

vehicles under all conditions.

• The radar sensor does not detect

the following objects:

– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles

in the roadway.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Crossing vehicles.

• The radar sensor has some perfor-

mance limitations. If a stationary ve-

hicle is in the vehicles’s path, the AEB

system will not function when the

vehicle is driven at speeds over ap-

proximately 50 mph (80 km/h).

• The radar sensor may not detect a

vehicle ahead in the following condi-

tions:

– Dirt, ice, snow or other material

covering the radar sensor.

– Interference by other radar

sources.

– Snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles.

– If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.

motorcycle).

– When driving on a steep downhill

slope or roads with sharp curves.

• In some road or traffic conditions,

the AEB system may unexpectedly

apply partial braking. When accel-

eration is necessary, continue to de-

press the accelerator pedal to over-

ride the system.

• Braking distances increase on slip-

pery surfaces.

• The system is designed to automati-

cally check the sensor’s functional-

ity, within certain limitations. The

system may not detect some forms

of obstructions of the sensor area

such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In

these cases, the system may not be

able to worn the driver properly. Be

sure that you check, clean and clear

the sensor area regularly.

• Excessive noise will interfere with

the warning chime sound, and the

chime may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-113

System temporarily unavailable

Condition A

When the radar sensor picks up interfer-

ence from another radar source, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the

AEB system is automatically turned off.

The AEB system warning light (orange) will

illuminate.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the AEB system will resume automatically.

Condition B

When the sensor area of the front bumper

is covered with dirt or is obstructed, mak-

ing it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,

the AEB system is automatically turned off.

The AEB system warning light (orange) will

illuminate and the “Not Available: Front Ra-

dar Blocked” warning message will appear

in the vehicle information display.

5-114 Starting and driving

When driving on roads with limited road

structures or buildings (for example, long

bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to

long walls), the system may illuminate the

system warning light (orange) and display

the “Not Available: Front Radar Blocked”

message.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop

the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift

lever in the P (Park) position and turn the EV

system off. Clean the radar cover on the

lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the

EV system. If the warning light continues to

illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be

turned off automatically, a chime will

sound, the AEB system warning light (or-

ange) will illuminate and the warning mes-

sage [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle

information display.

Action to take:

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop

the vehicle in a safe location, turn the EV

system off and restart the EV system. If the

warning light continues to illuminate, have

the AEB system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor

䊊

is located on the front of the

vehicle.

To keep the system operating properly, be

sure to observe the following:

• Always keep the sensor area of the front

bumper clean.

• Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensor.

• Do not cover or attach stickers or similar

objects on the front bumper near the sen-

sor area. This could cause failure or

malfunction.

Starting and driving 5-115

• Do not attach metallic objects near the

sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could

cause failure or malfunction.

• Do not alter, remove or paint the front

bumper. Before customizing or restoring

the front bumper, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada

Model: ARS4–B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux

CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux

appareils radio exempts de licence.

L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux

conditions suivantes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit ac- cepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Radio frequency radiation exposure in-

formation:

This equipment complies with FCC and IC

radiation exposure limits set forth for an

uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of

30 cm between the radiator and your

body.

This transmitter must not be co-located

or operating in conjunction with any

other antenna or transmitter.

Cet équipement est conforme aux lim-

ites d’exposition aux rayonnements IC

établies pour un environnement non

contrôlé.

Cet équipement doit être installé et

utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de

distance entre la sourcederayonnement

et votre corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

5-116 Starting and driving

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the AEB

with Pedestrian Detection system

could result in serious injury or death.

• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system is a supplemental aid to the

driver. It is not a replacement for the

driver’s attention to traffic condi-

tions or responsibility to drive safely.

It cannot prevent accidents due to

carelessness or dangerous driving

techniques.

• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system does not function in all driv-

ing, traffic, weather and road condi-

tions.

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system

can assist the driver when there is a risk of

a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in

the traveling lane or with a pedestrian.

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system

uses a radar sensor located on the front of

the vehicle

䊊

to measure the distance to

the vehicle ahead in the same lane. For

pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian De-

tection system uses a camera installed be-

hind the windshield

䊊

in addition to the

radar sensor.

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING

(AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION

(IF SO EQUIPPED)

Starting and driving 5-117

AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN

DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. AEB emergency warning indicator

3. AEB system warning light

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system

operates at speeds above approximately

3 mph (5 km/h). For the pedestrian detec-

tion function, the AEB with Pedestrian De-

tection system operates at speeds be-

tween6–37mph(10–60km/h).

If a risk of a forward collision with a vehicle

is detected, the AEB with Pedestrian Detec-

tion system will first provide a warning to

the driver by flashing the vehicle ahead de-

tection indicator and providing an audible

alert. In addition, the AEB with Pedestrian

Detection system applies partial braking. If

the driver applies the brakes quickly and

forcefully, but the AEB with Pedestrian De-

tection system detects that there is still the

possibility of a forward collision, the system

will automatically increase the braking

force.

If the risk of a collision becomes imminent

and the driver does not take action, the AEB

with Pedestrian Detection system issues

the second warning to the driver by flash-

ing the AEB with Pedestrian Detection

5-118 Starting and driving

emergency warning indicator (red), provid-

ing an audible warning, and then automati-

cally applies harder braking.

If a risk of a forward impact with a pedes-

trian is detected, the AEB with Pedestrian

Detection system will provide a warning to

the driver by flashing the AEB with Pedes-

trian Detection emergency warning indica-

tor (red), provides an audible alert and the

system will apply partial braking. If the

driver applies the brakes quickly and force-

fully but the AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system detects that there is still the possi-

bility of a forward impact with a pedestrian,

the system will automatically increase the

braking force. If the risk of collision be-

comes imminent and the driver does not

take action, the AEB with Pedestrian Detec-

tion system automatically applies harder

braking.

NOTE:

The vehicle’s brake lights come on when

any braking is performed by the AEB

with Pedestrian Detection system.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance

to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well

as driving and roadway conditions, the sys-

tem may help the driver avoid a forward

collision or may help mitigate the conse-

quences if a collision should be unavoid-

able. If the driver is handling the steering

wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB with

Pedestrian Detection system will function

later or will not function.

The automatic braking will cease under the

following conditions:

• When the steering wheel is turned to

avoid a collision.

• When the accelerator pedal is depressed.

• When there is no longer a vehicle or a

pedestrian detected ahead.

If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-

tem has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle

will remain at a standstill for approximately

2 seconds before the brakes are released.

Starting and driving 5-119

TURNING THE AEB WITH

PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM

ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system:

1. Press the

button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select “Driver As-

sistance.” Then press the OK button.

2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the

OK button.

3. Select “System” and use the OK button

to turn the system on or off.

When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system is turned off, the AEB with Pedes-

trian Detection system warning light illumi-

nates.

NOTE:

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-

tem will be automatically turned on

when the EV system is restarted.

AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN

DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

5-120 Starting and driving

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the AEB with Pedestrian De-

tection system. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these sys-

tem limitations could result in serious

injury or death.

• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system cannot detect all vehicles or

pedestrians under all conditions.

• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system does not detect the follow-

ing objects:

– Small pedestrians (including

small children), animals and cy-

clists.

– Pedestrians in wheelchairs or us-

ing mobile transport such as

scooters, child-operated toys, or

skateboards.

– Pedestrians who are seated or

otherwise not in a full upright

standing or walking position.

– Oncoming vehicles

– Crossing vehicles

– Obstacles on the roadside

• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system has some performance limi-

tations.

– If a stationary vehicle is in the ve-

hicle’s path, the AEB with Pedes-

trian Detection system will not

function when the vehicle is

driven at speeds over approxi-

mately 50 mph (80 km/h).

– For pedestrian detection, the AEB

with Pedestrian Detection system

will not function when the vehicle

is driven at speeds over approxi-

mately 37 mph (60 km/h) or below

approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system will not function for pedes-

trians in darkness or in tunnels, even

if there is street lighting in the area.

• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system may not function if the ve-

hicle ahead is narrow (for example, a

motorcycle).

• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system may not function if speed

difference between the two vehicles

is too small.

• The radar sensor AEB with Pedes-

trian Detection system may not

function properly or detect a vehicle

ahead in the following conditions:

– Poor visibility (conditions such as

rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sand-

storms, and road spray from other

vehicles)

– Driving on a steep downhill slope

or roads with sharp curves.

– Driving on a bumpy road surface,

such as an uneven dirt road.

– If dirt, ice, snow or other material

is covering the radar sensor area.

– Interference by other radar

sources.

– The camera area of windshield is

fogged up, or covered with dirt,

water drops, ice, snow, etc.

– Strong light (for example, sunlight

or high beams from oncoming ve-

hicles) enters the front camera.

Strong light causes the area

around the pedestrian to be cast

in a shadow, making it difficult to

see.

– A sudden change in brightness

occurs (for example, when the ve-

hicle enters or exits a tunnel or a

shaded area or lightning flashes).

– The poor contrast of a person to

the background, such as having

clothing color or pattern which is

similar to the background.

Starting and driving 5-121

– The pedestrian’s profile is par-

tially obscured or unidentifiable

due to the pedestrian transport-

ing luggage, wearing bulky or very

loose fitting clothing or accesso-

ries.

• The system performance may de-

grade in the following conditions:

– The vehicle is driven on a slippery

road.

– The vehicle is driven on a slope.

– Excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the trunk

room of your vehicle.

• The system is designed to automati-

cally check the sensor’s (radar and

camera) functionality, within certain

limitations. The system may not de-

tect blockage of sensor areas cov-

ered by ice, snow or stickers, for ex-

ample. In these cases, the system

may not be able to warn the driver

properly. Be sure that you check,

clean and clear sensor areas regu-

larly.

• In some road and traffic conditions,

the AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system may unexpectedly apply

partial braking. When acceleration is

necessary, depress the accelerator

pedal to override the system.

• Excessive noise will interfere with

the warning chime sound, and the

chime may not be heard.

5-122 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

Condition A

In the following conditions, the AEB with

Pedestrian Detection system warning light

blinks and the system will be turned off

automatically:

• The radar sensor picks up interference

from another radar source.

• The camera area of windshield is misted

or frozen.

• Strong light is shining from the front.

• The cabin temperature is over approxi-

mately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight.

• The camera area of windshield glass is

continuously covered with dirt, etc.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system

will resume automatically.

NOTE:

When the inside of the windshield on

camera area is misted or frozen, it will

take a period of time to remove it after

the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this

area, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

Starting and driving 5-123

Condition B

In the following conditions, the AEB with

Pedestrian Detection system warning light

will illuminate and the system will be

turned off automatically and the “Not Avail-

able: Front Radar Blocked” warning mes-

sage will appear in the vehicle information

display:

• The sensor area of the front bumper is

covered with dirt or is obstructed.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop

the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift

lever in the P (Park) position and turn the EV

system off. Clean the radar sensor area of

front bumper or the camera area of wind-

shield with a soft cloth, and restart the EV

system. If the warning light continues to

illuminate, have the AEB with Pedestrian

Detection system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-

tem malfunctions, it will be turned off auto-

matically, a chime will sound, the AEB with

Pedestrian Detection system warning light

(orange) will illuminate and the warning

message [Malfunction] will appear in the

vehicle information display.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop

the vehicle in a safe location, turn the EV

system off and restart the EV system. If the

warning light continues to illuminate, have

the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this ser-

vice.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The radar sensor is located on the front of

the vehicle

䊊

. The camera is located on

the upper side of the windshield

䊊

To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detection

system operating properly, be sure to ob-

serve the following:

• Always keep sensor areas of the front

bumper and windshield clean.

• Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensors (e.g., bumper, windshield).

• Do not cover or attach stickers, or install

any accessory near the sensors. This

5-124 Starting and driving

could block sensor signals, and/or cause

failure or malfunction.

• Do not attach metallic objects near the

radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This could

cause failure or malfunction.

• Do not place reflective materials, such as

white paper or a mirror, on the instrument

panel. The reflection of sunlight may ad-

versely affect the camera unit’s detection

capability.

• Do not alter, remove or paint the front

bumper. Before customizing or restoring

the front bumper, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada

Model: ARS4–B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two con-

ditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer-

ence, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation

of the device.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux

CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux

appareils radio exempts de licence.

L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux

conditions suivantes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le

fonctionnement.

Radio frequency radiation exposure in-

formation:

This equipment complies with FCC and IC

radiation exposure limits set forth for an

uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of

30 cm between the radiator and your

body.

This transmitter must not be co-located

or operating in conjunction with any

other antenna or transmitter.

Cet équipement est conforme aux lim-

ites d’exposition aux rayonnements IC

Starting and driving 5-125

établies pour un environnement non

contrôlé.

Cet équipement doit être installé et

utilisé avec un minimum de 30 cm de

distance entre la source de rayonnement

et votre corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the I-DA

system could result in serious injury or

death.

• The I–DA system is only a warning to

inform the driver of a potential lack

of driver attention or drowsiness. It

will not steer the vehicle or prevent

loss of control.

• The I–DA system does not detect

and provide an alert of the driver’s

lack of attention or fatigue in every

situation.

• It its the driver’s responsibility to:

– stay alert,

– drive safely,

– keep the vehicle in the traveling

lane,

– be in control of the vehicle at all

times,

– avoid driving when tired,

– avoid distractions (texting, etc.).

The I–DA system helps alert the driver if the

system detects a lack of attention or driv-

ing fatigue.

The system monitors driving style and

steering behavior over a period of time,

and it detects changes from the normal

pattern. If the system detects that driver

attention is decreasing over a period of

time, the system uses audible and visual

warnings to suggest that the driver take a

break.

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS

(I-DA) (IF SO EQUIPPED)

5-126 Starting and driving

I-DA SYSTEM OPERATION

If the system detects driver fatigue or that

driver attention is decreasing, the mes-

sage “Take a break?” appears in the vehicle

information display and a chime sounds

when the vehicle is driven at speeds above

37 mph (60 km/h).

The system continuously monitors driver

attention and can provide multiple warn-

ings per trip.

The system resets and starts reassessing

driving style and steering behavior when

the power switch is cycled from the ON to

the OFF position and back to the ON

position.

Starting and driving 5-127

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

I-DA SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the I–DA system.

1. Press the

button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the

button to select “Driver As-

sistance.” Then press the OK button.

2. Select “Driver Attention Alert” and use

the OK button to turn the system on or

off.

NOTE:

The setting will be retained even if the EV

system is restarted.

I-DA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limita-

tions for the I–DA system. Failure to op-

erate the vehicle in accordance with

these system limitations could result

in serious injury or death.

• The I-DA system may not operate

properly and may not provide an

alert in the following conditions:

– Poor road conditions such as an

uneven road surface or pot holes.

– Strong side wind.

5-128 Starting and driving

– If you have adopted a sporty driv-

ing style with higher cornering

speeds or higher rates of accel-

eration.

– Frequent lane changes or

changes to vehicle speed.

• The I–DA system will not provide an

alert in the following conditions:

– Vehicle speeds lower than 37 mph

(60 km/h).

– Short lapses of attention.

– Instantaneous distractions such

as dropping an object.

System malfunction

If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system

malfunctions, the system warning mes-

sage will appear in the vehicle information

display and the function will be stopped

automatically.

Action to take

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in P (Park) position, turn the EV sys-

tem off and restart the EV system. If the

system warning message continues to ap-

pear, have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-129

The vehicle range varies depending upon

the following factors:

• Speed

• Vehicle load

• Electrical load from vehicle accessories

• Traffic and road conditions

NISSAN recommends the following driv-

ing habits to help maximize vehicle

range:

Before driving:

• Follow the recommended periodic

maintenance.

• Keep tires inflated to the correct pressure.

• Keep wheels in correct alignment.

• Pre-heat or pre-cool the interior cabin

while the vehicle is charging.

• Remove unnecessary cargo from the

vehicle.

While driving:

• Drive in ECO mode.

– The ECO mode helps reduce power

consumption by reducing acceleration

when compared to the same accelera-

tor pedal position in the D (Drive) posi-

tion.

• Drive at a constant speed. Maintain cruis-

ing speeds with a constant accelerator

position or by using cruise control when

appropriate.

• Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Gently

press and release the accelerator pedal

for acceleration and deceleration.

• Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

• Avoid frequent stopping and braking.

Maintain a safe distance behind other

vehicles.

• Turn off the air conditioner/heater when it

is not necessary.

• Select a moderate temperature setting

for heating or cooling to help reduce

power consumption.

• Use the air conditioner/heater and close

windows to reduce drag when cruising at

a highway speed.

• Release the accelerator pedal to slow

down and do not apply the brakes when

traffic and road conditions allow.

– This vehicle is equipped with a regen-

erative brake system. The primary pur-

pose of the regenerative brake system

is to provide some power to recharge

the Li-ion battery and extend driving

range. A secondary benefit is “engine

braking” that operates based on Li-ion

battery conditions. In the D (Drive) posi-

tion, when the accelerator pedal is re-

leased, the regenerative brake system

provides some deceleration and some

power to the Li-ion battery.

INCREASING POWER ECONOMY

5-130 Starting and driving

The ECO Drive Report appears for approxi-

mately 30 seconds after placing the power

switch in the OFF position, driving the ve-

hicle for more than 0.3 miles (500 m), and

pressing the

button on the steering

wheel.

1. Previous 5 times (History)

Displays the average energy economy

for the previous 5 times

2. Current energy economy

Displays the most recent average en-

ergy economy

3. Best energy economy

Displays the best energy economy of

the past history

4. Regenerated energy (mileage)

Displays the amount of regenerated en-

ergy stored in the Li-ion battery in one

trip in terms of distance

If the vehicle has been driven mostly on

downhill roads, more energy is regener-

ated. This may cause the regenerated en-

ergy (mileage)

䊊

to show a longer dis-

tance than the vehicle was driven or the

current energy economy

䊊

to show

“99.9 miles/kWh.”

When the

button is pressed while the

ECO Drive Report is shown, the display

switches to the timer display. Either display

will continue to show for another 30 sec-

onds after the button is pressed. If the

doors are locked after placing the power

switch in the OFF position, the display turns

off before the preset time.

In the “Settings” menu, you can program

the ECO Drive Report to not appear when

the power switch is placed in the OFF posi-

tion. For additional information, refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

ECO DRIVE REPORT

Starting and driving 5-131

WARNING

• Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They

may ignite and cause a fire.

• Never leave the vehicle in the READY

to drive mode while the vehicle is

unattended.

• Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols. Unattended children could

become involved in serious acci-

dents.

• Safe parking procedures require

that both the parking brake be ap-

plied and the vehicle placed in the

park position. Failure to do so could

cause the vehicle to move unexpect-

edly or roll away and result in an ac-

cident.

• To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of

the vehicle and/or its systems, do

not leave children, people who re-

quire the assistance of others or

pets unattended in your vehicle. Ad-

ditionally, the temperature inside a

closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-132 Starting and driving

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Push the P (Park) position switch on the

shift lever.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling

into the street when parked on a slope, it

is a good practice to turn the wheels as

illustrated.

HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB

䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and move

the vehicle forward until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB

䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO CURB

䊊

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road

so the vehicle will move away from the cen-

ter of the road if it moves.

4. Place the power switch in the OFF

position.

WARNING

• If the READY to drive indicator light is

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering

will be harder to operate.

• When the power steering warning

light illuminates while the READY to

drive indicator light is on, the power

assist for the steering will cease op-

eration. You will still have control of

the vehicle but the steering will be

harder to operate.

The power steering system is designed to

provide power assistance while driving to

operate the steering wheel with less effort.

When the steering wheel is operated re-

peatedly or continuously while parking or

driving at a very low speed, the power as-

sist for the steering wheel will be reduced.

This is to prevent overheating of the power

steering system and help protect it from

getting damaged. When the power assis-

tance is reduced, steering wheel operation

will become harder. When the temperature

of the power steering system goes down,

the power assistance level will return to

normal. Avoid repeating such steering

POWER STEERING SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-133

wheel operations that could cause the

power steering system to overheat.

You may hear a noise when the steering

wheel is operated quickly. However, this is

not a malfunction.

If the power steering warning light

illuminates while the READY to drive indica-

tor light is on, it may indicate the power

steering system is not functioning properly

and may need servicing. Have the power

steering system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service. For additional

information, refer to “Power steering warn-

ing light” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

The power assist for steering stops operat-

ing when both the power steering warning

light and READY to drive indicator light are

illuminated. You will still have control of the

vehicle. However, greater steering effort is

needed, especially in sharp turns and at

low speeds.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

This vehicle is equipped with two braking

systems:

1. Hydraulic brake system

2. Regenerative brake system

Hydraulic brake system

The hydraulic brake system is similar to the

brakes used on conventional vehicles.

The brake system has two separate hy-

draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,

you will still have braking at two wheels.

Regenerative brake system

The primary purpose of the regenerative

brake system is to provide some power to

help recharge the Li-ion battery and ex-

tend driving range. A secondary benefit is

“engine braking” that operates based on

battery conditions.

In the D (Drive) range, when the accelerator

is released, the regenerative brake system

provides some deceleration and gener-

ates power for the Li-ion battery. Power is

also generated when the brake pedal is

applied.

When you put the shift lever in the B mode

and take your foot off the accelerator

pedal, more regenerative brake is applied

than in the D (Drive) position. However, dur-

ing high-speed driving you may feel that

regenerative brake provides less decelera-

tion than the engine braking in an ordinary

vehicle. This is normal.

Less deceleration is provided by the regen-

erative brake system when the Li-ion bat-

tery is fully charged. Regenerative brake is

automatically reduced when the Li-ion

battery is fully charged to prevent the Li-ion

battery from becoming overcharged. Re-

generative brake is also automatically re-

duced when the battery temperature is

high/low (indicated by the red/blue zones

on the battery temperature gauge) to pre-

vent Li-ion battery damage.

The brake pedal should be used to slow or

stop the vehicle depending on traffic or

road conditions. The vehicle brakes are not

affected by regenerative brake system op-

eration.

BRAKE SYSTEM

5-134 Starting and driving

NOTE:

• When applying the regenerative brakes,

you may hear a sound coming from the

regenerative brake system. This is a

normal operating characteristic of an

EV.

• If the power switch position is in a posi-

tion other than ON or READY to drive,

you can stop the vehicle by depressing

the brake pedal. However, greater foot

pressure on the brake pedal will be re-

quired to stop the vehicle, and the stop-

ping distance will be longer.

• When depressing the brake pedal, the

brake pedal feel will not be smooth or

may change when the cooperative re-

generative brake system activates.

However, the electronically controlled

brake system is operating normally and

this does not indicate a malfunction.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal

while driving. This will cause overheating of

the brakes, wearing out of the brake pads

and shoes faster, and will reduce driving

range.

To help reduce brake wear, and to prevent

the brakes from overheating, reduce speed

and select B mode before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes

may reduce braking performance and

could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

• While driving on a slippery surface,

be careful when braking or acceler-

ating. Abrupt braking or accelerat-

ing could cause the wheels to skid,

which could result in an accident.

• If the brake pedal is depressed with

the EV system OFF, you may feel an

increased brake pedal effort and a

decreased pedal stroke. If the BRAKE

warning light does not illuminate

and the brake pedal feels like it has

returned to its normal state after the

EV system is started, this indicates

that there is no malfunction and the

vehicle can be operated normally.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven

through water, the brakes may get wet. As

a result, the braking distance will be longer

and the vehicle may pull to one side during

braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly tapping the brake pedal

to heat up the brakes. Do this until the

brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the

vehicle at high speeds until the brakes

have dried.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever

the stopping effect of the parking brake is

weakened or whenever the parking brake

shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,

in order to assure the best braking perfor-

mance.

This procedure is described in the Genuine

NISSAN Service Manual, and it can be per-

formed by a certified repair facility. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer.

Starting and driving 5-135

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

• The ABS is a sophisticated device,

but it cannot prevent accidents re-

sulting from careless or dangerous

driving techniques. It can help main-

tain vehicle control during braking

on slippery surfaces. Remember

that stopping distances on slippery

surfaces will be longer than on nor-

mal surfaces even with ABS. Stop-

ping distances may also be longer

on rough, gravel or snow covered

roads, or if you are using tire chains.

Always maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you. Ulti-

mately, the driver is responsible for

safety.

• Tire type and condition may also af-

fect braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

– For additional information, refer

to “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels

do not lock during hard braking or when

braking on slippery surfaces. The system

detects the rotation speed at each wheel

and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-

vent each wheel from locking and sliding.

By preventing each wheel from locking, the

system helps the driver maintain steering

control and helps to minimize swerving

and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady

pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

Anti-lock Braking System will operate to

prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping dis-

tances.

Self-test feature

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in-

cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps,

hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you push

the power switch in the READY to drive po-

sition and move the vehicle at a low speed

in forward or reverse. When the self-test

occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise

and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.

This is normal and does not indicate a mal-

function. If the computer senses a mal-

function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-

nates the ABS warning light on the

instrument panel. The brake system then

operates normally, but without anti-lock

assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during

the self-test or while driving, have the ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

Normal operation

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-

ates at speeds above 3 to 6 mph (5 to

10 km/h). The speed varies according to

road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more

wheels are close to locking up, the actuator

5-136 Starting and driving

rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-

sure. This action is similar to pumping the

brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-

tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise

from under the hood or feel a vibration

from the actuator when it is operating. This

is normal and indicates that the ABS is op-

erating properly. However, the pulsation

may indicate that road conditions are haz-

ardous and extra care is required while

driving.

The VDC system uses various sensors to

monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.

Under certain driving conditions, the VDC

system helps to perform the following

functions.

• Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel

slip on one slipping drive wheel so power

is transferred to a drive wheel on the same

axle that is not slipping.

• Controls brake pressure and traction mo-

tor output to reduce drive wheel slip

based on vehicle speed (traction control

function).

• Controls brake pressure at individual

wheels and traction motor output to help

the driver maintain control of the vehicle

in the following conditions:

• Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the

steered path despite increased steering

input).

• Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to

certain road or driving conditions).

The VDC system can help the driver main-

tain control of the vehicle, but it cannot

prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving

situations.

When the VDC system operates, the

indicator light in the instrument panel

flashes. When the indicator light flashes,

note the following items:

• The road may be slippery or the system

may determine some action is required to

help keep the vehicle on the steered path.

• You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal

and hear a noise or vibration from under

the hood. This is normal and indicates

that the VDC system is working properly.

• Adjust your speed and driving according

to the road conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip in-

dicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control

( VDC) OFF indicator light” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

indicator light illuminates in the ve-

hicle information display. The VDC system

automatically turns off when this indicator

light is lit.

The vehicle information display is used to

turn off the VDC system. The VDC OFF indi-

cator light

illuminates to indicate that

the VDC system is off. When the vehicle

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-137

information display is used to turn off the

system, the VDC system still operates to

prevent one drive wheel from slipping by

transferring power to a non-slipping wheel.

The

indicator light flashes if this oc-

curs. All other VDC functions are off and the

indicator light will not flash. The VDC

system is automatically reset to on when

the power switch is placed in the OFF posi-

tion then back to the ON position. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-

ture that tests the system each time you

start the EV and move the vehicle forward

or in reverse at a slow speed. When the

self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk”

noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-

tion of a malfunction.

WARNING

• The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but

does not prevent accidents due to

abrupt steering operation at high

speeds or by careless or dangerous

driving techniques. Reduce vehicle

speed and be especially careful

when driving and cornering on slip-

pery surfaces and always drive care-

fully.

• Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs,

stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels

are not NISSAN recommended for

your vehicle or are extremely dete-

riorated the VDC system may not op-

erate properly. This could adversely

affect vehicle handling perfor-

mance, and the

indicator light

may flash or the

indicator

light may illuminate.

• If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys-

tem may not operate properly and

the

indicator light may illumi-

nate.

• If traction motor control related

parts are not NISSAN recommended

or are extremely deteriorated, the

indicator light may illuminate.

• When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the

indicator

light may illuminate. Do not drive on

these types of roads.

• When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the

indicator light may il-

luminate. This is not a malfunction.

Restart the EV system after driving

onto a stable surface.

• If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are

used, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the

indicator

light may illuminate.

• The VDC system is not a substitute

for winter tires or tire chains on a

snow covered road.

5-138 Starting and driving

The chassis control is an electric control

module that includes the following func-

tions:

• Intelligent Trace Control

INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL

(I-TC)

This system senses driving based on the

driver’s steering and acceleration/braking

patterns, and controls brake pressure at

individual wheels to aid tracing at corners

and help smooth vehicle response.

The I-TC can be set to on (enabled) or off

(disabled) through the vehicle information

display “Settings” page. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle information dis-

play” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC sys-

tem, the I-TC is also turned off.

When the I-TC is operated and the “Chassis

Control” mode is selected in the vehicle in-

formation display, the I-TC graphics are

shown in the vehicle information display.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

If the “Chassis Control System Error: See

Owner’s Manual” warning message ap-

pears in the vehicle information display, it

CHASSIS CONTROL

Starting and driving 5-139

may indicate that the I-TC is not function-

ing properly. Have the system checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

this service.

WARNING

The I-TC may not be effective depend-

ing on the driving condition. Always

drive carefully and attentively.

When the I-TC is operating, you may feel a

pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a

noise. This is normal and indicates that the

I-TC is operating properly.

Even if the I-TC is turned off, some functions

will remain on to assist the driver (for ex-

ample, avoidance scenes).

WARNING

• Never rely solely on the hill start as-

sist system to prevent the vehicle

from moving backward on a hill. Al-

ways drive carefully and attentively.

Depress the brake pedal when the

vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be

especially careful when stopped on

a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Fail-

ure to prevent the vehicle from roll-

ing backwards may result in a loss of

control of the vehicle and possible

serious injury or death.

• The hill start assist system is not de-

signed to hold the vehicle at a stand-

still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal

when the vehicle is stopped on a

steep hill. Failure to do so may cause

the vehicle to roll backwards and

may result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

• The hill start assist may not prevent

the vehicle from rolling backwards

on a hill under all load or road condi-

tions. Always be prepared to de-

press the brake pedal to prevent the

vehicle from rolling backwards. Fail-

ure to do so may result in a collision

or serious personal injury.

The hill start assist system automatically

keeps the brakes applied to help prevent

the vehicle from rolling backwards in the

time it takes the driver to release the brake

pedal and apply the accelerator when the

vehicle is stopped on a hill.

Hill start assist will operate automatically

under the following conditions:

• The shift lever is placed in the D (Drive), B

mode, or R (Reverse) position.

• The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill

by applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.

After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll

back and hill start assist will stop operating

completely.

Hill start assist will not operate when the

shift lever is placed in the N (Neutral) or P

(Park) position or on a flat and level road.

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

5-140 Starting and driving

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the Li-ion bat-

tery: Do not store the vehicle in tem-

peratures below -13°F (-25°C) for over

seven days. If the outside temperature

is -13°F (-25°C) or less, the Li-ion battery

may freeze and it cannot be charged or

provide power to run the vehicle. Move

the vehicle to a warm location.

NOTE:

• Connect the charger to the vehicle and

place the power switch in the OFF posi-

tion when parking the vehicle if tem-

peratures may go below -4°F (-20°C).

This provides external power to the Li-

ion battery warmer (if so equipped)

when it operates and does not dis-

charge the Li-ion battery. Vehicle driv-

ing range is reduced if the Li-ion battery

warmer (if so equipped) operates (Li-ion

battery temperature approximately

-4°F (-20°C) or colder) while driving the

vehicle. You may need to charge the Li-

ion battery sooner than in warmer tem-

peratures.

• The Li-ion battery requires more time to

charge when the Li-ion battery warmer

(if so equipped) operates.

• The predicted charging time displayed

on the meter and navigation system in-

creases when the Li-ion battery warmer

(if so equipped) operates.

• Vehicle range may be substantially re-

duced in extremely cold conditions (for

example under -4°F (-20°C)).

• Using the climate control system to

heat the cabin when outside tempera-

ture is below 32°F (0°C) uses more elec-

tricity and affects vehicle range more

than when using the heater when the

temperature is above 32°F (0°C).

• Climate control performance is reduced

when using the Climate Ctrl. Timer or

Remote Climate Control while the Li-ion

battery warmer (if so equipped) oper-

ates. Set only the charging timer [End

Time] when charging in cold weather.

The vehicle automatically determines

when to start charging to fully charge

the Li-ion battery, even if the Li-ion bat-

tery warmer operates. Charging ends

before the set end time if the Li-ion bat-

tery is fully charged.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

deicer through the key hole. If the lock be-

comes frozen, heat the key before inserting

it into the key hole or use the remote key-

less entry key fob.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is possible that the

outside temperature will drop below 32°F

(0°C), check the antifreeze to ensure proper

winter protection. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Cooling system” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

12-VOLT BATTERY

If the 12-volt battery is not fully charged

during extremely cold weather conditions,

the 12-volt battery fluid may freeze and

damage the 12-volt battery. To maintain

maximum efficiency, the 12-volt battery

should be checked regularly. For additional

information, refer to “12-volt battery” in the

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Starting and driving 5-141

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

antifreeze, drain the cooling system. Refill

before operating the vehicle. For additional

information, refer to “Cooling system” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry

pavement. However, the performance of

these tires will be substantially reduced in

snowy and icy conditions. If you operate

your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN

recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or

ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer for the tire type, size,

speed rating and availability information.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-

ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit

their use. Check local, state and provincial

laws before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may

be poorer than that of non-studded

snow tires.

Tire chains may be used. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Tire chains” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items

be carried in the vehicle during winter:

• A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-

move ice and snow from the windows and

wiper blades.

• A shovel to dig the vehicle out of

snow-drifts.

• Extra windshield-washer fluid to refill the

reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

• Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” un-

der these conditions. Try to avoid

driving on wet ice until the road is

salted or sanded.

• Whatever the conditions, drive with

caution. Accelerate and slow down

with care. If accelerating too fast, the

drive wheels will lose even more

traction.

•

Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

• Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

• Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch

of ice is seen ahead, brake before

reaching it. Try not to brake while on

the ice, and avoid any sudden steer-

ing maneuvers.

• Do not use cruise control on slippery

roads.

5-142 Starting and driving

FREEING A FROZEN CHARGE PORT

LID

When the charge por t is frozen, melt the ice

using a hair dryer.

PARKING BRAKE

CAUTION

When parking in an area where the

outside temperature is below 32°F

(0°C), do not apply the parking brake to

prevent it from freezing.

For safe parking, place the shift lever in

the P (Park) position and securely

block the wheels.

Starting and driving 5-143

NOTES

5-144 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch .............6-2

Roadside assistance program .............6-2

Emergency EV (Electric Vehicle) shut off .......6-3

Flat tire ............................6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).....6-3

Repairing flat tire ....................6-4

Jump starting .......................6-10

If the Li-ion battery becomes completely

discharged .........................6-13

Push starting ........................6-14

Towing your vehicle....................6-14

Towing recommended by NISSAN ........6-15

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . .6-15

Push the switch on to warn other drivers

when you must stop or park under emer-

gency conditions. All turn signal lights will

flash.

WARNING

• If stopping for an emergency, be

sure to move the vehicle well off the

road.

• Do not use the hazard warning

flashers while moving on the high-

way unless unusual circumstances

force you to drive so slowly that your

vehicle might become a hazard to

other traffic.

• Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flasher can be actuated with the

power switch in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use

of the hazard warning flasher switch

while driving.

In the event of a roadside emergency,

Roadside Assistance Service is available to

you. For additional information, please refer

to your Warranty Information Booklet (U.S.)

or Warranty & Roadside Assistance Infor-

mation Booklet (Canada) for details.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM

6-2 In case of emergency

To shut off the EV system in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the follow-

ing procedure.

• Rapidly push the power switch three con-

secutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or

• Push and hold the power switch for more

than 2 seconds.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It moni-

tors tire pressure of all tires. When the low

tire pressure warning light is lit, and the “Tire

Pressure Low — Add Air” warning appears

on the vehicle information display, one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with

low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and

warn you of it by the low tire pressure warn-

ing light. This system will activate only

when the vehicle is driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h). For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights

and audible reminders” in the “Instruments

and controls” section and “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

WARNING

• Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should con-

tact the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

• If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull

off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with underinflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and

increase the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and

could result in serious personal in-

jury. Check the tire pressure for all

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pres-

sure shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label to turn the low tire

pressure warning light OFF. If the

light still illuminates while driving

after adjusting the tire pressure, a

tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire,

repair it as soon as possible.

• When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS

will not function and the low tire

pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute. The light

will remain on after 1 minute. Have

your tires replaced and/or TPMS

system reset as soon as possible. It

EMERGENCY EV (ELECTRIC VEHICLE)

SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

these services.

• Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could af-

fect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

• The Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tire

Repair Sealant or equivalent can be

used for temporarily repairing a tire.

Do not inject any other tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as

this may cause a malfunction of tire

pressure sensors.

• NISSAN recommends using only

NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire

Sealant provided with your vehicle.

Other tire sealants may damage the

valve stem seal which can cause the

tire to lose air pressure. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer as soon as pos-

sible after using tire repair sealant

(for models equipped with the emer-

gency tire puncture repair kit).

REPAIRING FLAT TIRE

WARNING

•

After using Emergency Tire Sealant

to repair a minor tire puncture, do

not drive the vehicle at speeds faster

than 50 mph (80 km/h).

•

Immediately after using the Emer-

gency Tire Sealant to repair a minor

tire puncture, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer. The Emergency Tire Sealant

cannot permanently seal a punc-

tured tire. Continuing operation of

the vehicle without a permanent tire

repair can lead to a crash.

•

If you used the Emergency Tire Seal-

ant to repair a minor tire puncture, it

is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer to re-

place the TPMS sensor in addition to

repairing or replacing the tire.

•

NISSAN recommends using only

NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire

Sealant provided with your vehicle.

Other tire sealants may damage the

valve stem seal which can cause the

tire to lose air pressure.

This vehicle does not have a spare tire. The

emergency tire puncture repair kit (Emer-

gency Tire Sealant) is supplied with the ve-

hicle instead of a spare tire. It can be used

to temporarily repair minor tire punctures.

If possible, have the vehicle towed to a fa-

cility that can repair or replace the flat tire.

Using the emergency tire puncture repair

kit may cause a malfunction of the tire

pressure sensor and cause the low tire

pressure warning light to illuminate.

CAUTION

•

To avoid the emergency tire punc-

ture kit being damaged during stor-

age or use:

–

Only use the emergency tire punc-

ture repair kit on your vehicle. Do

not use it on other vehicles.

6-4 In case of emergency

–

Only use the kit to inflate the tires

of your vehicle and to check the

vehicle’s tire pressure.

–

Only plug the compressor into a

12-volt DC car power point.

–

Keep the kit free of water and dirt.

–

Do not disassemble or modify the

kit.

–

Do not drop the kit or allow hard

impacts to the kit.

•

Do not use the emergency tire punc-

ture repair kit under the following

conditions. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer or professional road

assistance.

–

when the sealant has passed its

expiration date (shown on the la-

bel attached to the bottle)

–

when the cut or the puncture is

approximately 0.25 in (6 mm) or

longer

–

when the tire sidewall is damaged

–

when the vehicle has been driven

with extremely low tire pressure

–

when the tire has come off the in-

side or the outside of the wheel

–

when the tire wheel is damaged

–

when two or more tires are flat

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake.

4. Push the P (Park) position switch on the

shift lever to the P (Park) position.

5. Turn off the EV system.

6. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and

to signal professional road assistance

personnel that you need assistance.

7. Have all passengers get out of the ve-

hicle and stand in a safe place, away

from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

•

Make sure the parking brake is se-

curely applied and the vehicle is

placed into the P (Park) position.

•

Never repair tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This

is hazardous.

•

Never repair tires if oncoming traffic

is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-

fessional road assistance.

In case of emergency 6-5

Getting emergency tire puncture

repair kit

Take out the emergency tire puncture re-

pair kit located in the cargo area. The repair

kit consists of the following items:

䊊

Tire sealant bottle

䊊

Air compressor*

䊊

Speed restriction sticker

* The compressor shape may differ de-

pending on the models.

Before using emergency tire

puncture repair kit

• If any foreign object (for example, a screw

or nail) is embedded in the tire, do not

remove it.

• Check the expiration date of the sealant

(shown on the label attached to the

bottle). Never use a sealant whose expira-

tion date has passed.

Repairing tire:

WARNING

Observe the following precautions

when using the tire repair compound.

•

Swallowing the compound is dan-

gerous. Immediately drink as much

water as possible and seek prompt

medical assistance.

•

Rinse well with lots of water if the

compound comes into contact with

skin or eyes. If irritation persists,

seek prompt medical attention.

•

Keep the repair compound out of the

reach of children.

•

The emergency repair compound

may cause a malfunction of the tire

pressure sensors and cause the low

tire pressure warning light to illumi-

nate. Have the tire pressure sensor

replaced as soon as possible.

6-6 In case of emergency

1. Take out the speed restriction sticker

from the air compressor, then put it in a

location where the driver can see it while

driving.

CAUTION

Do not put the speed restriction label

on the steering wheel pad, the speed-

ometer or the warning light locations.

2. Take the hose

䊊

and the power plug

䊊

out of the air compressor. Remove the

cap of the bottle holder from the air

compressor.

3. Remove the cap from the tire sealant

bottle. Leave the bottle seal intact.

Screw the bottle clockwise into the

bottle holder to pierce the seal of the

bottle.

In case of emergency 6-7

4. Remove the cap from the tire valve on

the flat tire.

5. Remove the protective cap

䊊

of the

hose and screw the hose securely onto

the tire valve. Make sure that the pres-

sure release valve

䊊

is securely tight-

ened. Make sure that the air compressor

switch is in the OFF (O) position, and

then insert the power plug into the

power outlet in the vehicle.

6. Push the power switch to the ACC posi-

tion. Then turn the compressor switch

to the ON (−) position and inflate the tire

up to the pressure that is specified on

the Tire and Loading Information label

affixed to the driver’s side center pillar if

possible, or to the minimum of 26 psi

(180 kPa). Turn the air compressor off

briefly in order to check the tire pressure

with the pressure gauge.

6-8 In case of emergency

If the tire is inflated to higher than the

specified pressure, lower the tire pres-

sure by releasing air with the pressure

release valve.

NOTE:

The compressor tire pressure gauge

may show a pressure reading of 87 psi

(600 kPa) for about 30 seconds while

inflating the tire. The pressure gauge

is indicating the pressure inside the

sealant can. When the sealant has

been injected into the tire the pres-

sure gauge will drop and indicate ac-

tual tire pressure.

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury while

using the emergency tire puncture re-

pair kit:

• Securely tighten the compressor

hose to the tire valve. Failure to do so

can cause the sealant to spray into

the air and get into your eyes or on

the skin.

• Do not stand directly beside the dam-

aged tire while it is being inflated be-

cause of the risk of the rupture. If

there are any cracks or bumps, turn

the compressor off immediately.

If the tire pressure does not increase to

26 psi (180 kPa) within 10 minutes, the

tire may be seriously damaged and the

tire cannot be repaired with this tire

repair kit. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

7. When the tire pressure is at the specified

amount, turn the air compressor off. If

the tire cannot be inflated to the speci-

fied amount, the air compressor can be

turned off at the minimum of 26 psi

(180 kPa). Remove the power plug from

the power outlet and quickly remove the

hose from the tire valve. Attach the pro-

tective cap and valve cap. Properly stow

the emergency tire puncture repair kit in

the cargo area.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury when

stowing the emergency tire puncture

repair kit:

• Keep the sealant bottle screwed into

the compressor. Failure to do so can

cause the sealant to spray into the air

and get into your eyes or on the skin.

8. Immediately drive the vehicle for 10 min-

utes or 2 miles (3 km) at a speed below

50 mph (80 km/h).

9. After driving, make sure that the air

compressor switch is in the OFF posi-

tion, then screw the hose securely onto

the tire valve. Check the tire pressure

with the pressure gauge. Temporary re-

pair is completed if the tire pressure

does not drop.

Make sure the pressure is adjusted to

the pressure that is specified on the Tire

and Loading Information label before

driving.

In case of emergency 6-9

10. If the tire pressure drops, repeat the

steps from 5 to 9. If the pressure drops

again or under 19 psi (130 kPa), the tire

cannot be repaired with this tire re-

pair kit. If the tire cannot be repaired,

the driver should not drive on it any

further. The car should be towed to the

nearest dealership.

The sealant bottle and hose cannot be

reused to repair another punctured tire.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer to pur-

chase replacements.

After repairing tire:

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for tire repair/

replacement as soon as possible.

WARNING

•

After using Emergency Tire Sealant

to repair a minor tire puncture, do

not drive the vehicle at speeds faster

than 50 mph (80 km/h).

•

Immediately after using Emergency

Tire Sealant to repair a minor tire

puncture, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer. The Emergency Tire Sealant

cannot permanently seal a punc-

tured tire. Continuing operation of

the vehicle without a permanent tire

repair can lead to a crash.

• Do not inject any tire liquid or aero-

sol tire sealant into the tires, as this

may cause a malfunction of the tire

pressure sensors.

• If you used the Emergency Tire Seal-

ant to repair a minor tire puncture, it

is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer to re-

place the TPMS sensor in addition to

repairing or replacing the tire.

• NISSAN recommends using only

NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire

Sealant provided with your vehicle.

Other tire sealants may damage the

valve stem seal which can cause the

tire to lose air pressure.

To start your EV system with a booster bat-

tery, the instructions and precautions be-

low must be followed.

Jump starting provides power to the 12-

volt system to allow the electrical systems

to operate. The electrical systems must be

operating to allow the Li-ion battery to be

charged. Jump starting does not charge

the Li-ion battery. The Li-ion battery must

be charged before the vehicle can be

driven.

WARNING

• If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a 12-volt battery explosion,

resulting in severe injury or death. It

could also damage your vehicle.

• Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the 12-volt

battery. Keep all sparks and flames

away from the 12-volt battery.

• Do not allow battery fluid to come

into contact with eyes, skin, clothing

or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a

corrosive sulfuric acid solution that

can cause severe burns. If the fluid

comes into contact with anything,

JUMP STARTING

6-10 In case of emergency

immediately flush the contacted

area with water.

• Keep the 12-volt battery out of the

reach of children.

• The booster battery must be rated

at 12 volt. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

• Whenever working on or near a 12-

volt battery, always wear suitable

eye protectors (for example,

goggles or industrial safety spec-

tacles) and remove rings, metal

bands, or any other jewelry. Do not

lean over the 12-volt battery when

jump starting.

• Do not attempt to jump start a fro-

zen battery. It could explode and

cause serious injury.

• Your vehicle has an automatic cool-

ing fan. It could come on at any time.

Keep hands and other objects away

from it.

WARNING

• Always follow the instructions be-

low. Failure to do so could result in

damage to the DC/DC converter and

cause personal injury.

• Do not attempt to perform a jump

start on the 12-volt battery at the

same time that the Li-ion battery is

being charged. Doing so may dam-

age the vehicle or charging equip-

ment and could cause an injury.

CAUTION

LEAF cannot be used as a booster ve-

hicle because it cannot supply enough

power to start a gasoline engine. How-

ever, a gasoline engine vehicle can be

used to jump start LEAF's 12-volt bat-

tery.

In case of emergency 6-11

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-

hicle

䊊

, position the two vehicles (

䊊

and

䊊

) to bring their 12-volt batteries

into close proximity to each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to

touch.

2. Apply the parking brake.

If the 12-volt battery is discharged,

the power switch cannot be moved

from the OFF position. Connect the

jumper cables to the booster vehicle

䊊

before pushing the power switch.

3. Push the P (Park) position switch to

place the vehicle in the P (Park) position.

4. Switch off all unnecessary electrical sys-

tems (headlights, heater, air conditioner,

etc.).

5. Place the power switch in the OFF

position.

6. Ensure vent caps are level and tight.

7. Connect jumper cables in the sequence

as illustrated (

䊊

→

䊊

→

䊊

→

䊊

CAUTION

•

Always connect positive (+) to positive

(+) and negative (−) to body ground

(for example, as illustrated), not to the

12-volt battery.

• Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the motor

compartment and that the cable

clamps do not contact any other

metal.

8. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

䊊

9. While the booster vehicle

䊊

engine is

running, place the EV system in the

READY to drive position.

CAUTION

If the system does not start right away,

push the power switch to the OFF po-

sition and wait 10 seconds before try-

ing again.

10. After starting your EV system, carefully

disconnect the negative cable and

then the positive cable (

䊊

→

䊊

→

䊊

→

䊊

) and keep in the READY to drive po-

sition over 20 minutes to charge the

12-volt battery.

6-12 In case of emergency

11. If necessary, connect the vehicle to a

charging station or EVSE (Electric Ve-

hicle Supply Equipment) to charge the

Li-ion battery. For additional informa-

tion, refer to the “Charging” section. The

vehicle cannot be driven until the Li-ion

battery is charged.

NOTE:

If it is not possible to turn the system ON

by following this procedure, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer immediately.

If the power limitation indicator light

illuminates, the traction motor output is

limited resulting in reduced vehicle speed.

Stop the vehicle in a safe location before

the Li-ion battery becomes completely dis-

charged and no power is available to drive

the vehicle. Contact Roadside assistance;

refer to a NISSAN Warranty Information

Booklet.

If possible, place the power switch in the

OFF position while waiting for assistance to

prevent discharging the 12-volt battery.

NOTE:

If the Li-ion battery becomes completely

discharged:

• The vehicle is automatically placed in

the ON position and it will not be pos-

sible to switch to the READY to drive po-

sition.

• The vehicle is automatically switched to

the N (Neutral) position and it will not be

possible to drive the vehicle.

WARNING

If the vehicle is in the N (Neutral) posi-

tion and the Li-ion battery and the 12-

volt battery become completely dis-

charged, the vehicle cannot be placed

in the P (Park) position. If this occurs,

place suitable blocks at both the front

and back of a wheel to prevent the ve-

hicle from moving. Failure to block a

wheel may allow the vehicle to move

unexpectedly which may result in seri-

ous personal injury or death.

To place the vehicle in the READY to drive

position so the vehicle can be driven,

charge the Li-ion battery until the driving

range on the instrument panel changes

from “---” to a numeric distance.

NOTE:

• Some vibration may occur when the ve-

hicle is stopped in case the Li-ion bat-

tery becomes completely discharged.

This is not the malfunction of the sys-

tem.

• If the Li-ion battery is completely dis-

charged, it is required to charge until

the low battery charge warning light

turns off (white) from on (yellow).

IF THE LI-ION BATTERY BECOMES

COMPLETELY DISCHARGED

In case of emergency 6-13

Do not attempt to start the system by

pushing the vehicle.

CAUTION

An EV cannot be push-started or tow-

started. Attempting to do so may

cause traction motor damage.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provin-

cial in Canada) and local regulations for

towing must be followed. Incorrect towing

equipment could damage your vehicle.

Towing instructions are available from a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer. Local service

operators are familiar with the applicable

laws and procedures for towing. To assure

proper towing and to prevent accidental

damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recom-

mends that you have a service operator

tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the

service operator carefully read the follow-

ing precautions.

WARNING

• Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

• Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

• When towing, make sure that the ax-

les, steering system and power train

are in working condition. If any unit

is damaged, dollies must be used.

• Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For additional information about towing

your vehicle behind a Recreational Vehicle

(RV), refer to “Flat towing” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of this

manual.

PUSH STARTING TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6-14 In case of emergency

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (front) wheels off the

ground or that the vehicle be placed on a

flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

• Never tow with the front wheels on

the ground or four wheels on the

ground (forward or backward), as

this may cause serious and expen-

sive damage to the motor.

• When towing this vehicle with the

rear wheels on the ground (if you do

not use towing dollies): Always re-

lease the parking brake.

NOTE:

If your vehicle cannot be moved because

the vehicle cannot be shifted to the N

(Neutral) position, please refer to the

LEAF Roadside Assistance Guide which is

located at www.NISSANUSA.com. If your

vehicle cannot be moved because the

parking brake cannot be released, refer

to “Parking brake” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (FREEING A

STUCK VEHICLE)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-

sonal injury or death when recovering

a stuck vehicle:

• Contact a professional towing ser-

vice to recover the vehicle if you

have any questions regarding the

recovery procedure.

• Tow chains or cables must be at-

tached only to main structural

members of the vehicle.

• Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to

tow or free a stuck vehicle.

• Only use devices specifically de-

signed for vehicle recovery and fol-

low the manufacturer’s instructions.

• Always pull the recovery device

straight out from the front of the ve-

hicle. Never pull at an angle.

• Route recovery devices so they do

not touch any part of the vehicle ex-

cept the attachment point.

In case of emergency 6-15

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use a tow strap or other device de-

signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

If the vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., try to free it by following the procedure

below.

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

( VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind

the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel left and right to

clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and

backward.

• Shift back and forth between the R (Re-

verse) and D (Drive) positions.

• Apply the accelerator as little as pos-

sible to maintain the rocking motion.

• Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R (Reverse) and D

(Drive).

• Do not spin the tires above 35 mph

(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing ser-

vice to remove the vehicle.

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ......................7-2

Washing ..........................7-2

Waxing ...........................7-2

Removing spots.....................7-3

Underbody ........................7-3

Glass ............................7-3

Wheels ...........................7-3

Chromeparts......................7-4

Tire dressing .......................7-4

Cleaning interior ......................7-4

Air fresheners ......................7-5

Floor mats ........................7-5

Seatbelts.........................7-7

Corrosion protection....................7-7

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion .........................7-7

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion .........................7-7

Protect your vehicle from corrosion ........7-7

In order to maintain the appearance of

your vehicle, it is important to take proper

care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

• After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-

age from acid rain.

• After driving on coastal roads.

• When contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or

bugs get on the paint surface.

• When dust or mud builds up on the

surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-

hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in

a shady area or protect the vehicle with a

body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-

face when putting on or removing the

body cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge

and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thor-

oughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle

soap or general purpose dishwashing liq-

uid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot)

water.

CAUTION

• Do not use car washes that use acid

in the detergent. Some car washes,

especially brushless ones, use some

acid for cleaning. The acid may react

with some plastic vehicle compo-

nents, causing them to crack. This

could affect their appearance, and

also could cause them not to func-

tion properly. Always check with

your car wash to confirm that acid is

not used.

• Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical

detergents, gasoline or solvents.

• Do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or while the vehicle body is

hot, as the surface may become

water-spotted.

• Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of

clean water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the

doors, hatches and hood are particularly

vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-

fore, these areas must be regularly

cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in

the lower edge of the door are open. Spray

water under the body and in the wheel

wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint sur-

face by using a damp chamois to dry the

vehicle.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface

and helps retain new vehicle appearance.

Polishing is recommended to remove

built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-

ered appearance before reapplying wax.

A NISSAN certified LEAF dealer can assist

you in choosing the proper product.

• Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions supplied

with the wax.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

• Do not use a wax containing any abra-

sives, cutting compounds or cleaners that

may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compound or aggressive polish-

ing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish

may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,

insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible

from the paint surface to avoid lasting

damage or staining. Special cleaning prod-

ucts are available at a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer or any automotive accessory

stores.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter,

the underbody must be cleaned regularly.

This will prevent dirt and salt from building

up and causing the acceleration of corro-

sion on the underbody and suspension.

Before the winter period and again in the

spring, the underseal must be checked

and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and

dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-

mal for glass to become coated with a film

after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.

Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily

remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win-

dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,

abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based

disinfectant cleaners. They could dam-

age the electrical conductors, radio

antenna elements or rear window de-

froster elements.

WHEELS

Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

• Clean the inner side of the wheels when

the wheel is changed or the underside of

the vehicle is washed.

• Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss

of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

• NISSAN recommends that the road

wheels be waxed to protect against road

salt in areas where it is used during winter.

CAUTION

Do not use abrasive cleaners when

washing the wheels.

Aluminum alloy wheels (if so

equipped)

Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in

a mild soap solution, especially during win-

ter months in areas where road salt is used.

Salt could discolor the wheels if not re-

moved.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

• Do not use a cleaner that uses

strong acid or alkali contents to

clean the wheels.

• Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as

ambient temperature.

• Rinse the wheel to completely re-

move the cleaner within 15 minutes

after the cleaner is applied.

Appearance and care 7-3

CHROME PARTS

Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the fin-

ish.

TIRE DRESSING

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a

coating to the tires to help reduce discolor-

ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-

plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-

ing and form a compound. This compound

may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

• Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-

ing on the tire dissolves more easily with

an oil-based tire dressing.

• Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire tread/

grooves (where it would be difficult to

remove).

• Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-

pletely removed from the tire

tread/grooves.

• Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by the tire dressing

manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the

interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a

vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe

the vinyl and leather sur faces (if so

equipped) with a clean, soft cloth damp-

ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean

with a dry soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in

order to maintain the appearance of the

leather (if so equipped).

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some

fabric protectors contain chemicals that

may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to

clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classifi-

cation sensor (weight sensor). This can

also affect the operation of the air bag

system and result in serious personal

injury.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

CAUTION

• Never use benzine, thinner, or any

similar material.

• Small dirt particles can be abrasive

and damaging to the leather sur-

faces (if so equipped) and should be

removed promptly. Do not use

saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,

oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-

gents or ammonia-based cleaners

as they may damage the leather’s

natural finish.

• Never use fabric protectors unless

recommended by the manufacturer.

• Do not use glass or plastic cleaner

on meter or gauge lens covers. It

may damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that

could affect the vehicle interior. If you use

an air freshener, take the following precau-

tions:

• Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they con-

tact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air

freshener in a location that allows it to

hang free and not contact an interior

surface.

• Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on

the vents. These products can cause im-

mediate damage and discoloration when

spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufactur-

er’s instructions before using air freshen-

ers.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference

that may result in a collision, injury or

death:

• NEVER place a floor mat on top of

another floor mat in the driver front

position or install them upside down

or backwards.

• Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

or equivalent floor mats, that are

specifically designed for use in your

vehicle model and model year.

Appearance and care 7-5

• Properly position the mats in the

floorwell using the floor mat posi-

tioning hook. For additional infor-

mation, refer to "Floor mat installa-

tion" in this section.

• Make sure the floor mat does not in-

terfere with pedal operation.

• Periodically check the floor mats to

make sure they are properly in-

stalled.

• After cleaning the vehicle interior,

check the floor mats to make sure

they are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and

make it easier to clean the interior. Mats

should be maintained with regular clean-

ing and replaced if they become exces-

sively worn.

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po-

sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of

the floor mat positioning hooks for each

seating position varies depending on the

vehicle.

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

follow the installation instructions provided

with the mat and the following:

1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell so

that the floor mat grommet holes are

aligned with the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the

hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is

properly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-

fere with pedal operation. With the igni-

tion in the OFF position, the selector le-

ver in the P (Park) position fully apply and

release all pedals. The floor mat must

not interfere with pedal operation or

prevent the pedal from returning to its

normal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for details about in-

stalling the floor mats in your vehicle.

The illustration shows the location of floor

mat positioning hooks.

Positioning hooks

7-6 Appearance and care

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping

them with a sponge dampened in a mild

soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-

pletely in the shade before using them.

For additional information, refer to “Seat

belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in

the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or

chemical solvents to clean the seat

belts, since these materials may se-

verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

• The accumulation of moisture-retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

• Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on

the vehicle body underside can accelerate

corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry

completely inside the vehicle, and should

be removed for drying to avoid floor panel

corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of

high relative humidity, especially those ar-

eas where the temperatures stay above

freezing, where atmospheric pollution ex-

ists, or where road salt is used.

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate the

rate of corrosion to those parts which are

not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in

the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt

use will accelerate the corrosion process.

Road salt will also accelerate the disinte-

gration of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

• Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep

the vehicle clean.

• Always check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as possible.

• Keep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumulation.

• Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wa-

ter as soon as possible.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-7

CAUTION

• NEVER remove dirt, sand or other

debris from the passenger compart-

ment by washing it out with a hose.

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

• Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic

components inside the vehicle as

this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing

are extremely corrosive. They accelerate

corrosion and deterioration of underbody

components such as the brake lines, brake

cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be

cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some

areas, it is recommended that you consult

a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Maintenance and do-it yourself

Maintenance requirement ................8-2

Scheduled maintenance ...............8-2

General maintenance .................8-2

Where to go for service ................8-2

General maintenance ...................8-3

Explanation of maintenance items ........8-3

Maintenance precautions ................8-5

Motor compartment check locations ........8-8

Cooling system .......................8-8

Checking coolant level ................8-9

Changing coolant ...................8-10

Reduction gear fluid ...................8-10

Brake fluid ..........................8-11

Windshield-washer fluid .................8-11

12-volt battery .......................8-12

Jump starting .....................8-14

Windshield wiper blades ................8-14

Cleaning .........................8-14

Replacing ........................8-14

Rear window wiper blade ..............8-16

Brakes............................8-16

Brake pad wear warning ..............8-16

Fuses .............................8-17

Motor compartment .................8-17

Passenger compartment .............8-20

Nissan Intelligent Key® battery replacement . . .8-21

Lights.............................8-24

Headlights .......................8-24

Fog lights (if so equipped) .............8-25

Ex terior and interior lights .............8-26

Wheels and tires .....................8-28

Tire pressure ......................8-28

Tire labeling.......................8-32

Types of tires ......................8-34

Tire chains .......................8-35

Changing wheels

and tires.............8-36

Emergency tire puncture repair kit .......8-38

Your new NISSAN has been designed to

have minimum maintenance require-

ments with long service intervals to save

you both time and money. However, some

day-to-day and regular maintenance is es-

sential to maintain your NISSAN’s fine me-

chanical condition, and its Electric Vehicle

(EV ) system performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure

that the scheduled maintenance, and gen-

eral maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one

who can ensure that your vehicle receives

the proper maintenance care. You are a

vital link in the maintenance chain.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

For your convenience, both required and

optional scheduled maintenance items

are described and listed in your “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”. You must

refer to that guide to ensure that neces-

sary maintenance is performed on your

NISSAN at regular intervals.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal

day-to-day operation. They are essential

for proper vehicle operation. It is your re-

sponsibility to perform these procedures

regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks

requires minimal mechanical skill and only

a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done

by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you

prefer, a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your

vehicle appears to malfunction, have the

systems checked and serviced. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-

cialists and are kept up-to-date with the

latest service information through techni-

cal bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership

information systems. They are completely

qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles be-

fore work begins.

You can be confident that a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer’s service department per-

forms the best job to meet the mainte-

nance requirements on your vehicle — in a

reliable and economical way.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT

8-2 Maintenance and do-it yourself

During the normal day-to-day operation of

the vehicle, general maintenance should

be performed regularly as prescribed in

this section. If you detect any unusual

sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to

check for the cause or have a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer do it promptly. In addition,

it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer if you think that re-

pairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-

nance work, refer to “Maintenance precau-

tions” in this section.

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE

ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with “*” is found in this section.

Outside vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be performed from time to time, unless

otherwise specified.

Doors and motor hood: Check that all

doors and the motor hood operate prop-

erly. Also ensure that all latches lock se-

curely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins,

rollers and links if necessary. Make sure

that the secondary latch keeps the motor

hood from opening when the primary latch

is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or

other corrosive materials, check lubrica-

tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular

basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop

lights, tail lights, turn signal lights and other

lights are all operating properly and in-

stalled securely. Also check the aim of the

headlights.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-

ing the tires, make sure that no wheel nuts

are missing, and check for any loose wheel

nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev-

ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge

often and always prior to long distance

trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all

tires to the pressure specified. Check care-

fully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the

TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core

and cap when the tires are replaced due to

wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve-

hicle pulls to either side while driving on a

straight and level road, or if you detect un-

even or abnormal tire wear, there may be a

need for wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at

normal highway speeds, wheel balancing

may be needed.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in

the Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a

regular basis. Check the windshield at least

every six months for cracks or other dam-

age. Have a damaged windshield repaired

by a qualified repair facility.

Wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if

they do not wipe properly.

Inside vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked on a regular basis, such as

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-3

when performing scheduled maintenance,

cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure that the

pedal does not catch or require uneven

effort. Keep the floor mat away from the

pedal.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes

down further than normal, the pedal feels

spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer

to stop, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer immediately.

Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull

the vehicle to one side when applied.

Electric shift P (Park) position mecha-

nism: On a steep hill, check that the vehicle

is held securely while the vehicle is in the P

(Park) position without applying the brakes.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake

operation regularly. The vehicle should be

securely held on a steep hill with only the

parking brake applied. If the parking brake

cannot keep a vehicle position, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

Seat: Check seat position controls such as

the seat adjusters, seatback recliners, etc.

to ensure that they operate smoothly and

that all latches lock securely in every posi-

tion. Check that the head restraints/

headrests move up and down smoothly

and that the locks (if so equipped) hold

securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat

belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,

adjusters and retractors) operate properly

and smoothly, and are installed securely.

Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,

wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering conditions, such as excessive free

play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure

that all warning lights and chimes are op-

erating properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

emits from the defroster outlets properly

and in sufficient quantity when operating

the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check

that the wipers and washers operate prop-

erly and that the wipers do not streak.

Under hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked periodically.

12-volt battery (for serviceable battery)*:

Check the fluid level in each cell. The fluid

should be at the bottom of the filler open-

ing. Vehicles operated in high tempera-

tures or under severe conditions require

frequent checks of the 12–volt battery fluid

level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the EV system is not

running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it yourself

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake

fluid level is between the “MAX” and “MIN”

lines on the reservoir.

Coolant level*: Check the coolant level

when the motor compartment is cold.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for

water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle

has been parked for a while. Water dripping

from the air conditioner after use is normal.

If you should notice any leaks, check for

cause and have it corrected immediately.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,

leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.

Make sure that the hoses have no cracks,

deformation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently

exposed to corrosive substances such as

those used on icy roads or to control dust. It

is very important to remove these sub-

stances, otherwise rust will form on the

floor pan and frame. At the end of winter,

the underbody should be thoroughly

flushed with plain water, being careful to

clean those areas where mud and dirt may

accumulate. For additional information, re-

fer to “Cleaning exterior” in the “Appearance

and care” section of this manual.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that

there is an adequate amount of fluid in the

reservoir.

When performing any inspection or main-

tenance work on your vehicle, always take

care to prevent serious accidental injury to

yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-

lowing are general precautions that should

be closely observed.

WARNING

• The EV system uses high voltage up

to approximately DC 400 volt. The

system can be hot during and after

starting and when the vehicle is shut

off. Be careful of both the high volt-

age and the high temperature. Obey

the labels that are attached to the

vehicle.

• Never disassemble, remove or re-

place high-voltage parts and cables

as well as their connectors. High-

voltage cables are colored orange.

• Disassembling, removing or replac-

ing those parts or cables can cause

severe burns or electric shock that

may result in serious injury or death.

The vehicle high-voltage system has

no user serviceable parts. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for any neces-

sary maintenance.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-5

• Park the vehicle on a level surface,

apply the parking brake securely

and chock the wheels to prevent the

vehicle from moving. Push the P

(Park) position switch on the shift

lever or place the vehicle into the N

(Neutral) position.

• If you must work with the EV (Electric

vehicle) system is turned on, keep

hands, clothing, hair and tools away

from moving fans and any other

moving parts.

• Make sure that the power switch is in

the OFF or LOCK position when per-

forming any part replacement or re-

pairs.

• It is advisable to secure or remove

any loose clothing and remove any

jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.

before working on your vehicle.

• Always wear eye protection when-

ever you work on your vehicle.

• Never get under the vehicle while it

is supported only by a jack. If it is

necessary to work under the vehicle,

support it with safety stands.

• Keep smoking materials, flames and

sparks away from the 12-volt bat-

tery.

CAUTION

• Do not work under the hood while

the motor compartment is hot. Push

the power switch in the OFF position

and wait until it cools down.

• Avoid direct contact with used cool-

ant. Improperly disposed coolant

and/or other vehicle fluids can dam-

age the environment. Always con-

form to local regulations for the dis-

posal of vehicle fluids.

• Never connect or disconnect the

battery or any transistorized com-

ponent while the power switch is in

the ON position.

• Your vehicle is equipped with an au-

tomatic cooling fan. It may come on

at any time without warning, even if

the power switch is not in the ACC,

ON or READY to drive position. To

avoid injury, always disconnect the

negative 12-volt battery cable be-

fore working near the fan.

• Before performing any electrical

maintenance work on the vehicle

such as the battery, fuses or bulb re-

placement, confirm the following:

– The charge connector is removed

from the vehicle.

– The Climate Ctrl. Timer is not ac-

tive or operating. For additional

information, refer to “Climate Ctrl.

Timer” in the “Monitor, climate, au-

dio, phone and voice recognition

systems” section of this manual.

– The 12-volt battery is not being

charged by the Li-ion battery and

that all charging status indicator

lights are off. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Charging the 12-

volt battery” in the “EV overview”

section and “Charging status indi-

cator lights” in the “Charging” sec-

tion of this manual.

• The power switch is in the OFF posi-

tion. Place the power switch in the

ON position and then in the OFF po-

sition to prevent the 12-volt battery

automatically being charged by the

Li-ion battery. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Charging the 12-

volt battery” in the “EV overview”

section of this manual.

The “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion gives instructions regarding only

those items that are relatively easy for an

owner to perform.

8-6 Maintenance and do-it yourself

A Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also

available. For additional information, refer

to “Owner’s manual/service manual order

information” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or

improper servicing may result in operating

difficulties and could affect your warranty

coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,

it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-7

1. Fuse/Fusible link holder

2. Brake fluid reservoir

3. 12-volt battery

4. Fuse holder

5. Fuse/Fusible link holder

6. Coolant reservoir cap

7. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

The cooling system is filled at the factory

with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

and 50% water to provide year-round anti-

freeze and coolant protection. The anti-

freeze solution contains rust and corrosion

inhibitors. Additional cooling system addi-

tives are not necessary.

WARNING

• Never remove the coolant tank cap

when the motor compartment is

hot. Wait until the motor compart-

ment cool down.

• The coolant tank is equipped with a

special type coolant tank cap. To

prevent damage to the motor com-

partment, use only a Genuine

NISSAN coolant tank cap.

CAUTION

• Never use any additives in the cool-

ant such as radiator sealer in the

cooling system. This may cause

damage to electrical equipment

such as the motor and inverter.

MOTOR COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS COOLING SYSTEM

8-8 Maintenance and do-it yourself

• When adding or replacing coolant,

be sure to use only a Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genu-

ine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to

provide antifreeze protection to

−34°F (−37°C) . If additional freeze

protection is needed due to the

weather conditions where you oper-

ate your vehicle, add Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) concentrate following

the directions on the container. If

and equivalent coolant other than

Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used,

follow the coolant manufacture's in-

structions to maintain minimum an-

tifreeze protection to −34°F (−37°C).

The use of other types of coolant so-

lutions other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent may damage the cool-

ing system.

• The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 125,000 miles

(200,000 km) or 15 years. Mixing any

other type of coolant other than

Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), including

Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the

use of non-distilled water will re-

duce the life expectancy of the

factory-filled coolant. For additional

information, refer to the NISSAN Ser-

vice and Maintenance Guide.

CHECKING COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir

when the high-voltage parts are cold. If

the coolant level is below the MIN level

䊊

open the reservoir cap and add coolant up

to the MAX level

䊊

. If the reservoir is empty,

check the coolant level in the coolant res-

ervoir when the high-voltage parts are

cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the

coolant reservoir, fill the coolant reservoir

with coolant up to the reservoir cap open-

ing and also add it to the reservoir up to the

MAX level

䊊

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-9

Tighten the cap securely after adding

coolant.

For additional information on the location

of the coolant reservoir, refer to “Motor

compartment check locations” in this sec-

tion.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, it is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

CHANGING COOLANT

It is recommended that major cooling sys-

tem repairs should be performed by a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer. The service

procedures can be found in the appropri-

ate NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance.

WARNING

• To avoid the danger of being

scalded, never change the coolant

when the motor compartment is

hot.

• Never remove the coolant reservoir

cap when the motor compartment is

hot. Serious burns could be caused

by high-pressure fluid escaping

from the radiator.

• Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made,

wash thoroughly with soap or hand

cleaner as soon as possible.

• Keep coolant out of reach of children

and pets.

Coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

When checking or replacement is required,

it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

CAUTION

• Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S

ATF. Do not mix with other fluids.

• Using reduction gear fluid other

than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF

will cause deterioration in driveabil-

ity and reduction gear durability,

and may damage the reduction

gear, which is not covered by the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited War-

ranty.

REDUCTION GEAR FLUID

8-10 Maintenance and do-it yourself

For additional brake fluid information, refer

to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

WARNING

• Use only new fluid from a sealed

container. Old, inferior or contami-

nated fluid may damage the brake

system. The use of improper fluids

can damage the brake system, and

affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.

• Clean the filler cap before removing.

• Brake fluid is poisonous and should

be stored carefully in marked con-

tainers out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted

surfaces. This will damage the paint. If

fluid is spilled, immediately wash the

surface with water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the

fluid is below the MIN line

䊊

or the brake

warning light illuminates, add Genuine

NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or

equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line

䊊

If fluid must be added frequently, the sys-

tem should be checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

Except for Canada

To check the fluid level, use your finger to

plug the center hole

䊊

of the cap/tube

assembly, then remove it from the reser-

voir. If there is no fluid in the tube, add fluid.

For Canada

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir

periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid

when the “Low Washer Fluid” message ap-

pears on the vehicle information display.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

BRAKE FLUID WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-11

information display warnings and indica-

tors” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,

lift the cap

䊊

and pour the windshield-

washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

Add a windshield-washer solvent to the

reservoir for better cleaning. In the winter

season, add a windshield-washer anti-

freeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when

driving conditions require an increased

amount of windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid:

Genuine NISSAN Windshield-Washer Con-

centrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

CAUTION

• Do not substitute antifreeze coolant

for windshield-washer solution. This

may result in damage to the paint.

• Do not fill the windshield-washer

reservoir with windshield-washer

fluid concentrates at full strength.

Some methyl alcohol based

windshield-washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer reservoir.

• Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid

concentrates with water to the

manufacturer’s recommended lev-

els before pouring the fluid into the

windshield-washer reservoir. Do not

use the windshield-washer reser-

voir to mix the windshield-washer

fluid concentrate and water.

• Keep the 12-volt battery surface clean and

dry. Clean the 12-volt battery with a solu-

tion of baking soda and water.

• Make certain the terminal connections

are clean and securely tightened.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the EV system is not

running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health

WARNING

• Do not expose the 12-volt battery to

flames or electrical sparks. Hydro-

gen gas generated by the 12-volt

battery is explosive. Do not allow 12-

volt battery fluid to contact your

12-VOLT BATTERY

8-12 Maintenance and do-it yourself

skin, eyes, fabrics or painted sur-

faces. After touching a 12-volt bat-

tery or 12-volt battery cap, do not

touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly

wash your hands. If the acid con-

tacts your eyes, skin or clothing, im-

mediately flush with water for at

least 15 minutes and seek medical

attention.

• Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid

in the 12-volt battery is low. Low 12-

volt battery fluid can cause a higher

load on the 12-volt battery which

can generate heat, reduce battery

life, and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

• When working on or near a 12-volt

battery, always wear suitable eye

protection and remove all jewelry.

• 12-volt battery posts, terminals and

related accessories contain lead and

lead compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

• Keep the 12-volt battery out of the

reach of children.

1. Remove the vent caps with a screw-

driver as shown. Use a cloth to protect

the battery case.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level up to the bottom

of the filler opening. Do not overfill. Re-

install the vent caps.

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-13

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or

under severe conditions require frequent

checks of the 12-volt battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

Jump starting provides power to the 12 volt

system to allow the electrical systems to

operate. The electrical systems must be

operating to allow the Li-ion battery to be

charged. Jump starting does not charge

the Li-ion battery. The Li-ion battery must

be charged before the vehicle can be

driven.

For additional information, refer to “Jump

starting” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual. If the power switch

does not switch to the READY to drive posi-

tion by jump starting, the 12-volt battery

may have to be replaced. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using

the windshield washer or if a wiper blade

chatters when running, wax or other mate-

rial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer solution or a mild detergent. Your

windshield is clean if beads do not form

when rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer solution or a mild de-

tergent. Then rinse the blade with clear wa-

ter. If your windshield is still not clear after

cleaning the blades and using the wiper,

replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair

driver vision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

Pulling up the wiper arm

The wiper arm should be in the up position

when replacing the wiper.

Pull up the wiper arm manually or using the

wiper rise-up function (if so equipped).

Wiper rise-up function (if so equipped):

To pull up the wiper arm, pull the lever

䊊

within 1 minute after the power switch is

turned off. The wiper operation stops in

mid-operation and wiper arm can be

pulled up.

To lower the wiper arm, place the wiper

arm in the down position and then push

the lever

䊊

up once after the power switch

is turned on.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-14 Maintenance and do-it yourself

CAUTION

Do not operate the windshield wiper

while arm is pulled up. The wiper arm

or hood may be damaged.

Replacing

1. Push the release tab

䊊

, and move the

wiper blade down the wiper arm

䊊

while pushing the release tab to remove.

2. Insert the new wiper blade onto the

wiper arm until a click sounds.

3. Rotate the wiper blade so that the

dimple is in the groove.

CAUTION

• After wiper blade replacement, re-

turn the wiper arm to its original po-

sition; otherwise it may be damaged

when the hood is opened.

• Make sure the wiper blades contact

the glass; otherwise the arm may be

damaged from wind pressure.

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-15

Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle

䊊

This may cause improper windshield

washer operation. If the nozzle is clogged,

remove any objects with a needle or small

䊊

. Be careful not to damage the nozzle.

REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer if checking or replace-

ment is required.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have

the brakes checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for this service.

WARNING

Do not adjust the height of the brake

pedal. Doing so could alter the effec-

tiveness of the brakes, which could re-

sult in a serious accident and personal

injury. If adjustment is required, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a brake pad requires re-

placement, it will make a high pitched

scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-

tion. This scraping sound will first occur

only when the brake pedal is depressed.

After more wear of the brake pad, the

sound will always be heard even if the

brake pedal is not depressed. Have the

brakes checked as soon as possible if the

wear warning sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,

occasional brake squeak, squeal or other

BRAKES

8-16 Maintenance and do-it yourself

noise may be heard. Occasional brake

noise during light to moderate stops is nor-

mal and does not affect the function or

performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information, re-

fer to the maintenance log section of your

NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.

MOTOR COMPARTMENT

WARNING

• Never touch, disassemble, remove

or replace the high-voltage parts

and cables, as well as their connec-

tors. High-voltage cables are col-

ored orange. Touching, disassem-

bling, removing or replacing those

parts and cables can cause severe

burns or electric shock that may re-

sult in serious injury or death.

• Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified

on the fuse box cover. This could

damage the electrical system or

electronic control units or cause a

fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Confirm that the power switch and the

headlight switch are turned off.

2. Open the hood.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder

cover by pushing the tab and lifting the

FUSES

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-17

cover from the right side, and then the

left side.

4. Locate the fuse that needs to be

replaced.

5. Remove the fuse using the fuse puller

located in the passenger compartment

fuse box.

6. If the fuse is open

䊊

, replace it with a

new fuse

䊊

7. If a new fuse also opens, have the electri-

cal system checked, and if necessary, re-

paired. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

8-18 Maintenance and do-it yourself

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate and the fuses are in good condition,

check the fusible links in the holders

䊊

and

䊊

. If any of these fusible links are

melted, replace only with Genuine NISSAN

parts.

For checking and replacing the fusible links

in the holders

䊊

and

䊊

, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-19

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified

on the fuse box cover. This could dam-

age the electrical system or electronic

control units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Make sure that the power switch and the

headlight switch are turned off.

2. Insert a screwdriver wrapped with the

cloth

䊊

into the slit

䊊

Use a cloth

䊊

to protect the fuse box

cover.

3. Then pull to remove the fuse box cover

䊊

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller

䊊

5. If the fuse is open

䊊

, replace it with a

new fuse

䊊

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-

trical system checked, and if necessar y

repaired. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

this service.

8-20 Maintenance and do-it yourself

Extended storage switch

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, remove the extended storage switch

and check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The extended storage switch is used

for long term vehicle storage. Even if

the extended storage switch is bro-

ken it is not necessary to replace it.

Replace only the open fuse in the

switch with a new one.

How to replace the ex tended storage

switch:

1. To remove the extended storage switch,

be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF

position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the

OFF position.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs

䊊

and

䊊

found

on each side of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out from

the fuse box

䊊

CAUTION

• Be careful not to allow children to

swallow the battery and removed

parts.

• An improperly disposed battery can

harm the environment. Always con-

firm local regulations for battery

disposal.

• When changing batteries, do not let

dust or oil get on the components.

• There is danger of explosion if the

lithium battery is incorrectly re-

placed. Replace only with the same

or equivalent type.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® BATTERY

REPLACEMENT

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-21

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as

follows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of

the corner and twist it to separate the

upper part from the lower part. Use a

cloth to protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery:

CR2025 or equivalent

• Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as doing so could

cause a malfunction.

• Hold the battery by the edges. Holding

the battery across the contact points

will seriously deplete the storage ca-

pacity.

• Make sure that the 丣 side faces the

bottom of the case.

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower

parts

䊊

, and then push them together

䊊

until it is securely closed.

5. Operate the buttons to check that it is

functioning properly.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

8-22 Maintenance and do-it yourself

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-23

1. Headlight assembly

2. Map light

3. Room light

4. High-mounted stop light

5. Rear combination light

6. Door mirror turn signal

7. Cargo light

8. License plate light

9. Fog light (if so equipped)

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens

of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car

wash. A temperature difference between

the inside and the outside of the lens

causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If

large drops of water collect inside the lens,

it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

HEADLIGHTS

If headlight bulb replacement is required, it

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

Replacing

Halogen headlight (high-beam):

The headlight high-beam is a semi-sealed

beam type that uses a replaceable head-

light (halogen) bulb.

LIGHTS

8-24 Maintenance and do-it yourself

CAUTION

• Do not leave the bulb out of the

headlight reflector for a long period

of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc.

entering the headlight body may af-

fect bulb performance.

• High-pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb

may break if the glass envelope is

scratched or the bulb is dropped.

• Only touch the base when handling

the bulb. Never touch the glass en-

velope. Touching the glass envelope

could significantly affect bulb life

and/or headlight performance.

• Aiming is not necessary after re-

placing the bulb. When aiming ad-

justment is necessary, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

•

Fog may temporarily form inside the

lens of the exterior lights in the rain or

in a car wash. A temperature differ-

ence between the inside and the out-

side of the lens causes the fog. This is

not a malfunction. If large drops of

water collect inside the lens, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed as shown in the chart.

FOG LIGHTS (IF SO EQUIPPED)

If fog light bulb replacement is required, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer for this service.

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-25

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*

High* 60 HB3

Low* 55 H11

Park/Turn signal* 28/8 7444NA

Side marker* — —

Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*

High* — —

Low* — —

Daytime running (if so equipped)* — —

Park/Turn signal* 28/8 7444NA

Side marker* — —

Front fog light (if so equipped)* 35 H8

Charge port lid light* — —

Rear combination light

Turn signal 21 WY21W

Stop/Tail* — —

Back-up 16 W16W

Side marker* — —

License plate light* 5 W5W

Map light* — —

Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — —

High-mounted stop light* — —

Vanity mirror light* 1.4 —

Glove box light* 1.4 —

Room light* 8 —

Cargo light 5 W5W

*It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for replacement.

NOTE:

Always check with the Parts Department

at a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for the

latest information about parts.

8-26 Maintenance and do-it yourself

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C, D or E.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens

and/or cover.

: REMOVE

: INSTALL

Cargo light

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-27

1. Remove the rear combination attach-

ment bolts

䊊

2. Pull the rear combination assembly as

shown in the illustration

䊊

3. Turn the bulb sockets and then remove

the bulbs

䊊

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in

the “In case of emergency” section.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

It monitors tire pressure of all tires.

When the low tire pressure warning

light is lit, and the CHECK TIRE PRES-

SURE warning appears on the ve-

hicle information display, one or

more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above

Rear combination light

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-28 Maintenance and do-it yourself

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system

may not detect a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example a flat tire while

driving).

For additional information, refer to

“Low tire pressure warning light” in

the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section and “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In

case of emergency” section of this

manual.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the pressure of the tires often

and always prior to long distance

trips. The recommended tire pres-

sure specifications are shown on the

F.M.V.S.S/C.M.V.S.S certification label

or Tire and Loading Information la-

bel under the “Cold Tire Pressure”

heading. The Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label is affixed to the driver

side center pillar. Tire pressures

should be checked regularly be-

cause:

• Most tires naturally lose air over

time.

• Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other ob-

jects or if the vehicle strikes a curb

while parking.

The tire pressures should be

checked when the tires are cold. The

tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or

more hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert

also provides visual and audible sig-

nals outside the vehicle for inflating

the tires to the recommended COLD

tire pressure. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire

Alert” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

Incorrect tire pressure, including

under inflation, may adversely af-

fect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

•

Improperly inflated tires can

fail suddenly and cause an ac-

cident.

•

The Gross Vehicle Weight rat-

ing (GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight

capacity is indicated on the

Tire and Loading Information

label. Do not load your vehicle

beyond this capacity. Over-

loading your vehicle may re-

sult in reduced tire life, unsafe

operating conditions due to

premature tire failure, or unfa-

vorable handling characteris-

tics and could also lead to a se-

rious accident. Loading

beyond the specified capacity

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-29

may also result in failure of

other vehicle components.

•

Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load

your vehicle, use a tire pressure

gauge to ensure that the tire

pressures are at the specified

level.

•

For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Tire and Loading Information

label

䊊

Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that can

be seated in the vehicle.

䊊

Original size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle

at the factory.

䊊

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the

tires to this pressure when the

tires are cold. Tires are consid-

ered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more

hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

The recommended cold tire in-

flation is set by the manufac-

turer to provide the best bal-

ance of tire wear, vehicle

handling, driveability, tire noise,

etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

䊊

Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling”

in this section.

䊊

Spare tire size or compact

spare tire size (if so equipped)

䊊

Vehicle load limit: For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle

loading information” in the

“Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

8-30 Maintenance and do-it yourself

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge se-

curely onto the valve stem. Do not

press too hard or force the valve

stem sideways, otherwise air will

escape. If the hissing sound of air

escaping from the tire is heard

while checking the pressure, re-

position the gauge to eliminate

this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the

gauge stem and compare it to

the specification shown on the

Tire and Loading Information

label.

5. Add air to the tire as necessary. If

too much air is added, press the

core of the valve stem briefly with

the tip of the gauge stem to re-

lease pressure. Recheck the pres-

sure and add or release air as

necessary.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all of the

tires.

SIZE

COLD TIRE

INFLATION

PRESSURE

FRONT

ORIGINAL

TIRE

P205/55R16

89H

250 kPa,

36 PSI

FRONT

ORIGINAL

TIRE

P215/50R17

90V

250 kPa,

36 PSI

REAR

ORIGINAL

TIRE

P205/55R16

89H

250 kPa,

36 PSI

REAR

ORIGINAL

TIRE

P215/50R17

90V

250 kPa,

36 PSI

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-31

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufac-

turers to place standardized infor-

mation on the sidewall of all tires.

This information identifies and de-

scribes the fundamental character-

istics of the tire and also provides the

tire identification number (TIN) for

safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in

case of a recall.

䊊

Tire size (example: P215/

60R16 94H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles.

(Not all tires have this information.)

2. Three-digit number (215): This

number gives the width in milli-

meters of the tire from sidewall

edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (60): This num-

ber, known as the aspect ratio,

gives the tire’s ratio of height to

width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (16): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter in

inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (94):

This number is the tire’s load in-

dex. It is a measurement of how

much weight each tire can sup-

port. You may not find this infor-

mation on all tires because it is

not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should

not drive the vehicle faster than

the tire speed rating.

Example

8-32 Maintenance and do-it yourself

䊊

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

for a new tire (example: DOT XX

XX XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-

ment of Transportation”. The sym-

bol can be placed above, below or

to the left or right of the Tire Iden-

tification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)

5. Four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built.

For example, the numbers

3103 means the 31st week of 2003.

If these numbers are missing,

then look on the other sidewall of

the tire.

䊊

Tire ply composition and mate-

rial

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire.

Tire manufacturers also must indi-

cate the materials in the tire,

which include steel, nylon, polyes-

ter, and others.

䊊

Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest

amount of air pressure that

should be put in the tire. Do not

exceed the maximum permissible

inflation pressure.

䊊

Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maxi-

mum load in kilograms and

pounds that can be carried by the

tire. When replacing the tires on

the vehicle, always use a tire that

has the same load rating as the

factory installed tire.

Example

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-33

䊊

Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires

an inner tube (“tube type”) or not

(“tubeless”).

䊊

The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown, if the

tire has radial structure.

䊊

Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

Other tire-related terminology:

In addition to the many terms that

are defined throughout this section,

Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the

sidewall that contains a whitewall,

bears white lettering or bears

manufacturer, brand and/or model

name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on

the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)

the outward facing sidewall of an

asymmetrical tire that has a particu-

lar side that must always face out-

ward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

• When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same

type (Example: Summer, All Season

or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer may be able to

help you with information about tire

type, size, speed rating and avail-

ability.

• Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels. Failure to

do so may result in a circumference

difference between tires on the front

and rear axles which can cuase the

VDC system to malfunction resulting

in personal injury or death, exces-

sive tie wear and may damage the

transmission and differential gears.

• Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory

equipped tires, and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum

speed rating of the tire.

• Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could af-

fect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

• For additional information regard-

ing tires, refer to “Important Tire

Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Safety Information” (Canada) in the

Warranty Information Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies all season tires on some

models to provide good performance all

year, including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL

SEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on

the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better

snow traction than All Season tires and

may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance

on dry roads. Summer tire performance is

substantially reduced in snow and ice.

Summer tires do not have the tire traction

rating M&S on the tire sidewall.

8-34 Maintenance and do-it yourself

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy

or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the

use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all

four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to

select tires equivalent in size and load rat-

ing to the original equipment tires. If you do

not, it can adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lower speed

ratings than factory equipped tires and

may not match the potential maximum

vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum

speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the

same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-

ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit

their use. Check local, state and provincial

laws before installing studded tires. Skid

and traction capabilities of studded snow

tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer

than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-

cording to location. Check the local laws

before installing tire chains. When installing

tire chains, make sure they are the proper

size for the tires on your vehicle and are

installed according to the chain manufac-

turer’s suggestions.

Use only SAE Class S chains. Class “S”

chains are used on vehicles with restricted

tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can

use Class “S” chains are designed to meet

the SAE standard minimum clearances be-

tween the tire and the closest vehicle sus-

pension or body component required to

accommodate the use of a winter traction

device (tire chains or cables). The minimum

clearances are determined using the fac-

tory equipped tire size. Other types may

damage your vehicle.

Use chain tensioners when recommended

by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a

tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain

must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage

to the fenders or underbody. If possible,

avoid fully loading your vehicle when using

tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced

speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be

damaged and/or vehicle handling and

performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving

with tire chains in such conditions can

cause damage to the various mechanisms

of the vehicle due to some overstress.

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-35

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the

tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

using a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (112 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to the specification at all

times. It is recommended that

wheel nuts be tightened to the

specification at each tire rotation

interval.

WARNING

•

After rotating the tires, check

and adjust the tire pressure.

•

Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

•

For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator

2. Wear indicator location mark

WARNING

•

Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking,

bulging or objects caught in

the tread. If excessive wear,

cracks, bulging or deep cuts

are found, the tire(s) should be

8-36 Maintenance and do-it yourself

replaced.

•

The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

•

Tires degrade with age and

use. Have tires, over 6 years old

checked by a qualified techni-

cian, because some tire dam-

age may not be obvious. Re-

place the tires as necessary to

prevent tire failure and pos-

sible personal injury.

•

For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size,

tread design, speed rating and load carry-

ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Specifica-

tions” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual for rec-

ommended types and sizes of tires and

wheels.

WARNING

• The use of tires other than those rec-

ommended or the mixed use of tires

of different brands, construction

(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread

patterns can adversely affect the

ride, braking, handling, Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) system, ground

clearance, body-to-tire clearance,

tire chain clearance, speedometer

calibration, headlight aim and bum-

per height. Some of these effects

may lead to accidents and could re-

sult in serious personal injury.

• If your vehicle was originally

equipped with four tires that were

the same size and you are only re-

placing two of the four tires, install

the new tires on the rear axle. Plac-

ing new tires on the front axle may

cause loss of vehicle control in some

driving conditions and cause an ac-

cident and personal injury.

• If the wheels are changed for any

reason, always replace with wheels

which have the same off-set dimen-

sion. Wheels of a different off-set

could cause premature tire wear, de-

grade vehicle handling characteris-

tics, affect the VDC system and/or

interference with the brake discs.

Such interference can lead to de-

creased braking efficiency and/or

early brake pad/shoe wear. For ad-

ditional information on wheel-off

set dimensions, refer to “Wheels and

tires” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this

manual.

• When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the

TPMS will not function when a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not func-

tion and the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on af-

ter 1 minute. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service.

• Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could af-

fect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-37

• The TPMS sensor may be damaged if

it is not handled correctly. Be careful

when handling the TPMS sensor.

• When replacing the TPMS sensor,

the ID registration may be required.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for ID

registration.

• Do not use a valve stem cap that is

not specified by NISSAN. The valve

stem cap may become stuck.

• Be sure that the valve stem caps are

correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve

may be clogged up with dirt and

cause a malfunction or loss of pres-

sure.

• Do not install a damaged or de-

formed wheel or tire even if it has

been repaired. Such wheels or tires

could have structural damage and

could fail without warning.

• The use of retread tire is not recom-

mended.

• For additional information regard-

ing tires, refer to “Important Tire

Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Safety Information” (Canada) in the

Warranty Information Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle

handling and tire life. Even with regular use,

wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,

they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in

the Warranty Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

For additional information on care of

wheels, refer to “Cleaning exterior” in the

“Appearance and care” section of this

manual.

EMERGENCY TIRE PUNCTURE

REPAIR KIT

The emergency tire puncture repair kit

(Emergency Tire Sealant) is supplied with

the vehicle instead of a spare tire. It can be

used to temporarily repair minor tire punc-

tures.

If possible, have the vehicle towed to a fa-

cility that can repair or replace the flat tire.

Using the emergency tire puncture repair

kit may cause a malfunction of the tire

pressure sensor and cause the low tire

pressure warning light to illuminate.

For additional information, refer to “Flat tire”

in the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual.

8-38 Maintenance and do-it yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities...........................9-2

Air conditioning system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations ............9-3

Specifications ........................9-4

Charging system ....................9-4

Motor ...........................9-5

Wheels and tires ....................9-5

Dimensions and weights...............9-5

When traveling or registering in another

country ............................9-6

Vehicle identification ...................9-6

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate . . . .9-6

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) ....................9-6

Traction motor serial number............9-7

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S certification label........9-7

Emission control information label ........9-7

Tire and Loading Information label ........9-8

Air conditioner specification label .........9-8

Installing front license plate ...............9-8

Vehicle loading information ...............9-9

Terms ...........................9-9

Vehicle load capacity.................9-10

Loading tips.......................9-12

Measurement of weights ..............9-12

Towing a trailer.......................9-13

Flat towing .........................9-13

Uniform tire quality grading ..............9-13

Treadwear........................9-13

Traction AA, A, B and C ................9-14

Temperature A, B and C ...............9-14

Reporting safety defects ................9-14

Telematics overview (models with Navigation

System) ...........................9-15

Telematic Control Unit Gen2K .............9-17

Event Data Recorders (EDR) ..............9-19

Additional Data Recording (on vehicles

equipped with optional ProPILOT™ Assist) . . .9-20

Owner's Manual/Service Manual order

information

.........................9-20

Charging

information ..................9-21

Cold tire pressures ....................9-22

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure

that is described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Cooling system

coolant

With reservoir 5.3 L 5-5/8 qt 4-5/8 qt • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) or equivalent

Reservoir 0.5 L 1/2 qt 1/2 qt

Reduction gear fluid 1.4 L 1-1/2 qt 1-1/4 qt

• Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF

• Using reduction gear fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S

ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and reduction gear

durability, and may damage the reduction gear, which is not

covered by the NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Brake fluid

Refill to the proper level according to the

instructions in the “Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid (Available in

mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer) or

equivalent DOT 3

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —

• HFC-134a (R-134a)

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner specifica-

tion label” in this section.

Air conditioning system lubricants — — —

• With heater pump use NISSAN A/C System Oil ND-OIL11 or

equivalent.

• Without heater pump use NISSAN A/C System Oil AE10 or

equivalent.

Windshield washer fluid (US) 2.5 L 5/8 gal 1/2 gal

• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &

Antifreeze fluid or equivalent

Windshield washer fluid (Canada) 4.5 L 1–1/4 gal 1 gal

• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &

Antifreeze fluid or equivalent

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

9-2 Technical and consumer information

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in your

NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the

refrigerant, HFC-134a (R-134a), and the

compressor oil, ND-OIL11 (with heater

pump), AE10 (without heater pump) or

the equivalent.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil

will cause severe damage to the air

conditioning system and will require

the replacement of all air conditioner

system components.

The refrigerant, HFC-134a (R-134a), in your

NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s

ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does

not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain

governmental regulations require the re-

covery and recycling of any refrigerant dur-

ing automotive air conditioning system

service. A NISSAN certified LEAF dealer has

the trained technicians and equipment

needed to recover and recycle your air con-

ditioning system refrigerant.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer when servicing your

air conditioning system.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

CHARGING SYSTEM

Rated input voltage AC120V (single phase), AC240V (single phase)

Rated input frequency 60Hz

Maximum rated current 30A

Charging modes/Types of connection

Mode 2/ Case B (EVSE)

Mode 3/ Case B/C (charging device, public charging stand)

Mode 4/ Case C (Quick charge)

Required installation (over current protection)

The methods of protection against over current and over voltage shall be in

accordance with national codes. Suitable over current protection devices for

the wiring of houses or buildings shall be installed.

IP Degree IP44: When the Genuine NISSAN EVSE is connected to the charging port

Operating temperature Same as vehicle operating temperature

Storage temperature Same as vehicle storage temperature

Rated input voltage

Rate input frequency

AC220V (single phase), AC240V

(single phase)

60Hz

Applicable standards

SAE J1772: 2010

EN61851-1: 2011

EN61851-21: 2002

IEC61851-1: 2010

IEC61851-21: 2001

EN61000-6-1: 2007

EN61000-6-3: 2007

Adapters

Do not use an extension cable or electrical adaptor except for Nissan Genuine

Adapter.

SPECIFICATIONS

9-4 Technical and consumer information

MOTOR

Model EM57

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel

Type Size Offset in

(mm)

Steel 16 × 6 1/2JJ 1.57 (40)

Aluminum 17 × 6 1/2J 1.77 (45)

Tire

Tire Size

All season P205/55R16 89H

All season P215/50R17 90V

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 176.3 (4,478)

Overall length W/Lic Plate in (mm) 176.8 (4,490)

Overall width in (mm) 70.4 (1,789)

Overall width W/OS Mirrors in (mm) 79.9 (2,029)

Overall height(Roof)

16 inch wheels in (mm) 60.6 (1,539)

17 inch wheels in (mm) 60.8 (1,545)

Overall height(Antenna)

16 inch wheels in (mm) 61.5 (1,561)

17 inch wheels in (mm) 61.7 (1,567)

Front tread

16 inch wheels in (mm) 60.6 (1,540)

17 inch wheels in (mm) 60.2 (1,530)

Rear tread

16 inch wheels in (mm) 61.2 (1,555)

17 inch wheels in (mm) 60.8 (1,545)

Wheelbase in (mm) 106.3 (2,700)

lbs. (kg)

Refer to the F.M.V.S.S. or C.M.V.S.S. certifi-

cation label on the driver’s side center

pillar.

Front lbs. (kg)

Rear lbs. (kg)

Technical and consumer information 9-5

When planning to travel in another coun-

try, you should first find out if the charging

equipment is compatible with that coun-

try's electrical system.

When transferring the registration of

your vehicle to another country, state,

province or district, it may be necessary to

modify the vehicle to meet local laws and

regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle

safety standards vary according to the

country, state, province or district; there-

fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, trans-

portation, and registration are the re-

sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-

sponsible for any inconvenience that

may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is

attached as shown. This number is the

identification for your vehicle and is used in

the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(CHASSIS NUMBER)

The vehicle identification number is lo-

cated as shown.

Remove the cover to access the number.

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

9-6 Technical and consumer information

TRACTION MOTOR SERIAL

NUMBER

The serial number of the traction motor is

stamped on the traction motor as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S CERTIFICATION

LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certi-

fication label is affixed as shown. This label

contains valuable vehicle information, such

as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR),

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month

and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identifi-

cation Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is

attached to the underside of the hood as

shown in the illustration.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label affixed to

the driver's side center pillar as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is at-

tached to the underside of the hood as

shown in the illustration.

Perform the following procedure to mount

the license plate.

Before mounting the license plate, confirm

that the following parts are enclosed in the

plastic bag.

• License plate bracket

䊊

• Screw ×2

1. Adjust the license plate bracket

䊊

at the

location (small dimples).

2. Mark along both sides of the mounting

holes and license plate screw holes us-

ing a felt-tip pen.

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

9-8 Technical and consumer information

3. Remove the license plate bracket

䊊

and connect the arcs from the ovals.

Mark the point in the center of each oval.

These are the screw installation

locations.

4. Install the license plate with two 0.39 in

(10 mm) screws.

WARNING

•

It is extremely dangerous to

ride in the cargo area inside the

vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more

likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

•

Do not allow people to ride in

any area of your vehicle that is

not equipped with seats and

seat belts.

•

Be sure everyone in your ve-

hicle is in a seat and using a

seat belt properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself

with the following terms before

loading your vehicle:

• Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:

standard and optional equipment,

fluids and emergency tools. This

weight does not

include passengers

and cargo.

• GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight

of passengers and cargo.

• GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

- maximum total combined weight

of the unloaded vehicle, passen-

gers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue

load and any other optional equip-

ment. This information is located

on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

• GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit speci-

fied for the front or rear axle.

• This information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

• GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

Rating) - The maximum total

weight rating of the vehicle, pas-

sengers, cargo, and trailer.

• Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum to-

tal weight limit specified of the load

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 9-9

(passengers and cargo) for the ve-

hicle. This is the maximum com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo that can be loaded into the

vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow

a trailer, the trailer tongue weight

must be included as part of the

cargo load. This information is lo-

cated on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label.

• Cargo capacity - permissible

weight of cargo, the subtracted

weight of occupants from the load

limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your

vehicle shown as “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo” on

the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel. Do not exceed the number of

occupants shown as “Seating Ca-

pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label.

To get “the combined weight of oc-

cupants and cargo”, add the weight

of all occupants, then add the total

luggage weight. Examples are

shown in the following illustration.

Steps for determining correct

load limit

9-10 Technical and consumer information

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg

or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s Tire

and Loading Information label.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For ex-

ample, if the XXX amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lbs. passengers in your ve-

hicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capacity

is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) =

650 lbs.) or (640 − 340 (5 x 70) =

300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That weight

may not safely exceed the avail-

able cargo and luggage load ca-

pacity calculated in Step 4.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-

firm that you do not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

or the Gross Axle Weight Rating

Technical and consumer information 9-11

(GAWR) for your vehicle. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Measure-

ment of weights” in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation

pressures. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label” in this section.

LOADING TIPS

•

The GVW must not exceed the GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./

C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

• Do not load the front and rear axle

to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed

the GVWR.

WARNING

•

Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the

seatbacks. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

•

Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change

the way your vehicle handles.

This could result in loss of con-

trol and cause personal injury.

•

Overloading not only can

shorten the life of your vehicle

and the tire, but can cause un-

safe vehicle handling and lon-

ger braking distances. This

may cause a premature tire

failure, which could result in a

serious accident and personal

injury. Failures caused by over-

loading are not covered by the

vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent

weight shifts that could affect the

balance of your vehicle. When the ve-

hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and

weigh the front and the rear wheels

separately to determine axle loads.

Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the Gross Axle Weight

Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle

loads should not exceed the Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These

ratings are given on the vehicle cer-

tification label. If weight ratings are

exceeded, move or remove items to

bring all weights below the ratings.

9-12

Technical and consumer information

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle. Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on

the ground is sometimes called flat towing.

This method is typically used when towing

a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle,

such as a motor home.

CAUTION

• Failure to follow these guidelines

can result in severe reduction gear

damage.

• DO NOT tow this vehicle with all four

wheels on the ground (flat towing).

• For emergency towing procedures

refer to “Towing your vehicle” in the

“In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Qual-

ity Grades: All passenger car tires must

conform to federal safety requirements in

addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-

cable on the tire sidewall between tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera-

ture A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-

ing based on the wear rate of the tire when

tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For ex-

ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends

upon actual conditions of their use how-

ever, and may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

TOWING A TRAILER FLAT TOWING UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Technical and consumer information 9-13

TRACTION AA, A, B AND C

The traction grades, from highest to low-

est, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades repre-

sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking

traction tests, and does not include ac-

celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

TEMPERATURE A, B AND C

The temperature grades A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to

the generation of heat and its ability to dis-

sipate heat when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature

can cause the material of the tire to degen-

erate and reduce tire life, and excessive

temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of per-

formance which all passenger car tires

must meet under the Federal Motor Ve-

hicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and

A represent higher levels of performance

on the laboratory test wheel than the mini-

mum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, under-inflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combi-

nation, can cause heat build-up and

possible tire failure.

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-

fying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a re-

call and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov; or

write to: Administrator, NHTSA,

400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,

D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

9-14 Technical and consumer information

information about motor vehicle

safety from http://

www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contact-

ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform Trans-

port Canada in addition to notifying

NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives com-

plaints, it may open an investigation,

and if it finds that a safety defect

exists in a group of vehicles, it may

request that NISSAN conduct a recall

campaign. However, Transport

Canada cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Cana-

da's Defect Investigations and Re-

calls Division toll free at

1-800-333-0510. You may also report

safety defects online at:

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/ Saf-Sec-

Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-

cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speak-

ers) or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/

Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-

cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)

Additional information concerning

motor vehicle safety may be ob-

tained from Transport Canada's

Road Safety Information Centre at

1-800-333-0371 or online at

www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English

speakers) or

www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety con-

cerns please contact our Consumer

Information Centre toll free at

1-800-387-0122.

In addition to Event Data Recorders (EDRs)

mentioned in this Owner's Manual, this ve-

hicle is equipped with electronic modules

that monitor, control and record data con-

cerning various vehicle systems, including

the motor, batteries, braking and electrical

systems. Other electronic modules record

information concerning driving conditions,

including idling, braking, acceleration, trip

and other related data, information about

your use of the car and its features such as

air conditioner or headlight usage, diag-

nostic trouble codes, vehicle charging, ve-

hicle speed, direction and/or location.

Some of this data is stored by the vehicle

for use during vehicle servicing. Other data

concerning your vehicle's operation and

performance is wirelessly transmitted by

cellular connection through the vehicle on-

board telematics system upon vehicle

start-up or at other intervals to NISSAN.

This data may be used by NISSAN for vari-

ous purposes, including: to provide you

with NissanConnect® EV & Services (For ad-

ditional information, refer to

“NissanConnect® Manual (for Leaf)”.);

TELEMATICS OVERVIEW (MODELS

WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM)

Technical and consumer information 9-15

troubleshooting; evaluation of your vehi-

cle's quality, functionality and perfor-

mance; analysis and research by NISSAN

designed to, among other things, optimize

performance of future electric vehicles in-

cluding improvements in future battery life;

to offer you new or additional products or

services; and as otherwise may be required

by law. Such data may be shared with

NISSAN's parents, subsidiaries, affiliates,

successors or assignees; authorized

NISSAN certified LEAF dealers; NISSAN's

marketing partners; your fleet company, if

your vehicle is a fleet vehicle; your rental

company, if your vehicle is a rental vehicle;

and third party service providers such as

cellular, information systems and data

management providers.

State and provincial laws allow access and

use of data recorded by vehicle devices

with the consent of the vehicle owner or

pursuant to subscription agreement. While

you are not required to allow such access

and use, if you do not so agree NISSAN may

be unable under applicable law to activate

the vehicle telematics system in your ve-

hicle, and certain features of your vehicle

which are dependent on vehicle telematics

will not operate as intended or designed.

These may include features such as auto-

matic charging station map updates, re-

mote battery state of charge check, charg-

ing complete notice, remote plug in

reminder, remote charging on, remote cli-

mate control on, drive route planning, driv-

ing tips to improve range, driving history,

billing simulation, ECO ranking, ECO forest,

maintenance reminders, etc. Other fea-

tures that may be developed and offered

by NISSAN in the future may also not func-

tion without telematics data transmission.

NissanConnect® EV & Services telematics ser-

vices are provided by NISSAN pursuant to a

subscription services agreement covering

your vehicle. This agreement is necessary for

all owners. This agreement, and an explana-

tion of its terms and conditions, can be found

at the NISSAN Owner’s Portal webpage. Fur-

ther, the operator of the vehicle must also

touch [OK] on the Navi screen to indicate as-

sent each time he or she starts the car. If you

decide at any time that you do not want your

vehicle to transmit data to NISSAN, you can

deactivate the telematics account associ-

ated with this vehicle by canceling the sub-

scription services agreement by visiting the

NISSAN Owner’s Portal Webpage or calling

NISSAN at 1-877-NOGASEV (1-877-664-2738).

The service can be reactivated later upon re-

quest if you choose. Simply visit the same

website or call the number above. Alterna-

tively, you can turn off the transmission of

certain categories of data through the use of

settings found in the navigation system un-

der Menu, NissanConnect® EV & Services, Ve-

hicle Information Sharing with NISSAN. Note,

turning off “Vehicle Information Sharing with

NISSAN” will only disable the automatic shar-

ing of information at vehicle start-up. Certain

categories of data may still be transmitted if

vehicle telematics features are accessed ei-

ther in the vehicle or remotely.

Your agreement to the transmission and

use of data by NISSAN can be provided in

various ways. The vehicle is equipped with

a “pop up” screen on the vehicle navigation

system that will ask for your consent to this

data transfer. A version of the following

message will appear: “Pursuant to sub-

scription agreement, your vehicle wire-

lessly transmits recorded vehicle data to

NISSAN for various purposes, including

NissanConnect® EV & Services, product

evaluation, research and development. By

9-16 Technical and consumer information

touching OK, you consent to the transmis-

sion and use of your vehicle data. See Own-

er's Manual or NISSAN Owner's portal web-

page for terms and details.” If you touch

[OK], your vehicle will transmit data as de-

signed in connection with the vehicle tele-

matics system. If you touch [Decline] your

vehicle will not transmit data. However, the

telematics features referenced above, and

perhaps others, will not be available to you.

The vehicle’s static navigation system will

remain operational, and you will be able to

access your radio and climate controls.

Telematics features are dependent on cel-

lular data transmission. Some areas may

have limited or no cellular connectivity, re-

sulting in a loss or interruption of data

transmission and, as a result, certain fea-

tures may be temporarily unavailable. Even

if areas with good signal reception, cellular

connectivity can be adversely affected by

things such as tall buildings, apartments,

tunnels, underground parking, mountain-

ous areas, etc. Even if the signal strength

bar of the in-vehicle data communication

module indicates good reception, connec-

tivity may be disrupted. This does not indi-

cate a malfunction. Operate the system

again after a few minutes to restore con-

nectivity. NissanConnect® EV & Services

telematics features are offered as a conve-

nience to the vehicle owner. NISSAN is not

responsible for, and owner assumes all risk

of, interruptions in service or errors based

on incomplete or inaccurate data.

NissanConnect® EV & Services communi-

cations may be received at a verified e-mail

address or by SMS/text messaging-

enabled mobile phone. Standard text rates

and/or data usage may apply depending

on your carrier.

If your vehicle’s telematics account is ac-

tive, and you are not the original owner,

please contact NISSAN at the website or

phone number above as soon as possible

to update the telematics enrollment infor-

mation. Upon sale of the vehicle, please

contact NISSAN at the website or phone

number above so that NISSAN’s records

may be updated. NissanConnect® EV &

Services subscription services will auto-

matically terminate at the end of the initial

free term if you do not wish to renew your

subscription agreement at the prices then

in effect.

A. INTRODUCTION

This product Telematic Control Unit Gen2K

incorporates the following software:

1. the software developed by, or developed

for, Ficosa International, S.A. (“Ficosa”),

2. the software owned by third party and

licensed to Ficosa,the software owned

by third party and licensed to Ficosa,

3. the software licensed under the GNU

GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE, Version 2

(“GPL”),the software licensed under the

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE, Version

2 (“GPL”),

4. the software licensed under the GNU LI-

BRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE, Ver-

sion 2.0 or the GNU LESSER GENERAL

PUBLIC LICENSE, Version 2.1 (collectively

“LGPL”), the Mozilla Public license v2

(“MPL”), the GPL-2.0 license with-

OpenSSL-exception (“GPLOpenSSL”) and

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE, Ver-

sion 3 with GCC exception (together with

the GPL software, jointly “Copyleft Soft-

ware”), and/or

5. open sourced software licensed under

terms and conditions other than Copyl-

eft Software.

TELEMATIC CONTROL UNIT GEN2K

Technical and consumer information 9-17

For the software classified as (3) or (4)

above, a copy of the license text is included

with the source code in the URL indicated

below, and please also refer to the terms

and conditions of Copyleft Software li-

censes at the websites listed below:

GPL: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-

licenses/gpl-2.0.html

and https://www.gnu.org/licenses/

gpl-3.0.en.html

LGPL:

http://www.gnu.org/licenses/

old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html

and

http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-

licenses/lgpl-2.0.html

MPL:

https://www.mozilla.org/en-US/MPL/2.0/

GPL-2.0-with-OpenSSL-exception:

https://gitlab.com/cryptsetup/

cryptsetup/blob/master/COPYING

GPLv3 GCC Exception:

https://www.gnu.org/licenses/

gcc-exception-3.1.en.html

The software classified as (3) and (4) above

are copyrighted by multiple people.

Please refer to the websites below regard-

ing the copyright notices of those people.

https://www.ficosa.com/software/

opensource/

The software licensed under the licenses

indicated in (3) and (4) above (“Copyleft

Software”) is distributed in the hope that it

will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY,

without even the implied warranty of MER-

CHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICU-

LAR PURPOSE.

For at least three (3) years from delivery of a

device embedding the above product, Fi-

cosa will give to any third party who con-

tacts us at the Contact Information pro-

vided below, for a charge no more than our

cost of physically performing source code

distribution, a complete machine-readable

copy of the source code corresponding to

the Copyleft Software indicated above.

When requesting this source code, please

specify Product: Telematic Control Unit

Gen2K and version Cx9.

Furthermore, source code and licenses

corresponding to the Copyleft Software

listed above is freely available to you and

any member of the public at the website

listed below:

https://www.ficosa.com/software/

opensource/

Contact Information

For enquiries about open source software

at FICOSA, please contact Ficosa’s Compli-

ance Officer by email: FOSS@ficosa.com

Please note that we are unable to answer any

queries regarding source code details, etc.

In addition, it is necessary for end users to

provide their own internet connection.

The end user is responsible for any con-

nection or line charges incurred through

browsing websites or downloading.

9-18 Technical and consumer information

B. LICENSING ANC COPYRIGHT NOTICE IN-

FORMATION

The software classified as (5) above con-

tains various open sourced software

(“OSS”) listed in the below website. Please

see the website indicted next for the terms

and conditions of the licenses (OSS Li-

censes) and other information regarding

the OSS contained this Product:

https://www.ficosa.com/software/

opensource/

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data

Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an

EDR is to record , in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data

that will assist in understanding how a ve-

hicle’s systems performed. The EDR is de-

signed to record data related to vehicle dy-

namics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-

cord such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

• Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better un-

derstanding of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle

only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs;

no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no per-

sonal data (for example, name, gender,

age and crash location) are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law en-

forcement, could combine the EDR data

with the type of personally identifying

data routinely acquired during a crash

investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, spe-

cial equipment is required and access to

the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In ad-

dition to the vehicle manufacturer and

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer, other par-

ties, such as law enforcement, that have

the special equipment, can read the in-

formation if they have access to the ve-

hicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be

accessed with the consent of the ve-

hicle owner or lessee or as otherwise

required or permitted by law.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

Technical and consumer information 9-19

ADDITIONAL DATA RECORDING

(ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH

OPTIONAL PROPILOT™ ASSIST)

If your vehicle is equipped with the optional

ProPILOT Assist, it will also be equipped

with supplemental data recording function

intended to assist in understanding how

ProPILOT Assist performs in certain non-

trival crash or near-crash scenarios. Spe-

cifically, supplemental recording is de-

signed to capture the following:

• Driver operational status of the accelera-

tor, brakes, steering, etc.

• Detection status of a vehicle ahead and

lane markers

• Vehicle information including distance to

vehicle ahead and lateral position

• Information on the operation of the ProPI-

LOT Assist and other crash avoidance

features

• ProPILOT Assist malfunction diagnosis

information

• External images from the multi-sensing

front camera (Available only when the SRS

air bag or IEB system is activated)

The ProPILOT Assist does not record con-

versations, sounds or images of the inside

of the vehicle.

To read this supplemental data, special

equipment is required and access to the

vehicle or the recording unit is needed. This

supplemental data will only be accessed

with the consent of the vehicle owner or

lessee or as otherwise required or permit-

ted by law. If downloaded, NISSAN and third

parties entrusted by

NISSAN may use the data recorded for the

purpose of improving NISSAN’s vehicle

safety performance.

NISSAN and third parties entrusted by

NISSAN will not disclose/provide the re-

corded data to a third party except:

- With the consent of the vehicle owner or

with the consent of the lessee

In response to an official request from law

enforcement, court order, governmental

agency, or other legally enforceable request.

- For research purposes after the data is

modified such that it is no longer tied to a

specific vehicle or vehicle owner (anony-

mized)

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this

model year and prior can be purchased. A

Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for

your vehicle. This manual is the same one

used by the factory trained technicians

working at a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also

be purchased.

For USA:

For current pricing and availability of Genu-

ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genu-

ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada:

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Ser-

vice Manual or Owner’s Manual for this model

year and prior, please contact a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer. For the phone number and

location of a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer in

your area, call the NISSAN Information Center

at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-

resentative will assist you.

OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

9-20 Technical and consumer information

CHARGING INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 9-21

The label is typically located on the driver

side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For

additional information, refer to “Wheels and

tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES

9-22 Technical and consumer information

NOTES

10 Index

12-volt battery .................8-12

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ......5-136

ADDITIONAL DATA RECORDING

(on vehicles equipped with optional ProPILOT

Assist) ......................9-20

Advanced air bag system ..........1-50

Air bag system...........1-50, 1-52, 1-58

Air bag warning labels ............1-61

Air bag warning light ..........1-61, 2-22

Air conditioner............4-30, 9-3, 9-8

Air conditioner specification label ......9-8

Air conditioning system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations .........9-3

Alarm, How to stop alarm (refer to, vehicle

security system) ................2-47

Alcohol, drugs and driving ..........5-9

Antenna ....................4-66

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ......5-136

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning

light .......................2-17

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light .......................2-17

Antifreeze ...................5-141

Appearance care..............7-2,7-4

At home after driving ............EV-18

Audible reminders ..............2-25

Audio System (models without Navigation

System) .....................4-45

Autolight switch ................2-52

Autolight system ...............2-52

Automatic ....................3-6

Automatic climate control (models with

Navigation System) ..............4-37

Automatic climate control (models without

Navigation System) ..............4-33

Automatic door locks .............3-6

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) . . .5-110

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with

Pedestrian Detection ............5-117

Avoiding collision and rollover ........5-7

Battery.........EV-2, 2-8, 2-56, 8-12, 8-21

Battery saver system.............2-56

Before driving your vehicle (models with

navigation system) .............EV-12

Before starting system ............5-14

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ..........5-37

Bluetooth® hands-free phone system

without navigation system .........4-67

Bluetooth® streaming audio ........4-64

Booster seats .................1-40

Brake. . .2-18, 2-19, 5-20, 5-134, 5-136, 8-11, 8-16

Brake fluid ....................8-11

Brake precautions ..............5-134

Brake system .................5-134

BRAKE system warning light (yellow). . . .2-18

BRAKE warning light (red) ..........2-19

Brakes......................8-16

Bulb replacement...............8-24

Car phone or CB radio ............4-67

Care of wheels .................7-3

Ceiling light ...................2-71

Changing coolant ...............8-10

Charge .....................2-61

Charge port lid .................3-19

Charge port lid switch ............2-61

Charge timer OFF switch ..........2-61

Charging. . . .CH-2, CH-8, CH-9, CH-15, CH-22,

CH-29, CH-42, 3-19, 9-4

Charging methods .............CH-35

Charging related indicator light .....CH-42

Charging related remote function . . . .CH-41

Charging status indicator light ......CH-42

Charging the Li-ion battery ........EV-10

Charging troubleshooting guide .....CH-47

Chassis control ................5-139

Checking ..................2-16, 8-9

Checking bulbs .................2-16

Checking coolant level .............8-9

Child restraints ...........1-22, 1-26, 1-40

Child safety ....................1-19

Child safety rear door lock ...........3-6

Child seat belts .................1-19

Circuit breaker, Fusible link ..........8-19

Cleaning ......................7-3

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels .......7-3

Cleaning exterior and interior.......7-2,7-4

Climate control .................4-44

Climate control operation ..........4-30

Climate control service ............4-44

Climate control system ............4-30

Climate control system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations .........4-44

Climate Ctrl. Timer ...............4-40

Clock .......................2-12

Clock setting (models without Navigation

System) .....................4-55

Cold weather driving .............5-141

Console box...................2-64

coolant ......................8-8

Coolant ................8-9, 8-10, 9-2

Cooling system .................8-8

Corrosion protection ..............7-7

Cruise control..................5-54

Cup holders ...................2-65

Defroster switch, Rear window and outside

mirror defroster switch ............2-51

Dimensions and weights............9-5

Display, vehicle information..........2-27

Door locks ..................3-4, 3-6

Doors .......................3-4

Driving ................5-4, 5-15, 5-141

Driving range ..................2-10

Driving the vehicle ..............EV-15

Driving vehicle..................5-15

e-Pedal ......................2-13

e-Pedal system.................5-22

ECO........................2-58

ECO drive report ................5-131

ECO mode ....................2-12

ECO switch ...................2-58

Efficient use of your vehicle ........EV-19

Electric shift control system .........5-15

Electronic parking brake ...........5-20

Emergency charge......CH-9, CH-15, CH-22

Emergency EV (Electric Vehicle) shut

off ......................5-12, 6-3

Emergency shutoff system .........EV-8

Emission control information label ......9-7

EV Characteristics ...............EV-9

EV system ....................EV-2

EV unique information ............EV-21

Event Data Recorder (EDR) ..........9-19

EVSE (Electric Vehicle Supply

Equipment) ..........CH-9, CH-15, CH-22

Ex terior appearance care ...........7-2

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .....9-7

Flashers (Refer to hazard warning flasher

switch).......................6-2

Flat tire ......................6-3

Flat towing ....................9-13

Floor mat cleaning ...............7-5

Fluid................8-8, 8-10, 8-11, 9-2

FM/AM/SAT Radio with Compact Disc (CD)

Player.......................4-54

Fog light switch ................2-58

For Intelligent Key system ...........3-6

Front passenger air bag and status

light ........................1-52

Front-seat mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system ........1-58

Fuses .......................8-17

Fusible links ...................8-19

10-2 Index

Garage door open, HomeLink®

Universal .....................2-72

Gauge ...............2-7, 2-8, 2-9, 2-10

General maintenance ...........8-2, 8-3

Glovebox....................2-64

Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2

Headlight switch ................2-52

Headlights ................2-52, 8-24

Headlights bulb replacement ........8-24

Heated seat switch ..............2-59

Heated seats ..................2-59

Heated steering wheel ............2-60

Heated steering wheel switch ........2-60

Heater ......................4-30

High voltage precautions...........EV-7

HillStart.....................5-140

Hill Start Assist.................5-140

Home charge .................CH-8

HomeLink® universal transceiver ......2-72

Hood release ..................3-16

Horn .......................2-58

How to normal charge ............CH-8

How to quick charge ............CH-29

How to trickle charge

(if so equipped) ........CH-9, CH-15, CH-22

Identification number (VIN) ..........9-6

If the Li-ion battery becomes completely

discharged....................6-13

Immediate charge..............CH-40

Immobilizer system ...........2-47, 5-13

Indicator lights .................2-23

Indicators for maintenance .........2-40

Indicators for operation ............2-36

Infants ......................1-20

Injured persons .................1-14

Inside rearview mirror .............3-23

Inside vehicle ...................8-3

Instrument brightness control........2-57

Intelligent Around View Monitor .......4-13

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles

without ProPILOT™ Assist) ..........5-56

Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) ......5-126

Intelligent Key battery .............8-21

Intelligent Key system .............3-13

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) ......5-31

Interior appearance care ............7-4

Interior light replacement ..........8-26

Interior lights ..................2-70

iPod® player operation ............4-61

ISOFIX child restraint ..............1-24

Jump starting ..................6-10

Key operating range of the door lock/unlock

function ......................3-8

Key operation ..................3-9

Keyless entry ..................3-13

Keys......................3-2, 3-6

Labels ............1-61, 8-30, 9-6, 9-7, 9-8

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) .......5-26

Larger children .................1-20

LATCH system..................1-24

Li-ion battery ..................EV-2

Li-ion battery available charge gauge . . .2-10

Li-ion battery status check .........CH-41

Li-ion battery temperature gauge ......2-8

Li-ion battery warmer.............EV-5

License plate, Installing front license

plate ........................9-8

Light .1-61, 2-16, 2-23, 2-52, 2-58, 2-70, 2-71, 8-24

Lights, Exterior and interior light

replacement ..................8-26

Loading information ..............9-9

Index 10-3

Loading information (Refer to vehicle loading

information) ...................9-9

Lock...................3-4, 3-6, 3-17

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-20

Low tire pressure warning system ......5-4

Low tire pressure warning system (Refer to

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)) . .5-4

Maintenance.....1-19, 2-40, 8-2, 8-3, 8-5, 8-12

Maintenance precautions ...........8-5

Maintenance requirements ..........8-2

Map lights ....................2-71

Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system) . . .3-3

Mirror....................3-23, 3-24

Motor ....................5-14, 9-5

Motor compartment ..............8-8

Motor serial number ..............9-7

Moving Object Detection ...........4-25

NISSAN Intelligent Key®

system ..............3-6, 3-8, 3-9, 5-10

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .2-47, 5-13

NissanConnect® Manual (for Leaf) ......4-3

Normal charge.................CH-8

Occasional charge ..............CH-8

Odometer .....................2-7

Off-roadrecovery................5-8

Oil..........................9-2

Opening rear hatch...............3-11

Outside air temperature ............2-11

Outside mirrors.................3-24

Outside vehicle..................8-3

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information ...................9-20

Panic alarm ...................3-14

Parking ...............5-19, 5-20, 5-132

Parking brake ..................5-19

Parking brake break-in ............5-135

Parking on hills.................5-132

Power................2-68, 3-4, 5-133

Power door lock .................3-4

Power door lock switch.............3-5

Power economy................5-130

Power meter ...................2-9

Power Meter ...................2-9

Power outlet ..................2-62

Power steering system............5-133

Power switch ...............5-10, 5-11

Power windows ................2-68

Precautions . . .EV-7, EV-8, CH-2, 1-11, 1-22, 1-43,

5-4, 5-54, 5-134, 8-5

Precautions on charging...........CH-2

Precautions on child restraints........1-22

Precautions on seat belt usage........1-11

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ......................1-43

Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-4

Pregnant women ................1-14

ProPILOT™ Assist ................5-79

Public charge .................CH-8

Pulling up the wiper arm ...........8-14

Push starting ..................6-14

Quick charge .................CH-29

Rapid air pressure loss .............5-8

Rear center seat belt ..............1-17

RearCrossTrafficAlert(RCTA)........5-46

Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock .3-6

Rear hatch ....................3-17

Rear hatch lock .................3-17

Rearseats.....................1-6

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch.......................2-51

Rear window wiper and washer switch . .2-50

10-4 Index

Rear window wiper and washer switch . .2-50

Rear window wiper blade ...........8-16

RearView Monitor ................4-4

Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities .....................9-2

Reduction gear fluid ..............8-10

Remote charge ................CH-41

Remote climate control............4-43

Remote keyless entry function, For Intelligent

Key system....................3-13

Remote keyless operation ..........3-13

Repairing flat tire.................6-4

Repairing tire ...................6-6

Replacement ..................8-24

Reporting safety defects ...........9-14

Road accident precautions .........EV-8

Roadside assistance program ........6-2

Rollover......................5-7

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag system ........1-58

Safety....................1-19, 9-14

Scene guide . .EV-10, EV-12, EV-14, EV-15, EV-18

Seat belt cleaning ................7-7

Seat belt extenders...............1-18

Seat belt hook ..................1-18

Seat belt maintenance.............1-19

Seat belt usage .................1-11

Seat belt warning light ............2-22

Seat belt(s)......1-11, 1-14, 1-17, 1-18, 1-19, 1-20,

1-59, 2-22, 7-7

Seatbelts.....................1-11

Seat belts with pretensioners ........1-59

Seat(s), Seats ................1-2, 2-59

Security system ................2-46

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), EV system start ........2-47, 5-13

Servicing climate control ...........4-44

Shifting ......................5-15

Shoulder belt height adjustment.......1-17

Shoulder belt height adjustment, For front

seats........................1-17

Small children ..................1-20

Specifications ..................9-4

Speedometer...................2-7

Starting .............5-4, 5-14, 6-10, 6-14

Starting your vehicle .............EV-14

Status light, Front passenger air bag . . . .1-52

Steering ..............2-60, 3-21, 5-133

Steering wheel switch for audio control . .4-65

Stopping the vehicle ..............6-5

Storage .....................2-63

Stowing golf bags ...............2-68

Sun visors ....................3-22

Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . .1-61

Supplemental air bag warning light. .1-61, 2-22

Supplemental restraint system .......1-43

Switch.....2-51, 2-52, 2-57, 2-58, 2-61, 3-5, 6-2

Telematic Control Unit Gen2K ........9-17

Telematics overview ..............9-15

Temperature ...................2-8

Tether strap child restraints .........1-26

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

traction motor start ...........2-47, 5-13

Three-point type ................1-14

Tilt steering column ..............3-21

Tilting steering column ............3-21

Tire........................2-20

Tire and Loading information label......9-8

Tire and Loading Information label .....8-30

Tire chains....................8-35

Tire dressing ...................7-4

Tire pressure ..................8-31

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . .6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .5-4

Tire rotation ...................8-36

Tires. . .5-4, 6-3, 7-4, 8-28, 8-30, 8-31, 8-34, 8-35,

8-36, 9-5, 9-8, 9-13

tonneau cover .................2-66

Top........................1-26

Top tether strap.................1-26

Tow truck towing ................6-14

Towing ...................6-14, 9-13

Towing a trailer .................9-13

TPMS, Tire Pressure Monitoring System . . .5-4

TPMS, Tire pressure warning system.....6-3

Traction motor ..................9-7

Index 10-5

Traction motor serial number .........9-7

Trailer towing ..................9-13

Transceiver ...................2-72

Transceiver, HomeLink® Universal ......2-72

Transmitter, With Intelligent Key system

(Refer to Intelligent Key system) .......3-13

Trickle charge .........CH-9, CH-15, CH-22

Turn signal switch ...............2-57

Type of charge and how to charge the Li-ion

battery .....................CH-5

Types of tires ..................8-34

Underbody cleaning...............7-3

Uniform tire quality grading..........9-13

Unplugged status ..............CH-41

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection

port........................4-60

Vanity mirror ..................3-23

Vehicle...........2-46, 5-137, 9-5, 9-6, 9-9

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .5-137

Vehicle identification number (VIN)......9-6

Vehicle information display..........2-27

Vehicle security system ............2-46

Vents .......................4-29

Warning........2-14, 2-16, 2-36, 5-4, 6-2, 6-3

Warning and indicator lights .........0-11

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels . . .1-61

Warning light . . .1-61, 2-17, 2-18, 2-19, 2-20, 2-22

Warning lights ..................2-16

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ....................2-14

Washer switch ..............2-49, 2-50

Washing ......................7-2

Waxing .......................7-2

Weights (Refer to Dimensions and

weights) ......................9-5

Wheel/tire size ..................9-5

Wheels and tires..............7-3,8-28

When starting and driving ...........5-4

When traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country .................9-6

Window(s)..................2-68, 7-3

Windshield wiper and washer switch. . . .2-49

Windshield-washer fluid ............8-11

Wiper ..........2-49, 2-50, 8-14, 8-15, 8-16

Wiper blades ...............8-14, 8-15

With Intelligent Key system (Refer to Intelligent

Key system) ...................3-13

10-6 Index

2018 LEAF

OWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2018 NISSAN LEAF

ZE1-D

Printing : November 2017

Publication No.:

Printed in U.S.A.

OM18EA 0ZE1U0

‘18

2018 Nissan Leaf

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Nissan 2018 NISSAN LEAF Questions and Answers

Related Products

Vevor DQ9003H3 Ignition Coil Pack and Spark Plugs Set for Nissan Infiniti EX35 High Performance and Reliability

Vevor DQ9003B Ignition Coil Pack and Spark Plugs Set of 6 Compatible with Nissan Infiniti

Vevor Ignition Coil Pack and Spark Plugs Set of 4 for Nissan Altima Versa Reliable Performance and Compatibility

DK2 86625 Custom Mount Kit Nissan Titan '04-'15, Armada '04-'15

DK2 Mount Kit for Nissan Frontier Pickup 05-18, Xterra 05-14, Pathfinder 05-15 - Custom Fit and Easy Installation

DK2 86620 Custom Mount Kit Nissan Frontier Pickup '98-'04, Xterra '99-'04